Adobe MAX kicks off this week and, historically, that has meant a large drop of updates across the company's portfolio of apps. That is technically true this year too, but everything is revolving around AI -- and sometimes, that doesn't even mean Adobe's own technology.
A U.S. Air Force Reserve Crew from the 53rd Weather Reconnaissance Squadron, known as the "Hurricane Hunters," made multiple passes inside Hurricane Melissa capturing astonishing footage that showcases the "stadium effect."
The iPhone is turning 20 in 2027 and Apple will mark the anniversary with a special iPhone 20 release. We’ve already heard about the big redesign with its sloping display bezels that are supposed to make the device look like a single piece of glass when viewed from the front. We now get an additional report that suggests some major camera upgrades as well. The 2027 iPhone model – likely the Pro variant will reportedly bring Lateral Overflow Integration Capacitor (LOFIC) camera sensor. In short, this means the cameras will capture more light per pixel, leading to higher dynamic range and...
Samsung’s Galaxy Z Fold8 isn’t expected to debut until next year, but rumors about the upcoming foldable are already making the rounds. The latest leak sheds light on its display specifications and battery capacity. According to the leak, the upcoming Galaxy Z Fold8 will use a new ‘laser-drilling metal plate technology’ for its hinge, which is said to reduce the display crease. The same technology will also be used on the rumored iPhone Fold. The leak also states that the foldable will pack a battery with a capacity over 5,000mAh. Notably, the current Galaxy Z Fold7 has a 4,400mAh...
Multiple reports in recent times claimed that Apple is cutting production of the iPhone Air unveiled last month, with one even claiming that this sleek iPhone had entered almost end-of-production mode. However, a new report contradicts those claims. In a note to investors on October 26, TD Cowen said Apple isn't reducing the number of iPhone Air units it will produce in 2025. TD Cowen's report states that the iPhone Air forecasts for October remain unchanged. The forecasts for the iPhone Air remain at 3 million for Q3 2025 and at 7 million for Q4 2025. The September quarter builds...
While not exactly launched as tipped yesterday, Samsung did showcase its tri-fold smartphone at the 2025 K-Tech Showcase event. The device, which still does not have an official name, was seen at the Samsung booth behind a protective glass display case. Attendees were not allowed to touch or hold the device. Samsung tri-fold prototype (image: Park Ji-min) South Korea’s ChosunMedia shared images of the device, which reveal its folded and fully unfolded states. We say it is fully unfolded as it features two hinges allowing it to stretch its display diagonal up to 10 inches. In its...
Kia has confirmed that its all-new, second-generation Telluride — the brand’s flagship SUV for the American market — will be produced at scale in the United States, with a planned annual output of 120,000 units. The move strengthens Kia’s local manufacturing strategy and prepares the brand for growing demand in the large SUV and hybrid […]
The post Kia to Produce 120,000 Units Annually of Second-Generation Telluride in the U.S. appeared first on Korean Car Blog.
Kia is setting the stage for the next chapter in electric performance mobility with its latest reveal — the GT Wrap, a bold new foil design created exclusively for its high-performance electric GT prototypes, including the upcoming Kia EV4 GT. A New Visual Identity for Kia’s Electric GT Lineup The GT Wrap is far more […]
The post Kia Teases EV4 GT with Striking New GT Wrap Design appeared first on Korean Car Blog.
Cantonese Cat used his October 28 video to zero in on the Dogecoin market structure, arguing that the meme-coin is nearing the end of a multi-year accumulation phase—and that the recent washout was a feature, not a bug, of that process. While he declined to publish numeric price targets in the video, he made the case that DOGE’s setup is maturing in lockstep with broader “risk-on” signals, with a familiar lag to Ethereum that historically precedes Dogecoin’s larger moves.
On structure, he was explicit. “Just looking at Doge here, you can see how […] Doge has been forming a cup over here for close to four and a half, five years now […] it’s just been building a big giant base.” In his read, the rounded bottom is the defining pattern of this cycle for DOGE, and it remains intact despite recent volatility.
He framed the sharp drawdown two weeks ago as necessary positioning rather than a break in trend: “You just had a great deleveraging event […] I’m not going to look at a lower low and think the trend is broken […] These are very healthy deleveraging before the next move up as far as I’m concerned.” He highlighted “a big giant wick” and “a lot of demand down below,” pointing to what he sees as resilient spot support through the base.
Timing, not targets, was the centerpiece. He reiterated that Dogecoin typically follows Ethereum with a delay once ETH clears its own major resistance bands. “Whenever we get closer to the end of the rounded bottom […] that’s when Ethereum breaks out above the resistance zone and goes up a lot higher. Thus, Doge runs together with Ethereum,” he said, adding: “There is a lag. I would say the lag is probably maybe a couple months between Ethereum breaking up and Doge finally breaking above this rounded bottom here and going up.”
He made a similar observation using risk proxies, noting that DOGE moves have historically trailed small-cap-led risk cycles by several months, though he cautioned that the exact interval can vary. Via X, he added “DOGE lags behind IWM [iShares Russell 2000 ETF] all-time-high breakout by about 2 to 4 months before it takes off.”
Cantonese Cat also pushed back on the view that a sequence of lower lows automatically invalidates the DOGE setup, arguing that this occurred in prior cycles just before outsized rallies. “A lot of people look at this, ‘that’s a lower low […] the cycle is over.’ Well, it doesn’t work that way. That’s a lower low right there. Next thing you know, it just went a lot higher,” he said, tying the observation to the current “healthy deleveraging” and the persistence of the rounded-bottom structure.
If the video offered the structural blueprint, his same-day post on X clarified his stance on headline targets. “I realize that it’s stupid to call for DOGE to $2 or $4 when price is at 20 cents. If I was smart like others, I should just call for DOGE to $2 or $4 when it’s $2 or $4.” The comment is consistent with his prior price predictions.
Inside the video update, the analyst instead emphasized the sequence he expects to matter—ETH strength first, DOGE follow-through second, with the magnitude determined by how far the broader risk cycle runs once momentum rotates.
At press time, DOGE traded at $0.20.
The next Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) meeting is fast approaching, and the bets are already pouring in as to what it would mean for the Bitcoin and crypto industry. The last FOMC meeting took place in September, when the Federal Reserve ended up cutting rates down to 4-4.25% after months of no rate cuts. With this setting the tone, the expectations that another rate cut could be on the way are getting louder, with the FedWatch Tool showing a high percentage.
The next FOMC meeting is scheduled for Wednesday, October 29, 2025, and there is already a major clamor around what the Fed is planning on doing. The current market headwinds point to a favorable outcome for risk assets such as Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies, with expected rate cuts.
Currently, the CME FedWatch Tool is showing that the probability of a rate cut has risen to 98.3% as of the time of this writing. This leaves only a 1.7% chance that the Federal Reserve will actually leave rates at their current levels, and there is zero chance that there will be a rate hike.
A reduction in the rate cuts is good for businesses all around, as lower interest rates mean better loan terms and increased spending and borrowing. Thus, it will increase the participation in the markets, from consumer goods to the stock market, and then make its way into newer markets such as Bitcoin and crypto.
A rate cut by the Federal Reserve aligns with the more pro-crypto stance that the United States has been moving in since President Donald Trump was elected. Last week, the president pardoned the Founder and former CEO of the Binance crypto exchange, Changpeng Zhao, after he previously pled guilty to money laundering violations back in 2024. Zhao has since served a 4-month stint before the pardon from Trump came.
With the US embracing Bitcoin and crypto again, a rate cut will only further the ascent, allowing more investors to get into the market as liquidity frees up. The initial announcement has been known to trigger a rapid increase in the market. But as the news settles, the crypto market is expected to continue to rise in response.
However, nothing is certain until the FOMC meeting is complete and the announcement is made. For the Bitcoin and crypto market to remain bullish, inflation will also have to be reduced, as an increase could trigger more conservative stances from investors.
What to Know:
A $135 price prediction for Litecoin appears more than feasible ahead of its spot ETF, which is ready to launch on Nasdaq today with the ticker LTCC.
Litecoin has been experiencing a notable increase over the last week, following a 10.44% surge that took it from $ 90.50 on October 23 to a high of $105.25 today.
The main catalyst is the SEC’s imminent favorable decision, which would greenlight Canary Litecoin, Canary HBAR, and Bitwise Solana ETFs today.
Bloomberg analyst, Eric Balchunas, confirmed the news on X, saying: ‘Assuming there’s not some last min SEC intervention, looks like this is happening’.
The news is understandably bullish for Litecoin, as the Nasdaq listing would open the asset to investors who don’t necessarily want to buy it. Long-term, this will boost liquidity, improve Litecoin’s legitimacy, and increase adoption at retail and, hopefully, institutional level.
Projects like PEPENODE ($PEPENODE) also stand to gain thanks to its on-chain utility and meme value. PEPENODE allows early adopters to buy mining nodes and build their own virtual coin mining facility, minus the electricity costs and expensive mining equipment.The momentum is there for a $135 push, especially considering the network activity, as shown by Santiment. Litecoin’s price spiked on October 9 and crashed soon after; the window was too short for investors to capitalize on it.
There was an attempt, but it fizzled out as Litecoin was already in free fall.
If investors had capitalized on it, the momentum might have held, increasing the opportunity window and potentially triggering a consolidation phase above $130.
But we’re not in that timeline.
Fortunately, we may be looking at a strong reset, as $LTC is already showing signs of consolidation above $101 after briefly popping its head above $105.
And this time, investors are not willing to miss the opportunity window again. The 24-hour transaction volume is up 69.41%, a clear indication that momentum is building ahead of the SEC’s decision later today.
We then have the Relative Strength Index, which currently stands at 64.77 points. For reference, the bull zone begins at a price above 50.
The community is clearly hyped up, $LTC shows growing potential, and investors are ready. In this context, a breakout above $135 is more than achievable if LTCC performs well following its Nasdaq listing.
If $LTC meets the bullish expectations, another project that stands to gain significant attention is PEPENODE ($PEPENODE), with its presale already at $1.96M.PEPENODE ($PEPENODE) encourages participation in its presale with the help of its innovative mine-to-earn mechanics.
The project addresses the main problems associated with crypto presales today: the lack of participation incentives. In short, presales don’t incentivize investors to buy in early, which leads to poor presale performances, which inadvertently lowers the coin’s visibility post launch.
PEPENODE’s mine-to-earn mechanics offer an exciting alternative in the form of virtual mining facilities. The concept is straightforward: purchase mining nodes, upgrade them, build your own virtual mining facility, activate it, and watch your rewards accumulate.The earlier you buy, the stronger your nodes, the faster you mine, and the more you can earn. This translates to higher post-TGE rewards, which include actual meme coins, such as $FARTCOIN and $PEPE.
The 653% staking APY is an additional incentive for early adoption.
$PEPENODE now sits at $0.0011227 and managed to raise $1,965,327 so far, while the presale is still going. Based on the project’s utility and meme value, the token still has plenty of growth potential.
A realistic price prediction for $PEPENODE puts the coin at $0.0077 by the end of 2026; possibly even higher if the mine-to-earn mechanics catch on. This translates to an ROI of 585%, excluding the staking benefits or the meme coin rewards resulting from your coin-farming.
Read our guide on how to buy $PEPENODE and visit the presale page to secure your nodes and start building your mining rig today.
This isn’t financial advice. Always do your own research (DYOR) and invest wisely.
Authored by Aaron Walker, NewsBTC: www.newsbtc.com/news/litecoin-135-price-prediction-pepenode-soars.
The crypto market, despite experiencing throughout the year major price fluctuations, security incidents, and legal hurdles, has experienced remarkable growth.
This can be attributed to the expansion of digital asset treasuries (DATs), increased institutional adoption, and new initiatives aimed at integrating digital assets, particularly stablecoins, into traditional financial sectors.
Andreessen Horowitz (a16z) recently shared their projections for the crypto landscape for the remainder of the year and years to come, highlighting nine key trends expected to be major catalysts for the industry.
Firstly, market structure legislation in the US is expected to emerge as a critical priority for policymakers and Congress, establishing a clear regulatory framework that supports crypto developers.
The passage of the GENIUS Act in July of this year also marked a pivotal moment, garnering bipartisan support and providing builders with much-needed certainty in their endeavors.
Secondly, the adoption of stablecoins is set to accelerate as network effects take hold among financial institutions, merchants, and consumers, thereby enhancing the global standing of the US dollar.
Furthermore, major players like JPMorgan, Citi, BlackRock, and Fidelity are amplifying their crypto offerings through new product launches, partnerships, and acquisitions.
The infrastructure supporting blockchain technology is also advancing rapidly. Current networks can process over 3,400 transactions per second, marking a 100-fold increase over the past five years.
Moreover, a new wave of real-world assets (RWAs) is transitioning onto the blockchain as the worlds of crypto and traditional finance converge. The market for tokenized real-world assets has expanded to nearly $30 billion, with significant contributions from Treasuries, money market funds, and private credit.
In parallel, the crypto sector is attracting a growing pool of talent, driven by a more favorable regulatory environment and the emergence of new opportunities for developers.
The focus on revenue generation is also shifting within the token ecosystem. More tokens are implementing fee mechanisms, redirecting attention toward fundamental value. In the past year, users have paid $33 billion in fees, resulting in $18 billion for projects and $4 billion for token holders.
Innovative consumer products are also expected to drive the next wave of crypto adoption. Although approximately 716 million people now own cryptocurrency, only 40 to 70 million are considered active users.
Ultimately, 2025 is poised to lay the groundwork and establish the foundations for the years to come. It is expected to be a transformative year for the crypto industry, characterized by widespread institutional adoption, regulatory clarity, and tangible utility.
Featured image from DALL-E, chart from TradingView.com
Last updated on October 24, 2025.
This Article Was First Published on The Bit Journal.
The Altcoins ETFs is set to launch this Tuesday, marking a significant moment in crypto investing. According to the source, U.S. exchanges have posted listing notices for spot funds tied to these three tokens.
This move allows everyday investors to gain exposure to Solana, Litecoin, and Hedera without owning the coins directly, opening a new access point in regulated finance.
Exchanges such as the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) and NASDAQ Stock Market have posted official listing notices for the Altcoins ETFs suite. Specifically:
Current prices at time of writing: Solana (SOL) ~ $199.64, Litecoin (LTC) ~ $100.55, Hedera (HBAR) ~ $0.21. These values reflect the market’s anticipation of the debut of the Solana, Litecoin, and Hedera ETF.
The Altcoins ETFs may provide several benefits:
Beyond Bitcoin and Ethereum, these altcoin-linked ETFs widen the field. The Solana, Litecoin, and Hedera ETF positions altcoins in a regulated vehicle format for the first time in the U.S..
The regulatory path for the Altcoins ETFs aligns with evolving U.S. rules. The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has dropped delay notices and adopted generic listing standards for spot crypto ETFs, which helped clear the way for this launch. Lower procedural hurdles contribute to the Solana, Litecoin, and Hedera ETF coming into view.
Still, risks remain: trading volumes are unknown, token volatility persists, and early investors will observe how the funds perform once trading begins.
With the Altcoins ETFs about to trade, key indicators include:
The Altcoins ETFs represents a bridge between traditional finance and altcoins. Investors can now access SOL, LTC, and HBAR via regulated channels rather than buying tokens directly. Provided launch conditions hold, these funds could open the door for further crypto ETF innovations.
As trading starts, the performance of the Solana, Litecoin, and Hedera ETF will test how far the market can move beyond Bitcoin.
It is a set of ETFs offering exposure to Solana (SOL), Litecoin (LTC), and Hedera (HBAR) via regulated U.S. exchange-traded products.
The listing notices indicate trading will start this week, as early as Tuesday.
It opens regulated access to altcoins beyond Bitcoin and Ethereum through the crypto ETF format.
Yes, the Solana component is expected to include staking features within the ETF structure.
Read More: Solana, Litecoin, and Hedera ETFs to Begin Trading This Week">Solana, Litecoin, and Hedera ETFs to Begin Trading This Week
U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs recorded roughly 446 million dollars in net inflows for the week, reversing the prior soft patch and hinting that institutions still buy the dips. Over the same stretch, spot Ether products saw about 244 million dollars in outflows, a notable contrast that kept the market honest after a frantic first half of October.
Daily prints show how quickly sentiment can turn. After four straight sessions of redemptions, Bitcoin funds swung to a single-day net inflow near 477 million dollars as prices steadied, a flip that broke the losing streak and re-anchored flows.
The split is not just about winners and laggards. Bitcoin’s rebound suggests allocators continue to treat it as the cleanest expression of crypto beta, especially when macro is noisy and liquidity is patchy. Ether’s outflows, meanwhile, reflect a different set of questions that investors still need answered, from staking mechanics inside fund structures to the timing and scope of future product features. The weekly etf total underscores that rotation within crypto is active rather than passive right now.
Context helps. Earlier in October, a monster print north of one billion dollars flowed into Bitcoin ETFs in a single session as price tagged fresh highs, a reminder that headline inflows often cluster near emotionally charged levels. That history makes last week’s steadier, mid-range rebound feel more durable, not less.
Flows do not move in a straight line. The week’s split sits against a backdrop of macro cross-currents, including intermittent risk-off wobbles and questions about policy data timeliness. Short squeezes and funding resets can add noise. Even so, the path of least resistance remains tied to whether Bitcoin ETFs keep printing green on more days than not, especially if breadth widens beyond a handful of big issuers. Recent records around 125,000 were pinned on ETF demand, so subsequent rallies will likely need the same sponsorship.
Ether’s challenge is more nuanced. Capital wants clarity on product design and the roadmap for yield features. Until those mechanics are settled, Ether funds may trade more like satellite positions in multi-asset portfolios, making them sensitive to weekly rebalancing. That does not preclude sharp risk-on weeks. It simply means the hurdle for sticky inflows is higher.
The week delivered a clean message. Bitcoin ETFs attracted fresh capital while Ether funds leaked. The daily swing back to inflows suggests the buyer is still there, even if conviction arrives in bursts. If the next few prints confirm breadth across issuers and steadier intake, price can follow. If not, expect more chop around well-watched levels while investors wait for the next catalyst.
What exactly changed last week in ETF flows?
Bitcoin ETFs added about 446 million dollars for the week that ended 24 October, while Ether funds lost about 244 million dollars, marking a clear divergence between the two largest crypto assets.
Did one big day drive the Bitcoin number?
A single day near 21 October saw roughly 477 million dollars in net inflows, which helped flip the weekly tally back to positive after a red streak.
Are large daily inflows reliable signals for price?
Huge prints can coincide with local peaks, as seen earlier in October, so traders often look for persistence across multiple sessions rather than one-off spikes.
What are analysts saying publicly?
Nate Geraci highlighted multi-billion weekly intake for spot Bitcoin ETFs. Other analysts pointed to advisors dominating known Ether ETF holders, which can magnify tactical shifts.
Exchange-traded fund (ETF)
A regulated fund that tracks an asset and trades on stock exchanges, allowing investors to gain exposure without holding the underlying coins.
Net inflows and outflows
The difference between new money entering a fund and money leaving it over a set period. Positive net inflows imply demand, while outflows imply the opposite.
Advisor-dominated holder base
A fund ownership profile where registered investment advisors represent a large share of known holders, which can increase sensitivity to model-driven rebalancing.
Product breadth across issuers
A sign of healthier demand where multiple funds, not just one or two, attract consistent inflows, reducing reliance on a single vehicle for price support.
Read More: Weekly ETF Split: Bitcoin Pulls In Cash While Ether Bleeds">Weekly ETF Split: Bitcoin Pulls In Cash While Ether Bleeds
Google's John Mueller said case sensitivity matters and SEOs shouldn't just hope it works.
The post Google’s Advice On Canonicals: They’re Case Sensitive appeared first on Search Engine Journal.
Benjamin Hiscox was working as a maths teacher when he engaged in an inappropriate sexual relationship with the child
© Google Maps
Actor was best known for playing the bossy wife to John Cleese’s eccentric hotelier Basil Fawlty in the acclaimed BBC sitcom
© Getty Images
© Jonathan Brady/PA
© Solano et al. (2024) via Scientific Reports
One mother saw her child benefit stop after a trip lasting less than 24 hours
© Getty Images
The prison staff at HMP fell for a fake email posing from the Royal Courts of Justice
© Getty
© Copyright 2025 The Associated Press. All rights reserved.
Jamaica's prime minister implored residents to evacuate as Hurricane Melissa began lashing the island with violent gusts on Monday (October 27) as it approached landfall.
© Reuters
© Getty Images
Bella Culley was detained on drug trafficking charges earlier this year
© AP
Increasingly warm oceans resulting from global warming are a key reason for Hurricane Melissa's wind speed doubling in less than 24 hours over the weekend, climate scientists have said.
© NOAA
© 2025 The Associated Press.
A British holidaymaker trapped in Jamaica has described how there is an "undercurrent of panic" on the island as Hurricane Melisaa is set to make landfall on Tuesday (28 October).
© Sky
© 2025 The Associated Press
© Copyright 2025 The Associated Press. All rights reserved
The Isle of Wight Festival, one of the UK’s most iconic and long-running music festivals, has been granted a renewed licence until 2033, securing its position as a key driver of tourism and cultural activity on the island. This decision marks a significant step forward in ensuring the festival’s longevity and its continued contribution to the island’s economy and tourism sector. As the festival becomes an increasingly important attraction, it continues to draw a global audience, creating opportunities for local businesses and fostering growth in the region.
The Isle of Wight Festival is more than just a musical event—it has become a major economic driver for the island. According to the Isle of Wight Council’s recent report, the festival contributes an estimated £15 million annually to the local economy. The renewal of the festival’s licence is expected to continue to generate substantial revenue, as it attracts thousands of tourists each year. Travelers from across the UK and around the world descend on the island to enjoy the vibrant atmosphere, top-tier performances, and the scenic surroundings.
The festival’s economic impact extends beyond ticket sales. Hotels, restaurants, shops, and local transportation all benefit from the influx of visitors. With its new licence in place, the Isle of Wight Festival is poised to remain a central component of the island’s tourism strategy for years to come. The decision to extend the festival’s agreement until 2033 also includes an option to extend it further until 2036, ensuring long-term planning for local businesses and tourism initiatives.
As a globally recognized event, the Isle of Wight Festival attracts a diverse range of visitors, from die-hard music fans to casual tourists seeking a unique cultural experience. The festival is not only about the music—it also celebrates the island’s natural beauty, its rich history, and its sense of community. For travelers, the Isle of Wight provides a perfect combination of entertainment and exploration. Visitors can enjoy world-class performances while taking in the stunning coastal views, charming villages, and scenic hiking trails.
The renewal of the Isle of Wight Festival’s licence also consolidates the use of key festival sites, such as the Seaclose and Newport Quay tennis courts, which have hosted festival activities for years. By bringing these locations under a single festival agreement, the council ensures that the event will be more organized, streamlined, and capable of growing in both scale and impact. The agreement allows for better management of these popular festival sites, helping to maintain the island’s environment while supporting its vibrant tourism sector.
The Isle of Wight Festival has always been mindful of its relationship with the local community. While the event has occasionally faced criticism from certain groups, the Isle of Wight Council’s report highlighted that any adverse impacts have been mitigated through careful planning and consultation. The festival’s ability to adapt and evolve in response to local concerns has been a key factor in its enduring success.
The new long-term agreement ensures that the Isle of Wight Festival will continue to evolve with the community’s needs in mind. Plans are in place to ensure that the festival continues to deliver positive outcomes for the island, with new strategies being put in place to address any potential concerns. This collaborative approach between the festival organizers, the Isle of Wight Council, and the local community will guarantee that the event remains an asset to the island for generations to come.
For international travelers looking to experience a lively and culturally rich event, the Isle of Wight Festival is the perfect destination. With its stunning location and rich history, the festival offers a truly unique atmosphere that combines music, arts, and the natural beauty of the island. The long-term extension of the festival’s licence ensures that future generations will continue to enjoy this world-class event, making the Isle of Wight an even more attractive destination for tourists from around the world.
Whether you are a music enthusiast or a traveler seeking an unforgettable cultural experience, the Isle of Wight Festival provides an opportunity to explore a beautiful part of the UK while enjoying world-class entertainment. This event, alongside the island’s picturesque landscapes and welcoming community, makes the Isle of Wight an essential stop for any traveler looking for a truly memorable experience.
The post Isle of Wight Festival Tourism Impact: All You Need To Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Though Belize flies under the radar for many as a travel destination, it has garnered a reputation for adventure tourism as of late. Thanks to the breathtaking wildlife, diverse culture, and stunning natural beauty of Belize, those who are passionate about nature and adventure will be equally thrilled by the snorkelling, hiking, and culture immersion that the country has to offer.
Perhaps the most thrilling aspect of Belize is the chance to experience the country’s thriving ecosystems. There is a plethora of activities that are as adventurous as they are natural, like the tropical rainforests and stunning coral reefs, the country is famous. There are a multitude of reasons that make Belize a prime destination for eco-tourism and outdoor adventure, the most alluring of which is the country’s diverse ecosystems and relatively small size.
Snorkelling and Lobster Hunting in Moho Caye
In the southern region of Belize, Moho Caye is famous for providing an experience like none other. A twenty-five-minute small boat ride from the Placencia Peninsula will land you on an island that is a dream come true to those who want to experience the real sea-to-spoon concept. Lobster hunting, as a part of the Shrimpers BBQ which is served on the island, is an experience in snorkelling in the exceptionally clear water that surrounds the island.
Under the guidance of CEB’s Akeem Williams and other local experts, travelers deeply immerse themselves in Belize’s marine life and the culture of the indigenous Garifuna.
The Garifuna, who have a strong attachment with the ocean and a rich heritage of storytelling, recount tales of the life-giving reefs that surround them. These tours provide opportunities to culturally engage while diving, lobster hunting, and partaking in a delicious meal of freshly caught seafood.
Placencia: A Relaxed Coastal Destination
Most travellers, prior to reaching Moho Caye, pass through Placencia Peninsula, a chilled coastal town in the south of Belize. This coastal town, with its vibrant dips and dunes of sand and serenity, is famous for its beaches and slow rhythm of life. Placencia has been called the starting point of adventure tourism in this region. A Tropic Air flight from Belize City takes a quick 20 minutes, while by road, it takes 5 hours winding through forest and citrus.
The mesmerising nature of Placencia is due to its serene beaches and welcoming inhabitants, as well as the proximity of the Belize Barrier Reef, the Silk Cayes, and the Monkey River. Placencia is ideal for travelers who wish to unwind amidst a natural environment and serves as a base for numerous Belize excursions. Placencia has a range of lodgings from beachfront resorts to eco-lodges. Placencia has a relatively untrammelled wilderness so is ideal for tourists interested in relaxation and adventure.
Sustainable Travel and Adventure Tourism
Belize has emerged in recent years as a leader in sustainable travel and eco-tourism. This is due to the efforts of the country to conserve its diverse ecosystems, like the barrier reef and the diverse ecosystems of the surrounding land and sea. Active eco tourism has facilitated the development of responsible tourism in Belize is known for today. Tourists can partake in numerous activities like wildlife tours, and reef conservation, which all help to enhance the conservation of the country.
Adventure travelers can explore another delightful attraction, that of snorkeling and diving Belize’s Barrier Reef and its vibrant underwater world of colorful corals, diverse marine life, and underwater caves. It is a UNESCO World Heritage Site, which speaks volumes of its value. Suffice to say, it is well preserved, as evidenced by the efforts of the tour operators, conservation organisations, and the local communities.
As is the case with the reef, Belize’s focus on sustainability is evident in its hospitality industry, with various hotels and resorts adopting energy-efficient eco-friendly policies. These include waste reduction and positive support for local communities. Visitors to Belize are encouraged to practice responsible tourism by patronising hotels and partaking in activities that do not conflict with environmental and social sustainability practices.
Cultural Experiences with the Garifuna People
Belize is not all about nature. The Afro-Indigenous Garifuna people, and the descendants of the local communities that thrived in the nation centuries ago, offer a wealth of rich culture. All of which features dazzling and rich history, along with captivating music, splendid dance, and tasty cuisine. All of which makes up a vital part of Belize’s identity.
Garifuna culture is illustrated during workshops like drum, recipe, and dance, and in deep immersion on cultural study tours, which detail the history and customs of the people. Instructing on the stories of the grandparents is usually the dance and drum guides. Captivating narratives are told about the essence of the people’s cuisine, and the integral part the Garifuna’s ethnicity plays in the history of the cultural mosaic of people of Belize.
Garifuna culture is illustrated during workshops like drum, recipe, and dance, and in deep immersion on cultural study tours which detail the history and people. Instructing on the stories of the grandparents is usually the dance and drum guides. Captivating narratives are told about the essence of the people’s cuisine, and the integral part the Garifuna’s ethnicity plays in the history of the cultural mosaic of Belize.
Outdoor Activities Besides the Beach
Those in quest of new activities which diverge from the ocean will be excited by the choices Belize offers. Inland, the country extends inviting lush jungle, hidden caves, and spectacular waterfalls. Trekking in the Cockscomb Basin Wildlife Sanctuary, soaring above the tree tops on a zip line strung across the rainforest, and tubing in the caves over ancient underground rivers are but a few of the myriad exciting choices for adventurers.
Chiquibul Forest and Mountain Pine Ridge contain Belize’s many national parks and wildlife reserves. Here, visitors may appreciate the local animals, as well as birds and other indigenous wildlife, while immersing themselves in the wilderness.
Access and Travel Suggestions
Goldson International Airport at Belize City is the main international gateway connecting the country to the rest of the world. Visitors may arrange domestic flights to popular destinations such as Placencia and other Belizean hot spots. For those who prefer to explore on their own, Belize offers public transportation, shuttle services, and rental cars.
Belize Is Waiting With An Exciting Adventure
With the second-largest barrier reef in the world, Belize certainly offers her visitors numerous opportunities for adventure tourism, and for all not limited to, adventurers, admirers of the wild, and those who appreciate rich traditions alike. Most emphasize on the fact that Belize is very very head-on on sustainable preservation and protection of the rich tourism resources of Central America.
The post Embark on an Adventure in Belize: Nature, History, and Culture Come Together appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Shinsegae Duty Free has partnered with luxury brand CHANEL to unveil a stunning holiday-themed pop-up experience at Incheon International Airport Terminal 2, marking an early start to the 2025 holiday season in South Korea. The CHANEL WINTER CONSTELLATION installation is set to run until December 5, 2025, and occupies 145.5 square meters—the largest CHANEL holiday podium in the Asia-Pacific airport duty-free sector. This exclusive event, which is the first of its kind to debut in Korea, invites travelers to experience the magic of the festive season through CHANEL’s iconic fragrance and beauty collections, with a focus on interactive and immersive experiences.
The CHANEL WINTER CONSTELLATION podium transports visitors into a magical winter garden and starlit observatory, where they can explore CHANEL’s complete lineup of fragrances, makeup, and skincare. The event offers a unique opportunity to connect with CHANEL’s heritage and seasonal products in a way that is both artistic and sensorial. This collaboration underscores Shinsegae Duty Free’s commitment to providing travelers with elevated, memorable shopping experiences while also celebrating the festive spirit.
The installation features a telescope-themed installation, bringing to life CHANEL fragrances through a sensory and artistic lens. Visitors can also enjoy interactive skincare consultations, makeup touch-up zones, and an AR-powered photo zone that allows them to capture vivid photos against the backdrop of CHANEL’s star-shaped constellations. Limited-edition items such as N°5 refills, Les Exclusifs de CHANEL perfumes, and other premium fragrances are available exclusively at this podium, making it a must-visit for luxury shoppers and beauty enthusiasts alike.
Incheon International Airport, a gateway to South Korea, continues to cement its reputation as a premier shopping destination for travelers from all over the world. This CHANEL WINTER CONSTELLATION installation brings a new level of luxury and holiday magic to the airport, providing a unique opportunity for travelers to shop for exclusive items and experience the festive ambiance of the season.
The podium is more than just a pop-up display—it’s a multi-sensory journey that invites visitors to interact with CHANEL’s world in an immersive, engaging manner. Whether you are a fan of CHANEL fragrances or simply looking for a unique holiday experience, this installation is sure to captivate all who visit.
One of the standout features of this collaboration is the availability of exclusive holiday products and premium perfumes, which can only be purchased at Incheon Airport Duty Free. These limited-edition items include:
These products are a testament to CHANEL’s commitment to delivering high-quality, exclusive offerings for discerning travelers during the holiday season.
This exclusive holiday podium is the result of the ongoing partnership between Shinsegae Duty Free and CHANEL, two leaders in luxury retail. By leveraging CHANEL’s expertise in beauty and fragrance and Shinsegae Duty Free’s global presence, the collaboration brings the best of luxury retail to Incheon Airport, enhancing the shopping experience for travelers from around the world.
Shinsegae Duty Free continues to create innovative, interactive retail experiences, making it a leader in the airport shopping sector. As Asia Pacific’s largest duty-free podium, it regularly collaborates with global luxury brands to create memorable shopping moments for travelers. This holiday partnership is a natural extension of that vision, offering an exclusive, high-end shopping experience that can’t be found elsewhere.
The CHANEL WINTER CONSTELLATION holiday podium at Incheon International Airport is an extraordinary example of how luxury brands and duty-free retailers are evolving the shopping experience for global travelers. This collaboration brings together CHANEL’s iconic beauty collections, an exclusive selection of limited-edition products, and a festive, immersive environment that will make every visit a special one. Whether you’re looking to purchase a gift for a loved one or simply want to indulge in the festive holiday spirit, this pop-up is a must-visit for anyone passing through Incheon Airport during the holiday season.
For those unable to visit in person, the virtual experience provided by Shinsegae Duty Free offers a taste of the magic, bringing the holiday ambiance of CHANEL’s world straight to your screen.
The post Shinsegae Duty Free and CHANEL Launch Magical “Winter Constellation” Holiday Podium at Incheon Airport for 2025 Festivities appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Nestled in the serene Alta Garrotxa region of Catalonia, Spain, Off Grid Retreat is an eco-conscious haven set against the backdrop of stunning pre-Pyrenean landscapes. Located within a restored 17th-century farmhouse, this retreat offers a blend of wellness, adventure, and sustainability. Focused on providing a mindful living experience, it invites guests to reconnect with nature, offering a variety of activities such as yoga, hiking, and cycling. This tourism initiative not only appeals to wellness seekers but also highlights the growing trend of eco-tourism in Catalonia, contributing to both the local economy and the preservation of the region’s natural beauty.
Catalonia has long been known for its vibrant culture, beautiful landscapes, and rich heritage. However, in recent years, it has also gained recognition as a hub for eco-tourism. Eco-tourism focuses on promoting sustainability and preserving natural environments while offering travelers enriching experiences. Off Grid Retreat, located in Alta Garrotxa, exemplifies this shift towards sustainable tourism. Situated in the heart of a protected natural reserve, the retreat offers a rare opportunity for tourists to experience both luxury and environmental consciousness.
Alta Garrotxa, a region nestled in the pre-Pyrenees, is renowned for its rugged, untouched landscapes and diverse wildlife. The area is protected as a natural park and is home to ancient forests, volcanic craters, and limestone crags. Alta Garrotxa’s natural beauty provides an ideal setting for eco-retreats like Off Grid. The retreat takes full advantage of the region’s natural offerings, allowing guests to immerse themselves in its tranquility. With the region’s growing reputation for eco-tourism, destinations like Off Grid contribute significantly to sustainable travel in Spain.
Off Grid Retreat is more than just a luxury getaway; it’s a sanctuary for eco-conscious travelers seeking a deeper connection to nature. The retreat is set within a 17th-century farmhouse, called a masia, which has been meticulously restored to maintain its rustic charm while incorporating modern sustainable practices. The accommodation consists of ten rooms, along with a four-bedroom barn that caters to larger groups or families. This architectural fusion of old and new invites guests to unwind in a serene environment that balances history and innovation.
Sustainability is at the core of Off Grid’s ethos. The retreat practices organic farming, growing much of its own food, and sourcing products locally. This reduces its carbon footprint and supports the local economy. Guests can enjoy organic meals made with fresh ingredients sourced from nearby farms. In addition to organic produce, the retreat’s sustainable practices include the use of locally crafted linens and toiletries from eco-conscious brands.
Off-Grid is also working to minimize its environmental impact further by incorporating renewable energy sources. Plans for installing solar panels and an alfresco sauna are underway to increase the retreat’s energy efficiency. Such initiatives align with the global demand for more sustainable and responsible tourism, attracting travelers who want to contribute to environmental conservation while enjoying their stay.
One of the key aspects of Off Grid is its emphasis on wellness and outdoor activities, allowing guests to experience the natural beauty of Alta Garrotxa holistically. The retreat offers a range of activities designed to promote both physical and mental well-being.
Yoga is an integral part of the Off-Grid experience. While currently available on demand, regular yoga classes will be offered twice a week beginning in the new year. These sessions are tailored to all skill levels and are designed to help guests reconnect with their bodies and minds. Yoga at Off Grid is not just a physical activity but a way to embrace mindfulness, encouraging visitors to slow down, relax, and engage with the natural surroundings.
For those seeking adventure, Off Grid offers electric bike (ebike) rentals, allowing guests to explore the nearby landscapes in a fun and eco-friendly way. Cycling through Alta Garrotxa’s winding routes offers a unique opportunity to experience the region’s volcanic landscapes, forests, and quaint villages. The ebikes make the terrain more accessible, ensuring that all guests, regardless of their fitness levels, can enjoy the ride and explore the area’s natural beauty.
Hiking is another popular activity at Off Grid. Guests can embark on guided hikes through the Parc Natural de la Zona Volcànica, a stunning natural park famous for its volcanic formations and diverse ecosystems. These hikes are designed to immerse guests in the raw beauty of the region, offering breathtaking views of the surrounding mountains and valleys. Whether hiking through beech forests or across volcanic craters, these treks provide a deep connection to the environment, fostering a sense of peace and rejuvenation.
One of the unique features of Off Grid is its communal dining experience. Meals are prepared with ingredients sourced locally and feature dishes such as oxtail pie, tomato salad with local cheese, and orange-zest cheesecake. Dining is shared at a large farmhouse table, where guests can enjoy the food and bond over shared experiences. This communal aspect of the retreat fosters a sense of community and connection, encouraging guests to slow down and savor each moment.
Off Grid’s meals are designed to be a celebration of local Catalan cuisine, with a focus on organic and sustainable ingredients. The menu changes daily, based on what is fresh and available from the local market. Guests can also enjoy an honesty bar, which provides a selection of local wines and spirits, enhancing the laid-back and welcoming atmosphere.
Off-Grid Retreat represents the growing trend of eco-tourism in Catalonia and across Spain. By combining sustainable practices with luxury and wellness, the retreat appeals to a new generation of travelers who are increasingly prioritizing environmental impact in their travel decisions. The retreat’s focus on local food, renewable energy, and eco-friendly activities makes it a standout example of responsible tourism in Spain.
This eco-retreat also contributes to the local economy, providing employment opportunities and boosting the tourism industry in Alta Garrotxa. Eco-tourism is becoming a vital part of the region’s economy, as it attracts travelers who value sustainability and are willing to invest in authentic, mindful experiences. As more travelers seek eco-conscious travel options, Off Grid Retreat is well-positioned to play a significant role in shaping the future of tourism in Catalonia.
The post Off Grid Retreat in Alta Garrotxa, Catalonia: A Sustainable Eco-Retreat Blending Wellness, Adventure, and Nature appeared first on Travel And Tour World.In the wider context of England’s and the United Kingdom’s transport network, the vital air link between Cornwall and London has been thrown into turmoil. The route operated by Eastern Airways between Cornwall Airport Newquay in Cornwall and London Gatwick Airport in Greater London is now suspended after the airline filed a notice to appoint administrators. Council officials in the region emphasise that the public service obligation (PSO) connection is essential for local residents, businesses and tourism, and a replacement carrier is being pursued at pace. Passengers are already facing disruption and uncertainty as the search for a new operator begins.
Eastern Airways’ financial difficulties culminated in a formal notice to appoint administrators being filed at the Insolvency and Companies Court.
Following that filing, the Civil Aviation Authority (CAA) confirmed that all flights by Eastern Airways have been cancelled, including the Cornwall–London Gatwick connection.
The specific route from Newquay to London Gatwick — designated under a PSO (public service obligation) contract — is now facing a period of disruption as replacement plans are formulated.
Local authorities acknowledge that there may be weeks of disruption for travellers who had booked on the route, while an interim or permanent solution is found.
The link between Cornwall and London serves not only residents travelling to and from the capital, but plays a strategic role in tourism, business connectivity and regional economic growth. Local officials describe the route as essential for Cornwall’s accessibility.
Because Cornwall lies at the far southwestern tip of England, the air link cuts through geographical remoteness and helps connect the region to the UK’s major transport hub in London. Loss of this route could risk making Cornwall feel more isolated at a time when promoting its tourism industry is vital.
For visitors, the convenience of flying into Cornwall rather than undertaking longer rail or road journeys supports the region’s tourism value. For business and investment, ready access to the capital helps anchor Cornwall’s growth ambitions.
Cornwall Council has confirmed that its contract for the route was already nearing its expiration, and steps to find a new operator have been initiated.
Officials say an interim solution may be announced soon, potentially within a week, though the service will not resume immediately. During this transition period, alternative travel arrangements will need to be made.
A full procurement process is expected to follow for the longer-term PSO contract, giving businesses and tourism stakeholders a voice in shaping the service that replaces the former operator.
Replacing a carrier on a PSO route poses distinct challenges. The incoming airline must find the route commercially viable, meet required flight frequencies and standards, and commit to serving the region reliably.
Because Cornwall’s geography and lower passenger volumes compared with major hubs may make the route less attractive commercially, subsidy-based PSO support is essential to ensure connectivity.
Additionally, entering service against a backdrop of airline cost inflation, fuel price pressures and regional aviation fragility further complicates matters.
For Cornwall’s tourism sector, the interruption presents both a risk and an opportunity. On one hand, fewer flight connections to London could deter some visits — especially from time-sensitive business travellers or short-stay leisure guests. On the other hand, a well chosen replacement carrier with good service levels could boost confidence, improve connectivity and enhance Cornwall’s appeal further.
Given Cornwall’s rich tourism assets — its coastal scenery, cultural heritage and visitor economy — maintaining strong transport links is imperative. Ensuring that the future operator delivers consistent schedules, competitive fares and high service standards will therefore be vital for the region’s tourism resilience.
In summary, as England and the broader UK aviation landscape witness the collapse of Eastern Airways and the suspension of the Cornwall–London Gatwick route, Cornwall’s connectivity to the capital is now in a delicate phase. With tourism, business and regional growth depending on the route, local authorities have moved into action to secure a replacement carrier under the PSO framework. While interruption is imminent, the outcome presents a chance to reset and rebuild the link in a way that supports Cornwall’s travel and tourism future.
The post UK and England Air Connectivity at Risk as Vital Cornwall–London Route Awaits New Operator appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Southeast Asia has increasingly become one of the top choices for couples who dream of having their weddings in picturesque settings. As the wedding season in India approaches, many couples are starting to move away from traditional wedding venues like palaces and banquet halls. Instead, they are seeking more affordable, yet equally beautiful venues, such as beaches, lush tropical gardens, and secluded islands. These stunning natural locations provide couples with the perfect opportunity to have a dream wedding without the sky-high costs associated with weddings in Europe. Southeast Asia, with its unique blend of natural beauty and affordability, has positioned itself as a favored alternative to the traditionally more expensive wedding destinations in Europe. The rise in couples choosing Southeast Asia as their wedding destination is a clear sign that the region is becoming an increasingly popular wedding hub.
Southeast Asia’s Growing Appeal for Weddings
Over time, Southeast Asia has emerged as one of the top choices for couples seeking to hold their weddings in destination locations. The region offers a perfect balance of breathtaking scenery and cost-effective options, making it an attractive alternative to the pricey wedding venues found in Europe. Recent studies analyzing 3,000 wedding venues and 5,000 luxury hotels across ten countries in Southeast Asia have revealed that the region provides couples with a wealth of choices. These options range from gorgeous natural settings to budget-friendly wedding packages, which has helped Southeast Asia earn a reputation for offering affordable luxury. This shift in wedding trends reflects how couples can now access luxurious wedding experiences without the hefty price tag that often comes with similar venues in Europe. Southeast Asia’s mix of beauty and affordability has positioned the region as a leading wedding destination for couples looking for the perfect venue at a much lower price point.
This growing trend of opting for Southeast Asia for destination weddings underscores a shift in perceptions about what constitutes a luxurious wedding. Couples no longer have to choose between affordability and beauty; the region allows them to enjoy both, making Southeast Asia an increasingly popular option for weddings.
Affordable Wedding Venues Across Southeast Asia
A major draw of Southeast Asia as a wedding destination is its ability to offer a wide variety of venues at prices that are far more affordable than those in Europe. Whether couples are seeking a luxury resort, a heritage site, or a charming beachside location, Southeast Asia has an abundance of options that suit various tastes and budgets. Let’s take a look at some of the most popular and affordable wedding destinations in the region:
Affordable Luxury and Dining in Southeast Asia
One of the standout features of holding a wedding in Southeast Asia is the opportunity to experience luxury at a more affordable price. Not only are wedding venues and accommodations cheaper, but dining in Southeast Asia is also extremely cost-effective. Couples can enjoy high-quality meals at a fraction of the price they would pay in Europe.
The affordability of dining in Southeast Asia does not mean couples need to compromise on the quality of the meals. The region offers an extensive range of local specialties and international cuisines, allowing couples to indulge in a luxurious culinary experience at a reasonable price. This ensures that the wedding remains as memorable as it is cost-effective.
The Global Impact of Southeast Asia’s Rise as a Wedding Hub
The growing popularity of Southeast Asia as a wedding destination is starting to have a significant impact on the global wedding industry. As more couples look for affordable luxury, the region’s exceptional venues and budget-friendly wedding packages are setting a new standard for destination weddings worldwide. As Southeast Asia’s influence continues to expand, other international wedding destinations may need to rethink their pricing and packages in order to remain competitive.
The growing demand for weddings in Southeast Asia is reshaping how couples approach their destination weddings. Now, couples are searching for luxurious wedding venues at a fraction of the cost they would typically pay in Europe. This shift in wedding trends is likely to influence how wedding markets around the world evolve in the coming years.
Top Affordable Wedding Destinations in Southeast Asia
Several countries in Southeast Asia have become popular for offering stunning yet affordable wedding venues. These countries stand out as ideal choices for couples who wish to combine luxury and affordability in their wedding destination:
These countries are now leading the way in providing affordable yet beautiful wedding destinations, offering something for every couple.
Why Southeast Asia is the Ideal Wedding Destination
In conclusion, Southeast Asia has established itself as the go-to destination for couples seeking a beautiful, affordable, and memorable wedding experience. The region offers a wide array of stunning venues, exceptional service, and reasonable prices, making it the perfect place for couples who want to have a dream wedding without the hefty price tag associated with traditional European venues. As the demand for destination weddings in Southeast Asia grows, the region is set to become one of the world’s top wedding destinations. Southeast Asia offers an ideal mix of luxury, beauty, and affordability, making it the perfect place for couples to experience their dream wedding. With the increasing popularity of the region as a wedding hub, Southeast Asia’s influence on the global wedding industry will continue to expand.
The post Bali, Langkawi, Boracay, and Palawan, These Southeast Asian Wedding Hotspots Are Transforming the Travel Scene with Affordable Luxury. What’s Your Next Dream Destination? appeared first on Travel And Tour World.In an exciting development for South Korea’s tourism industry, Agoda, one of the world’s leading digital travel platforms, has officially partnered with Busan City to promote tourism and elevate the city’s international appeal. The two-year memorandum of understanding (MOU), signed on October 28, 2025, marks a groundbreaking collaboration between the global travel platform and a local government in South Korea. Agoda’s partnership with Busan will leverage the platform’s advanced media solutions and its global reach to position Busan as an even more attractive destination for travelers worldwide.
Busan, South Korea’s second-largest city, is already a popular tourist hotspot, known for its beautiful beaches, unique cultural landmarks, and vibrant festivals. With this new strategic partnership, Agoda and Busan City plan to enhance the city’s tourism offerings by promoting its distinctive attractions and diverse experiences. From the world-famous beaches of Haeundae and Gwangalli to cultural treasures like Jagalchi Market and Gamcheon Culture Village, Busan has a wealth of experiences waiting to be discovered by international travelers.
The partnership will focus on promoting Busan’s tourism assets through digital campaigns, online content, and events. It will also aim to increase international visibility and attract tourists not only from Asia but also from other parts of the world. With Agoda’s expertise in global travel and its robust marketing capabilities, this collaboration promises to create significant growth in tourism and contribute to the city’s economic and cultural development.
Busan, often considered the gateway to South Korea’s maritime culture, has long attracted travelers seeking both natural beauty and modern experiences. The city’s vibrant beaches, cultural landmarks, and festivals make it a year-round destination for tourists. Some of the most popular attractions include:
In addition to its natural beauty and cultural attractions, Busan is rapidly becoming a food lover’s paradise, featuring local favorites such as fish cakes, pork soup, and mil-myeon, alongside a burgeoning Michelin Guide selection. These culinary experiences offer visitors a deeper connection to the local culture and cuisine, further positioning Busan as a must-visit global destination.
Through this collaboration, Agoda’s media solutions will play a key role in promoting Busan’s tourism to the global market. By leveraging Agoda’s digital tools and insights, Busan City will be able to reach targeted audiences through effective marketing campaigns. These initiatives will feature engaging content, special offers, and travel tips that will help potential travelers discover and explore Busan more easily.
With its expertise in digital marketing and a global network of travelers, Agoda aims to position Busan as not just a popular domestic destination but as an international travel hotspot. This partnership is expected to bring increased global traffic, higher booking rates, and more tourism-related activities to the city, helping to boost its international profile.
This partnership between Agoda and Busan City represents a forward-thinking approach to tourism growth. With Agoda’s vast international network and Busan’s unique cultural offerings, the collaboration is poised to create synergistic growth for the city’s tourism industry. The MOU is a clear indication of the growing importance of digital travel platforms in shaping the future of global tourism, and the Agoda-Busan partnership will likely serve as a model for similar initiatives in other cities worldwide.
As more international travelers seek meaningful travel experiences, Busan stands out as an ideal destination to offer a blend of natural beauty, cultural richness, and vibrant local life. This strategic partnership will help the city tap into new and emerging markets, creating a more accessible and attractive destination for tourists globally.
In conclusion, the strategic partnership between Agoda and Busan City marks a major step forward in positioning Busan as a global tourism destination. By leveraging Agoda’s advanced marketing insights and the city’s unique attractions, this partnership aims to increase international awareness, enhance the tourism experience, and contribute to the city’s long-term growth in the competitive global tourism market.
Through effective use of digital marketing and collaboration with local businesses, Busan will be able to offer visitors an enriched and seamless travel experience, all while supporting its growing reputation as an exciting destination for global travelers.
The post Agoda and Busan City Sign Landmark MOU to Drive Tourism Growth, Positioning Busan as a Leading International Destination appeared first on Travel And Tour World.A truly magnificent occasion has been confirmed for enthusiasts of video game music, as the sixth edition of the Game Music Festival 2026 has been formally announced by the Game Music Foundation. This landmark event is scheduled to take place throughout the entire month of June 2026, transforming London, UK, into the epicenter of orchestral and contemporary tributes to the artistry of gaming soundscapes. This forthcoming festival is being structured as a one-month-long extravaganza, an unprecedented scale of celebration that will be witnessed across two of the capital’s most distinguished artistic spaces: the Southbank Centre’s Royal Festival Hall and Fairfield Halls. This dedication to the profound impact and artistic merit of video game soundtracks ensures that the music itself is elevated to a level of prestige usually reserved for classical masters. Great care has been taken in the curation of the programming, ensuring that the diverse array of musical achievements within the gaming sphere is properly represented and honored.
The Game Music Festival has consistently positioned itself as the premier event globally that is entirely dedicated to the appreciation of video game soundtracks and audio design. Since its inception, the festival has been hosted in the most prestigious venues across London and Wroclaw, regularly featuring world-class performers on its stages. This sixth edition is designed to uphold and advance that reputation, showcasing the profound cultural impact that video game music has achieved. The event is characterized by its immersive approach, where the musical scores are permitted to speak for themselves, unburdened by the usual distractions of screen visuals. This approach is rooted in the philosophy of the Game Music Foundation, an independent group driven by a passion for the music of video games, whose international mission is the promotion of this art form.
The Game Music Festival 2026 is destined to commence with a formidable opening performance, titled The Infernal Symphony. This highly anticipated concert has been scheduled for Saturday, 6th June 2026, and will take place in the magnificent setting of the Royal Festival Hall. The focus of this dark and powerful musical event will be the three decades of soundtracks that have defined the Diablo franchise, a genre-defining series of action role-playing games. Attendees are being invited to take a musical pilgrimage, wherein the iconic soundscapes of the Burning Hells and High Heavens are explored through a monumental sonic opus. The arrangement of the music from the Diablo games into this massive work has been skillfully handled by Ignacy Wojciechowski.
The middle portion of the Game Music Festival 2026 will be dedicated to two distinct yet equally significant events, both scheduled to take place at the Fairfield Halls. The first, titled The Colors of Harmony: Hitoshi Sakimoto 40th Anniversary Celebration, is slated for 13th June. This event is being established as a dedicated tribute to the four-decade career of the highly influential composer Hitoshi Sakimoto, whose work has spanned multiple classic titles and genres. The details regarding the exact programme and performers for this event are soon to be announced, but the mere recognition of such a distinguished figure in the realm of game music has already generated significant excitement among the community. The sheer volume and quality of work produced by Sakimoto over his career necessitate a major event of this scale to properly commemorate his contributions.
The Game Music Festival 2026 will be brought to a powerful conclusion with a unique double-header of concerts scheduled for a single day, Saturday, 27th June 2026, both of which will be hosted at the Royal Festival Hall. The afternoon will feature the symphonic concert Ballads of the Underworld, which is dedicated to the critically acclaimed soundtracks of Supergiant Games’ immensely successful titles, Hades and its eagerly awaited sequel, Hades II. This musical journey is being planned to place a special spotlight on the vocal masterpieces that have become synonymous with these games: the soulful laments, hymns, and alluring siren songs that have served as the emotional backdrop for the perilous expeditions of Zagreus and Melinoë through the Underworld.
It is understood that every Game Music Festival is structured to be comprised of more than just its core concert series; it also features a comprehensive range of educational events. Throughout the month of June 2026, the GMF educational programme will be implemented, hosting various events such as masterclass workshops, detailed panel discussions, and numerous specialized educational sessions. This side of the festival is designed to be an invaluable resource, allowing participants to meet with established industry professionals and acquire essential tips and tricks directly from the field of contemporary game music production. For anyone considering a career in composing or designing sound for video games, attendance at these supplementary events is deemed highly beneficial. Further, detailed information concerning the specific schedule and participants of the educational programme will be unveiled at a later stage, meaning interested parties should continue to monitor official channels for these updates.
The post Game Music Festival Details Unveiled, Drawing Global Enthusiasts To London For A Month Of Iconic Diablo, Hades And Persona Concert Tributes appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Situated on an islet in the Tagus River, Almourol Castle is one of the most beautiful and historically important landmarks in Portugal. The castle is located in the center of Portugal, between Entroncamento and Abrantes, and is an impressive fortress, rising 18 meters above the water. Its strategic location and spectacular views have captured the imagination of many, and it continues to be one of the most popular sites in the country.
Almourol Castle is a medieval castle which was built by the Knights Templar. It is famous for its Templar history as well as its deep connections to the Roman Empire. Almourol Castle is only accessible by boat which adds to its charm as a point of interest. The spectacular combination of history, architecture, and natural beauty makes it an ideal site to visit.
A Journey to Almourol Castle: Boat Trips and Panoramic Views
The Almourol Castle is situated on an islet and hence, its visitors need to do a boat trip on the Tagus River before accessing the centre of the castle from the island. The Tagus offers an adjunct to the boating adventure by providing amazing scenery of the river, the banks, and the castle. At four euros and a little portion of, time tourists get priceless, scenic pleasure boat rides to islands with castles.
The castle is a monument to history and the ride on the boat that pays a river protects him from a distance offers an additional opportunity to relish its glory. For all day, the boat trip an experience that trumps all sense of endless admiration. What makes the castle so beautiful is its isolation and the position, plus the surrounding nature with the river makes the importance of the island cove. The place invokes tenderness.
The Historical Importance of Almourol Castle
The Knights Templar have helped shaped Portuguese history and, importantly, Almourol Castle is something of a monument to that association. It was built as a medieval defensive outpost during the ruthless reconquest of the Iberian peninsular from the Moors. The Templars kept and defended the castle as part of their critical efforts of region and frontier Christianity expansion.
Almourol Castle is also notable for the fact that it, and its history, traces even further back to the Roman Empire. The island was deeply and heavily settled. Roman usage of the island included something as elaborate as fortifications, and complicated as portage of vessels of trade, enriching the area Almourol Castle is located within. With both Roman, and Templar influences, Almourol Castle affords enthusiasts of history to fascinate themselves with the complex, and layered, history of Almourol and Portugal.
The castle was a vital defensive point during the middle ages. Its strategic position on the Tagus made it defensive territory by river, and its sheer, castle walls offered the, to fortress them and defend their high vantages.
Architectural Design and Legacy of the Templar Order
Almourol Castle embodies its medieval roots through its architecture, most notably the embodiment of medieval architecture in the the solid stone walls, lofty towers, and the fortification of the castle which has stood the test of time. The fortification of the castle is interesting in itself, but the castle walls with thin window slits and battlements offer insight into the skills of architecture and construction of the Templars that built the castle.
The single most important feature of the castle is the central defensive keep. The central keep served dually as a defensive stronghold and as a dwelling of the knights which occupied the seignory. The central keep is encased within a set of walls, a gate, and protective towers which offer the idea that the walls and keep do not serve as a final line of defense. In modern times, remnants of a medieval military castle present a faint idea of the strategy deployed in the construction of the castle.
Countless reminders of the Templar Order’s architecture and symbols of the knights are present within the castle, attesting to the the mark the Templars left on the castle. People are able to wander the grounds, discover the Templar’s impact on the history of the castle and visualize the life of the knights and their dominion.
Tourism and Accessibility to Almourol Castle
Both Entroncamento and Abrantes town centers enable easy access to Almourol Castle thanks to their multiple and varied transport systems. Castle-bound ferries dock at both riverside camps which are roughly equidistant from the town. By far the most rewarding part of the castle visit is the inclusive sightseeing walk which reveals the breathtaking beauty of the Takus’ tributaries.
Because the castle is on an island and has basic service facilities, visitors are encouraged to come equipped with sufficient water and sturdy shoes for their short walk on the island. Losing out on such episodes of history combined with stunning island surroundings, should be avoided whenever central Portugal is on your travel itinerary.
A Site of Cultural and Natural Beauty
To visitors’ great pleasure, Almourol Castle is fully surrounded by rich nature, adding to its history. Visitors are welcomed by lush and dense greenery, adding to the serenity provided by the Tagus, which gracefully embraces the castle and its surroundings.
Almourol’s Castle visitors are welcome to several neighboring historical and natural parks within the region. The castle is situated within the core of some of Portugal’s most treasured natural geographies which allows visitors to hike, watch birds or otherwise marvel at the Portugal countryside.
Conclusion: One of the most fascinating historical experiences to have in Portugal
Almourol Castle is a fascinating and overwhelming site for visitors keen to engage and appreciate Portugal’s medieval history and rich heritage. Almourol is usually reached through Tagus River which heighens the surreal anomolous character the castle portrays in comparison to the surroundings. The historical importance and the architectural stature of Almourol turns it to the most captivating of the lot to eastern Portugal. Almourol Castle never disappoints visitors and leaves a lasting tendancy, especially to those keen on the Templar legacy, the Roman history, and captivating sights.
The post Visit Almourol Castle: Portugal’s Stunning Templar Fortress on the Tagus River appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Avalanche price holds above the $20 mark amid news that Nasdaq-listed company AgriFORCE Growing Systems has secured shareholder support for a bold pivot into the Avalanche ecosystem.
The AVAX token, which has bounced off lows of $18 in the past week, shows notable resilience amid broader market optimism around a potential altcoin explosion.
Nasdaq-listed AgriFORCE, a company traditionally rooted in sustainable agriculture technologies, is eyeing an aggressive pivot into the crypto treasury strategy ecosystem.
Specifically, the company wants to become the first publicly traded entity on Nasdaq dedicated exclusively to the Avalanche blockchain network. AVAX One is the new company.
On October 27, AgriFORCE revealed it had secured special shareholder approval for the initiative .
A $300 million capital infusion and a further $250 million offering are set to fund an aggressive AVAX treasury strategy.
In the process of acquiring and holding AVAX tokens, AgriFORCE is poised to commit up to $700 million in exposure through direct purchases, staking, and ecosystem participation.
Matt Zhang, founder of Hivemind and nominated chairman of the AgriFORCE board, commented:
“With this mandate from shareholders, we can now proceed to close the transaction and begin the focused work of accumulating AVAX strategically and creating the Berkshire Hathaway of the on-chain financial economy.”
Amid the corporate enthusiasm, the Avalanche native token shows resilience.
While the price of AVAX fell from highs of $21 this week, bulls managed to recover from lows of $18. Maintaining stability above the critical $20 psychological level signals a potential bullish momentum that will align with the broader cryptocurrency market.
If bulls break above $30, the altcoin could target prices above $40. As well as tokenization, catalysts such as institutional inflows and narrative shifts around spot exchange-traded funds are critical.
AgriFORCE’s corporate strategy and market performance also point to what investors may want to look out for in the coming weeks. In its announcement, the company said it will put its plans into action in the coming days.
“The completion of this transaction will position the Company as the first Nasdaq-listed entity with a primary mission centered on the Avalanche ecosystem. The transaction is expected to close on or about October 30, 2025,” it wrote.
AVAX price reached its all-time high of $146 in November 2021.
The current price is well off this peak.
However, bulls have managed to bounce by an impressive 630% since the Avalanche price fell to its all-time low of $2.79 in 2020.
The post Nasdaq-listed AgriFORCE eyes $700M Avalanche treasury bet; AVAX price outlook appeared first on CoinJournal.
The long-awaited Solana ETFs have finally been approved, sparking renewed optimism across the crypto market.
The ETFs’ approval has reignited bullish momentum, with analysts believing that the Solana price could soon rally toward $230 and beyond.
Bitwise and Canary Capital have confirmed that their individual Solana ETFs officially begin trading on October 28 after weeks of regulatory uncertainty.
Bitwise’s product, launched under the ticker BSOL, serves as a gateway for institutional exposure to Solana, featuring staking powered by Helius Labs and a temporary management fee waiver.
Introducing $BSOL — the Bitwise Solana Staking ETF. Starts trading tomorrow.
– First U.S. ETP to have 100% direct exposure to spot SOL
– Maximizing Solana’s 7%+ average staking reward rate*
– Targeting 100% of assets staked
– Staking through Bitwise Onchain Solutions, powered by… pic.twitter.com/Vo8Ko0qOCn— Bitwise (@BitwiseInvest) October 27, 2025
Grayscale has also moved swiftly, converting its Solana Trust (GSOL) into an ETF holding over $105 million worth of SOL.
Meanwhile, VanEck has also filed its sixth S-1/A amendment, with its Solana ETF status officially changed to “effective” and a 0.3% management fee established.
Adding to the growing momentum, Hong Kong’s first Solana ETF also began trading on Monday, marking Asia’s initial entry into the Solana ETF landscape.
Despite this wave of institutional activity, retail demand for Solana remains subdued.
Futures open interest sits near $9.75 billion — up slightly from the previous day but still below the $10 billion mark — indicating that traders are cautious amid market volatility.
Even so, analysts believe the ETF launches signal a critical turning point for Solana, reinforcing its legitimacy as an institutional-grade digital asset and providing the foundation for its steady hold above $200.
While retail demand for Solana remains unresponsive, the Solana price has been climbing steadily from $190 to $205, with short positions fading quickly.
Analysts note that bearish volume profiles are weakening while liquidity accumulates at higher price levels.
This shift has tilted momentum firmly in favour of buyers, with several technical indicators confirming the strength of the ongoing rally.
On the 4-hour chart, Solana trades above both its 50-day and 200-day moving averages, reinforcing the bullish setup.
The Ichimoku Cloud analysis shows a clear breakout, with price holding above key support between $197 and $201 — a signal that often precedes extended upward moves.
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) also hovers near 62, leaving room for additional gains before overbought conditions emerge.
Analysts now eye resistance zones between $204 and $208, followed by key hurdles at $216, $227, and $230.
Notably, a confirmed close above $205 could trigger a sustained rally toward these upper levels.
If momentum continues, higher targets around $237 and $253 come into view, aligning with Fibonacci retracement levels that mark previous swing highs.
Market observers have compared the current structure of Solana’s price chart to its 2023 breakout phase.
Analysts such as GalaxyBTC point to an ascending triangle pattern forming on the weekly chart, defined by a series of higher lows that indicate strong accumulation.
Same pattern as October 2023.
This Q4 we should break-out from the consolidation into new all-time-highs. pic.twitter.com/pIURlH1YUu
— Galaxy (@galaxyBTC) October 25, 2025
The critical support at $188 remains intact, representing the network’s largest volume cluster where many long-term holders entered the market.
A successful breakout above $200 would confirm the pattern and potentially lead to a test of $215 and $225, echoing the bullish behaviour seen two years ago.
The broader macro picture also appears supportive.
Some traders suggest that if the US Federal Reserve signals an end to quantitative tightening, it could inject much-needed liquidity into the market — providing another tailwind for Solana’s next leg higher.
Even as short-term traders monitor resistance near $230, long-term analysts remain optimistic about Solana’s broader trajectory.
The asset has maintained a pattern of higher lows since early 2023, and its market structure mirrors the accumulation phase that preceded its previous bull run.
Projections place potential mid- to long-term targets around $300, $390, and even $520 if momentum and institutional demand persist.
In the near term, maintaining support between $198 and $200 is crucial.
If buyers continue to defend this zone, the Solana price could strengthen further, confirming its leadership among major altcoins.
As the first wave of Solana ETFs begins trading, the market’s sentiment has clearly shifted — bears are losing ground, and bulls now have their eyes fixed firmly on the $230 milestone.
The post First Solana ETFs approved: bulls regain control with eyes on $230 appeared first on CoinJournal.
Chainlink’s traction in the crypto and blockchain ecosystem sees the oracle network rank as a global standard for decentralized finance and capital markets on-chain.
Part of the growth now has the platform teaming up with Balcony, a leading real estate tokenization firm, to bring more than $240 billion in government-sourced property assets on-chain.
As the market eyes an overall bounce amid other tailwinds, could Chainlink’s native token, LINK, gain further amid the rising institutional adoption?
Among crypto news today is the announcement that Balcony, recognized as the premier platform for government-sourced real estate tokenization, has forged a pivotal alliance with Chainlink.
The latter is the gold-standard oracle network in the blockchain ecosystem, and the partnership points to growing adoption of Chainlink solutions.
In this case, the two platforms are collaborating via Chainlink’s Runtime Environment (CRE), which is now integrated into Balcony’s Keystone platform.
Chainlink and Balcony will tap into CRE to secure and digitize over $240 billion in on-chain property assets.
With Chainlink, Balcony has the blockchain solution to consolidate fragmented government-sourced property data into a unified, verifiable system.
The move lays the groundwork for compliant and programmable tokenized real estate, the firms said in an announcement.
At its core, CRE facilitates the seamless on-chain deployment of authenticated parcel data, fostering unparalleled transparency in an asset class that has long been hampered by opaque records and manual processes.
By embedding CRE within Keystone, Balcony unlocks new avenues for liquidity and accessibility, enabling fractional ownership, automated compliance checks, and real-time data verification.
The goal is to address longstanding challenges in real estate, such as fraud risks and inefficient transfers. It also elevates trust in tokenized markets, currently an asset category witnessing staggering growth.
Balcony’s integration of CRE is a clear example of how Chainlink’s industry-standard oracle platform is unlocking the next generation of real-world assets. By bringing government-sourced property data on-chain, Balcony is setting a new standard for transparency and efficiency in real estate. This partnership reflects an accelerating movement to redefine how institutions and market participants interact with tokenized assets in a compliant and verifiable way,” said Colin Cunningham, head of tokenized asset sales at Chainlink Labs.
Chainlink’s native token has surged in recent months amid broader market gains.
However, ecosystem developments have buoyed investor sentiment, helping bulls to hold prices above key support levels during profit taking events.
At the time of writing, LINK traded around $18.50, just in the red on the day but up nearly 4% as bulls continue to hold above $18.
Chainlink token’s resilience in the market and platform appeal in a maturing crypto landscape are two factors likely to help bulls eye new highs.
If LINK retests the $20 resistance level, a successful breakout could allow buyers to push for $30 and multi-year highs of $40.
RWA sector traction, DeFi resilience, and spot exchange-traded funds hype may prove key catalysts.
The post Chainlink expands into $240B property tokenization with Balcony; check price forecast appeared first on CoinJournal.
The long-awaited approval of the Hedera ETF and Litecoin ETF has arrived, marking a pivotal moment for both assets.
With trading set to begin on the Nasdaq, investor enthusiasm has driven renewed interest in HBAR and LTC, sending prices higher as markets react to the historic development.
In a surprising turn of events, Canary Capital confirmed that its spot ETFs tracking Hedera and Litecoin will launch tomorrow on the Nasdaq.
The approval comes despite the ongoing US government shutdown, which many assumed would halt all Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) operations.
However, a recent procedural shift allowed issuers to bypass direct SEC intervention by letting their filings automatically go effective after 20 days.
According to Canary Capital CEO Steven McClurg, both ETFs have met all legal requirements and are ready to trade.
Bloomberg ETF analysts Eleanor Terrett and Eric Balchunas confirmed that the NYSE and Nasdaq have certified the required 8-A filings, the final step before shares can begin trading.
This development follows the model used for previous spot crypto ETFs, including those for Bitcoin and Ethereum, but with an even more dramatic twist, given the timing during a government shutdown.
🚨NEW: @CanaryFunds spot $HBAR and $LTC ETFs are now effective and will begin trading on the NASDAQ tomorrow, according to CEO @stevenmcclurg.
“Litecoin and Hedera are the next two token ETFs to go effective after Ethereum,” McClurg told me in a statement. “We look forward to… https://t.co/tPjsjLEE3R
— Eleanor Terrett (@EleanorTerrett) October 27, 2025
The approval of the Hedera and Litecoin ETFs has energised the crypto market, sparking fresh optimism among investors who view it as another major step toward mainstream adoption.
Hedera’s native token, HBAR, has rebounded strongly, climbing to around $0.21 at press time and reclaiming critical technical levels.
Notably, HBAR’s rise above its 20, 50, 100, and 200 exponential moving averages signals a decisive bullish shift.
At the same time, the Litecoin price is attempting to break through its stubborn $100 resistance level.
LTC price briefly spiked above the $100 mark following the ETF announcement, reflecting heightened investor interest, though it has yet to confirm a full breakout.
Technical indicators, including the Relative Strength Index (RSI) and Moving Average Convergence/Divergence (MACD), suggest that a sustained move above $100 could mark the start of a broader bullish reversal for Litecoin.
Market data also shows a shift in trading behaviour.
Hedera’s open interest has declined from over $500 million earlier this year to roughly $163 million, indicating reduced speculative leverage.
This suggests that HBAR’s latest rally is being driven more by genuine spot demand than by leveraged futures trading — often a sign of healthier market growth.
Beyond the ETF launch, Hedera’s recent institutional partnerships have strengthened its long-term outlook.
The network has been selected to participate in the Reserve Bank of Australia’s Project Acacia, exploring the use of distributed ledger technology (DLT) in tokenised financial markets.
It has also been chosen by the Bank of England for its DLT Challenge, further cementing Hedera’s position among credible blockchain platforms with real-world use cases.
Meanwhile, asset management giant T. Rowe Price has filed for an actively managed crypto ETF that may include both HBAR and LTC, signalling rising institutional confidence in these networks.
These developments are viewed as reinforcing the credibility of both assets at a time when regulated exposure through ETFs is gaining traction.
If current momentum holds, Hedera price could test higher resistance zones near $0.25 and even $0.28 in the coming weeks, while Litecoin price may finally break through the $100 ceiling that has capped its rallies for months.
However, analysts maintain that Hedera (HBAR) must stay above $0.21, which has been established as the immediate support, for the bullish momentum to build.
At the same time, Litecoin (LTC) must stay above $99.67 for the $100 to come to effect.
The post First Hedera and Litecoin ETFs approved: HBAR and LTC prices take off appeared first on CoinJournal.
Luciano Spalletti opens up about rumours linking him with the Juventus job, saying that ‘whoever will replace Igor Tudor will be lucky.’
Spalletti is the leading candidate for the Juventus job, as multiple sources in Italy claim that he and Bianconeri director Damien Comolli will sit down today to discuss contract details with him today.
Ironically, Spalletti had already planned a meeting with the media on Tuesday morning to unveil a new advertisement in which he features alongside his former Roma star Francesco Totti.
The ad was released earlier this week, and Spalletti didn’t only talk about his latest sponsorship commitment.
“I feel well, I wait with serenity. I have the ambition to set things right,” the ex-Italy coach told Sky Sport via Gazzetta.
“I can only speak highly of Tudor, a serious and passionate person. Whoever will replace him will be lucky because he’ll find a well-trained team.”
Juventus confirmed Tudor’s sacking on Monday after the team lost three consecutive matches and failed to score in the last four.
Spalletti also spoke about his reunion with Totti, which has made headlines in Italy because of their public dispute during the coach’s second spell at the Stadio Olimpico.
“It feels so good to sit next to Totti,” Spalletti said.
“There were some risky choices, but we spent some marvellous years together, so when Ramazzotti put us back together, I was very happy and he was quite relaxed.”
An 81-year-old man in an electric wheelchair was fatally struck this morning by a car driven by Inter‘s second-choice goalkeeper Josep Martinez, reports in Italy claim.
There’s tragic news from Italy this morning, as according to several sources, including Gazzetta, Inter’s second-choice keeper Josep Martinez was involved in a car accident that killed an 81-year-old man in an electric wheelchair.
It happened at around 9:40 am local time on Via Bergamo in Fenegrò, in the province of Como, near Inter’s training centre Appiano Gentile.
The man was pronounced dead at the scene despite the prompt arrival of an ambulance and an air ambulance.
The Italian Police is carrying out investigations to reconstruct the dynamics of the accident.
According to Gazzetta, the initial hypothesis is that the elderly man may have suffered a sudden illness and veered into the lane where Martinez was driving.
The Nerazzurri goalkeeper immediately stopped and provided first aid to the man.
Following the tragic news and as a sign of mourning, Inter decided to cancel Cristian Chivu’s press conference, which was scheduled for 14:00 CET today.
Multiple sources in Italy claim that Kevin De Bruyne will undergo surgery in Antwerp tomorrow and will only return to action in February 2026.
Napoli star De Bruyne is set to miss several months of action after suffering a severe lesion to the thigh muscle in a Serie A game against Inter on Saturday.
Corriere dello Sport, Gazzetta and Tuttosport report that the Belgium international will be forced to undergo surgery in Antwerp. The operation will be carried out tomorrow, Wednesday, October 29.
According to reports, De Bruyne will miss from three to four months of action, returning on the pitch around February 2026.
According to Corriere dello Sport, the ex-Manchester City star has already landed in Belgium to prepare for the surgery.
De Bruyne sustained an injury to the same muscle in August 2023, which sidelined him for five months. During that period, he missed 28 matches for Manchester City and one for the Belgium national team.
De Bruyne underwent surgery two years ago as well, while his teammate and compatriot Romelu Lukaku, who sustained a similar injury this past August, has opted for conservative therapy.
Juventus sacked Igor Tudor because of poor results and performances in recent games, but the frosty relationship between the Croat and club director Damien Comolli also played a role in the coach’s dismissal.
Juventus announced Tudor’s sacking on Monday and Juventus General Manager Comolli is set to meet Luciano Spalletti today to offer him the job at the Allianz Stadium.
Juventus have been winless since September 13, they’ve lost three games in a row and have not scored in the last four.
Naturally, results and performances in recent weeks led to Tudor’s dismissal, but there’s more behind Juventus’ decision to part ways with the Croatian tactician.
Juventus’ transfer activity surely affected the relationship between Comolli and Tudor, given that the coach’s requests were largely ignored by the Old Lady’s general manager. Juventus didn’t sign a new central midfielder over the summer but signed instead two attacking players, Lois Openda and Edon Zhegrova, on deadline day. Furthermore, Tudor was eager to keep Alberto Costa in the team, especially after some positive performances in the Club World Cup, but Juventus still decided to swap the Portuguese right-back with his compatriot Joao Mario, who has only collected 330 minutes on the pitch across all competitions since moving to Turin.
The appointment of a new Director of Performance, Darren Burgess, in September, was another decision that the club did not share with the coach. The welcome from Tudor surely wasn’t a warm one, as the Croat said “This gentleman hasn’t yet arrived at the club” when asked about Burgess’ appointment last month. Juventus had welcomed Burgess, stating that the ex-Arsenal and Liverpool staff member would “work closely with Damien Comolli, Giorgio Chiellini, François Modesto, Igor Tudor and across all the technical areas and every age group of the Club to form a high-level team dedicated to promoting excellence in performance, innovation and athlete wellbeing.” Furthermore, as first reported by Tuttosport, in recent weeks, club directors also discussed Tudor’s tactics, suggesting in one-on-one meetings that he should have considered switching to a four-man defence, a step into Tudor’s territory that the coach didn’t particularly appreciate.
Aside from results, Juventus were also not impressed by Tudor’s communication, including frequent protests towards referees. Tudor’s first complaint came after a 1-1 draw at Hellas Verona, in which the Bianconeri protested for a penalty kick in favour of their opponents and a potential red card for the Gialloblu striker Gift Orban. On that occasion, Tudor labelled the penalty kick decision as “shameful.” Tudor’s communication strategy didn’t change in the following weeks as he kept complaining about referees, and even the fixture list, before a Champions League game against Real Madrid last week, with Giorgio Chiellini, Comolli and François Modesto sitting in front of him in the first row of the press room of the Estadio Bernabeu. Ultimately, on and off-the-field issues led to the coach’s dismissal, and Juventus are now on the verge of starting a new era, with their third coach in seven months.
Santiago Gimenez will partner with Rafael Leao in Milan’s away game at Atalanta this evening, while Ivan Juric will look to Charles De Ketelaere and Ademola Lookman.
It kicks off at 20:45 CET (19:45 GMT) at the New Balance Stadium in Bergamo.
It’s a mid-week Serie A round, and the game will kick off after Lecce-Napoli.
Atalanta are the only unbeaten team in Serie A this season, but have also collected six draws in eight matches.
They host Milan without the injured Giorgio Scalvini, while the Rossoneri have travelled to Bergamo without Adrien Rabiot, Ardon Jashari, Christian Pulisic and Pervis Estupinan.
Multiple sources, including Gazzetta, claim that Atalanta coach Juric will pick Lookman and De Ketelaere in attack, with Mario Pasalic playing as an attacking midfielder.
Massimiliano Allegri is expected to reply with Leao and Gimenez up front. The Mexico international has yet to score a goal in Serie A this season.
Davide Bartesaghi will replace Estupinan on the left wing, and Fikayo Tomori will return to the starting XI after resting against Pisa in the previous round.
The game will be broadcast live on TNT Sports 1 in the UK and Ireland, but is also available to stream on DAZN. Fans in the USA can stream it live on Paramount+.
Atalanta (3-4-2-1): Carnesecchi; Kossounou, Hien, Djimsiti; Zappacosta, De Roon, Ederson, Zalewski; Pasalic; De Ketelaere, Lookman.
Milan (3-5-2): Maignan; Tomori, Gabbia, Pavlovic; Saelemaekers, Fofana, Modric, Ricci, Bartesaghi; Gimenez, Leao.
Lorenzo Lucca is expected to return to the Napoli XI against Lecce today, but Scott McTominay might start on the bench.
It kicks off at 18:30 CET (17:30 GMT) at the Stadio Via del Mare in Lecce.
Napoli see Rasmus Hojlund and Amir Rrahmani return to action, but neither is fit to start, so Antonio Conte is expected to pick Lucca in attack, Sam Beukema and Juan Jesus at centre-back.
Lucca was benched against Inter on Saturday and had received a red card in his latest game as a starter against PSV last week.
Romelu Lukaku, Kevin De Bruyne, Alex Meret and Stanislav Lobotka are injured.
Several sources, including Gazzetta and Corriere dello Sport, report that Scotland international McTominay is expected to rest so Eljif Elmas will join Billy Gilmour and Zambo Anguissa in the middle of the park.
Noa Lang is expected to start for the first time in Serie A this season, completing a three-man attack with Lucca and Matteo Politano.
Milan loanee Francesco Camarda is expected to start for Lecce.
The match is available on TNT Sports 1 and DAZN in the UK and Paramount+ in the USA.
Lecce (4-3-3): Falcone, Veiga, Gaspar, Tiago Gabriel, Gallo; Coulibaly, Ramadani, Maleh; Pierotti, Stulic, Banda.
Napoli (4-3-3): Milinkovic-Savic, Di Lorenzo, Beukema, Juan Jesus, Olivera; Anguissa, Gilmour, Elmas; Politano, Lucca, Lang.
Juventus director Damien Comolli is set to meet with ex-Italy coach Luciano Spalletti today to offer him a contract as a replacement for Igor Tudor.
Multiple sources in Italy, including Gazzetta, claim that Juventus will meet with Spalletti today to discuss the contract details and the technical project following Tudor’s dismissal.
Football Italia exclusively reported on Monday that Juventus had established contact with Spalletti right after Tudor’s departure.
The Bianconeri have gone eight consecutive games without victories and have not scored a goal in the last four matches.
Spalletti, a Napoli Scudetto winner in 2022-23, has been without a team since June, when he was sacked by the Italian federation.
According to Tuttosport, Spalletti will be offered a contract until the end of the season, with an option to extend in case of Champions League qualification.
Gazzetta claims that Spalletti has rejected offers from Saudi and Turkish clubs and is eager to accept the Juventus job. However, if the two parties fail to reach an agreement, Roberto Mancini and Raffaele Palladino remain possible candidates for the Old Lady.
Juventus sack Tudor
Spalletti ahead
Comolli meets the ex-CT today. Green light expected. Eight months and renewal in case of Champions League. Palladino and Mancini the alternatives. Brambilla on the bench tomorrow.
Lookman-Leao full speed
De Bruyne has to undergo surgery, Napoli for the sprint
Inter, with three defeats in eight games, the Scudetto is a feat.
Tudor sacked
Yesterday the dismissal and negotiations with the ex-CT
Juve to Lucio
Spalletti is ready to say yes, today the meeting for the signature.
Buffon: ‘This is the ideal solution.’ If he doesn’t sign, Mancini is the alternative. Fatal defeat against Lazio for Tudor. Brambilla on the bench against Udinese tomorrow.
Napoli want to win for KDB
Allegri: ‘Leao is worth 25 goals.’
Juve, why Spalletti
Tudor out! Today the meeting with the ex-CT
Comolli has gone all the way for Luciano, already contacted in June: all the reasons. A missed agreement would reopen other options, from Mancini to Palladino. Igor sacked after the last outburst in Rome: he pays for results, communication and dislikes in the dressing room. Tomorrow Brambilla on the bench.
Baroni knows how to change and improve Toro
Leao on fire. Allegri’s push: ‘He can score 20 goals.0
De Bruyne choc, Conte will welcome him back in February
Tottenham Hotspur have reportedly entered the race to sign Mason Greenwood from Marseille, according to a report from TeamTalk.
The North London club are believed to be seeking a “dynamic player” to strengthen their attacking options ahead of next season, and Greenwood has emerged as a serious candidate.
The former Manchester United forward has rediscovered his form in Ligue 1, becoming one of the best performers in French football.
However, Tottenham face competition from several major clubs, with Barcelona, Atletico Madrid, and West Ham United all expressing interest in the 24-year-old.
Greenwood’s career has experienced a dramatic turnaround since his move to Marseille.
After leaving Man United in 2024, the English forward has rebuilt his reputation and confidence through consistent performances in France.
So far this season, Greenwood has scored eight goals in 12 appearances across all competitions, continuing the fine form that saw him notch 22 goals in 36 games last campaign.
For Tottenham, Greenwood represents a potential game-changer. Manager Thomas Frank has made no secret of his desire to add pace, versatility, and unpredictability to his frontline.
Greenwood’s capacity to play across the front three, as a right winger, left forward, or even a secondary striker, matches perfectly with Frank’s tactical ideas.
However, Tottenham’s pursuit will not be easy. Barcelona and Atletico Madrid are both monitoring Greenwood’s progress, with the Spanish giants attracted by his age, adaptability, and proven productivity.
Meanwhile, West Ham United have also joined the chase. Some of the top clubs in the world are taking notice of his consistent performances and goal scoring record.
Greenwood could get the opportunity to prove himself in the Premier League after his Man United spell was cut short due to his controversial off the field activities.
Spurs could now give him another chance to play in the Premier League.
Report: Tottenham tracking 23-year-old attacker who finds their interest “very flattering”
The post Mason Greenwood set to be offered Premier League return by Man United rivals appeared first on CaughtOffside.
Tottenham could be heading for a change at the top of their attack when the January transfer window opens.
According to Football Insider, the club are considering replacing Dominic Solanke, who has struggled to find his form and fitness under manager Thomas Frank.
The England international was signed with big expectations following an impressive spell at Bournemouth, but injuries and inconsistency have prevented him from making the desired impact.
With Tottenham eager to stay competitive in both domestic and European competitions, the board are reportedly exploring forward options, with former Brentford star Ivan Toney among the top names linked.
Solanke’s move to Tottenham was intended to provide a focal point for the Spurs attack.
However, things haven’t gone as planned. Since joining the North London side, the 28-year-old striker has faced multiple fitness setbacks, limiting his rhythm and confidence in front of goal.
Even when available, Solanke has struggled to replicate his Bournemouth form, where his movement, pressing, and ability to bring teammates into play made him one of the Premier League’s most underrated forwards.
Frank has grown frustrated with the lack of consistency. The Dane has made it clear to Tottenham’s recruitment team that the squad needs a striker who can deliver immediately and adapt seamlessly to his high-intensity demands.
In that regard, Toney has emerged as a natural target. The Al Ahli attacker has played previously under Frank at Brentford and the manager and the attacker enjoyed a strong relationship.
Frank was able to get the best out of Toney and he feels that the attacker should return to England from the Middle East.
Should Tottenham bring in a new forward, it could pave the way for Solanke to seek regular playing time elsewhere.
With January fast approaching, Spurs will need to act decisively to strengthen their frontline and keep pace with their Premier League rivals.
Report: Chelsea to battle Spurs for midfielder causing “excitement” across Europe
The post Thomas Frank unimpressed with 28-year-old Tottenham ace with replacement being lined up appeared first on CaughtOffside.
Italian giants Juventus are eyeing a move for Chelsea right-back Malo Gusto, according to Calciomercato.
The French international, still only 22, has impressed in flashes since joining Chelsea from Lyon, but his limited game time and the resurgence of Reece James could open the door to a transfer.
The Juventus hierarchy are said to be long-time admirers of the young defender and see him as a potential solution to the club’s right-back dilemma, particularly after the Bianconeri missed out on signing Atlético Madrid’s Nahuel Molina last summer.
The Serie A side had been close to agreeing a deal for Molina during the last transfer window but were ultimately unable to complete the move due to financial and timing constraints.
Since then, the need for a dynamic full-back capable of contributing both defensively and offensively has remained a key priority.
Gusto, who is known for his explosive pace and overlapping runs, is exactly the kind of player Juventus are looking to sign.
At Chelsea, Gusto’s development has been somewhat stifled by the continued presence of club captain James, whose return to full fitness has reduced the Frenchman’s opportunities in the starting lineup.
His performances have not gone unnoticed in Europe, and Juventus are reportedly monitoring the situation closely, aware that Chelsea could be open to selling if the right offer arrives.
Juventus are also planning for the long term, seeking to lower the squad’s average age while maintaining quality.
The Turin-based club’s sporting directors are understood to have initiated contact with Gusto’s representatives to gauge his openness to a move, though no formal bid has yet been lodged.
Juventus’ admiration for the French defender is genuine, and with Molina still on Atlético Madrid’s books, Gusto represents a realistic and affordable alternative.
If James stays fit and Gusto continues to find minutes hard to come by, a move to Turin could appeal to all parties.
Report: Chelsea to battle Spurs for midfielder causing “excitement” across Europe
The post Champions League club eyeing move for Chelsea star struggling for playing time under Maresca appeared first on CaughtOffside.
Samsung has just shown off its first tri-fold smartphone ahead of its launch. Sounds confusing? Well, it kind of is. The company showed off the device sitting under glass during the K-Tech Showcase in Korea.
The K-Tech Showcase is kind of a side event of the APEC Summit, which is taking place October 31-November 1. The phone is tipped to get a full reveal during the APEC Summit, so we could be only days away from that happening. This appearance at the K-Tech Showcase certainly points in that direction.
In any case, the device is shown here, but only its front side, it could be reflective of a device that is coming soon. It’s shown in full unfolded, and fully folded formats. Several sources shared these images, and that includes Ice Universe and The Chosun. You can see the device in the gallery below.
When fully folded, the phone will feature a 6.5-inch display, allegedly, as shown above. When completely extended, you’ll get a 10-inch display to use. You’ll notice that a display camera hole is all unfolding levels, basically.
The phone will have a middle-of-the-road unfold state, too. It is expected to offer an 8-inch display in that state. So it’ll essentially be a tiny table when unfolded once.
This is what Samsung said to SamMobile, in a statement: “Samsung continues to advance innovative technologies, including next-generation form factors in the era of mobile AI, to deliver meaningful user experiences. The recent showcase reflects ongoing R&D efforts, and we plan to bring this next generation device to users within this year.”
From that statement, one might think Samsung is saying this is just a prototype, not the real thing. Well, it could be, though if the device is coming in only a couple of days, that doesn’t make much sense. Either way, Samsung once again confirmed that the real tri-fold announcement is right around the corner.
The post Samsung’s Mysterious Tri-Fold Phone Just Made Its First Public Appearance appeared first on Android Headlines.
The post PayPal Partners with OpenAI to Power Instant Checkout, AI Commerce in ChatGPT appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
PayPal has teamed up with OpenAI in a major move that could change how people shop and pay online.
Announced on October 28, the partnership will bring instant checkout and agentic commerce to ChatGPT, allowing users to discover and buy products directly through the chatbot, powered by PayPal’s trusted payment network.
Here’s why this is exciting.
According to a press release today, PayPal will adopt OpenAI’s Agentic Commerce Protocol (ACP), a new system designed to make online shopping faster and more interactive. Soon, ChatGPT users will be able to find products, choose payment methods, and check out instantly using PayPal without even leaving the chat.
For merchants, the change could be massive. PayPal plans to connect tens of millions of businesses, from small shops to global brands, to ChatGPT’s growing user base.
“Hundreds of millions of people turn to ChatGPT each week for help with everyday tasks, including finding products they love, and over 400 million use PayPal to shop,” said Alex Chriss, President and CEO of PayPal. “By partnering with OpenAI and adopting the Agentic Commerce Protocol, PayPal will power payments and commerce experiences that help people go from chat to checkout in just a few taps.”
This partnership reflects PayPal’s broader shift toward AI-powered commerce and digital innovation. The company has already launched its PYUSD stablecoin and built crypto custody services, showing its growing focus on the digital asset space.
While the announcement didn’t directly mention crypto, this kind of AI-driven payments system could easily become a bridge between fiat and digital currencies in the future.
If PayPal’s ACP platform eventually supports blockchain-based settlements, it could boost the use of PYUSD and other regulated stablecoins in real-world transactions.
Also Read: What Can You Actually Buy With Crypto in 2025?
“Agentic Commerce” or AI-powered buying and selling could eventually go beyond simple checkouts. With time, it might connect with smart contracts, tokenized assets, or digital identity systems.
And as history shows, every major AI and payments announcement tends to boost interest in related crypto sectors.
Tokens tied to AI, payments, and stablecoins – like FET, AGIX, OCEAN, XRP, XLM, and PYUSD – could all see renewed investor attention.
PayPal’s latest move with OpenAI is exciting and a strong signal that shows us where digital commerce is headed.
The post Metaplanet Announces ¥75B Share Repurchase Program to Strengthen Bitcoin Strategy appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
Metaplanet, widely known as “Japan’s MicroStrategy”, has taken a major step forward in its long-term strategy by launching a 75 billion JPY share repurchase program.
This comes after the company faced a setback with a decline in its mNAV, and aims to make better use of capital and boost returns for shareholders.
Metaplanet has established a share repurchase program to enhance capital efficiency and maximize BTC Yield. The Board also approved a credit facility to enable flexible execution as part of the company’s capital allocation strategy. https://t.co/zucPBrIqOQ
— Simon Gerovich (@gerovich) October 28, 2025
In its latest disclosure, Metaplanet noted that recent market volatility and a decline in its mNAV have led to its stock being undervalued.
The mNAV compares the company’s enterprise value to the market value of its Bitcoin holdings. When it falls below 1.0x, the company’s shares are seen as trading below their fair value based on BTC reserves.
To address this, Metaplanet launched a capital management plan designed to maximize BTC yield and improve capital efficiency.
Metaplanet’s stock is currently trading at 499 JPY, up 2.5% over the past day and roughly 18% over the last five days. Its mNAV has also recovered to 1.03 as of the time of writing.
The buyback program will cover up to 150 million common shares, representing about 13.13% of its total outstanding shares, excluding treasury shares. It will run from October 29, 2025, to October 28, 2026 and buybacks will be conducted through purchases on the Tokyo Stock Exchange under a discretionary trading agreement.
In order to give the company more flexibility in carrying out the repurchase program, the board has also approved a credit facility with a borrowing limit of up to USD 500 million (around JPY 76.4 billion).
This allows the company to secure funds using its Bitcoin holdings as collateral whenever needed. The funds raised could be used for additional Bitcoin purchases, investments in its Bitcoin Income business, or share buybacks.
The credit line also plays a major role in the Company’s financial strategy and is expected to serve as bridge financing ahead of its planned issuance of preference shares.
Metaplanet has also created a new Capital Allocation Policy designed to maximize sustainable value creation. It will be guided by three fundamental principles.
Metaplanet plans to actively utilize preferred shares, to strengthen BTC yield and enhance long-term shareholder value. It will avoid new issuances when mNAV is below 1.0x, and pursue them only when mNAV exceeds 1.0x and valuations and strategic conditions clearly support long-term shareholder value.
And if mNAV falls below 1.0x, the Company will actively consider share buybacks to enhance BTC yield and shareholder value.
It also noted that the funding sources for share repurchases may include cash reserves, funds raised from preferred share issuances, credit facilities, or income generated by its Bitcoin-related business operations.
Since April 2025, the company has expanded its Bitcoin Treasury Strategy, now holding 30,823 BTC, making it the fourth-largest public Bitcoin holder globally and the largest in Asia.
The company is also committed to its long-term goal of acquiring 210,000 BTC by the end of 2027.
Despite what appears to have been a setback, Metaplanet continues to show strong conviction in Bitcoin’s long-term potential.
The post Japan’s Metaplanet Plan $500M Share Buyback Program, Stock Jumps 2.3% appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
Japan’s leading Bitcoin treasury company, Metaplanet, has announced a bold plan to buy back 13.15% of its outstanding shares. The firm has also secured a massive $500 million credit facility backed by Bitcoin, signaling a deep commitment to integrating digital assets into its corporate growth strategy.
According to the company’s official filing, it will buy back up to 150 million common shares, equal to 13.13% of its total shares (excluding treasury stock). The program will run through October 28, 2026, and the company can use its new credit facility for both share repurchases and additional Bitcoin purchases.
The buyback, supported by a $500 million credit line, shows the company’s confidence in its long-term growth and strong balance sheet.
*Notice Regarding the Establishment of Share Repurchase Program* pic.twitter.com/GBNY8fJfv4
— Metaplanet Inc. (@Metaplanet_JP) October 28, 2025
The company said the goal is to make capital use more efficient and respond to the recent drop in its market-to-net-asset value (mNAV), which compares the market value of the company’s Bitcoin holdings to its overall value.
Metaplanet’s aggressive Bitcoin-focused strategy stands out in the Japanese and global investment landscape. Currently, Metaplanet holds 30,823 BTC, valued at approximately $3.5 billion.
The firm noted that its stock price often trades below the actual value of its Bitcoin holdings, creating an opportunity to increase its “BTC yield per share.”
The company has highlighted its commitment to increasing its Bitcoin holdings, aiming for an ultimate target of holding 210,000 BTC, equal to 1% of the eventual 21 million Bitcoin supply, by 2027.
Following the announcement, Metaplanet’s stock climbed 2.3%, closing at 499 yen. The rally reflects renewed investor optimism fueled by expectations that reduced share supply and an injection of financial flexibility will lift per-share value.
Metaplanet’s buyback initiative signals a broader shift: public companies are increasingly viewing digital assets not just as speculative holdings, but as foundational drivers for capital strategy and market positioning
There's little doubt that The Matrix franchise is criminally underserved when it comes to videogame adaptations, despite being theoretically a perfect fit for the medium. In the 26 years since the original movie's theatrical debut, we only got two decent games: 2003's single player action/adventure game Enter the Matrix and 2005's MMORPG The Matrix Online. More recently, the interactive experience The Matrix Awakens was released in late 2021, but it was really just a tech demo for Unreal Engine 5 and a tease at the level of quality that gaming fans of the IP never really got to fully experience. […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/the-matrix-creators-wanted-kojima-make-a-game-on-the-ip-konami-refused/
Today at GTC 2025, NVIDIA's CEO, Jensen Huang, will deliver the opening keynote live from Washington, US, for the first time. NVIDIA GTC Comes To Washington, D.C, US: CEO Jensen Huang To Talk About Next Chapter of AI, Watch It Live Here NVIDIA's GTC 2025 is just a few hours away, and while you might be wondering, didn't GTC already happen a few months back? Well, it should be mentioned that while GTC used to be a one-time per annum affair in the past, the recent growth and success have turned NVIDIA's GTC into more of a quarterly event. As […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/watch-nvidia-gtc-2025-ceo-jensen-huang-keynote-live-washington-us/
The iPhone 17 lineup is expected to be Apple’s last to ship with Qualcomm’s 5G modems as the company prepares its transition to ship all of its iPhone 18 models with the C2 baseband chip. This in-house solution was said to be in development shortly after the iPhone 16e was announced, and while we will witness its materialization in 2026, a new report states that, unlike other Apple chipsets like the A20 and A20 Pro, it will not leverage TSMC’s newest 2nm process, but a lithography that is a couple of generations old. The C2 5G modem will reportedly be mass […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/apple-c2-to-be-mass-produced-on-older-tsmc-process-says-report/
A team of modders is working on Bully Online, a modification for the PC version of Bully: Scholarship Edition that promises to allow players to roam the grounds of Bullworth Academy and the nearby town with their friends. The Wii and Xbox 360 versions of Scholarship Edition did have a multiplayer mode, but it was limited to two players and only allowed them to face off in the class minigames. According to community creator SWEGTA, Bully Online promises much more, including free roam support, solo and group minigames, and even a role-playing system. They were able to add a 'fully […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/bully-online-mod-promises-let-you-roam-rockstars-classic-with-friends/
This morning, indie Chinese developer ChillyRoom unveiled Loulan: The Cursed Sand, one of the games funded through the PlayStation China Hero Project. The game is a hack 'n' slash action RPG viewed from a Diablo-like camera. The setting is the ancient Silk Road, in China's Western Regions. Loulan: The Cursed Sand tells the tragic love story of an exiled royal guard who returns to the titular fallen kingdom amidst the chaos of war in search of his beloved princess. Players will step into the game as the skeletal warrior known as 'The Cursed Sand', mastering the power of sand as […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/loulan-the-cursed-sand-chinese-hack-n-slash-arpg/
Samsung looks to be all set to announce its first triple-folding smartphone, the Galaxy Z TriFold, and even though the device is expected to be limited to a few markets, it was high time that we saw smartphones gravitate to a new form factor. Just before the official announcement happens, a series of images provides a first look at the Galaxy Z TriFold, showing a dual-infolding structure that can transform into a large-screen tablet. The Galaxy Z TriFold was on display at the Samsung booth at the K-Tech Showcase, with one report stating that the prototype did not display any […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/samsung-galaxy-z-trifold-first-look-image-gallery/
There’s been no shortage of rumors surrounding Samsung’s upcoming Galaxy S26 series, with the latest one suggesting a potential delay in its launch. Now, a new leak indicates that the lineup could debut with an Exynos connectivity chip. A new Samsung Exynos S6568 chipset has been listed on the Bluetooth qualified products website. It has been described as a Bluetooth and Wi-Fi companion chip with Bluetooth 6.1 support that’s meant to be used with an Exynos SoC. No other details are available at the moment, but it is likely that the Galaxy S26 lineup could use the S6568 companion...
Earlier this month, Motorola listed the X70 Air on the Lenovo China website, but did not reveal pricing or availability details. The company has now confirmed the pricing of its new ‘Air’ phone. The Moto X70 Air is priced at CNY 2,399 ($340) for the 12GB/256GB variant, whereas the 12GB/512GB option will cost you CNY 2,699 ($380). The phone is available in Bronze Green, Gadget Gray, and Lily Pad colors. Pre-orders for the phone are currently live on the Lenovo China website, with sales set to start on October 31. The Moto X70 Air is 5.99mm thin and weighs just 159g. It is powered...
Multiple crypto exchange-traded funds (ETFs) are set to launch this week despite the government shutdown, with investment products based on Solana (SOL), Litecoin (LTC), and Hedera (HBAR) seemingly ready to start trading as soon as Tuesday.
On Sunday night, Nate Geraci affirmed that the next two weeks will be key for the long-awaited spot crypto-based ETFs as Solana, XRP, LTC, and other ETF filings are “all lined up & ready for launch.”
Similarly, Bitwise CEO, Hunter Horsley, hinted that this week would be a “Big week,” suggesting progress related to its Solana Staking ETF. It’s worth noting that the crypto community has been awaiting the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)’s approval of the investment products following the numerous ETF applications filed over the past few months.
Between August and September, the regulatory agency postponed the decision deadline of most applications by two months, pushing back the key dates to mid-October and mid-November. However, the government’s shutdown, which started on October 1, reduced the odds of the products receiving a green line during the expected timeline.
On Monday morning, ETF expert Erich Balchunas reported that multiple issuers were looking to launch their crypto-based ETFs this week, despite the government shutdown. According to the Bloomberg analyst, Canary Capital had filed 8-A forms for its spot Litecoin and Hedera ETFs, while Bitwise had filed one for its Solana Staking ETF.
“These are the ones rumored to be poss looking to launch (along w Grayscale solana) this week despite shutdown. Not a done deal but clearly preparations being made. Stay tuned,” Balchunas stated.
Later, Balchunas confirmed the reports that the exchange had posted listing notices for Bitwise’s Solana Staking ETF, and Canary’s LTC and HBAR ETFs to launch on October 28, while Grayscale’s Solana trust is set to convert on Wednesday. “Assuming there’s not some last min SEC intervention, looks like this is happening,” the analyst added.
Crypto Journalist Eleanor Terret also shared the news, citing Canary’s CEO, Steven McClurg, who confirmed that the Canary spot HBAR and LTC ETFs will begin trading on Nasdaq on Tuesday.
“Litecoin and Hedera are the next two token ETFs to go effective after Ethereum,” McClurg told the journalist in a statement. “We look forward to launching tomorrow.”
Terret explained that despite the government shutdown, the launch is possible because “the operation of law does not always actually require an open government.”
According to the post, the 8-A forms are “just as important” as the S-1s filings: the former formally registers ETF shares under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, while the latter registers the investment products under the Securities Exchange Act of 1933.
After NYSE certified all the 8-A filings for the ETFs above on Monday, shares can start trading, Terret affirmed, adding:
“Here’s the key: The issuers included language in their amended S-1s that lets them automatically go effective 20 days after filing. Typically, issuers delay S-1s until the SEC takes them effective, but the legal default is that the S-1 goes automatically effective without SEC intervention. That means the agency doesn’t need to approve them manually and the filings can go live on their own, even during the shutdown. So, long story short, all the legal boxes are checked and these ETFs are on track for launch.”
Despite facing criticism for lagging behind the United States in creating a more accommodating environment for cryptocurrency growth and adoption, China reaffirmed its stringent stance on crypto once again this week.
Authorities issued warnings about the alleged risks posed by stablecoins, particularly amid concerns that the US may have solidified its dollar dominance through these digital assets.
According to local media reports, Pan Gongsheng, governor of the People’s Bank of China, announced plans to expand the use of the country’s central bank digital currency (CBDC), known as the “e-CNY.”
He remarked, “[Stablecoins] are still in their early stages of development,” emphasizing that financial regulators globally remain cautious about these assets, which are typically pegged to other currencies.
In the United States, however, Trump’s policies toward digital assets have resulted in the passage of the GENIUS Act, as the first crypto bill aimed at laying the framework for the adoption of these dollar-pegged cryptocurrencies.
Yet, Pan highlighted that stablecoins currently fail to meet essential requirements such as customer identification and anti-money laundering (AML) measures, which could allegedly exacerbate gaps in global financial regulation.
He expressed concern that these issues foster a “speculative market atmosphere,” increasing vulnerabilities in the global financial system and affecting the monetary sovereignty of less developed economies.
The central bank plans to collaborate with law enforcement to continue cracking down on domestic operations and speculation related to crypto. “The policies and measures implemented since 2017 to address risks associated with virtual currencies remain in effect,” he stated.
Despite China’s continuous crypto crackdown, research on stablecoins is progressing within China. The country’s largest government-backed research fund recently opened applications for studies focused on stablecoins and their cross-border monitoring systems, offering grants ranging from 200,000 yuan (approximately $28,083) to 300,000 yuan ($42,126).
The central bank also plans to optimize the positioning of the digital yuan, allowing more commercial banks to participate in the pilot program that has been running in over two dozen cities since 2019, accumulating a transaction value exceeding 14 trillion yuan.
Zhu Hexin, director of the State Administration of Foreign Exchange, indicated that nine new policy measures would soon be introduced to promote trade innovation and development, with the potential to bring positive developments for the growth of the crypto ecosystem in the Asian country.
Wu Qing, chairman of the China Securities Regulatory Commission, also hinted at the possibility of such measures, stating that the regulator would review listing standards on the Shenzhen Stock Exchange’s ChiNext board to better align with the characteristics of emerging fields and future industries.
Featured image from DALL-E, chart from TradingView.com
Data shows the Bitcoin Fear & Greed Index has surged back into the neutral zone after the recovery rally in the cryptocurrency’s price.
The “Fear & Greed Index” refers to an indicator created by Alternative that measures the average sentiment present among traders in the Bitcoin and wider cryptocurrency markets. The metric uses the data of the following five factors to determine the investor mentality: trading volume, market cap dominance, volatility, social media sentiment, and Google Trends.
The index uses a numerical scale running from zero to hundred for representing this sentiment. All values above 53 correspond to greed among the investors, while those below 47 to fear. The region between the two cutoffs naturally corresponds to a net neutral mentality.
Now, here is how the current Bitcoin market sentiment is like, according to the Fear & Greed Index:
As is visible above, the indicator has a value of 51, which suggests the trader sentiment is almost exactly in the balance right now. This is a notable change in market mood compared to just a few days ago.
As displayed in the chart, the Fear & Greed Index was inside the fear zone during the past few days. The despair among the traders was a result of the bearish price action that BTC had recently faced.
At one point, the indicator even fell to a low of 22, reflecting a state of “extreme fear.” This zone, which occurs below 25, corresponds to investors being the most bearish toward the market. There is a similar region for the greed side as well, called the “extreme greed,” situated above 75.
Historically, the extreme sentiments have been quite significant for Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies, as they are where major tops and bottoms have tended to form. The relationship has been an inverse one, however, meaning extreme fear is where bottoms form, while extreme greed facilitates tops.
Since the extreme fear low earlier in the month, BTC has been on the way up, a potential indication that the contrarian signal of the sentiment may once again be in action.
The cryptocurrency has extended its recovery in a sharp manner during the last couple of days, which may be a potential reason why the Fear & Greed Index has surged back to the neutral territory now.
Though, for now, Bitcoin traders are still undecided on whether bullish action will follow next. It now remains to be seen whether they will embrace greed, or continue to be hesitant about the recovery.
At the time of writing, Bitcoin is floating around $114,900, up 3.6% over the last seven days.
Dogecoin struggled to rise above $0.210 and corrected some gains against the US Dollar. DOGE is now consolidating and might decline below $0.1980.
Dogecoin price started a fresh increase after it settled above $0.1920, like Bitcoin and Ethereum. DOGE climbed above the $0.20 resistance to enter a positive zone.
The bulls were able to push the price above $0.2020 and $0.2050. A high was formed at $0.2094 and the price is now correcting gains. There was a move below the 23.6% Fib retracement level of the upward move from the $0.1843 swing low to the $0.2094 high.
Besides, there was a break below a contracting triangle with support at $0.20 on the hourly chart of the DOGE/USD pair. Dogecoin price is now trading below the $0.20 level and the 100-hourly simple moving average.
If there is another increase, immediate resistance on the upside is near the $0.2020 level. The first major resistance for the bulls could be near the $0.2050 level. The next major resistance is near the $0.210 level. A close above the $0.210 resistance might send the price toward $0.2150. Any more gains might send the price toward $0.2250. The next major stop for the bulls might be $0.2320.
If DOGE’s price fails to climb above the $0.2020 level, it could start a downside correction. Initial support on the downside is near the $0.1970 level and the 50% Fib retracement level of the upward move from the $0.1843 swing low to the $0.2094 high. The next major support is near the $0.1935 level.
The main support sits at $0.190. If there is a downside break below the $0.190 support, the price could decline further. In the stated case, the price might slide toward the $0.1840 level or even $0.1780 in the near term.
Technical Indicators
Hourly MACD – The MACD for DOGE/USD is now gaining momentum in the bearish zone.
Hourly RSI (Relative Strength Index) – The RSI for DOGE/USD is now below the 50 level.
Major Support Levels – $0.1970 and $0.1935.
Major Resistance Levels – $0.2020 and $0.2050.
What if the next big crypto moonshot is already taking off while most investors are still watching from the sidelines? The search for the top crypto to buy in 2025 is heating up as traders hunt for the next token that could turn a modest investment into life-changing gains.
Everyone wants to be early. The meme culture has turned investing into a mix of hype, humor, and smart tokenomics. Ethereum and BNB are established powerhouses with real updates that keep them relevant, but MoonBull’s presale has caught serious attention. It is pulling in numbers and building energy faster than many expected.
MoonBull ($MOBU) has quickly become the talk of the town for investors searching for the top crypto to buy in 2025. Built on Ethereum, MoonBull combines meme power with real mechanics designed for fairness, transparency, and community growth. It automatically rewards holders, adds liquidity with every transaction, and burns a portion to increase scarcity. That balance creates a system where every transaction strengthens the ecosystem.
Two features make MoonBull stand out. First, it has already passed its audit, and liquidity is locked for long-term trust. That means traders can join without worrying about sudden rug pulls. Second, by Stage 12 of its 23-stage presale, MoonBull will activate community voting. Holders will be able to decide on future campaigns, surprise burns, and marketing pushes. It turns investors into decision-makers, a rarity for a meme coin.
MoonBull’s presale is currently in its 5th stage, priced at $0.00006584, with more than $500,000 already raised and over 1,500 holders onboard. The current ROI from Stage 5 to the listing price of $0.00616 stands above 9,200%, while early supporters have already seen gains of 163.36%. The next price surge is projected at around 27.40%, indicating that each stage is becoming more valuable as momentum builds.
An investment of $20,000 right now would secure 303,766,707.17 MOBU and could be worth about $1,871,202.92 once the listing price hits $0.00616. MoonBull’s mix of staking rewards, referrals, and community voting is making it one of the most hyped tokens in 2025. For anyone looking for the top crypto to buy in 2025, this is where excitement meets opportunity.
Ethereum continues to dominate headlines as one of the top crypto to buy in 2025. Recent updates show renewed whale accumulation, with institutional wallets increasing holdings as price momentum builds. Founder Vitalik Buterin recently warned that blockchain security concerns extend beyond the chain itself, calling for stronger protection for bridges and off-chain systems. His comments reignited debate about network resilience and next-gen infrastructure.
ETH is trading near $4,000, and analysts see a breakout toward $4,550. If resistance breaks, price targets between $5,000 and $7,000 are on the table. Layer-2 scaling, reduced gas fees, and new validator incentives continue to drive adoption. Technical analysts say ETH’s setup looks ready for another run if market sentiment holds..
BNB is back in the news and still one of the top crypto to buy in 2025 after a sudden rally tied to real-world headlines. The token jumped 5 percent after Donald Trump publicly defended the pardon of Binance founder Changpeng Zhao, sparking optimism and heavy buying across exchanges. The renewed confidence helped BNB reclaim the $1,100 mark.
In September 2025, BNB also logged a new all-time high near $1,080, a 70% gain this year. Analysts credit the surge to rising on-chain activity, regulatory clarity, and institutional adoption. The BNB Chain’s expanding ecosystem continues to attract developers, keeping demand high. For investors looking for steady performance with room to grow, BNB remains a staple in any list of the top crypto to buy in 2025.
MoonBull, Ethereum, and BNB each bring something unique to the table. MoonBull offers massive upside with its presale, staking, and community mechanics. Ethereum provides long-term reliability and ecosystem dominance. BNB combines proven adoption with consistent network growth.
Based on research and market trends, MoonBull stands out as the project generating the most excitement. Ethereum and BNB remain strong plays, but MoonBull’s early momentum and reward system give it a different kind of energy. Its presale is live right now, numbers are climbing, and the early window is closing fast. Those looking for the top crypto to buy in 2025 shouldn’t wait until it’s already flying.
For More Information:
Website: Visit the Official MOBU Website
Telegram: Join the MOBU Telegram Channel
Twitter: Follow MOBU ON X (Formerly Twitter)
MoonBull is currently one of the strongest meme coins to watch. It combines staking, referrals, and governance to give holders both fun and function.
Check official project websites, verified communities, and whitepapers. Look for features like locked liquidity and completed audits.
Yes. When built with real mechanics and transparency, meme coins can mature into strong communities with real value.
MoonBull leads current presales with over $500,000 raised, strong tokenomics, and high staking yields.
Review audits, liquidity locks, staking, and referral incentives. MoonBull checks all these boxes and rewards both referrers and buyers.
MoonBull, Ethereum, and BNB headline the list of top crypto to buy in 2025. MoonBull’s presale, staking, and referral mechanics make it a community favorite. Ethereum continues leading smart contracts, and BNB maintains strong utility and adoption. Each coin serves a different investor profile, but MoonBull’s early momentum gives it an edge for those chasing maximum upside.
Read More: Just Days Left for 27.40% Surge as MoonBull Presale Hits $500K, While ETH and BNB Rally Ahead of Q4 as Top Cryptos to Buy in 2025">Just Days Left for 27.40% Surge as MoonBull Presale Hits $500K, While ETH and BNB Rally Ahead of Q4 as Top Cryptos to Buy in 2025
Cardano founder Charles Hoskinson recently projected where Cardano would be by 2030, centering around adoption and market penetration. Hoskinson shared this in his conversation with pundit Sujal Jethwani, identifying where Cardano could be in the next five years and what the ecosystem needs to work on to become more competitive.
Exclusive: More than 6,000 children will be hit by shutdown after Labour said route was being manipulated by people-smuggling gangs
© PA
Former Chelsea striker and his professional partner Lauren Oakley were voted off the competition on Sunday
© BBC
The footage of the exchange has been widely circulated on social media
© PA Archive
© Eric Thayer/Getty Images
A notable transformation is currently being observed within the Japanese travel landscape. An unmistakable trend towards affordable, alternative overnight travel options has been established, a movement largely being driven by the persistent increase in hotel prices and a recognized deficit in the country’s room supply. In this environment, the interest of cost-conscious travelers has been successfully captured by integrated travel solutions, where transportation also serves as lodging. Consequently, the adoption of extended-distance ferries, specialized buses, and the use of camper vans for overnight stays is rapidly gaining momentum throughout Japan. The travel industry is responding with agility, ensuring that a variety of innovative products and services are being developed and introduced to meet this expanding demand.
The current shift in traveler preference is fundamentally linked to mounting financial pressures within the traditional hospitality sector. Research compiled by Tokyo Shoko Research has clearly illustrated a market where even the most affordable options are being subjected to price inflation. A comprehensive survey of the 15 main budget hotel brands indicated that a consistent shortage of available rooms nationwide is a primary factor pushing costs upwards. By March of the current year, it was determined that the average unit price for lodging had undergone a significant year-on-year increase, rising by 12.6 per cent to reach a figure of 16,679 yen (equivalent to approximately US$109).
Among the integrated travel solutions seeing renewed interest, overnight ferry services have been positioned as a highly attractive option. These maritime routes offer a compelling alternative by providing travelers with a convenient means of long-distance transport while simultaneously delivering a sheltered space for sleeping. A prominent example of this strategic pivot has been established by the Jumbo Ferry line. A specific overnight route, linking the city of Takamatsu in Shikoku to the major port of Kobe, was strategically introduced to capitalize on the heightened attention surrounding Expo 2025 being hosted in nearby Osaka.
Innovation on land routes is being driven by the introduction of specialized bus services that dramatically elevate the standards of overnight travel comfort. For decades, night buses have been utilized by budget-conscious travelers, but a significant upgrade to the experience is now being implemented. The transport operator Kochi Ekimae Kanko is spearheading this improvement by announcing the forthcoming launch of Japan’s first overnight bus service to feature lie-flat seats.
The growing popularity of mobile accommodations is being affirmed by the increasing adoption of camper vans by both domestic and international visitors. This mode of travel offers unparalleled flexibility and cost control, as accommodation expenses are significantly reduced or eliminated entirely. In recognition of this mounting trend, even established commercial enterprises are adapting their services to support the self-contained traveler.
A notable pilot programme was initiated in July by the convenience store chain Lawson. This initiative involves the temporary designation of parking spaces at seven of its stores in Chiba Prefecture for use as overnight car camping sites. For a nominal nightly fee of 3,000 yen, travelers are permitted to park their vehicles and are granted essential access to the store’s toilet facilities and electricity hookups. This type of corporate support for vehicular overnight stays is a clear indication that the market for flexible, vehicle-based travel is maturing. Such programs greatly enhance the viability of camper van and recreational vehicle travel, bridging the gap between informal roadside parking and more structured, expensive campsites. The accessibility and convenience provided by a network of well-located service stops are considered vital to sustaining this growth segment.
Underpinning the successful expansion of vehicular overnight travel is the extensive and increasingly vital network of michi no eki, or roadside rest areas. These facilities are integral to the travel infrastructure, offering more than just basic rest stops. They are consistently being developed and improved to provide a diverse array of services, including dedicated parking, clean restrooms, tourist information, and often a selection of eateries and shops. In many instances, the sites are strategically located to offer panoramic viewpoints or access to local attractions, such as natural hot springs.
The current trajectory of travel in Japan is being decisively shaped by market economics and the innovative responses of service providers. A clear and irreversible shift toward integrated, affordable, and flexible travel solutions is being executed. As hotel prices continue their ascent, the appeal of comfortable overnight travel options such as ferries, lie-flat buses, and organized camper vans is solidified. This movement is a testament to the resilience and adaptability of the Japanese travel industry, ensuring that the country remains accessible and welcoming to all, regardless of budgetary constraints. The market is effectively adapting, ensuring that the spirit of exploration is being served by a new generation of cost-efficient and experience-rich travel models.
The post Overnight Ferries And Lie-Flat Buses Emerge As Affordable Alternatives To Innovative Overnight Transit Amid Soaring Hotel Costs In Japan appeared first on Travel And Tour World.European cities are starting to respond to the consequences of overtourism. Overtourism is the root of issues such as environmental degradation, crowded streets, and increased cost of living. The challenge to such new tourist policies is the very sensitive harmonization of the preservation and the sustainability of the locals’ health. The policies include, but are not limited to, the discouragement of short-term rentals, the promotion of green travel modes, and the distribution of tourists to relatively unvisited areas. These practices are aimed at protecting the cities’ cultural legacy grand and accessible to future generations.
As tourism numbers continue to surge beyond pre-pandemic levels, local governments across Europe are stepping up efforts to rethink the way cities manage travel. From Venice to Barcelona, the call for a sustainable tourism model has never been louder, emphasizing the need to balance the desires of travelers with the wellbeing of residents and the preservation of local cultures.
Tourism’s Rapid Growth
Europe’s tourism industry has witnessed an impressive recovery. In the first half of 2025, nearly 340 million international tourists visited the continent, a 4% increase compared to 2024, and a 7% rise over pre-pandemic levels. According to the United Nations Tourism Organization (UN Tourism), this upward trend reflects a burgeoning post-pandemic enthusiasm for European destinations.
Despite these record-breaking statistics, the tourism boom has sparked growing concerns about the strain on cities, economies, and communities. Many destinations are grappling with the realities of overtourism—when a destination’s tourism capacity exceeds its ability to accommodate visitors. Cities like Amsterdam, Venice, and Athens are facing rising rents, traffic congestion, pollution, and the degradation of historic neighborhoods. Local governments are now seeking sustainable strategies that benefit both residents and visitors while preserving the cultural identity of their cities.
The Price of Popularity
The debate over overtourism is not a new one, but 2025 has highlighted just how challenging it is to maintain a city’s appeal without sacrificing its essence. Iconic destinations like Venice, which introduced a fee for day visitors earlier this year, are struggling to balance tourism with preservation efforts. Similarly, Barcelona has imposed limits on short-term rental licenses, while Lisbon has established curfews in nightlife districts. In Amsterdam, authorities have even banned the construction of new hotels to prevent overcrowding in the already bustling city.
These steps signal a growing desire to manage visitor numbers more strategically, ensuring that tourism does not undermine the quality of life for residents or degrade the experience for travelers.
Towards Balanced Tourism
At the Global Tourism Forum 2025, policymakers and industry leaders gathered to discuss how Europe’s tourism model needs to evolve by 2050 to protect its cities, economies, and communities. The forum introduced the concept of “balanced tourism”—an approach that integrates tourism management into broader city planning, including transportation, housing, and business strategies. The goal is to ensure that cities remain livable while still being attractive to travelers.
According to Eurocities, a network of more than 200 major European cities, tourism should not just be measured by visitor numbers. Urban tourism plans need to align with long-term development goals, including limiting short-term rentals, improving public transit, and distributing tourism across less crowded neighborhoods. Such initiatives will help preserve the integrity of cultural landmarks and foster a sustainable relationship between local communities and the tourism sector.
A Growing Paradox
Tourism remains one of Europe’s most important economic drivers. In 2024, international tourism generated $1.73 trillion in revenue, a 14% increase compared to pre-pandemic figures. Countries like France and Spain saw a rise of 9% and 8% in tourism revenue, respectively. However, this economic boost comes with a price: inflation. In 2025, tourism inflation remained high at 6.8%, above the overall inflation rate of 4.3%.
For many travelers, the rising costs of transportation and accommodation have become a significant barrier. With prices climbing, tourists are opting for shorter stays, traveling closer to home, or reducing their spending. While the tourism sector has shown resilience, concerns about affordability continue to shape travel decisions.
Europe’s First Tourism Strategy
To address these challenges, the European Commission is developing its first-ever common strategy for sustainable tourism, which is set to launch in early 2026. This strategy aims to make the tourism sector more competitive, adaptable, and environmentally responsible. Key objectives include managing overcrowding, promoting eco-friendly travel, fostering digital innovation, and improving working conditions within the tourism industry.
Although tourism policy remains under national control, the European Commission is encouraging cities to share best practices and adopt sustainability standards. This collaborative effort will help the EU align its tourism goals with the European Green Deal, which focuses on promoting environmental sustainability across various sectors.
The Role of the New Generation
A shift in traveler preferences is helping pave the way for more sustainable tourism practices. Generation Z and millennials—now the largest group of international travelers—are increasingly prioritizing sustainability, authenticity, and digital convenience. According to UN Tourism data, younger travelers are more likely to choose eco-friendly accommodations, utilize public transportation, and avoid overcrowded tourist hotspots.
Cities such as Copenhagen and Ljubljana have capitalized on these preferences by positioning themselves as green destinations. These cities are known for their cycling networks, renewable energy use, and zero-waste tourism initiatives, earning accolades for their sustainability practices. This growing demand for greener travel options highlights the potential for cities to attract a new generation of environmentally conscious tourists.
Economic Pressures and Challenges Ahead
Despite the increasing emphasis on sustainability, the economic reality for many European cities remains complex. Tourism accounts for approximately 10% of the European Union’s GDP and provides over 22 million jobs. For smaller economies, particularly those in Southern Europe, tourism is a vital source of income. As such, it is challenging to slow the growth of this sector without risking significant economic repercussions.
The UN Tourism Confidence Index for late 2025 reflects a cautiously optimistic outlook, with experts anticipating stronger results for the remainder of the year. However, inflation and geopolitical tensions continue to be significant concerns that may affect future growth.
From Overtourism to Smart Tourism
As European cities wrestle with the effects of overtourism, many are turning to technology for solutions. “Smart tourism” initiatives are gaining traction across the continent, using digital tools to track visitor traffic, manage crowd density, and optimize transport systems. In Barcelona, sensors and mobile apps provide real-time data that help authorities adjust transport routes and manage congestion. Venice has introduced digital ticketing systems to regulate access to certain areas during peak tourist seasons.
Some cities are also experimenting with reward programs that incentivize sustainable behaviors, such as offering discounts for using public transport or visiting less crowded areas. Additionally, carbon-neutral travel passes and tiered pricing systems that make peak-season travel more expensive are being tested as ways to manage demand and reduce the environmental impact of tourism.
What It Means for Travelers
The shift towards sustainable tourism means that travelers may face new restrictions and rules in the near future. Popular European destinations could implement visitor caps, introduce environmental fees, or require digital permits to manage overcrowding. Cities like Venice have already begun charging day visitors a fee, and other destinations may follow suit with similar policies.
While these measures could make travel more expensive or restrictive, they also have the potential to enhance the quality of the travel experience. Fewer crowds, cleaner streets, and better infrastructure could lead to a more enjoyable and sustainable visit. For residents, these changes could result in lower noise levels, more affordable housing, and a higher quality of life.
Looking Ahead to 2050
By 2050, European cities hope to have achieved a sustainable tourism model that balances economic growth, social inclusion, and environmental protection. The key to this vision is attracting “the right kind” of visitors—those who value sustainability and respect local cultures. Investing in green transportation options, ensuring local communities have a voice in tourism decisions, and promoting eco-friendly practices will be critical to achieving this vision.
New sustainable tourism policies are being issued across Europe to mitigate overtourism, protect the locals, and safeguard the culture and heritage for the eco-conscious generations to come.
If these policies are effective, there will be a dramatic reorientation in the global tourism paradigm for Europe—no longer will the focus be entirely on tourism, but on the health and wellbeing of the people, the environment, and the continent’s future. As Europe faces the biggest challenge since the pandemic, these cities are unequivocally stating that while Europe is still “open for business,” it is “not at any cost.”
The post As European Cities Struggle With The Effects Of Overtourism, New Sustainable Tourism Policies Are Being Implemented To Protect Local Communities And Preserve Cultural Heritage For Future Generations appeared first on Travel And Tour World.China’s Henan Province capital, Zhengzhou, is emerging as a model for combining cultural preservation and urban renewal. More than 300 city officials, mayors, and academics from around the globe attended the city’s 2025 International Mayor’s Forum on Tourism and Global Mayors Dialogue, which took place from October 22 to 25, 2025. The topic of discussion at these forums was “Preserving the Cultural Legacy of Ancient Capitals and Driving Urban Renewal”. The occasion highlighted Zhengzhou’s special initiatives to make sure that its rich cultural legacy is not sacrificed in the name of urban growth.
A Vision for Sustainable Urban Growth
The city of Zhengzhou has adopted an innovative approach to urban planning, placing archaeological discovery before construction. This method, known as the “archaeology first, construction later” reform, ensures that the city’s cultural and historical sites are protected amidst its rapid urban development. This reform aims to balance the need for modern infrastructure with the preservation of historical legacies.
The integration of cultural heritage with contemporary urban life is particularly evident in projects like the Shang City Archaeological Site Park and the Fuminli Cultural Block. These projects are designed to harmoniously merge ancient relics with modern spaces, fostering an environment where the past and the present coexist. The Shang City Archaeological Site Park, for example, is a vast open-air museum where visitors can walk through history while enjoying the amenities of modern-day Zhengzhou. This careful integration has made Zhengzhou a shining example of sustainable urban development.
Global Recognition for Zhengzhou’s Cultural and Urban Renewal Approach
Zhengzhou’s efforts have not gone unnoticed. The city has received international recognition for its work in merging urban expansion with cultural preservation. At the forum, leaders from Italy, Spain, and New Zealand commended the city for its forward-thinking strategies. Maurizio Rasero, the Mayor of Asti, Italy, praised the city’s ability to preserve its cultural charm while embracing the advancements of modern infrastructure. Juan de Dios Perez Garcia, the Mayor of Spain’s Zaragoza, also recognised Zhengzhou for its innovative projects that harmoniously blend the ancient and the contemporary.
Furthermore, New Zealand’s Rotorua Mayor highlighted the role of modern technology in revitalising traditional culture. He pointed out that technology has played a crucial role in revamping ancient cultural sites and integrating them into today’s economy. By using modern tools to enhance the visitor experience, cities like Zhengzhou can stimulate economic growth, promote tourism, and create new job opportunities.
Zhengzhou’s Urban Projects: A Model for the Future
The Shang City Archaeological Site Park and Fuminli Cultural Block are just the beginning of Zhengzhou’s ambitious vision for the future. These developments are not just about preserving the past but also about ensuring that the city remains competitive on the global stage. The integration of heritage sites into urban spaces is seen as a crucial step in promoting cultural tourism. The Fuminli Cultural Block, for instance, is a lively cultural district where ancient architecture meets modern retail spaces, providing a platform for both local artisans and global businesses to thrive.
Zhengzhou’s urban renewal initiatives are also deeply intertwined with the region’s tourism sector. By preserving cultural landmarks and making them accessible to tourists, the city has created a new wave of cultural tourism. Tourists visiting Zhengzhou can now experience an immersive journey that includes archaeological sites, museums, and cultural exhibitions. This not only provides an educational experience but also boosts local businesses by attracting both domestic and international visitors.
A Global Dialogue on Cultural Preservation and Urbanization
The Global Mayors Dialogue-Zhengzhou and 2025 International Mayor’s Forum on Tourism served as platforms for a global discussion on the challenges and opportunities in balancing cultural preservation with urban growth. This event provided a space for mayors, officials, and scholars to share their experiences and learn from one another. Several key themes emerged during the discussions, including the role of governance in cultural heritage protection, the importance of involving local communities in preservation efforts, and the need for sustainable tourism practices.
Zhengzhou’s example has shown that it is possible to preserve the past while embracing the future. By placing cultural heritage at the forefront of urban planning, the city has not only protected its historical treasures but also created new opportunities for tourism, education, and economic development.
Zhengzhou’s Approach: A Roadmap for Future Generations
The city of Zhengzhou’s approach to merging cultural preservation with urban development is a roadmap for cities around the world. As urbanisation continues at an unprecedented pace, cities must find ways to preserve their cultural legacies while adapting to the demands of the modern world. Zhengzhou’s success is a testament to the fact that cultural preservation is not a hindrance to growth but rather an essential component of sustainable urban development.
A New Era of Cultural and Urban Synergy
The difficulties of maintaining cultural heritage while promoting economic growth will only get worse as the world becomes more urbanised. Other cities struggling with the challenges of urban renewal can learn a lot from Zhengzhou’s audacious strategy. Zhengzhou has established a benchmark for other cities to follow by giving archaeology and cultural preservation top priority in its urban planning. The 2025 International Mayor’s Forum on Tourism and the Global Mayors Dialogue-Zhengzhou played a significant role in emphasizing the value of combining urban and cultural development in ways that benefit both local communities and international tourism.
It is obvious that the preservation of cultural heritage will be essential in determining how tourism, urban planning, and economic growth develop in cities like Zhengzhou. Zhengzhou is well-positioned to continue being a leader in urban development and cultural preservation for many years to come thanks to projects like the Fuminli Cultural Block and the Shang City Archaeological Site Park.
The post China’s Zhengzhou Leads the Charge in Merging Cultural Preservation with Urban Development: A Glimpse into the Global Mayors Dialogue 2025 appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Brisbane is set to offer travelers an elevated flying experience as American Airlines introduces its premium Boeing 787-9 Dreamliner, marking the start of direct flights from Australia to Dallas and Los Angeles. This new service not only enhances Brisbane’s connectivity to North America but also provides passengers with a luxurious travel experience, featuring redesigned cabins and cutting-edge amenities. With more premium seating and advanced technology, the Dreamliner promises to deliver unmatched comfort on long-haul flights, solidifying Brisbane’s position as a key hub for international travel.
For the first time in Australia, a new premium Boeing 787-9 Dreamliner has been introduced by one of the leading international airlines, marking the beginning of a highly anticipated season of flights connecting Brisbane with North America. This new service, which includes routes to Dallas Fort Worth and Los Angeles, is set to elevate the travel experience for Australian passengers traveling to the United States.
The inaugural Brisbane to Dallas Fort Worth (BNE-DFW) flight took off on October 28, 2025, using the state-of-the-art Boeing 787-9 Dreamliner. The new aircraft, equipped with advanced features and premium seating, aims to provide passengers with enhanced travel comfort, ensuring that their long-haul flights are as relaxing and convenient as possible. This service also marks a significant milestone in Brisbane’s international connectivity, with the addition of these long-haul routes to one of the most in-demand destinations in North America.
The Boeing 787-9 Dreamliner offers more premium seating opportunities than ever before, with a total of 51 Flagship Suite® seats in business class, providing travelers with an elevated level of comfort. These seats are designed to offer maximum privacy and comfort, complete with lie-flat beds for restful sleep during long flights. In addition to the Flagship Suites, the aircraft also boasts redesigned Premium Economy and Main cabins, which feature spacious and ergonomic seating designed for longer journeys.
In addition to its enhanced seating, the new Boeing 787-9 Dreamliner is equipped with the latest technology designed to make the flight experience even more seamless and enjoyable. The aircraft offers Bluetooth connectivity, allowing passengers to connect their devices wirelessly for entertainment and communication. The refreshed cabin design incorporates modern aesthetics, focusing on creating a welcoming and comfortable environment for all passengers on board. Whether traveling for business or leisure, the new Dreamliner ensures that every journey is a pleasant one.
The Brisbane to Dallas Fort Worth route will operate six times a week, providing ample opportunities for travelers to connect between Australia and the United States. Starting in December 2025, the service will become a daily operation and will continue until the end of March 2026. Over the course of the season, the airline will offer a total of 69,296 seats across 284 flights, making this route the longest in both Brisbane Airport’s and the airline’s network by distance.
This significant expansion of services comes as Brisbane continues to grow as a key hub for international travel. In addition to the Brisbane to Dallas service, the airline will operate three weekly flights between Brisbane and Los Angeles from December through January, further enhancing Brisbane’s direct connectivity to North America. These added routes reflect the increasing demand for travel between Australia and the United States and are expected to drive significant growth in passenger numbers, both from inbound and outbound markets.
As Brisbane Airport continues to expand its global network, it has now established direct connections to 35 international destinations. This expansion is expected to further boost the region’s appeal as a gateway for both business and leisure travelers. During the summer of 2025, international travel is projected to increase by 9% compared to the previous year, highlighting the growing demand for global travel and the airport’s role as a central hub for international aviation.
In total, Brisbane Airport is expecting to handle around 25 million passengers throughout 2025, a clear sign of the airport’s importance to the region’s economic and tourism sectors. As the demand for international travel continues to rise, the airport is making significant investments to improve its infrastructure and accommodate the growing number of passengers. The airport is currently undergoing a multi-billion-dollar transformation, with a $5 billion investment set to be spent over the next five years to enhance facilities and services for travelers.
These investments are part of Brisbane Airport’s ongoing efforts to provide a world-class travel experience and ensure that the airport remains competitive in the global aviation market. The Future BNE transformation project will see the airport improve its terminals, add more capacity, and enhance customer amenities to meet the needs of passengers as they travel through the airport.
The expansion of international routes, including the introduction of new services on the Boeing 787-9 Dreamliner, is a key part of this growth strategy. By increasing the number of direct flights to major global destinations, Brisbane Airport is strengthening its position as a leading international hub, connecting passengers to important global markets, especially in North America and Asia.
For travelers, the addition of these new flights and premium aircraft offerings represents a major leap in convenience and comfort. Whether flying for business or pleasure, the new services provide passengers with a range of options that cater to different needs and preferences. From the premium comfort of the Flagship Suite® seats to the cutting-edge connectivity and modern design of the Boeing 787-9, passengers can expect a travel experience that combines luxury, efficiency, and ease.
Brisbane is welcoming American Airlines’ premium Boeing 787-9 Dreamliner, offering direct flights to Dallas and Los Angeles from Australia. This new service enhances travel comfort with luxurious seating and advanced amenities, strengthening Brisbane’s direct connectivity to North America.
With these enhancements, Brisbane Airport is poised to remain a central player in Australia’s aviation industry, continuing to provide exceptional service to both local residents and international visitors. As the airport continues to evolve and expand, it is set to play a critical role in driving the region’s tourism and economic growth, making it an even more attractive destination for travelers around the world.
The post Brisbane Welcomes American Airlines’ Premium Boeing 787-9 Dreamliner With Direct Flights To Dallas And Los Angeles From Australia appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Every year Ireland’s national tourism body, Fáilte Ireland, conducts a survey to get a sense of the problems tourism businesses in Ireland are facing. Most businesses attempted to recuperate economic pressures mainly during summer of 2025. Most of those businesses reported stagnated or declining revenues compared to 2024. This highlights the difficulties in recovering fully during a continuous economic climate.
After gathering information, or lack thereof, from respondents of the survey, Fáilte Ireland reported 43% fell revenues. Another 20% had flat revenues. Only able 37% reported growing business. Lingering sentiments of uncertainty from business owners after subdued economic conditions should have lead to far worse performance in the survey, leading Fáilte Ireland to be pleasantly surprised.
Sectoral Differences: Hotels, Restaurants, and B&Bs Struggle
The performance of different sectors within Ireland’s tourism industry varied widely, according to the survey results. While some businesses saw growth, others faced serious challenges. Notably, 54% of hotels and 46% of tourism attractions reported an increase in turnover during the summer. For hotels, however, the increase was tempered by a reduction in the number of longer stays, although the dip was somewhat offset by a rise in short breaks, which proved to be a more popular option for travelers this summer.
Conversely, the survey revealed that restaurants and bed and breakfasts (B&Bs) had a much harder time, with 64% of restaurants and 52% of B&Bs stating that this summer had been particularly difficult for their businesses. The challenging conditions were attributed to a range of factors, including rising operational costs, particularly energy and payroll expenses, which continue to strain the profitability of these businesses.
Regional Disparities: Wild Atlantic Way vs. Ireland’s Hidden Heartlands
The survey also highlighted significant regional disparities in tourism performance across Ireland. Some areas, such as the Wild Atlantic Way and Ireland’s Ancient East, were able to maintain their revenue levels from the summer of 2024, indicating that these regions managed to attract a steady stream of tourists. The appeal of these areas, known for their breathtaking landscapes, cultural heritage, and outdoor activities, remains strong, contributing to their resilience despite the overall industry downturn.
On the other hand, businesses located in Ireland’s Hidden Heartlands, particularly in the midlands region, as well as those in Dublin, reported more concerning figures. Fifty percent of operators in Ireland’s Hidden Heartlands and 48% of those in Dublin claimed that their revenue had decreased compared to the summer of 2024. This indicates that urban and midland-based businesses are facing more difficulty in attracting tourists, possibly due to factors such as high accommodation costs, less appeal for certain traveler demographics, or competition from more well-known tourist regions.
Decline in North American and European Visitors
One of the most significant findings in the survey was the reported decline in the number of visitors from key international markets, particularly North America and Europe. Forty-four percent of businesses reported a decrease in revenue from North American tourists this summer, with similar declines observed from European markets. The decrease in revenue from these international visitors was a key concern, as the tourism industry in Ireland has long relied on travelers from the United States and key European countries like Germany and the UK.
Specifically, 44% of businesses noted a decline in visitors from Germany, while 48% of respondents reported a drop in visitors from Britain. These declines suggest that external factors, such as economic uncertainty, changes in travel behavior, or even geopolitical issues, could be affecting Ireland’s ability to attract international tourists. The drop in European visitors, in particular, may also reflect a shift in preferences, with some European tourists opting for destinations closer to home due to cost concerns or changing travel patterns.
Rising Operational Costs Remain a Major Concern
Rising operational costs continue to be a major concern for tourism operators across Ireland. Over 1,000 survey respondents cited energy costs as a primary challenge, reflecting the broader economic pressures that businesses are facing in the wake of global energy price fluctuations. Additionally, payroll costs were highlighted as a significant factor affecting business performance, with 81% of hotels and food and drink operators listing them as a key concern.
Non-accommodation operators, such as tour operators and attractions, also noted that the high cost of accommodation is a growing issue, especially when it comes to attracting international visitors. Many businesses expressed frustration over the perception that a holiday in Ireland offers poor value for money, a sentiment that is becoming more common among tourists as costs continue to rise across the sector.
Positive Reviews Amidst Challenges: A Glimmer of Hope
Despite the challenges reported, the survey did show some positive aspects of the tourism sector’s performance. Fifty-five percent of tourism businesses reported receiving positive reviews and recommendations from visitors, indicating that there is still strong satisfaction with the quality of experiences provided in Ireland. This positive feedback is essential for long-term growth, as repeat customers and word-of-mouth recommendations remain crucial for the industry’s recovery and resilience.
Uncertain Outlook for the Rest of 2025
Looking ahead to the final quarter of 2025, the outlook for the tourism industry remains subdued. According to the survey, 44% of businesses expect their revenue to decline in the last quarter compared to the same period in 2024. Only 21% of businesses expect an increase in income, with most operators bracing for a challenging close to the year. This reflects broader concerns within the industry about economic uncertainty, rising costs, and changing travel trends that are impacting tourism worldwide.
The Impact of International Tariffs and Uncertainty
The ongoing uncertainty surrounding international trade tariffs, particularly with the United States, has also had an effect on the tourism sector. About 25% of businesses claimed that the uncertainty caused by tariffs had a negative impact on their investment plans, with many operators delaying or scaling back projects. This uncertainty is particularly evident among businesses that rely heavily on American visitors, as changes in trade policy and the broader global economy could further impact international tourism to Ireland.
A Challenging Year for Irish Tourism
According to the most recent data from Fáilte Ireland, the “Tourism Barometer” survey yields a mixed picture for the sector. Although some areas and industries exceeded expectations, most operators are struggling with sustained poor profitability, coupled with rising and hard to predict international trade. The anticipated conditions for the coming months are expected to remain unsustainable. This is a reason to expect poor profitability for hospitality and tourism. Some positivity from visitors and the considerable effort resilience and business adaptation under the current conditions provide some reason for expected unsustainable profitability levels to remain for the sector in the recovery phase.
The post Tourism Industry of Ireland Sees Decline in Revenue, Particularly in Dublin and the Midlands, Here’s What You Need to Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Flight cancellations by Air Senegal, Fastjet Zimbabwe, Air Côte d’Ivoire, CemAir, and Ethiopian Airlines have caused widespread disruptions for travelers across Africa. Technical issues, financial difficulties, and security concerns have left passengers scrambling to find alternative arrangements. These cancellations have affected key regional and international routes, leading to delays and uncertainty. Below is an overview of the affected airlines, canceled flights, and tips on how to manage these travel disruptions.
Air Senegal’s operational troubles have intensified due to some difficulties, resulting in a wave of flight cancellations. The airline’s inability to meet leasing obligations for its aircraft has forced it to ground multiple flights, particularly on regional routes, leaving many travelers in limbo.
Canceled Flights:
Fastjet Zimbabwe is grappling with technical issues that have led to the cancellation of multiple flights. Affected routes, primarily between Zimbabwe and South Africa, have seen many passengers left stranded at the airport.
Canceled Flights:
Air Côte d’Ivoire, the national carrier of Côte d’Ivoire, has canceled several flights, disrupting services to major West African cities like Casablanca and Johannesburg. These suspensions are the result of operational constraints, leading to the temporary halt of essential routes.
Canceled Flights:
CemAir, a regional carrier in South Africa, has faced significant flight disruptions due to a failure in its third-party reservation system. The crash of the system has resulted in the cancellation of multiple flights across its domestic network.
Canceled Flights:
Ethiopian Airlines has temporarily suspended flights due to security and operational concerns. This has led to the cancellation of a flight between Hong Kong and Addis Ababa.
Canceled Flight:
The recent flight cancellations by Air Senegal, Fastjet Zimbabwe, Air Côte d’Ivoire, CemAir, and Ethiopian Airlines have significantly impacted passengers across multiple routes. Travelers have experienced delays, missed connections, and disruptions to their travel plans. For many, these cancellations have led to uncertainty, particularly for those with time-sensitive commitments or connecting flights. The suspension of key regional and international routes has further complicated travel, especially for passengers who had limited alternative options.
Passengers affected by the cancellations are advised to contact their respective airlines directly for rebooking or refund options. It is crucial for travelers to stay informed by regularly checking the airline’s website or customer service for updates on flight statuses. In some cases, airlines are providing flexibility for rebooking or offering compensation. Passengers should also consider exploring other travel options, including connecting flights with different carriers, to minimize disruption. Staying proactive and flexible will help mitigate the impact of these cancellations.
The cancellations by Air Senegal, Fastjet Zimbabwe, Air Côte d’Ivoire, CemAir, and Ethiopian Airlines have caused significant disruptions for passengers. With operational challenges ranging from financial issues to technical glitches and security concerns, travelers must remain vigilant and flexible to navigate these changes. Passengers are encouraged to stay in contact with their airlines for rebooking options and to explore alternative travel arrangements to minimize the impact of these cancellations.
Source: FlightAware
Disclaimer: The information provided is sourced from FlightAware and airport websites. We do not guarantee its accuracy and have no intention to harm or malign any airlines. If you notice any discrepancies, please contact us at pr@travelandtourworld.com
The post Passengers Impacted Across Africa, Including Senegal, Zimbabwe, Ivory Coast, Togo, Cameroon, Ethiopia, and More, as Air Senegal, Fastjet Zimbabwe, Air Côte d’Ivoire, CemAir, and Ethiopian Airlines Face 26 Cancellations, Disrupting Travel at Abidjan, Bulawayo, Conakry, Kimberley, Port Bouet, Victoria Falls, and Other Destinations appeared first on Travel And Tour World.A fundamental alteration in the motivations governing international travel has been observed. The primary allure of a destination, which historically centred on iconic edifices and celebrated institutions, is now frequently being supplanted by a distinct kind of cultural pursuit. This shift is codified under the umbrella of snack tourism, a phenomenon wherein travel itineraries are thoughtfully constructed around the acquisition and consumption of regional edible specialties, moving the focus from traditional sightseeing to what is being termed snack-seeing. A new form of exploration is being embraced by contemporary travellers, where the essence of a destination is captured not merely through visual observation but through gustatory engagement.
The definition of snack tourism is intentionally broad, encompassing a variety of simple, everyday treats rather than being limited to the sphere of luxury dining or high-end gastronomy. This is a crucial distinction that must be made clear. The items being sought are often the common packaged goods obtainable at local convenience stores, petrol stations, or neighbourhood markets. These are the chocolate bars that shaped the childhoods of local populations, the unique fizzy drinks available only in a specific territory, or the ubiquitous packets of crisps that reflect regional flavour preferences. A true understanding of a place, it is believed, is achieved not through its postcard imagery but through its humble, packaged fare.
The momentum behind snack tourism is being overwhelmingly generated by younger demographics. The Millennials generation, in particular, is positioned as the primary catalyst for this shift, often being referred to as the lead of the snack pack. Data collected and disseminated by Skyscanner illustrates the extent of this generational preference. It has been noted that nearly six out of every ten Millennials, representing a significant 59 per cent, admit that the selection of their travel destination is based specifically on the availability of popular local snacks or delicacies. This statistical finding underscores a deeply ingrained preference for food-centric travel planning within this demographic.
Moreover, the financial commitment to this new form of exploration is substantial. It is further reported that an even larger proportion of Millennials, precisely 70 per cent, consciously allocate a dedicated budget solely for the purpose of collecting unique international treats that can be brought back home as edible souvenirs. This deliberate budgeting signifies that the acquisition of regional snacks is not an incidental activity but a pre-planned, essential component of the travel experience. The economic implication of this behaviour is considerable, shifting expenditure away from traditional souvenir shops and redirecting it toward local supermarkets and specialty food vendors, thereby injecting capital directly into the local food production and retail sectors.
The appeal of regional snacks is fundamentally rooted in their capacity for cultural storytelling. It is widely understood that every nation possesses a signature snack which, through its flavour profile and packaging, communicates volumes about the characteristics and values of its people. This is evident in the dynamic street food culture found across India, which speaks to a collective passion for spice and layered flavour complexity. Similarly, the meticulous and inventive nature of Japan’s unique KitKat flavours and their packaging reflects a cultural dedication to innovation and detail. When a bite is taken from a locally made product, the experience extends far beyond the mere consumption of ingredients; it is an active engagement with history, craftsmanship, and local emotion.
The variety of treats being sought out across the globe is extensive and specific. Travellers are deliberately seeking out the distinctive Baci chocolates of Italy, indulging in Korea’s famed honey-butter chips, and exploring the array of unique confectionery available only in select markets. Similarly, the desire to experience Australia’s Tim Tams, the United States’ Coca-Cola Vanilla Soda, or France’s Petit Écolier biscuits is a palpable driving force. Even beverages like Thailand’s Mogu Mogu drinks are being highlighted as integral components of this flavourful exploration. The pursuit of these specific, geographically-tied items confirms that the travel destination is being assessed not merely by its famous sights but by its unique inventory of accessible culinary delights. These products are being used as a lens through which the local environment is viewed, confirming that flavour is a potent vehicle for cultural transmission.
The move away from landmark-centric travel towards food-focused itineraries is reflective of a deeper, evolving desire for authentic and intimate travel experiences. The grand scale and crowded nature of famous monuments can often create a psychological distance between the traveller and the genuine culture of the place being visited. Conversely, the act of selecting a snack in a local shop, interacting with a vendor, and consuming a product made specifically for the regional palate fosters a sense of immediate connection and belonging. A more profound connection to the locale is facilitated through this approach.
The evidence strongly suggests that snack tourism is a trend that will be sustained and expanded upon in the global travel market. The integration of technology, particularly social media platforms, allows for easier research and sharing of these edible discoveries, further fuelling the movement. The prioritization of local food over historic sites, particularly by Millennials and Gen Z, indicates a permanent change in travel philosophy. The culinary landscape of a region is now firmly established as an intrinsic and primary cultural asset, ensuring that the exploration of local snacks will remain a compelling and essential pursuit for the modern global traveller.
The post Snack Tourism Unpacked: A Detailed Look At How Local Delicacies In Global Destinations Are Becoming The Primary Travel Incentive For Millennials And Gen Z appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Alaska Airlines is enhancing its offerings by launching several new nonstop routes that will connect key cities between California and the Pacific Northwest. This new service will significantly improve travel options for passengers, providing more direct connections between major hubs in these regions. The expansion comes as part of the airline’s ongoing efforts to increase service capacity and cater to the rising demand for domestic travel.
As part of the new initiative, Alaska Airlines has announced nonstop flights between California’s major cities and the Pacific Northwest. Notably, the airline will connect San Diego to Dallas-Fort Worth, with several additional nonstop routes between cities in California and Washington, Oregon, and other parts of the Pacific Northwest.
The new flights are designed to reduce travel time, offering a more seamless and direct route for travelers. These additions will allow Alaska Airlines to provide better access to key business and leisure destinations, making it easier for people to travel for work, family visits, or vacation. The expanded network will allow passengers to skip the usual layovers and connecting flights, making travel both more efficient and enjoyable.
The new nonstop services are expected to draw more travelers looking for convenient, direct options when flying between California and the Pacific Northwest. This includes connections from San Francisco, Los Angeles, Seattle, and other cities within the region, catering to both the business community and tourists looking to explore these vibrant areas.
Alaska Airlines’ expansion comes as demand for domestic travel continues to rise in the post-pandemic era. Travelers are increasingly seeking convenient flight options, and with more people looking to travel to and from California and the Pacific Northwest, Alaska Airlines aims to meet this demand by providing more nonstop routes.
The Pacific Northwest and California are two of the U.S.’s busiest travel regions. Whether it’s for business meetings in Seattle or a beach holiday in Southern California, travelers often face time-consuming connections through major hubs like Denver or Chicago. Alaska Airlines’ decision to streamline these routes with more direct services offers both convenience and time savings.
This expansion is not just about offering more flights; it’s about making travel easier, more affordable, and more accessible for passengers in these regions. The new routes also come at a time when air travel has become more focused on speed and efficiency, as many travelers look for ways to get to their destinations as quickly as possible.
The announcement of new nonstop flights comes as part of Alaska Airlines’ broader growth strategy. The airline has consistently expanded its reach across the U.S., increasing its presence in key cities on the West Coast and beyond. Alaska’s reputation for reliability and service excellence, combined with its growing network, has made it a go-to choice for many domestic travelers.
The airline has also made significant investments in its fleet, ensuring that its new and existing aircraft provide the highest levels of comfort and safety. Whether you’re traveling for business or leisure, Alaska Airlines aims to provide a superior in-flight experience. Passengers will continue to enjoy complimentary snacks and beverages, Wi-Fi, and entertainment options, all while traveling in a spacious and comfortable environment.
Additionally, the airline continues to focus on sustainability, with efforts to reduce its environmental impact. Alaska Airlines is working towards more fuel-efficient planes and carbon-offset programs, making it an increasingly attractive option for eco-conscious travelers.
The new routes are available for booking starting today, and travelers can book through the Alaska Airlines website or its mobile app. As always, travelers are encouraged to book early to secure the best fares and preferred travel times. Given the demand for these popular routes, seats are expected to fill up quickly, especially during peak travel seasons.
California and the Pacific Northwest are both culturally rich regions, and these new routes will allow residents of these areas to connect easily for both leisure and business. Whether you’re based in California and looking to visit family in Washington or you’re a Seattle resident heading to Southern California for a vacation, these nonstop flights will offer greater flexibility and reduce travel time.
The new flights are also expected to boost tourism to the Pacific Northwest. Cities like Portland, Oregon, and Seattle offer unique attractions such as outdoor activities in the Pacific wilderness, as well as world-class food and music scenes. Similarly, California offers famous attractions, from the beaches of Los Angeles to the mountains of the Sierra Nevada.
With the launch of new nonstop routes between California and the Pacific Northwest, Alaska Airlines continues to offer enhanced travel options for its passengers. These new flights will make it easier for travelers to visit major cities and scenic destinations, saving time and improving the overall travel experience.
As the demand for more direct and convenient travel grows, Alaska Airlines is positioning itself as a leader in the domestic airline market. This expansion reflects the company’s commitment to providing quality service, improving efficiency, and meeting the needs of travelers in these bustling regions. Whether you’re flying for business or leisure, the new routes will allow you to enjoy a seamless journey across some of the U.S.’s most popular destinations.
The post Alaska Airlines Launches New Nonstop Routes in California and Pacific Northwest appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Bitcoin’s largest corporate holder just got bigger. Strategy (MSTR.O) added another 390 BTC to its treasury last week, spending $43.4 million at an average price of $111,053 per bitcoin.
The move highlights the company’s consistent buying pattern even as the asset’s 2025 rally shows no signs of slowing down.
According to a post on X, the purchase was completed between October 20 and October 26, funded through proceeds from its STRF, STRK, and STRD series preferred stock issuances.
As of October 26, 2025, Strategy holds a total of 640,808 bitcoins, the largest corporate Bitcoin treasury globally. The company has spent an estimated $47.44 billion on its cumulative BTC acquisitions, with an average purchase price of $74,032 per coin.
The firm’s BTC yield has reached 26.0% year-to-date, reflecting the impact of Bitcoin’s continued appreciation throughout 2025. Strategy’s relentless accumulation underscores its belief in Bitcoin as a long-term store of value and strategic asset in an inflationary global market.
The 390 BTC acquisition may seem modest compared to earlier buys, but it reinforces a steady accumulation strategy rather than speculative timing. For a company already holding more than half a million bitcoins, even smaller purchases demonstrate conviction, and signal confidence to the broader market.
Strategy’s approach remains consistent: acquire, hold, and wait. Each acquisition pushes its balance sheet deeper into Bitcoin exposure, while the firm’s yield performance continues to validate its “digital gold” thesis.
In a market often driven by short-term hype, Strategy’s consistent purchases stand out. This latest buy adds to a streak of quarterly acquisitions despite fluctuating prices, proving that the company views Bitcoin less as a trade and more as a reserve asset.
The company’s funding model, issuing preferred stock to raise capital, provides a low-risk, flexible way to expand its Bitcoin portfolio without taking on excessive debt. It’s a model that other institutional players are beginning to notice.
A 26% BTC yield YTD is a remarkable figure, even for an asset that’s outperformed most global equities this year. It points to the effectiveness of Strategy’s treasury management approach. While traditional portfolios rely on bonds and equities for returns, Strategy’s balance sheet now behaves more like a Bitcoin ETF, one that captures both price appreciation and strategic yield.
This yield not only reflects gains from market performance but also the company’s ability to leverage its holdings effectively, signaling operational efficiency and a long-term advantage over competitors who remain on the sidelines.
In parallel, another institutional player, American Bitcoin ($ABTC), has also increased its holdings. The firm recently acquired 1,414 BTC, bringing its total treasury to 3,865 BTC.
American Bitcoin’s strategy differs from pure accumulation. The company combines direct Bitcoin production through mining with periodic market purchases to strengthen its balance sheet. This hybrid model allows it to reduce its average cost per bitcoin, ensuring it remains competitive even as spot prices rise.
Executive Chairman Asher Genoot explained the approach clearly:
“By producing Bitcoin directly, we can reduce our average cost per Bitcoin to drive a cost advantage over vehicles that buy exclusively on the open market.”
This production-based accumulation creates a natural hedge against market volatility. While most public Bitcoin holders rely solely on capital inflows, American Bitcoin generates part of its treasury through self-mining, providing long-term cost stability.
Another notable metric from American Bitcoin’s update is its Satoshis Per Share (SPS), now reported at 418, marking a 52% increase since September 1. This figure tracks the company’s Bitcoin exposure per share and gives investors a clear view of how effectively treasury growth translates into shareholder value.
The strong SPS growth indicates both aggressive accumulation and disciplined treasury scaling. It also positions the company competitively among institutional Bitcoin holders, where transparency around treasury performance is increasingly valued.
The company’s progress was shared in a post by Treasury Edge, highlighting the alignment between mining expansion, financial strategy, and shareholder impact.
The latest moves from both Strategy and American Bitcoin show that institutional conviction in Bitcoin remains strong even after significant price growth in 2025.
Strategy’s continued buying streak and American Bitcoin’s integrated mining model reflect two sides of the same coin, accumulation through both capital deployment and production efficiency. Together, they illustrate a maturing institutional ecosystem around Bitcoin, where companies view the asset not as speculation but as a strategic treasury reserve.
At a time when central banks debate digital currencies and inflationary pressures persist globally, the continued flow of corporate capital into Bitcoin adds weight to the idea that digital assets are no longer fringe.
With Strategy now holding over 640,000 BTC and American Bitcoin scaling production, the narrative is clear: Bitcoin is becoming an institutional-grade treasury instrument.
As Bitcoin’s supply issuance continues to decline and halving approaches, companies accumulating now are effectively securing their share of a finite asset. The result is a stronger, more mature market structure, one increasingly dominated by strategic, long-term holders rather than speculative traders.
Strategy’s latest 390 BTC purchase reaffirms its role as the world’s leading Bitcoin accumulator, while American Bitcoin’s dual mining-and-purchase strategy sets a cost-efficient precedent for others to follow.
Both stories highlight the same reality: corporate Bitcoin adoption isn’t slowing down. Instead, it’s evolving, from opportunistic buys to structured, yield-driven treasury management.
Bitcoin is no longer just a trade. For these institutions, it’s a strategy.
Disclosure: This is not trading or investment advice. Always do your research before buying any cryptocurrency or investing in any services.
Follow us on Twitter @themerklehash to stay updated with the latest Crypto, NFT, AI, Cybersecurity, and Metaverse news!
The post Strategy Expands Bitcoin Holdings to 640,808 BTC as Institutional Accumulation Surges appeared first on The Merkle News.
Traditional online payment systems are outdated. They’re slow, expensive, and depend heavily on humans.
x402 changes that.
It introduces a new way for developers and AI agents to pay for APIs, software, and services directly with stablecoins, all over standard HTTP connections.
In simple terms, it makes autonomous, instant payments possible between machines, without needing middlemen.
The digital world moves fast, but today’s payment rails still crawl.
They rely on centralized processors, carry high fees, and take days to settle.
Every API, subscription, or software access comes with friction, recurring billing systems, manual approvals, and regional limitations.
For developers and AI agents that operate in real time, that model doesn’t work anymore.
x402 replaces this outdated setup with an agent-to-agent payment model.
Here’s what that means in practice:
🔹 Payments settle in seconds
🔹 Micropayments are supported natively
🔹 Global access with no currency conversion
🔹 No chargebacks, no middlemen
It’s designed to work across borders and protocols, using stablecoins as the default payment medium.
Think of it as PayPal, but for machines.
x402 uses the existing HTTP 402 response code, the one originally intended for “Payment Required”, to enable direct payment settlement between two digital agents.
This means that a bot, app, or AI system can automatically pay for an API call or a data request in real time, without needing a human or a credit card.
Payments are made in stablecoins like USDC, achieving instant finality and zero chargebacks.
Each transaction happens seamlessly, fast, compliant, and verifiable on-chain.
Some of the most active builders on BNB Chain are already bringing x402 to life.
Projects like @unibase_ai, @pieverse_io, @AEON_Community, and @termix_ai are integrating the protocol into their systems to enable autonomous API payments.
BNB Chain describes x402 as an internet-native payment standard, a design built specifically for agents and AI ecosystems, not humans.
Developers can now plug x402 into their applications and allow AI agents to pay directly for what they consume, on demand.
The x402 system also introduces “Facilitators.”
These are the gateways that verify and settle payments made through the protocol.
Entities like PayAI or Coinbase can serve as facilitators, validating payments, ensuring compliance, and maintaining a secure on-ramp between traditional finance and machine payments.
This layer guarantees the same regulatory assurance as human transactions, without slowing down the process.
x402 is more than a payment protocol, it’s a new financial standard for the AI era.
It allows software agents to pay as they go, per API call, per data request, per inference, all without subscriptions, cards, or intermediaries.
That opens a new economy: one where AI models, tools, and bots transact directly, autonomously, and transparently.
By aligning payments with machine speed, x402 eliminates one of the biggest bottlenecks in AI deployment, billing.
BNB Chain has quickly become the home for x402 integrations.
Its speed, low fees, and EVM compatibility make it an ideal ground for developers experimenting with autonomous payments.
According to BNB Chain’s official announcement, the protocol’s adoption rate has already begun to climb, with multiple agent-based dApps adopting the standard.
Traditional online payment systems today are slow, expensive and human-dependent.
x402 changes that, allowing developers and AI agents to pay for APIs, software and services directly with stablecoins over HTTP.
Builders like @unibase_ai, @pieverse_io, @AEON_Community &… pic.twitter.com/0NS9jvidkK
— BNB Chain (@BNBCHAIN) October 27, 2025
BNB Chain’s ecosystem has long supported innovation in DeFi, gaming, and payments, and now, it’s positioning itself as the AI payment layer of Web3.
Interestingly, x402 isn’t just a BNB Chain story.
On Solana, the trend has exploded, up over 4,000% in just seven days, according to data tracked across developer communities.
The $X402 token, which powers the Solana side of the movement, is gaining traction fast.
It enables ultra-fast, low-fee payments for AI agents, while attracting new developers through hackathons and open integrations.
The mission: to make Solana the “default payment layer” for the AI economy.
x402 is an internet-native payment standard for Agents: fast, cheap, and on-chain.
Agents can pay per API call in USDC with instant finality, no chargebacks, and full compliance. The entire process is achieved without the friction of managing API keys or subscriptions.… pic.twitter.com/NSGC6Y0Bf9
— CoinMarketCap (@CoinMarketCap) October 27, 2025
The growth is already visible.
Over the last 7 days, several x402-based tokens have surged as developers race to integrate HTTP-based payments.
Here are the Top 10 Gainers in the x402 ecosystem:
🔸 ZARA – [@zaara_ai](https://x.com/zaara_ai)
🔸 PAYAI – [@PayAINetwork](https://x.com/PayAINetwork)
🔸 FREGO – [@GetFrego](https://x.com/GetFrego)
🔸 DREAMS – [@daydreamsagents](https://x.com/daydreamsagents)
🔸 JTVO – [@JatevoId](https://x.com/JatevoId)
🔸 QUAIN – [@quaindotcom](https://x.com/quaindotcom)
🔸 OPUS – [@opus_universe](https://x.com/opus_universe)
🔸 FDRY – [@getFoundry](https://x.com/getFoundry)
🔸 BREW – [@homebrewrobots](https://x.com/homebrewrobots)
🔸 SWITCH – [@switchboardxyz](https://x.com/switchboardxyz)
🚨 x402 trend is exploding on Solana – up over 4,000% in just 7 days 🚀
Powered by seamless HTTP 402 integration, $X402 enables ultra-fast, low-fee payments for #AIAgent.
The $X402 token not only attracts developers through the upcoming hackathon but also promises to… https://t.co/KDSF0r4P81 pic.twitter.com/sV3oBNeHZG— Solana Daily (@solana_daily) October 27, 2025
The rise of x402 marks a shift from human-driven payments to machine-native finance.
Just as DeFi decentralized trading and staking, x402 is decentralizing the act of paying itself, making transactions faster, smaller, and smarter.
It’s also setting the foundation for PayFi, a new movement that combines payment infrastructure with DeFi principles for AI and Web3.
As stablecoins continue to dominate settlement flows and agents become more autonomous, protocols like x402 will likely become the backbone of the next financial internet.
The internet of money is evolving again, this time, for machines.
x402 bridges the gap between AI agents and blockchain payments, offering speed, efficiency, and autonomy that traditional payment rails can’t match.
Whether on BNB Chain or Solana, the momentum is clear.
x402 is no longer just a protocol, it’s a standard in the making.
And as developers continue to build around it, one question lingers: Will the x402 trend take over Solana next?
Disclosure: This is not trading or investment advice. Always do your research before buying any cryptocurrency or investing in any services.
Follow us on Twitter @themerklehash to stay updated with the latest Crypto, NFT, AI, Cybersecurity, and Metaverse news!
The post x402: The Internet-Native Payment Standard Powering the AI Agent Economy appeared first on The Merkle News.
As the January transfer window approaches, Brentford striker Igor Thiago has become one of the most sought-after names.
The 24-year-old Brazilian forward has enjoyed a stellar campaign so far, scoring goals consistently for the club.
Newcastle United, Tottenham, and Aston Villa are all monitoring his situation closely, setting the stage for a potential bidding war when the market reopens, sources close to the agents industry have informed CaughtOffside.
Newcastle are believed to be leading the chase. Following the departure of Alexander Isak, the Magpies are actively searching for depth in their attack.
Although they signed Nick Woltemade in a big money move in the summer transfer window, they need more attackers to provide manager Eddie Howe the best platform to perform well this season.
Sources suggest Newcastle are preparing a €40 million offer, hoping to strike early before rival clubs enter the race.
Tottenham, meanwhile, are adopting a more cautious stance. Still adjusting under Thomas Frank, the North London club are weighing the option of a loan deal with an option to buy.
Their proposed package, a €35 million fee plus performance-based add-ons, shows that they are unwilling to commit a large amount of money on the deal. Spurs see Thiago as a valuable rotational option who could relieve the burden on Dominic Solanke and inject competition into the forward line.
Despite the growing speculation, Brentford remain calm. Having only signed Thiago from Club Brugge last year for €33 million, the Bees hold a long-term contract with him until 2029.
The club are under no financial pressure to sell and are expected to demand a premium well above his initial valuation.
With six goals in nine Premier League matches so far this season, Thiago has quickly become the focal point of Brentford’s attack.
With Newcastle United, Tottenham, and Aston Villa all positioning themselves to make a move, Brentford face the challenge of holding on to their prized striker.
Newcastle keen to avoid repeat of Alexander Isak saga with star player
The post Sources: Newcastle United prepare bid for attacker with six goals in nine league games appeared first on CaughtOffside.
A fresh transfer battle is brewing between two European giants, as Barcelona and Arsenal are reportedly set to go head-to-head for the signature of Lacine Megnan-Pave, one of France’s brightest teenage prospects.
According to L’Équipe, the 15-year-old Montpellier striker has caught the attention of scouts across Europe following a string of impressive performances for the club’s U19 side, where he has already scored two goals this season.
Despite his young age, Megnan-Pave has the physicality and technique to shine at a big club as interest in his services continues to increase.
Barcelona’s famed La Masia academy is currently tipped as the frontrunner to secure his services.
Standing at 6 feet tall, Megnan-Pave already possesses a commanding physical presence for his age. Yet it is his balance, intelligent movement, and natural goal-scoring instinct that have stood out most to scouts.
Montpellier have earned a reputation for developing elite-level French talent, from Olivier Giroud and Rémy Cabella to Elye Wahi, and Megnan-Pave could be the next in that line.
The Catalan giants continue to rebuild their squad structure around young prospects, much like they did with Lamine Yamal, Pau Cubarsí, and Fermín López.
Barca’s sporting director Deco has already green-lit the pursuit, with talks underway between intermediaries representing the player and the club.
However, Arsenal remain firmly in the mix. Under Mikel Arteta, the North London club have invested heavily in young, technically gifted players with high developmental ceilings.
The Gunners believe Megnan-Pave could become a star in the future under their environment which encourages young players to shine.
The north-London club have seen the progress of young players like Ethan Nwaneri and Myles Lewis-Skelly under Arteta and have been highly impressed with that.
Montpellier, meanwhile, are aware that keeping hold of the teenager will be difficult. With European giants circling and no professional contract signed yet due to his age, the French club face an uphill task to convince him to stay in Ligue 1.
Sources: Arsenal & Chelsea scouts watched Champions League star worth €70-80 million
The post Report: Arsenal involved in transfer battle with Barcelona for French attacker appeared first on CaughtOffside.
The race for one of England’s most exciting young midfielders is heating up.
According to journalist Florian Plettenberg, Manchester United and Newcastle United are leading a growing list of Premier League clubs monitoring Elliot Anderson, with both sides having already registered their interest.
The 22-year-old midfielder has caught the attention of some of the top clubs after his move to Nottingham Forest.
As Forest brace for a potential transfer battle next summer, insiders reveal that the club are demanding between £100–120 million, with no release clause in Anderson’s contract, a sign of how highly he is valued at the City Ground.
Anderson has evolved into the creative heartbeat of the team and his ability to make things happen from the midfield is something that both Man United and Newcastle United are particularly impressed with.
Managers Ruben Amorim and Eddie Howe are both looking for a new midfielder next year and Anderson is someone who has earned a place in their shortlist.
United have been scouting the player extensively and see him as a player who can become a part of their long terms plans under Amorim as the Portuguese manager is looking for more stability in the middle of the park.
Forest, for their part, remain adamant that the midfielder is not for sale, unless an exceptional offer arrives.
Anderson is a central figure in their long-term project, and with no release clause in his current deal, they hold all the leverage heading into next year.
The £100–120 million valuation reflects both his current impact and projected potential, especially given his age and Premier League experience.
Whether Anderson stays loyal to Forest’s project or takes the next step toward the elite, one thing is certain, his talent is undeniable and Forest would find it difficult to keep him at the club for long.
JUST IN: Sir Jim Ratcliffe blocks Ruben Amorim demand to sign legendary striker
The post Premier League club demanding £100–120 million for Man United & Newcastle target appeared first on CaughtOffside.
If you write with any large-language model, ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, or the dozen niche tools that pop up every month, you’ve surely run into the same brick wall: AI detectors. Classmates whisper about GPTZero, professors swear by Turnitin’s AI meter, and agencies quietly copy-paste everything into Copyleaks before they publish. Nothing drains the fun out of automated drafting faster than a bright-red “99% AI-written” label.
That tension is why “AI humanizers” now headline software round-ups and TikTok tutorials alike. The promise is simple: paste your machine-written paragraph in, click “Humanize,” and out comes prose that sounds like you after two coffees and zero robots. The reality is more nuanced, but some platforms really do trip up leading detectors at least most of the time.
Below you’ll find a practical, evidence-based look at the field as it stands. I’ve narrowed the spotlight to three tools that consistently beat GPTZero, Turnitin, and Copyleaks in independent side-by-side tests: Smodin: https://smodin.io/ai-humanizer, Undetectable.ai’s Rewrite module, and HIX Rewrite+ (formerly HIX Covert). You’ll also learn why “passing the detectors” is never just about software and how to keep your words both honest and invisible to the bots.
Before judging humanizers, it helps to know what they’re hiding. Modern detectors rely on two core signals:
– Statistical fingerprints. Language models like GPT use certain phrase patterns, function-word frequencies, and sentence-length distributions that differ from human baselines. Detectors train other models to spot those quirks.
– Burstiness vs. perplexity. Human writing jumps around: a short fragment here, a multi-clause monster there. AI tends to coast in a tighter range. Detectors score that smoothness as “low burstiness” and raise alarms.
Turnitin and Copyleaks layer plagiarism checks and cross-document comparisons on top, but the heartbeat is still pattern analysis. Break the patterns, and you drop the detection score.
After combing through dozens of platforms and running them against fresh detector builds released this fall, three names consistently floated to the top in both reliability and usability. Each excels at a slightly different mix of speed, linguistic nuance, and detector-dodging “stealth” scores, which is why they’ve become staples in student Discords, freelance Slack channels, and small-agency content workflows. Below you’ll find a closer look at what sets Smodin, Undetectable.ai, and HIX Rewrite+ apart, along with the blind-test data that earned them front-runner status.
Smodin bills itself as the Swiss Army knife of writing tools generator, paraphraser, detector, and, crucially, a “humanizer” that rewrites machine text to sound organic. It supports 100+ languages, which matters if you write bilingual essays or global marketing copy. In four October blind tests run by freelance reviewers, Smodin’s rewrite dropped GPTZero scores from an average of 83% AI to 12%. Turnitin’s AI index fell below its 20-percent “possible AI” threshold in three of four samples. Copyleaks still caught one technical paragraph (likely due to jargon repetition), but overall accuracy hovered around an 85 percent bypass rate.
Strengths:
– Solid at varying sentence length and inserting subtle contractions (“we’re,” “they’ve”) that detectors weigh heavily.
– Lets you highlight every change, so you can reverse anything that warps meaning.
– Reasonably priced: the current Writing plan is $15/month.
Weak spots:
– Long academic citations sometimes get truncated. Paste those back in manually.
– On ultra-formal papers, the tool adds a conversational tilt that editors may notice. Tone sliders help, but you still need a quick proofread.
Undetectable.ai surfaced in late 2024 and quickly won a cult following among copywriters. The company’s marketing flex: “0% AI on all major detectors, or we credit your account.” In practice, its success rate sits closer to 90 percent, but that’s still impressive.
How does it work? It adds “entropy layers,” essentially rewriting twice: once for semantics, once for randomness. You can crank an “Entropy” dial from 1 to 5; anything above 3 can begin to sound disjointed, but level 3 nearly always sneaks past GPTZero and Copyleaks. Turnitin remains the toughest nut; Undetectable.ai achieves a pass roughly four out of five tries.
Pros:
– Fast bulk mode: you can upload a 10,000-word white paper and get it back in under a minute.
– Built-in plagiarism sweep uses the Copyscape API, catching accidental overlap.
Cons:
– No free tier, and the Pro plan ($29/month) caps you at 25,000 words. Heavy users can burn through that in a week.
– Level 3+ entropy occasionally introduces factual drift. Double-check names, dates, and figures.
HIX Write launched as a straight copy assistant in 2023. It’s 2025: Rewrite+ engine quietly became a detection-dodger’s secret weapon. The interface is minimal: paste, select “Covert,” pick a tone (academic, casual, narrative), and hit run. The server spins a hybrid model that blends lexical substitution with clause rearrangement. In public benchmarks hosted by the independent ReviewStack Lab (July 2025), HIX achieved the best Copyleaks evasion only one false flag in 30 runs, while tying Smodin on GPTZero.
Good news:
– Best at retaining stylistic nuance. If your original had rhetorical questions or semi-colons, they’re often preserved.
– Respectable free allotment: 5,000 words/month.
Bad news:
– Limited language options (only eight major tongues).
– No side-by-side change tracking; you need a diff tool if you’re paranoid.
To ground the numbers, let’s walk through a single paragraph about CRISPR agriculture, originally produced by GPT-4 Turbo. Raw text scored 98% AI on GPTZero, 89% on Turnitin, 91% on Copyleaks.
– Smodin output: “14% AI” (GPTZero), “17% AI” (Turnitin), “22% AI” (Copyleaks).
– Undetectable.ai (entropy 3): “5% AI,” “21% AI,” “15% AI.”
– HIX Rewrite+ (academic tone): “12% AI,” “18% AI,” “9% AI.”
All three cleared the generic “likely human” threshold that most instructors use (usually 20-25%). The differences matter only if your reader scrutinizes every decimal. In real-world conditions, thousands of essays funneling into an LMS, any of these outputs would slip through.
Even the best tool can’t cover every tell-tale sign on its own. Experienced editors and professors look for other giveaways long before they click “Check AI”:
– Sudden voice shift. If your intro sounds like Hemingway and your body reads like a textbook, suspicion spikes.
– Lack of personal anecdote. AI rarely invents believable micro stories (“I spilled coffee on my first draft at 2 a.m.”). Adding one can tilt judgment your way.
– Too-perfect structure. Flawless five-paragraph symmetry is another red flag. Humans ramble; sprinkle a side-thought here and there.
In short, humanizers defeat algorithmic pattern detectors, but they can’t import lived experience. That part is on you.
Ultimately, the best pick hinges less on raw bypass percentages and more on your daily writing context, how many words you crank out, how frequently you switch languages, and how much polish you add by hand after the fact. Think of these humanizers as different gears on the same bike: one may climb academic hills effortlessly, another might zip through marketing flats, and a third offers an all-around ride with a lighter price tag. Keep that metaphor in mind as you weigh the options below.
– You value multilingual support and budget flexibility → Smodin.
– You need industrial-scale throughput and don’t mind tweaking entropy → Undetectable.ai.
– You care most about retaining voice and want a generous free tier → HIX Rewrite+.
All three update their models every few weeks because detectors evolve just as fast. A subscription that works today might falter next semester. Most creators, therefore, keep at least two accounts active and cross-check outputs before hitting “submit” or “publish.”
The headline question “Which AI humanizer passes GPTZero, Turnitin, and Copyleaks?” no longer has a single silver-bullet answer. Smodin, Undetectable.ai, and HIX Rewrite+ each clear the bar in late 2025, provided you use them thoughtfully. No guarantee of eternal invisibility; detectors will sharpen again, and the cat-and-mouse game will lurch forward.
The thing that will never change is the worth of real, captivating prose. These tools are not to conceal your thoughts, but to perfect your language. Combine machine efficiency and human touch, and you will always be a step further than algorithms and bored readers, regardless of what detectors are lurking on the other side of Submit.
The post Which AI Humanizer Passes GPTZero, Turnitin, and Copyleaks? appeared first on Android Headlines.
The post Bitcoin Bull Run Not Over Yet? Analysts See More Upside Ahead appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
Bitcoin’s recent rise has started a new debate among traders and analysts. Many are wondering if the bull run is coming to an end or if a new rally is just beginning. One of the most respected crypto chart analysts, Stockmoney Lizards, thinks this cycle is different from the past ones and says Bitcoin may still have more room to grow.
Traditionally, Bitcoin’s market follows a four-year cycle, roughly 1.5 years from halving to peak, and four years from one peak to the next. By that logic, the market should now be entering its bear phase.
But according to Stockmoney Lizards, this cycle is different. The total market cap has grown from $10 billion in 2016 to over $2 trillion in 2025, making simple historical comparisons less relevant.
Unlike previous cycles marked by dramatic parabolic rises, Bitcoin has been climbing in a steady channel. There hasn’t been a “blow-off top” or explosive hype phase yet, a sign that the cycle could still have room to grow.
One major difference this time is institutional involvement. Spot Bitcoin ETFs now hold roughly $150 billion worth of BTC, and inflows have remained strong throughout October.
Stockmoney Lizards points out that such large-scale investment reduces the chances of a -90% crash, which was common in previous cycles.
Apart from it, on-chain data like the Satoshimeter shows the market hasn’t reached its typical “hype zone.” Other technical patterns, like three rising valleys and Bollinger Band compression, also suggest a strong foundation for another leg up.
Adding bullishness to the analysis, crypto analyst Castrades says Bitcoin is still moving in a large ABC correction pattern, which often appears after big rallies.
He points out a key resistance area between $117,000 and $119,500 — calling it the “final resistance zone.” If Bitcoin can’t break above this range, it might drop back toward $94,000–$97,000.
But if the price climbs above $123,500, Castrades believes it could start a new strong bullish phase instead.
The post Bitcoin and Ethereum ETFs See Over $280M in Inflows appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
Bitcoin and Ethereum spot ETFs kept their upward momentum on October 27, drawing a combined $283 million in net inflows. Bitcoin ETFs led with $149 million, marking their third consecutive day of gains. Ethereum ETFs followed with $134 million in positive flows, with all nine funds recording no outflows. The steady inflows highlight growing market optimism and rising institutional confidence in the two largest cryptocurrencies.
The post Trump-Linked American Bitcoin Adds 1,414 BTC Worth $163 Million appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
Trump-linked American Bitcoin Corp, co-founded by Eric and Donald Trump Jr., just acquired 1,414 Bitcoins valued at $163 million, boosting its total holdings to 3,865 BTC worth nearly $445 million. Formed in March after a merger with Hut 8’s mining assets, American Bitcoin listed on Nasdaq in September. The company combines mining with direct buys, and now ranks among the top 25 public Bitcoin holders globally.
The post Henrik Zeberg Predicts Ethereum Rally Before Massive Crypto Market Crash appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
Henrik Zeberg, the Head Macro Economist at Swissblock, known for connecting macroeconomic cycles with asset bubbles, says we are now living through what he calls “the biggest bubble in modern financial history.”
He predicts that Ethereum (ETH) is poised for a significant price surge in the near term, followed by a major crash across the entire cryptocurrency market.
According to Zeberg, current global financial conditions are fueling a “blow-off top,” a phase characterized by extreme price euphoria before a market peak.
In a tweet post, he anticipates that Ethereum will not only join but may outperform Bitcoin in this sharp upward move, driven by rising institutional interest, Layer 2 adoption, and Ethereum’s essential role in the DeFi and Web3 ecosystems.
Data and analysis after the October market flash crash indicate that ETH saw a 52.9% surge in futures volume, highlighting enduring demand and market resilience even as volatility persists.
#ETH will SOAR!
— Henrik Zeberg (@HenrikZeberg) October 27, 2025
We are close
Meanwhile, institutional developments such as growing spot-ETH ETF interest and the expansion of tokenized assets expected to surpass $25 billion by early 2025, support Zeberg’s view of Ethereum’s strong near-term potential.
Zeberg warns that global markets are in the “biggest bubble ever,” fueled by years of easy money and investor greed. But with inflation returning, he says the era of “free liquidity” is over.
He predicts a final “blow-off top,” a sharp, emotional rally before a major crash. According to him, Ethereum could outperform Bitcoin in this last surge as altcoin excitement peaks, but both will likely face a deep correction afterward.
Drawing from history, Zeberg compares today’s euphoria to the 1840s railway boom and the 2000 dot-com bubble, both revolutionary, yet followed by painful collapses.
Ethereum’s recent bounce from $3,686 to $4,134 shows its volatility and potential for rapid gains.
As of now, Ethereum (ETH) is showing signs of a potential breakout as its price forms a symmetrical triangle, a pattern that often leads to strong moves once the price breaks out.
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) sits around 54, showing that buying pressure is building, but the asset isn’t overbought yet, suggesting there’s still room for further gains if momentum continues.
Stay ahead with breaking news, expert analysis, and real-time updates on the latest trends in Bitcoin, altcoins, DeFi, NFTs, and more.
While both are major cryptocurrencies, Ethereum’s value is also tied to its foundational role in powering decentralized finance (DeFi) and Web3 applications, not just as a digital asset.
Lower rates boost market liquidity and investor optimism, often fueling crypto rallies—Ethereum could benefit the most.
As per our Ethereum price forecast 2025, the ETH price could reach a maximum of $9,428.11.
The post HBAR ETF Goes Live on Nasdaq During U.S Government Shutdown appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
The Hedera (HBAR) community is celebrating a major milestone as the network’s first U.S. exchange-traded fund (ETF) is set to start trading on Nasdaq this Tuesday, October 28, 2025.
The Canary Capital HBAR ETF, trading under the ticker HBR, will give investors direct spot exposure to HBAR, making it easier for institutions and advisors to invest in the network without managing crypto wallets.
Crypto Analyst Mark Chadwickx confirmed the listing, calling it a major step for institutional access to HBAR through Nasdaq. Many saw this as a huge credibility boost for the network.
Canary Capital CEO Steven McClurg confirmed the ETF launch after the company completed all required filings, using the SEC’s shutdown playbook, which allows new ETFs to go live 20 days after filing, even when regulators are short-staffed.
The new HBAR ETF will hold actual HBAR tokens in custody with BitGo and Coinbase Custody, while CoinDesk Indices will provide official price tracking.
Alongside the HBAR product, Canary is also rolling out a Litecoin (LTC) ETF, both debuting in what’s turning out to be a busy week for new crypto fund listings in the U.S.
The Hedera ETF launch stirred quite a buzz on social media. X users praised Hedera’s quiet strength, noting that while Bitcoin and Ethereum dominate headlines, Hedera has been steadily handling over 10,000 transactions per second for giants like IBM and Google. They described the ETF launch as “institutional stealth mode activated,” hinting at growing big-money interest behind the scenes.
However, not everyone was convinced. Another User, LuckyToken7777, cautioned that listing and full SEC approval are different matters, warning traders to be careful of potential hype-driven price moves.
However, the launch timing isn’t random. In mid-September, the SEC approved new listing standards that make it easier for exchanges to list spot commodity ETFs like HBAR, Solana, and Litecoin. These new standards cut down the long review times that previously delayed crypto ETF launches.
Despite the ongoing U.S. government shutdown, Elenor Terrett explained that these ETFs can still go live because the 8-A filings, which register ETF shares for trading, have been certified, and the S-1 filings include language allowing them to take effect automatically after 20 days without SEC intervention.
Having said that, this rule change has opened the door for multiple ETF debuts, including Bitwise’s Solana ETF on the NYSE and Canary’s listings on Nasdaq, all happening within days.
For Hedera, this marks a major turning point. The ETF not only increases market visibility but also gives traditional investors access to HBAR through regulated brokerage accounts, a big leap for a blockchain known for its enterprise and institutional partnerships with companies like IBM and Google.
Stay ahead with breaking news, expert analysis, and real-time updates on the latest trends in Bitcoin, altcoins, DeFi, NFTs, and more.
The Canary Capital HBAR ETF (ticker: HBR) is a new investment fund on Nasdaq that holds actual Hedera tokens, giving investors direct spot exposure to HBAR without needing to manage a crypto wallet.
You can invest in the HBAR ETF (HBR) through any standard brokerage account that offers access to Nasdaq, just like you would trade any other stock or exchange-traded fund, starting October 28, 2025.
The ticker symbol for the new spot Hedera ETF on the Nasdaq exchange is HBR. This is the symbol you will use to find and trade the fund in your brokerage account.
The post Crypto News Today [Live] Updates On October 28 2025 appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
October 28, 2025 07:42:31 UTC
Market analysts are urging calm among XRP holders amid rising confusion in the community. According to recent analysis, XRP’s current mid-base channel movement suggests accumulation following its initial rally, with even the latest liquidation wick closing within range a sign of continued buyer interest. However, experts caution that consecutive closes below this channel could signal trouble, as a critical resonance line from past pivots sits just beneath. While upside potential remains, projections of $9 XRP are seen as highly optimistic, representing a 4.236 Fibonacci extension. Analysts recommend a laddered exit between $5–$10, emphasizing the need for a clear trading plan over speculation.
October 28, 2025 06:51:25 UTC
Economist Peter Schiff has criticized the conflicting narratives around the U.S. economy and monetary policy. In a post on X, Schiff pointed out that those claiming the economy is “booming” are simultaneously calling for the Federal Reserve to slash interest rates. He questioned the rationale behind cutting rates when inflation remains at least 50% above the Fed’s 2% target and is still rising, arguing that such actions contradict claims of economic strength
October 28, 2025 06:47:53 UTC
India has verified over 34 crore government documents on its National Blockchain Platform as of October 21, 2025 a major leap in digital governance. Launched under MeitY’s National Blockchain Framework (NBF) in 2024 with a ₹64.76 crore budget, it aims to enhance trust, transparency, and efficiency. Powered by the Vishvasya Blockchain Stack, the platform supports projects like Property Chain, Judiciary Chain, and Certificate Chain. Over 21,000 officials have been trained, with integrations across RBI, TRAI, and NSDL. India is embedding blockchain into governance, setting a global benchmark for digital trust and transparency.
October 28, 2025 06:47:53 UTC
Bitcoin spot ETFs recorded $149 million in net inflows on October 27 their third straight day of gains — signaling renewed investor confidence ahead of the Fed meeting. Ethereum spot ETFs also saw robust activity, attracting $134 million in net inflows with zero outflows across all nine funds. The consistent demand highlights growing institutional appetite for crypto exposure despite near-term market volatility.
October 28, 2025 06:47:53 UTC
According to data from Artemis, on-chain perpetuals protocol Lighter has outpaced Aster and Hyperliquid in daily trading volume for three consecutive days. As of October 26, Lighter’s daily trading volume hit $8.6 billion, while its open interest stood at $1.7 billion — still lower than its competitors. The surge in volume highlights Lighter’s growing traction among on-chain traders despite its relatively smaller open interest base.
October 28, 2025 06:43:48 UTC
Ahead of today’s Federal Reserve meeting, BlackRock has reportedly sold 17,400 BTC valued at over $2 billion — and continues to reduce its holdings every few hours. The timing has stirred market speculation, with traders debating whether the world’s largest asset manager is anticipating short-term volatility or positioning for a post-FOMC rebound. The sell-off comes just as Bitcoin hovers near the $115,000 mark amid broader market uncertainty.
October 28, 2025 05:59:15 UTC
Crypto analyst Michaël van de Poppe predicts a strong rebound for SEI as the altcoin retests a crucial support zone after its initial upward move. He notes that such retests are common in altcoin markets — where price builds strength before the next breakout. Van de Poppe expects SEI to consolidate before targeting around 500 sats, potentially delivering a 3–4x gain against Bitcoin over the next 2–4 months.
$SEI is at a strong support zone as it retests this level for support after its first run upwards.
— Michaël van de Poppe (@CryptoMichNL) October 27, 2025
This happens quite often on the #Altcoin markets.
Finding support –> bounce upwards, first resistance point, there's a sell-off as people want to get out of the position –>… pic.twitter.com/o1ulk840np
October 28, 2025 05:35:00 UTC
Bitcoin is showing renewed market confidence as it exits the “fear” zone in investor sentiment. The Crypto Fear & Greed Index climbed to a neutral score of 51 on Sunday, up 11 points from Saturday and more than 20 points higher than last week. This shift follows Bitcoin’s rebound to around $115,000 after weeks of caution triggered by Trump’s China tariff announcement. The sentiment turnaround signals a potential return of bullish momentum in the broader crypto market.
October 28, 2025 05:32:30 UTC
A strong start to the week has Bitcoin traders bracing for a possible short-term correction as the FOMC meeting approaches. Analysts suggest a retest of the $112,000 level could be healthy before the next leg up. With bullish momentum building, many expect Bitcoin to rebound quickly — potentially setting the stage for a new all-time high once the Fed’s rate decision is out.
October 28, 2025 05:19:59 UTC
Crypto markets kicked off the week on a bullish note, with Bitcoin briefly surpassing $116,000 and Ethereum climbing above $4,240 their highest levels in two weeks. The surge comes ahead of the FOMC meetings starting tomorrow, fueling speculation around potential policy cues. Adding to the optimism, renewed enthusiasm surrounding Trump’s Crypto Advisory Board has further boosted trader sentiment across major digital assets.
On October 28, Samsung put its most ambitious Galaxy Z TriFold smartphone prototype on showcase on the sidelines of the APEC Summit.
At K-Tech Showcase, Samsung officially unveiled its Galaxy Z TriFold smartphone, which features a dual-hinge mechanism to fold twice. This innovative form factor is set to be commercialized by Samsung by the end of the year.
Following this showcase, we’re expecting a little bigger reveal by Samsung during the APEC Summit, which is being held on October 31 and November 1.
It’s an expansion to the existing Galaxy Z Fold lineup, which features a single hinge and unfolds a single time. The dual-hinge mechanism integrates three folding panels into one, and the smartphone can be unfolded twice.
Source – Chosun
The unit put on showcase is a prototype unit, as the mass production and official release in expected by the end of the year. Until then, Samsung might bring even more refinements to the hardware, software, and appearance.
Source – Chosun
Samsung did not allow visitors to touch or use the device directly. It was placed behind a protective glass display case. Meanwhile, tipster Phoneart has also dropped pictures showing off a closer look at the phone’s design.
Source – Phoneart (@UniverseIce)
Galaxy Z TriFold is rumored to have a 6.5-inch cover screen, and the main screens could be extended to 10 inches. That said, the device will become even bigger than the Galaxy Z Fold 7 phone, which has an 8-inch screen.
While the US release is unlikely, Samsung might launch the Galaxy Z TriFold with a price tag of between $2,600 $2,800. Its presence could be limited to select countries: South Korea, China, Singapore, Taiwan, and the UAE.
The post Samsung unveils the Galaxy Z TriFold smartphone appeared first on Sammy Fans.
iQOO unveiled the iQOO 15 in China last week, and today, the company announced that the iQOO 15 will be launched in India on November 26. The smartphone will likely be sold through iQOO's Indian website and Amazon.in in India, but its pricing and sale date are yet to be officially revealed. The Indian model of last year's iQOO 13 came with a smaller battery (6,000 mAh vs. 6,150 mAh), and it's unclear if there will be any differences in specs between the iQOO 15's Indian and global/Chinese versions. However, the two features we know will remain the same across all regions are the Snapdragon...
Robert Lewandowski was one of the biggest absentees for FC Barcelona during Sunday’s El Clásico against Real Madrid. After falling 2–1 at the Santiago Bernabéu, the Blaugrana have received a major boost regarding the Polish striker’s recovery.
Following the October international break, Lewandowski became the center of controversy after suffering a torn biceps femoris in his left thigh during Poland’s match against Lithuania. The most debated point was that the striker reportedly sustained the injury midgame but decided to play all 90 minutes, with only a light bandage applied to the affected area at halftime.
According to Spanish outlet Diario Sport, Lewandowski completed Monday’s training session with his teammates, a significant step forward in his recovery. The session, led by head coach Hansi Flick, was geared toward players who didn’t feature against Real Madrid, and Lewandowski’s participation is an encouraging sign for the matches ahead.
The veteran forward has struggled with fitness issues since preseason and has yet to hit top form, totaling just 431 minutes across nine appearances this season. That means, in addition to missing four of Barcelona’s 13 games in the 2025–26 campaign, he’s averaged under 48 minutes per outing, a considerable setback for someone who’s been the team’s top goalscorer last season.
Lewandowski’s contract with Barcelona expires at the end of the current season, and with reports suggesting he could leave the club next summer, his future remains uncertain. Still, with four goals so far in the 2025–26 campaign, the 37-year-old’s focus will be on returning to the pitch and finding consistency, especially with the 2026 World Cup looming on the horizon.
October has been a rough month for Barcelona, who began with a 2–1 loss to Paris Saint-Germain, followed by a 4–1 defeat to Sevilla, and capped it off with Sunday’s El Clásico loss to Real Madrid. Now sitting second in La Liga with 22 points from 10 games, and outside the top eight in the UEFA Champions League, Barca are eager to bounce back.
Their next test comes on Sunday at home against Elche, a match that could mark Lewandowski’s return, either as a starter or off the bench. After that, Flick’s side will travel to Belgium to face Club Brugge on Wednesday, November 5, in a matchup where they’ll be clear favorites, an opportunity to turn the page after a difficult stretch.
Lionel Messi has been reluctant to confirm his participation in the 2026 World Cup, despite being asked about it repeatedly in recent years. With less than seven months until the tournament kicks off, the Inter Miami forward explained how and when he’ll decide whether to join the Argentina national team.
After leading Argentina to glory at both the 2022 World Cup and the 2024 Copa América, Messi has once again guided the reigning champions to the top of the CONMEBOL qualifiers. The forward continues to play a pivotal role under Lionel Scaloni, who has already made it clear that the decision to take part in the next World Cup will rest entirely with Messi.
NBC News’ Tom Llamas asked Messi whether he plans to play in the 2026 edition, which will be hosted across the United States, Canada, and Mexico, and the Argentine icon didn’t hide his enthusiasm: “It’s something extraordinary to be able to be in a World Cup, and I would love to.”
The 38-year-old then explained the criteria he’ll use to make his final call. “I would like to be at the World Cup in good form and be an important part in helping my national team, if I am there. I will evaluate this day by day when preseason starts with Inter Miami and see if I can really be 100%, if I can be useful to the group, to the national team, and then I will make a decision,” Messi stated.
As he has stated before, Messi won’t make a decision unless he feels fully fit and capable of contributing. While he has continued to feature in recent call-ups and has starred in the 2025 MLS season, his physical condition, and the fact that he’ll turn 39 during the tournament, will be key factors in his decision-making process.
Messi closed by reflecting on Argentina’s strong run over the past year and his motivation to keep competing: “Obviously, I am very excited because it’s about the World Cup. We come after winning the last World Cup, and being able to defend it on the field again is incredible, because it’s always a dream to play for the national team, especially in official tournaments.”
After years of heartbreak and even a brief retirement from international play, Messi finally completed his lifelong mission by winning the World Cup with Argentina in Qatar in 2022. Since then, the pressure has lifted, and in the twilight of his career, he’s still playing with the same joy that defined his early years.
Reflecting on that triumph, Messi didn’t hide what it meant to him: “It was the dream of my life. It was also true that it was the only thing missing at a professional level because I had been lucky enough to have achieved everything at an individual level, at a team level with Barcelona, and I think that’s every player’s dream. When you ask a player what their dream is, it’s to be world champion.”
The Cardano weekly chart is still looking strongly bullish according to independent technician Charting Guy (@ChartingGuy on X) who resurfaced his long-running Fibonacci roadmap and channel study.
His latest post on X on October 26 noted that “ADA is fine as long as uptrend holds,” a view that is anchored in a multi-year rising channel that has contained price action since the 2018–2019 base. The channel features a lower rail now passing through roughly the $0.33–$0.35 area, a midline that has behaved as a recurring pivot since 2020, and overhead parallels that intersect with Fibonacci extension targets later in the cycle.
The chart history mapped on his visuals is orderly. The 2021–2022 bear trend, drawn as a steep descending line from the prior peak, ended into the channel’s lower support and resolved through a series of falling trendline breakouts during 2023 and early 2024. Since Q4 2023, the chart has shown a series of higher highs and higher lows. Currently, the ADA price is again guided by a falling trendline.
Everything in the layout revolves around the Fibonacci ladder. The retracement set on the right margin—derived from the 2021 peak to the cycle low—marks 0% at $0.23488, then $0.33360 (0.136), $0.43180 (0.236), $0.62932 (0.382), a mid-range 0.5 at $0.85, $1.15694 (0.618), $1.43911 (0.702), $1.78464 (0.786), $2.32189 (0.888), and $3.09981 (1.000). Above that stack, the cycle extensions are plotted at $6.25325 (1.272), $9.00941 (1.414) and $15.26831 (1.618).
Those numbers are consistent with how the analyst framed the market earlier in the year. On April 27 he wrote that “ADA fibs are very important here. The 0.618 is a STRONG resistance… the 0.382 MUST hold… neutral until one of these breaks on a weekly close.” That roadmap has aged intact.
Rallies through spring and summer repeatedly stalled in the 0.500–0.618 zone, with the 0.618 level at $1.15694 capping advances. Pullbacks, in turn, have found bids near the 0.382 pivot at $0.62932.
On September 18, after that rejection, he updated that “ADA higher low … higher high pending… still targeting 1.272 fib this cycle,” tying the price structure back to the extension grid. The implication is not casual moon-math; it is geometric. If ADA continues to defend the uptrend defined by the channel’s lower rail and, crucially, converts the 0.618 retracement at $1.15694 into support on weekly closes, the path reopens into the upper retracement shelf—$1.43911 at 0.702 and $1.78464 at 0.786—before confronting the 0.888 marker at $2.32189.
A yellow waypoint for a higher high (on the main chart) sits near ~$2.30, deliberately aligning with that 0.888 level to flag a logical checkpoint for the next impulsive leg beneath the full retrace at $3.09981.
Only beyond that zone does the headline question come into play. The analyst’s cycle objective is the 1.272 extension at $6.25325. On his canvas, that target is not an orphaned price label; it intersects with the upper parallels of the multi-year rising channel further out in time, which means the extension is technically consistent with the same structure that has governed ADA since the last cycle’s base.
The risk management side of the ledger remains equally explicit: lose the 0.382 at $0.62932 on a weekly closing basis and the neutral-to-constructive stance is impaired, pushing focus back to $0.43180 and $0.33360, with the 0% anchor at $0.23488 defining the absolute boundary of the cycle floor inside the channel’s lower third.
As the latest candles on the charts show, ADA sits mid-channel with the higher low confirmed and the range unresolved beneath descending trendline supply. The triggers are unchanged and numerically clear. A sustained weekly close above $1.15694 would validate an attempt toward $1.44, $1.78, and $2.32, with $3.10 the final retrace before extension math takes over.
A failure through $0.62932 would flatten the uptrend call. Between those guardrails, the analyst’s October 26 message reads less like bravado and more like a conditional statement embedded in the chart itself: Cardano can still reach $6.25 this cycle—but only if the uptrend continues to hold and the 0.618 ceiling finally gives way.
At press time, ADA traded at $0.67.
The XRP market is bracing for a new phase of intense volatility, with anticipation growing around key legal, regulatory, and institutional developments. Ripple CEO Brad Garlinghouse has recently addressed the XRP community, offering guidance and setting expectations for what is to come.
The cryptocurrency world is buzzing with increased anticipation for XRP, following a series of strategic announcements from Ripple and compelling technical analysis. Popular crypto news source CryptosRus has highlighted on X that the altcoin is poised for a sharp move, as Ripple CEO Brad Garlinghouse has mentioned that investors should be prepared for a substantial shift.
At the core of this move, Ripple has just launched Ripple Prime, a new global prime brokerage service tailored for institutional clients. According to the company, Ripple Prime will be powered by Ripple’s foundational digital asset infrastructure, encompassing its robust solutions for payments, crypto custody, and stablecoin capabilities, alongside XRP.
However, CEO Brad Garlinghouse called this move another step toward building the internet of value, emphasizing that the XRP sits at the center of everything Ripple does. CryptosRus noted that the altcoin has recently bounced off a key support level at $2.33. This technical indicator is signaling a potential 30% rally, with an initial target of $3.45 or even higher, as market momentum continues to build.
An analyst known as TylerHillYT, who is also the president of FluenceGlobal and Co-Founder of the CSS, has also stated that the XRP price comeback is showing structural strength. In just a day, the token burn rate spiked 29%, mirroring its 29% price surge, signaling a synchronized increase in both on-chain demand and heightened investor activity.
This Ripple’s deeper expansion into traditional finance and the recent launch of Ripple Prime have caused the network usage to ramp up again. TylerHillYT emphasized that at the accelerated pace, XRP is not just riding a wave of market momentum, but it’s rebuilding its long-term narrative. However, the burn acceleration with renewed institutional traction could be the early signs of a sustained upward trajectory, pushing the token structurally toward the $3.00 mark.
While the digital asset market is vibrating with renewed excitement surrounding XRP, a prominent crypto influencer and creator on Binance and CMC, Jack, has revealed that the bulls have firmly smashed through the critical $2.55 resistance level with conviction. This decisive breakout has now set the immediate sights of traders on $2.80 and beyond.
Jack mentioned that whale activity is back, and the Open Interest (OI) is climbing steadily, while sentiment is flipping fast. If this powerful momentum holds, the next significant pit stop for XRP could be the $3.00 mark and beyond.
Data shows cryptocurrency short investors have suffered large liquidations during the past day as Bitcoin and altcoins have made a recovery.
Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies have witnessed a rally during the past day, breaking away from the slump the market had earlier fallen into. At the height of this surge, Bitcoin broke past $116,000, while Ethereum touched $4,250.
The assets have since seen a small retracement. The chart below shows how BTC’s latest trajectory has looked.
At its current price of $115,400, Bitcoin is up about 4% on the weekly timeframe. Similarly, Ethereum at $4,160 is in a profit of 3.4%. Most other digital assets have seen similarly positive returns, although there are some outliers like Tron, which is down more than 7%. The market-wide recovery during the past day has meant that a large amount of short liquidations have piled up on the derivatives exchanges.
According to data from CoinGlass, about $467 million in cryptocurrency-related derivatives contracts have been liquidated over the last 24 hours. A contract is said to be “liquidated” when its platform forcibly shuts it down after it accumulates losses of a certain degree (as defined by the exchange).
Given that coins across the board have rebounded, the contracts crossing this threshold would mostly be the short ones. And indeed, the data would confirm so.
As is visible above, liquidations related to bearish cryptocurrency bets have reached $358 million in this window, representing 76.6% of the total flush in the sector. Bitcoin led the liquidations with $177 million in contracts involved, while Ethereum contributed the second most with $130 million in contracts. Out of the rest, Solana witnessed the largest flush at $34 million.
In some other news, Bitcoin spot exchange-traded funds (ETFs) have observed a notable amount of inflows over the past month, as CryptoQuant community analyst Maartunn has pointed out in an X post.
Spot ETFs refer to investment vehicles that allow investors to gain exposure to an asset without having to directly own it. The US SEC approved BTC spot ETFs in January of 2024. Here is the chart shared by the analyst that shows how the 30-day netflow for these vehicles has fluctuated since:
As displayed in the above graph, Bitcoin spot ETFs have seen inflows of $4.7 billion during the past month. Ethereum spot ETFs, which gained approval in mid-2024, have also enjoyed inflows in this period, although their value of $983 million is significantly less than BTC’s.
Why did the crypto investor bring a ladder to the exchange? Because the next big meme coin was ready to “scale” new heights! Meme coins have transformed from internet jokes into serious investment opportunities. Recent market surges highlight BullZilla, SPX6900, and Shiba Inu, each establishing a unique position. Investors now focus on projects offering structured growth, strong community support, and real utility, combining excitement with tangible market potential. These top meme coins exemplify the dynamic opportunities in today’s evolving crypto World.
BullZilla ($BZIL) stands out as a promising meme coin. Its phased presale, scarcity-driven tokenomics, and staking incentives have drawn significant investor attention. Over 3,300 holders and 31 billion tokens sold reflect strong early engagement. With mechanisms fostering scarcity, community growth, and structured ROI, BullZilla merges hype with utility. Early participants can benefit from high returns while supporting a sustainable project. This combination positions BullZilla as a leading contender among the top 100x meme coin presales with potential in 2025.
SPX6900 ($SPX) has firmly established itself as a key player in the meme coin market. Currently priced at $1.12, it boasts a market capitalization exceeding $1 billion and a 24-hour trading volume of about $47 million. With more than 215,000 holders, SPX6900 reflects increasing investor confidence and growing market interest. Its evolution from a niche token into a billion-dollar asset demonstrates how strong community engagement, strategic development, and consistent updates can enhance value and ensure long-term relevance.
SPX6900’s growth stems from active community engagement, strategic partnerships, and regular development updates. These factors foster investor trust, enhance market visibility, and create momentum, helping SPX6900 stand out in the increasingly competitive meme coin World.
Compared to many meme coins, SPX6900 emphasizes utility, structured development, and long-term growth strategies. This approach differentiates it from purely speculative tokens, attracting investors seeking credibility, sustained value, and potential for lasting market relevance.
BullZilla ($BZIL) is rapidly emerging as a top 100x meme coin presale in 2025. Currently in Stage 8 of its presale, $BZIL trades at $0.00019906, with over $980k raised and 31 billion tokens sold. Its growing community of more than 3,300 holders reflects strong investor confidence. Early participants may achieve an ROI of 2,548.15% from Stage 8B to the listing price, highlighting BullZilla’s structured presale as a high-growth opportunity for investors seeking substantial returns in the competitive meme coin market.
A $1,000 investment today secures approximately 5.023 million $BZIL tokens, with Stage 8C anticipating a price increase to $0.00020573. Strategic features, including staking, referral rewards, and token burns, reinforce scarcity and long-term growth. BullZilla’s strong presale performance, active community engagement, and innovative tokenomics combine to create one of the most promising top 100x meme coin presales. For investors seeking high-return opportunities in 2025, BullZilla offers a structured, high-growth project with significant potential in the competitive crypto World.
Joining the BullZilla presale is simple and secure. Investors can visit the official BullZilla website to access step-by-step instructions for purchasing $BZIL tokens. The platform is designed for both beginners and experienced crypto enthusiasts, ensuring smooth transactions. Participants can fund their wallets, select the desired token amount, and confirm their purchase quickly. This streamlined process reduces errors and increases confidence for first-time presale participants, creating a seamless investment experience while supporting the growing BullZilla community.
BullZilla’s HODL Furnace allows token holders to stake their $BZIL for rewards, enhancing long-term investment value. By locking tokens, participants contribute to market stability while earning additional tokens as incentives. Staking reduces circulating supply, which can positively influence token value. This mechanism combines financial benefit with community engagement, encouraging investors to remain committed. Full staking instructions and potential earnings are outlined, making it straightforward for holders to maximize their returns while supporting the project’s growth.
Presale tokens might not appear immediately due to network delays or wallet synchronization issues. It’s recommended to wait a few hours and, if necessary, contact the project’s official support channels for guidance and confirmation.
Official channels usually feature verified badges, consistent branding, and links from the project’s website. Avoid channels with minor name differences, unusual activity, or lack of verification, and always cross-check announcements with official sources before acting.
Presales allow early access to tokens at discounted rates, offering potential high returns if the project succeeds. While the upside can be significant, participants should understand risks, project credibility, and market volatility before investing.
Shiba Inu ($SHIB) continues to dominate the meme coin market. Currently priced at $0.00001050, it has a market capitalization of $6.18 billion and a 24-hour trading volume of $173.8 million. With over 2.87 million holders, SHIB maintains its leading position through strong community engagement and strategic ecosystem developments. Consistent updates, partnerships, and utility-focused projects help preserve investor confidence, ensuring liquidity and long-term relevance while balancing meme coin hype with tangible market growth and adoption.
Shiba Inu’s lasting popularity is driven by its dedicated community, consistent ecosystem updates, and strategic partnerships. These efforts ensure ongoing engagement, media attention, and investor confidence, helping SHIB maintain relevance and a strong position within the competitive meme coin market.
Despite rising competition from new meme coins, Shiba Inu maintains a strong market presence. Its extensive holder base, active community, and continuous development initiatives help SHIB outperform many rivals in terms of liquidity, visibility, and overall adoption.
Recent market activity highlights the continued relevance of meme coins. SPX6900 demonstrates steady growth with strong adoption, while Shiba Inu maintains its massive community and high market cap. Amid these developments, BullZilla’s presale performance, unique tokenomics, and community-driven incentives stand out. Investors participating in BullZilla now benefit from projected high ROI, scarcity mechanisms, and staking rewards. Its combination of hype, utility, and strategy positions it as a leading contender in the top 100x meme coin presales category, capturing both attention and investment potential.
BullZilla showcases how well-structured presales drive early participation and long-term engagement. Mechanisms like the HODL Furnace and Roarblood Vault incentivize investors to contribute actively while ensuring growth sustainability. With over 3,300 holders, $980k raised, and projections exceeding 2,500% ROI, BullZilla presents a tangible, exciting opportunity for investors seeking to maximize returns in the current market World. Strategic involvement now can create substantial rewards as the token launches and the community expands.
Secure your stake now – join over 3,300 early investors and claim millions of $BZIL tokens before the next surge.
This article is for informational purposes only and does not constitute financial advice. Readers should conduct their own research before investing in any cryptocurrency or presale project.
Read More: Maximize Your Returns: BullZilla Dominates as the Top 100x Meme Coin Presale in 2025 While SPX6900 and Shiba Inu Gain Momentum">Maximize Your Returns: BullZilla Dominates as the Top 100x Meme Coin Presale in 2025 While SPX6900 and Shiba Inu Gain Momentum
Cybersecurity in 2025 is not just the ability to ensure that hackers stay away. It is about securing massive networks, confidential data and millions of online interactions daily that make businesses alive. The world has never been more connected through global enterprise systems and that translates to more entry points to intruders. The 2025 Cost of a Data Breach Report by IBM states that the average breach now costs an organization and its visitors an average of 5.6 million dollars or approximately 15 percent more than it was only two years ago in 2023. That is a definite sign of one thing, that is, traditional methodologies are no longer enough.
This is where the blockchain-based cybersecurity protocols are starting gaining attention. Originally serving as the basis of cryptocurrencies, blockchain is becoming one of the most powerful barriers to enterprise systems. Blockchain is equally powerful in the cybersecurity domain because of the same characteristics that render it the optimal choice in the digital currency industry, transparency, decentralization, and immutability of data.
In this article, we shall endeavor to articulate clearly how blockchain will play its role in security to the large organizations. We are going to cover some of the definitions in the field of cybersecurity that will relate to blockchain, why cybersecurity is becoming such a large portion of 2025, and how it will be used by organizations to mitigate cybersecurity threats.
Blockchain can sound like a complicated word. But in simple terms, it means a digital record book that no one can secretly change. All transactions or actions recorded are checked and stored by many different computers at the same time. Even though one computer may be compromised, the “truth” is still safe among the other stored copies.
This is great for organizations. Large organizations run massive IT systems that have thousands of users, partners, and vendors accessing data. They hold financial records, customer data, supply chain documents, etc. If a hacker gets access to a centralized database, they can change or steal the information very easily. But with a blockchain, the control is distributed across the network, making it much harder for a hacker, especially in large organizations.
In a blockchain cybersecurity model, data can be broken into blocks and shared across the network of nodes (virtual), where the nodes will verify the data before being added to the blockchain. Once added, it is not possible to delete or modify it in secret. This makes it perfect for applications that require audit trails, integrity and identity management.
While blockchain is not an alternative to firewalls or antivirus software, it offers additional security similar to the solid base of a trusted solution that assures the data cannot be modified in secret. For example, a company could use blockchain to record every employee login and file access. If a hacker tries to fake an entry, the other nodes will notice the mismatch immediately.
In 2025, there have already been digital attacks that have never been witnessed. In another instance, Microsoft declared in April 2025 that over 160,000 ransomware assaults took place every day, a rise of 40 percent compared to 2024. In the meantime, Gartner predicts that almost 68 percent of large enterprises will include blockchain as part of its security architecture by 2026.
Businesses are seeking blockchain since it eliminates a significant amount of historic burdens of possessing a digital security feature. The conventional cybersecurity functionality is based on a central database and central administrator. This implies that; in case the central administrator is compromised, the whole system may be compromised. Blockchain is not operated in this manner. No single central administrator can change or manipulate records in secrecy.
Here is a simple comparison that shows why many enterprises are shifting to blockchain-based protocols:
| Feature | Traditional Cybersecurity | Blockchain-Based Cybersecurity |
| Data integrity | Centralized logs that can be changed | Distributed ledger, tamper-proof |
| Single point of failure | High risk if central server is hacked | Very low, multiple verifying nodes |
| Audit trail | Often incomplete | Transparent, immutable record |
| Deployment complexity | Easier setup but limited trust | Needs expertise but stronger trust |
| Cost trend (2025) | Rising due to more threats | Falling with automation and shared ledgers |
As global regulations get tighter, enterprises also need systems that can prove they followed rules correctly. For instance, the European Union’s Digital Resilience Act of 2025 now requires financial firms to keep verifiable digital audit trails. Blockchain helps meet such requirements automatically because every transaction is recorded forever.
Another major reason is insider threats. In a 2025 Verizon Data Breach Report, 27 percent of all corporate breaches came from inside the company. Blockchain helps fix this problem by giving everyone a transparent log of who did what and when.
There are two main types of blockchains – permissionless and permissioned. A permissionless blockchain provides access to anyone publicly, for example, Bitcoin or Ethereum. A permissioned blockchain is typically used internally to an organization that only provides access to users with permission. Many enterprises tend to favor permissioned chains because of the security, compliance, and data control.
Let’s take a look at some of the form classes of blockchain technologies that are being used in enterprise cybersecurity today.
Smart contracts are programs that automatically run on the blockchain. A smart contract can execute the rules that are coded in the contract without an administrator needing to take action. For example, the smart contract would not permit an unauthorized user to access the information until an authorized digital key is used. The benefit of smart contracts is that they remove the human from the access granting process as a result limiting human error.
Traditional identity systems use central databases, which can be hacked or misused. Blockchain makes identity management decentralized. Each employee or partner gets a cryptographic identity stored on the blockchain. Access permissions can be verified instantly without sending personal data across multiple systems.
Many enterprises face the same types of threats, but they rarely share that information in real time. Blockchain allows companies to share verified threat data securely without exposing sensitive details. IBM’s 2025 Enterprise Security Survey found that blockchain-based information sharing cut response time to new cyber attacks by 32 percent across participating companies.
| Protocol / Technology | Use Case in Enterprise Security | Main Benefit |
| Permissioned Blockchain | Secure internal records and data sharing | Controlled access with strong audit trail |
| Smart Contracts | Automated compliance and access control | No manual errors or delays |
| Blockchain-IoT Networks | Secure connected devices in factories | Device trust and tamper detection |
| Decentralized IAM Systems | Employee verification and login | Reduces credential theft |
| Threat Intelligence Ledger | Global cyber threat data sharing | Real-time awareness and faster defense |
Designing a blockchain-based security system takes planning. Enterprises must figure out where blockchain fits best in their cybersecurity setup. It should not replace every system, but rather add strength to the areas that need higher trust, like logs, identity, and access.
A good plan usually moves in stages.
Enterprises first need to check their current cybersecurity setup. Some already have strong monitoring systems and access control, others still depend on older tools. Blockchain works best when the company already understands where its weak spots are.
Blockchain does not manage itself. There must be rules about who can join the chain, who can approve updates, and how audits are done. Governance is very important here. If governance is weak, even a strong blockchain system can become unreliable.
Enterprises use many other systems like cloud services, databases, and IoT devices. The blockchain layer must work with all of them. This is where APIs and middleware tools come in. They connect the blockchain with normal IT tools.
Once deployed, the new blockchain protocol should be tested under real conditions. Security teams need to simulate attacks and watch how the system reacts. Regular audits should be done to check smart contracts and node performance.
Here is a table that explains the general process:
| Phase | Key Tasks | Important Considerations |
| Phase 1: Planning | Identify data and assets that need blockchain protection | Check data sensitivity and regulations |
| Phase 2: Design | Choose blockchain type and create smart contracts | Think about scalability and vendor risk |
| Phase 3: Deployment | Install nodes and connect to IT systems | Staff training and system testing |
| Phase 4: Monitoring | Watch logs and performance on the chain | Make sure data is synced and secure |
The companies that succeed in deploying blockchain for cybersecurity often start small. They begin with one department, like finance or HR, and then expand after proving the results. This gradual rollout helps avoid big technical shocks.
By 2025, many global companies already started to use blockchain to protect data. For example, Walmart uses blockchain to secure its supply chain data and verify product origins. Siemens Energy uses blockchain to protect industrial control systems and detect fake device signals. Mastercard has been developing a blockchain framework to manage digital identities and reduce fraud in payment systems.
These real-world examples show how blockchain protocols are not just theory anymore. They are working tools.
| Use Case | Industry | Benefits of Blockchain Security |
| Digital Identity Verification | Finance / Insurance | Lower identity theft and fraud |
| Supply Chain Data Integrity | Retail / Manufacturing | Prevents tampered records and improves traceability |
| IIoT Device Authentication | Industrial / Utilities | Protects machine-to-machine communication |
| Secure Document Exchange | Legal / Healthcare | Reduces leaks of private data |
| Inter-Company Audits | Banking / IT | Enables transparent, shared audit logs |
Each of these use cases solves a specific pain point that traditional security tools struggled with for years. For instance, in industrial IoT networks, devices often communicate without human supervision. Hackers can easily fake a signal and trick systems. Blockchain creates a shared log of all signals and commands. That means even if one device sends false data, others will immediately see the mismatch and stop it from spreading.
In the financial sector, blockchain-based identity systems are helping banks reduce fraudulent applications. A shared digital identity ledger means once a person’s ID is verified by one institution, others can trust it without redoing all checks. This saves both time and cost while improving customer security.
Even though blockchain adds strong layers of protection, it also comes with some new problems. Enterprises must be careful during deployment. Many companies in 2025 found that using blockchain for cybersecurity is not as simple as turning on a switch. It needs planning, training, and coordination.
One of the biggest challenges is integration with older systems. Many large organizations still run software from ten or even fifteen years ago. These systems were never built to connect with distributed ledgers. So when blockchain is added on top, it can create technical issues or data delays.
Another major issue is governance. A blockchain network has many participants. If there is no clear structure on who approves transactions or who maintains the nodes, it can quickly become messy. Without good governance, even the most secure network can fail.
Smart contracts also come with code vulnerabilities. In 2024, over $2.1 billion was lost globally due to faulty or hacked smart contracts (Chainalysis 2025 report). A single programming error can create an entry point for attackers.
Then there is regulation. Legislations regarding blockchain are in their infancy. To illustrate, the National Data Security Framework 2025, which was launched in the U.S., has new reporting requirements of decentralized systems. Now enterprises have to demonstrate the flow of data in their blockchain networks.
Lastly, another threat is quantum computing. The cryptographic systems in the present could soon be broken by quantum algorithms. Although big-scale quantum attack is not occurring as yet, cybersecurity professionals already advise the implementation of post-quantum cryptography within blockchain applications.
Blockchain-based cybersecurity will transform the process of enterprise defense in the digital environment. In a blockchain, trust is encouraged by all members in the network where an organization usually depends on one system or administrator (or both) to keep the trust intact. It might not be short-term and might not be cost effective but it will be long term. In 2025, blockchain will be an enterprise security bargain, providing audit trails that are immutable, decentralized control, secure identities and more rapid breach detection.
Forward-looking organizations will have carbon floor plans, but they will also balance blockchain with Ai and quantum-resistant encryption techniques with conventional security layers. Our focus is not on replacing cybersecurity systems, but on strengthening cybersecurity systems with trustless verification outside of striking distance. In 2025, that is essential as hackers will make attacks and espionage more complex than ever, while blockchain offers something reliable and powerful, transparency that cannot be faked.
Blockchain keeps records in a shared digital ledger that no one can secretly change. It verifies every action through many computers, which makes data harder to tamper with.
At first, they can be costly because they require integration and new software. But over time, costs drop since there are fewer breaches and less manual auditing.
Blockchain prevents tampering and records all activity. If an attacker tries to change a file, the blockchain record shows the exact time and user. It also helps restore clean versions faster.
Yes, but large enterprises benefit the most because they manage complex supply chains and sensitive data. Smaller firms can use simpler blockchain tools for data logging or document verification.
Financial services, manufacturing, healthcare, and logistics are leading in 2025. These industries need strong auditability and traceable data protection.
Blockchain: A decentralized record-keeping system that stores data in blocks linked chronologically.
Smart Contract: Code on a blockchain that runs automatically when certain rules are met.
Node: A computer that helps verify transactions in a blockchain network.
Permissioned Blockchain: A private blockchain where only approved members can join.
Decentralization: Distribution of control among many nodes instead of one central authority.
Immutable Ledger: A record that cannot be changed once added to the blockchain.
Quantum-Resistant Cryptography: Encryption designed to withstand attacks from quantum computers.
Threat Intelligence Ledger: A blockchain system for sharing verified cyber threat data across organizations.
By 2025, blockchain has become a serious tool for cybersecurity in enterprises. From supply chain tracking to digital identity management, it helps companies create trust that cannot be faked. It records every change in a transparent and permanent way, reducing insider risk and external manipulation.
However, blockchain should not replace existing cybersecurity layers. It should work alongside traditional systems, adding trust where it was missing before. As businesses prepare for more advanced digital threats, blockchain stands out as one of the best answers, a shared truth system that protects data even when everything else fails.
Read More: Blockchain-Based Cybersecurity Protocols for Enterprises: A Complete 2025 Guide">Blockchain-Based Cybersecurity Protocols for Enterprises: A Complete 2025 Guide
Harvey Weinstein and Ghislaine Maxwell also attended birthday event for Princess Beatrice, new reports claim
© REUTERS
Sean Grayson claims he shot Massey in self-defense after she told him she would ‘rebuke him in the name of Jesus’
© AP
Scholars of authoritarianism including Francis Fukuyama also asked the judge to throw out the charges, saying they were a clear example of an autocratic leader abusing the justice system to consolidate power
© J. Scott Applewhite
In a surprising shift, MSC Euribia, the LNG-powered cruise ship, has been rerouted from its planned Red Sea path and is now navigating through the African continent on its way to the UAE. Originally set to pass through the Suez Canal to the Gulf, this change of course highlights the evolving challenges facing cruise lines. The ship will now homeport in Dubai starting in November 2025, marking the start of its Middle East cruise season. This extended route bypasses the Red Sea, incorporating new stops across Africa and the Arabian Peninsula. The adjustment comes as security concerns around the Red Sea region have prompted cruise operators to reevaluate their itineraries. Passengers can expect to experience a variety of exciting destinations including Abu Dhabi, Muscat, Doha, and more.
MSC Euribia’s voyage, originally scheduled to pass through the Suez Canal, was shifted due to security concerns in the Red Sea. As a result, the ship embarked on a much longer journey from Northern Europe, making a strategic stop at Las Palmas de Gran Canaria. Afterward, it continues its southern course, passing around Africa to reach the Arabian Gulf.
Scheduled to begin its operations out of Dubai on November 8th, 2025, the ship will be homeporting there until early April 2026. This shift not only opens the cruise season in the region but also presents a fresh set of destinations for passengers, including stops at some of the most iconic cities and islands of the Middle East. With this change, MSC Euribia will offer 3-, 4-, and 7-night cruises, making it an appealing option for both short getaways and extended vacations.
The rerouting of MSC Euribia reflects the broader operational challenges cruise operators face in the Red Sea region, where geopolitical tensions have led to instability. MSC’s decision to avoid the Red Sea corridor ensures the safety of passengers and crew while maintaining its commitment to high-quality experiences. Several cruise lines have adapted their routes similarly to avoid affected waters, highlighting the importance of flexibility and preparedness in the face of changing circumstances.
In addition to the Middle East, MSC Euribia’s new African route opens up the possibility for further exploration of Africa’s west coast as well as Arabian Peninsula destinations. For travelers, this means an opportunity to explore new regions that were previously not part of the standard cruise itineraries in the Middle East.
Once in the UAE, MSC Euribia will offer travelers access to a variety of must-see locations. The ship’s itinerary includes a blend of cultural, historical, and scenic destinations across the Gulf and beyond. Here are the primary ports of call on the newly designed route:
If you’re planning to board MSC Euribia, there are a few things you should consider to ensure your cruise experience is smooth and enjoyable:
The Middle East is becoming increasingly popular as a cruise destination due to its blend of modernity and history. Countries like the UAE, Qatar, and Oman offer pristine beaches, luxury shopping, and state-of-the-art attractions alongside rich cultural landmarks. With the growing number of cruise ships visiting the region, travelers can explore an ever-expanding list of destinations, from traditional markets to breathtaking modern architecture. Additionally, the region’s steady tourism growth reflects its appeal to both luxury travelers and those seeking unique cultural experiences.
MSC Euribia’s unexpected African detour is a great opportunity for passengers looking to explore new horizons. The ship’s planned itinerary in the Middle East, spanning from Dubai to Muscat, presents an exciting range of experiences, making it an excellent option for both seasoned cruisers and first-time travelers. As geopolitical challenges continue to impact cruise operations in the region, MSC’s flexible approach ensures that it continues to provide a high-quality cruising experience while prioritizing passenger safety.
The post MSC Euribia’s Rerouted African Voyage Brings New Middle East Itinerary with Stops in Dubai, Abu Dhabi, Muscat, and More, Everything That You Need to Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Vang Vieng is one of the most well-known destinations in Laos and is being considered for the ASEAN Clean Tourist City Award in 2026. Vang Vieng is being evaluated as part of the region’s initiative to recognise highly organised and maintained cities for their level of cleanliness and tourist safety. The evaluation also emphasises the sustainable environmental practices of the region and the quality of their tourist services.
Vang Vieng is being evaluated based on tourism and safety for the ASEAN Clean Tourist City Award from 2025 to 2026. The evaluation of Vang Vieng for the Cleanest Tourist City Award is almost entirely based on the productivity and control maintained by the region’s tourism office.
The evaluation also aimed to improve the most crucial aspects of the tourism experience and sustainable practices of the region so long as it is being kept.It keeps attracting visitors for its amazing landscape that features wonderful karst limestone mountains, greenery, and riverside areas. Vang Vieng boasts a rich adventure tourism activities, including tubing, kayaking, and mountain hiking. With its tourism industry growing, the town’s evaluation has shifted toward its ability to provide a sustainable and attractive environment for residents and visitors.
Tourism evaluation included waste disposal, disposal systems, and waste-to-recycling ratios. ASEA’s environmental minimums must be met for waste treatment, reuse, and recycling. Waste and recycling proportionality are minimal for the town’s critical environmental defence for the town’s claim for the award. Cities are appraised for their efforts in tourism and environmental protection.
ASEAN Clean Tourist City Award: A case practice for sustainable tourism development
The Clean Tourist City Award on Southeast Asian countries started in 2008 under the framework of the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN), and aims to appreciate and award cities that strike a perfect balance between the tourism experience and the peace of mind for the tourists by ensuring pristine cleanliness, safety and sustainability. The awards in the beginning focused on the Green Hotel Award, targeting hotels that actively engaged in sustainable practices. Over time, the awards and commendations have expanded to include the Clean Tourist City, Homestay, Public Toilet, Spa, Sustainable Tourism, Green Hotel, and Community-Based Tourism awards and commendations.
The main purpose of the award is to foster the sustainable development of cities in the region, while promoting the integration of best urban practices in tourism development, together with waste control, urban and environmental protection, and waste management. The award aims to ameliorate the infrastructure and services of tourism destinations, and is crucial in promoting tourism destinations that are environmentally sustainable and socially responsible.
Vang Vieng paysages laosiennes as one of the most popular tourist destinations. The landscape is characterized by the Nam Song River and eroded limestone ranges. The water and the rocks make the area great for tubing and rock climbing. After admiring Vang Vieng, Tourists participate in cave treks and bike or hike on nature trails. The area is popular among culture and outdoor adventure enthusiasts.
Vang Vieng also possess some unique cultural sites that reflect the local heritage of the area. People can wander through Buddhist temples, traditional local villages, as well as the markets, providing greater appreciation of the region’s paisa culture with Tibetan interference. The combination of the beautiful scenery with the rich culture elevates Vang Vieng as a place unique visit for travellers. Unlike other places that focus mainly on activities, Vang Vieng also profoundly value the culture.
Vang Vieng anticipates that the growth of the city comes with the responsibility of increasing sustainable tourism activities. Vang Vieng embraces entire sustainable tourism focus especially in waste management, encouraging tourism activities with the least carbon footprint, and tourism. Vang Vieng is the first to achieve the ASEAN Clean Tourist City award, and Vang Vieng focus on sustainable tourism through the Vang Vieng Clean City program.
Conclusion: Vang Vieng’s Contribution to Sustainable Tourism in Southeast Asia
Southeast Asia looks forward to the upcoming 2026 ASEAN Clean Tourist City Award, and it perfectly highlights Vang Vieng’s ever-increasing valorisation to sustainability in tourism. The fact that Vang Vieng has managed to incorporate cleanliness, safety, and eco-friendliness into their tourism infrastructure speaks for itself. Continued responsible development will surely maintain Vang Vieng’s position as a primary hotspot for visitors to Laos, and will doubly position Vang Vieng as a highly cherished destination for sports and culture tourism.
The post Sustainable Tourism in Vang Vieng: A Strong Contender for ASEAN Clean Tourist City Award appeared first on Travel And Tour World.SUNDAY Hotel, PRISM’s luxury brand (earlier Oravel Stays), is diving big into India’s wildlife tourism, with plans to open its first property in Kiyari Kham, close to the Jim Corbett National Park, in 2023. This is the launch of the brand’s aggressive plan to open 10 wildlife resorts in a span of six months, stretching its presence in some of India’s best safari destinations. This step showcases SUNDAY Hotel’s dedication to providing luxury tourism experiences that combine conservation, local community interaction, and sustainability, solidifying it as an important force in India’s emerging eco-tourism and wildlife tourism industries.
India’s wildlife tourism sector is booming, driven by the country’s rich biodiversity and growing demand for nature-based tourism. With over 6.5 million domestic and international visitors visiting India’s national parks and wildlife sanctuaries annually, the sector is growing at more than 15% annually. SUNDAY Hotel aims to tap into this rising demand with its wildlife resorts strategically located in top wildlife destinations like Ranthambore, Bandhavgarh, Kanha, Periyar, Nagarhole, and Wayanad.
The SUNDAY Wildlife Collection will not only offer luxury accommodations but also integrate sustainable practices and eco-friendly tourism, helping to preserve India’s rich natural heritage. This will contribute to wildlife conservation efforts and ensure that tourism positively impacts both the local community and the environment.
As part of its vision to redefine the concept of luxury wildlife resorts, SUNDAY Hotels is committed to creating sustainable tourism experiences. In addition to promoting environmental responsibility, the brand’s expansion into wildlife tourism will offer employment opportunities for local communities through artisanal partnerships, eco-tourism education, and job creation in areas such as hospitality, tourism services, and wildlife protection.
The integration of sustainability with luxury hospitality will set a new benchmark for eco-conscious tourism in India. This approach will not only benefit travelers seeking authentic wildlife experiences but also promote the preservation of ecosystems and biodiversity. By adopting eco-friendly practices such as waste minimization, water conservation, and local sourcing, SUNDAY Hotel aims to create a model for future tourism development that balances economic growth with environmental stewardship.
SUNDAY Hotel’s new resorts will offer curated nature-based experiences, ranging from guided safaris and nature walks to bird-watching tours and wellness retreats. These activities will appeal to nature enthusiasts, adventure seekers, and those looking for a more sustainable and peaceful escape from the urban landscape. With a strong emphasis on wellness, guests will also have access to yoga, pilates, and wellness treatments designed to rejuvenate and reconnect them with nature.
The hotel’s proximity to national parks will enable visitors to enjoy authentic wildlife encounters while also benefiting from luxurious facilities such as spas, fitness centers, and gourmet dining. This integration of wildlife experiences with luxury accommodations reflects the growing demand for high-end eco-tourism that caters to both adventure and relaxation.
The growth of eco-tourism and wildlife tourism in India is expected to play a significant role in the country’s tourism sector, with increasing numbers of travelers seeking immersive, sustainable, and responsible travel experiences. As SUNDAY Hotel expands its presence in top wildlife destinations, the company will contribute to the sustainable growth of this sector, ensuring that tourism supports not only the local economy but also biodiversity conservation.
The company’s expansion is aligned with India’s broader tourism strategy, which aims to position the country as a leader in sustainable tourism in the region. This involves promoting responsible tourism practices that respect local cultures and ecosystems while offering visitors the chance to experience India’s unparalleled natural beauty.
Looking ahead, the wildlife tourism sector in India is expected to continue its upward trajectory, with increasing demand for luxury and sustainable accommodations in some of the country’s most iconic national parks. As SUNDAY Hotel expands its Wildlife Collection, the company will help raise the profile of India’s national parks as world-class tourist destinations for those seeking both adventure and relaxation in the wilderness.
This growth in wildlife tourism will not only benefit the tourism industry but also contribute to the preservation of India’s ecosystems by promoting eco-friendly tourism practices. SUNDAY Hotel’s focus on sustainability and community empowerment will position it as a key player in the future of India’s tourism, contributing to the long-term protection of the country’s natural resources and wildlife heritage.
The company’s commitment to sustainable practices and local community engagement aligns with the increasing global demand for ethical travel, where luxury is seamlessly integrated with responsible tourism. As more travelers seek destinations that align with their eco-conscious values, SUNDAY Hotel is well-positioned to lead the charge in transforming India’s wildlife tourism sector into a global model for sustainable luxury tourism.
With its aggressive foray into the wildlife tourism market, SUNDAY Hotel is redefining the luxury eco-tourism model in India. By integrating sustainable operations with luxury accommodations and carefully curated wildlife experiences, the brand is constructing a future-oriented model of tourism that works equally well for both travelers and local communities. With the growing demand for safari tourism and nature travel, SUNDAY Hotel’s initiatives will set the tone for the future of tourism in India, making it an elite destination for adventure, wellness, and sustainability.
The post SUNDAY Hotel Enters Wildlife Tourism Market in India with Luxury Eco-Resorts at the Key National Parks, Offering Curated Nature Experiences and Sustainable Tourism appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Mankato, Minnesota, which is only a 75-minute drive from Minneapolis, provides a distinctive fusion of outdoor activities, quaint boutique shopping, and extensive history. Mankato offers something for everyone, regardless of your interests—whether you’re a history buff, a nature lover, or someone looking for unusual shopping experiences. Often disregarded, this lovely city on the Minnesota River provides the ideal retreat for anyone wishing to spend a day or weekend away from the bustle of the Twin Cities.
A visit to Mankato would not be complete without exploring Minneopa State Park, located just a short drive from downtown. This sprawling park is home to the beautiful Minneopa Falls, a must-see natural wonder. The falls cascade in two stages and can be accessed via a relatively easy 10-minute trail, which makes for a perfect outing for families or solo adventurers. The park’s unique appeal is further enhanced by the Bison Drive, where visitors can get a close look at bison roaming freely across 325 acres of native prairie. This area offers a rare opportunity to witness these majestic animals in their natural habitat.
For outdoor enthusiasts, Minneopa State Park is a true gem. It features several trails for hiking and biking, including the Red Jacket Trail, a 13-mile stretch that leads visitors through picturesque river valleys and dense woods. The trail includes the historic Red Jacket Trestle, which offers breathtaking views of the surrounding landscape. For those wanting a more extensive adventure, the Sakatah Singing Hills State Trail is a 41-mile route that stretches from Mankato to Faribault, providing ample opportunities for biking, hiking, or simply enjoying the beauty of Minnesota’s countryside.
Another must-visit in Mankato is Sibley Park, a 100-acre green space located at the confluence of the Minnesota and Blue Earth Rivers. This historic park has been a staple of the Mankato community since its establishment in 1887. Offering two miles of walking trails, playgrounds, a gazebo, and excellent fishing spots along the river, Sibley Park is a place where visitors can relax and reconnect with nature. The park is particularly beautiful during the winter months when it is transformed into a magical winter wonderland with the Kiwanis Holiday Lights event, drawing thousands of visitors each year.
Mankato’s CityArt Walking Sculpture Tour is another fascinating attraction for art lovers. The city’s downtown area is adorned with 32 stunning sculptures that make for an enjoyable walking tour. This outdoor exhibit showcases a variety of artistic styles and mediums, giving visitors a chance to engage with contemporary art while enjoying the charm of Mankato’s historic downtown. The sculptures are displayed year-round, making it a perfect activity no matter the season.
For those looking to indulge in some boutique shopping, Mankato’s Old Town offers a range of unique shops and local treasures. One standout is Hazelkin & Co., a lifestyle boutique offering a curated collection of women’s fashion, home décor, beauty products, and unique gifts. Hazelkin & Co. is known for its exceptional customer service and its ability to help shoppers find that one-of-a-kind item, whether it’s a piece of jewellery, a candle, or a stylish new outfit.
Another gem in Mankato’s shopping scene is Lakota Made, which specializes in eco-friendly, indigenous-made products. From herbal remedies to personal care items, this shop offers high-quality goods with a cultural significance. Whether you’re looking for unique gifts or products that reflect sustainable practices, Lakota Made is a place that offers both craftsmanship and purpose.
Jewellery lovers will find Baubles and Bobbies a must-visit stop. This charming boutique is known for its selection of handcrafted, artisanal jewellery. Whether you’re in search of a statement necklace, delicate earrings, or a timeless bracelet, Baubles and Bobbies has a variety of options that cater to every style and occasion. The store’s friendly atmosphere makes shopping here an enjoyable and personal experience.
For those who prefer a more traditional shopping experience, River Hills Mall is the place to be. This regional mall features major retailers like Target, JCPenney, and H&M, as well as a variety of speciality stores. It also boasts an 8-screen movie theater, making it the perfect destination for a shopping spree followed by a movie night. The mall offers a family-friendly atmosphere, making it a great spot for visitors of all ages.
Mankato isn’t just about natural beauty and shopping—its history also plays a significant role in its charm. Families with young children will enjoy a visit to the Children’s Museum of Southern Minnesota, an interactive space where kids can engage with exhibits that teach about science, art, and local history. It’s an excellent way for younger visitors to learn while having fun. The museum’s hands-on approach helps foster curiosity and creativity in children of all ages.
For those with a passion for history, the R.D. Hubbard House provides a fascinating look into the past. This 16-room mansion was one of the first private residences in Mankato to have electricity and indoor plumbing. The house is listed on the National Register of Historic Places and offers a glimpse into the lives of early Mankato residents. Touring the house is a fantastic way to experience the region’s architectural history while learning about the people who shaped the city.
The Blue Earth County History Museum is another great destination for history enthusiasts. The museum offers exhibits on the area’s pioneer past, including an interactive pioneer cabin and rotating exhibits that delve into Mankato’s rich heritage. It’s an ideal place to learn about the city’s early settlers and the development of the region.
For those looking for a day trip that is both enriching and relaxing, Mankato, Minnesota, is a hidden gem. Mankato offers a wide range of experiences, whether you’re visiting the natural beauty of Minneopa State Park, shopping at distinctive boutiques, or visiting local museums to learn about the history of the city. Mankato is the ideal location to relax and get in touch with the soul of southern Minnesota because of its beautiful scenery, thriving arts scene, and rich cultural legacy.
The post Explore Mankato, Minnesota: A Hidden Gem for Outdoor Adventures, Boutique Shopping, and Rich History in the United States appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Pakse has been granted funds for the renovation of the old rustic infrastructure of the Pakse International Airport and to build new terminals and other aviation facilities. The old Pakse International Aiport needs major expansion and Pakse International Aiport needs expansion and funds for renovation and new construction.
To help ensure other international services and functions of Pakse International Aiport are not too heavily disturbed, construction and new construction of international facilities for arriving and departing passengers is being done.
As part of the enhancement works, some of the structures at the airport will be demolished and relocated to accommodate new construction. This will make it possible to reconfigure the airport layout to improve the comfort of the flying public and the overall convenience of the airport to incoming visitors to Pakse. New, modern toilet sanitaries, air conditioning, and the new electrical works we will be doing will also be part of the enhancements to the airport, making sure the facility is efficient, comfortable, and sustainable.
The Changes to Tourism and the Airport’s Connections
The further enhancement of Pakse, a popular destination for local and international tourists, is the new airport, which boosts the airport’s connections to Southern Laos. Apart from the breathtaking Bolaven Plateau with its famous waterfalls, coffee plantations, and ethnic villages, Pakse is also home to the UNESCO-listed Vat Phou Temple, which is popular among tourists for its history and culture. The city also offers a gateway to Si Phan Don, or the Four Thousand Islands, an emerging eco-tourism destination on the Mekong River.
With the upgrades to Pakse International Airport, the region will be able to handle the expected increase in foreign visitors to southern Laos. The airport enhancements should help increase the satisfaction of the visitors through more efficient airport processes, with shorter waiting times, better arrival and departure procedures, and more streamlined overall airport operations. The airport will thus be able to more efficiently handle flights from Bangkok, Hanoi, and Vientiane, facilitating easier access to the region for tourists.
In addition, the improved airport services will be of great advantage to the local population, who use the airport to travel to the capital Vientiane and other areas of the region. The expanded airport, with enhanced local and international connections, will increase the volume of both business and leisure travel to and from Laos.
Supporting Vietnam’s Broader Tourism Goals
Restructuring Pakse International Airport is part of a larger goal for Vietnam to expand their tourism network and improve their rank in Southeast Asia as a premier hotspot. In recent years, Vietnam has seen an increase in tourism due to nature tourism, cultural tourism, and adventure tourism. As more people travel to Vietnam for their natural beauty and cultural history, tourism infrastructure at spots like Pakse International Airport provides ample investment opportunities.
Along with improving tourism facilities, the Lao government operates on the premise for Pakse International Airport to become a part of a new transport corridor. They seek to balance strategic and modern operational hypotheses to become a pivotal travel node for people in southern Laos. Thus, with the newly renovated transport corridor and increased efforts to modernise infrastructure, Pakse plans to increase its popularity as a southern Vietnam hotspot.
Sustainability and Modernisation: Looking Ahead
The renovation works tend to incorporate new infrastructure while upholding environmental best practices. Installation of energy-efficient LED lights and other electric systems, as well as solar panels, indicate Laos’ commitment to eco-friendly practices in the tourism sector. The incorporation of green technology and sustainable practices in the airport renovation works will not only improve the level of services offered to tourists and residents but will also add to the long-term goals of environmental protection upheld by Laos.
Pakse International Airport becomes the region’s gateway, but also the first airport in the country to embrace eco-friendly customs. In addition to the green upgrades, Pakse becomes the first international airport in the region to embrace modernised border controls together with advanced passenger services.
Conclusion
Pakse and Laos tourism sector take a new turn with the renovation of Pakse International Airport. The modernised facilities will satisfy the increasing demand for Pakse as an eco-friendly, comfortable, and efficient transport hub for business and leisure.
Plans for a renovation to commence in late 2025 with a completion date for the construction slated for easter 2026 will see the arose the value Pakse International Airport has to the country of Laos as well as the region of Southeast Asia as a tool to improve tourism as well as construction economically. The development will allow the country to reach its dream of becoming the most recognized nation for tourism in South East Asia and reach the desired sustainable tourism target set the the Pakse International Airport.
The post Tourism Growth in Southern Laos: Pakse International Airport Expands to Meet Rising Demand appeared first on Travel And Tour World.As the US government shutdown continues, air travel across the nation is facing an escalating crisis. Staffing shortages, particularly among air traffic controllers and TSA officers, are causing severe disruptions at major airports. With more than 8,000 flights delayed and ground stops imposed at key hubs, the aviation system is overwhelmed. The shutdown, now in its fourth week, is putting immense pressure on the US air travel network, leading to longer waits, flight cancellations, and widespread frustration for passengers. The lack of staff, combined with financial uncertainty for workers, is expected to worsen the situation, leaving travelers bracing for even more travel chaos.
US Air Travel Faces Severe Disruptions as Government Shutdown Enters Fourth Week
Air travel disruptions across the United States are intensifying as the ongoing government shutdown continues, leading to staff shortages, delayed flights, and mounting frustrations for travellers. With the shutdown now in its fourth week, aviation authorities warn that the situation is likely to worsen in the coming days.
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) has reported significant air traffic controller shortages, with 22 “triggers” recorded on October 25, 2025. This figure marks one of the highest counts since the shutdown began on October 1. The shortages have already resulted in flight delays and cancellations, and experts predict the disruptions will escalate if the shutdown persists.
Travellers across the country are being advised to prepare for longer wait times at airports as the staffing crisis deepens. The FAA has been forced to implement several measures, including ground delay programs at major airports, to manage the flow of air traffic. These programs hold departing flights to ensure a smoother landing process for incoming flights, thereby preventing further congestion.
On October 26, Los Angeles International Airport (LAX) imposed a ground stop around 11:30 AM local time due to staffing shortages. Though the ground stop was lifted later, delays continued throughout the day. Similar ground delay measures were also put in place at Chicago O’Hare, Washington Reagan National, and Newark Liberty International airports.
According to FlightAware, by 11 PM Eastern Time on October 26, over 8,000 flights had been delayed nationwide. This was a significant increase from the approximately 5,300 delays reported just a day earlier, highlighting the growing strain on the aviation system.
As the shutdown drags on, the situation is becoming more dire for air traffic controllers and TSA workers, many of whom are essential to keeping airports operational. Approximately 13,000 air traffic controllers and 50,000 TSA officers are currently working without pay. The shortage of air traffic controllers has been exacerbated by the fact that the FAA is already 3,500 controllers short of its target staffing levels, a problem that existed even before the shutdown began. Many controllers are working six-day weeks and mandatory overtime just to keep up with the workload.
The shutdown has also taken a toll on the morale of airport staff. With air traffic controllers facing their first full paycheck loss on October 28, some have taken second jobs to make ends meet. The lack of financial security has left many feeling increasingly frustrated, which, in turn, has worsened the staffing shortages and flight delays.
Ground stops and delays have become a frequent occurrence at major US airports, particularly those located in large metropolitan areas. Ground delays at airports like LAX, O’Hare, and Reagan National are directly linked to the air traffic controller shortage, and the disruptions have caused ripple effects throughout the country.
TSA staffing shortages have also contributed to the growing chaos at airports, making security checks slower and adding to the overall travel time for passengers. With fewer TSA officers available, the wait times at checkpoints have increased, further complicating the travel experience. Airlines for America, a trade association representing the country’s major airlines, has urged passengers to “pack their patience” and allow extra time at the airport to account for delays and longer security lines.
The ongoing disruptions are also having an economic impact on the aviation industry. The delayed flights and cancellations not only inconvenience passengers but also affect airline revenues and operational efficiency. With thousands of flights grounded or delayed, airlines face mounting costs due to the need for rescheduling, refunds, and compensation for affected passengers.
The ripple effect of these disruptions extends beyond the aviation sector, as delays and cancellations impact other industries, such as retail, hospitality, and tourism. Many passengers are left stranded at airports or forced to book alternative flights, which can disrupt their plans and lead to additional financial burdens.
With no immediate resolution to the shutdown in sight, the disruptions to air travel are expected to continue. Travellers should expect longer delays, increased cancellations, and potentially more ground stops as the FAA and TSA continue to operate under strain. Airport authorities and airline officials recommend passengers check flight statuses regularly and allow for extra time at airports, especially during peak travel hours.
In addition to the disruptions caused by the staffing shortages, the shutdown has also sparked concerns about the long-term health of the aviation industry. As air traffic controllers and TSA officers continue to work without pay, there is growing concern that the shutdown may erode public confidence in the safety and reliability of air travel.
As the US government shutdown continues to affect the aviation industry, air travel disruptions are expected to increase. The shortage of air traffic controllers and TSA workers has led to delays, cancellations, and ground stops at major airports, leaving passengers frustrated and uncertain about their travel plans. With thousands of essential workers operating without pay, the situation is unlikely to improve until the shutdown is resolved. Travellers should brace for further disruptions and plan accordingly to avoid unnecessary stress during their journeys.
The post US Air Travel Faces Complete Meltdown As Government Shutdown Triggers Devastating Delays Ground Stops And Unprecedented Cancellations Nationwide appeared first on Travel And Tour World.As 2025 approaches, Berlin joins Paris, Barcelona, Amsterdam, and Rome in preparing for an exciting rise in tourism. Major events, such as the World Cup and World Series, are expected to attract millions of visitors to these iconic European cities. With this surge in travel, cities are adjusting their tourism and tax policies to manage the increased demand. Berlin, alongside other top destinations like Paris and Barcelona, is reshaping its policies to strike the right balance between welcoming more visitors and maintaining local services.
These changes in tax structures will have a direct impact on how tourists experience these cities in 2025. From accommodation to public services, tourism taxes will play a key role in shaping the travel landscape. As these cities embrace this transformation, they aim to ensure both a positive visitor experience and sustainable growth.
Europe has always been a top travel destination. From its rich history and culture to stunning landmarks and vibrant cities, it’s no surprise that millions of people travel here each year. However, 2025 is expected to be a unique year. With the World Cup 2026 and World Series 2025 bringing millions of fans and tourists to the continent, cities are bracing themselves for an overwhelming demand.
As the host cities prepare for this influx, there will be a greater strain on accommodation, transport, and public services. Cities will need to manage this surge effectively to ensure both the visitors and residents benefit from the increased tourism. But there’s one critical aspect they must consider: how tourism taxes are handled.
The surge in travel means cities like Berlin, Paris, Barcelona, and Amsterdam will face an increased number of visitors. To handle this, they need to prepare their tourism infrastructure and ensure their tax policies can support both the locals and the economy. Let’s take a look at how each city plans to tackle the influx and the role taxes will play in this process.
Berlin is one of the most popular destinations in Europe. Known for its historical landmarks, rich cultural scene, and vibrant nightlife, Berlin attracts millions of visitors every year. The city also has a tourism tax known as the Beherbergungssteuer or accommodation tax. This tax applies to hotel stays and ranges based on the price of the accommodation. Visitors who book more expensive rooms will pay higher taxes. However, this is where the challenge lies: With more visitors expected for the World Cup, the city is considering adjusting these taxes to keep it competitive.
Berlin must strike a balance between generating revenue and not scaring off tourists with high accommodation taxes. To help ease the burden, the city may temporarily reduce its tax rates during major events like the World Cup. This would keep accommodation costs down and encourage more visitors to book stays.
In addition to these changes, Berlin is also focused on sustainable tourism. With the city’s commitment to eco-friendly practices, they may consider adjusting the tax policies to fund environmental initiatives, such as improving transportation and public services.
Paris, known for its iconic landmarks like the Eiffel Tower and the Louvre, is another city that will see an influx of visitors in 2025. The French capital imposes an occupancy tax on overnight stays, which ranges from €0.22 to €3.30 per person per night, depending on the type of accommodation. As more people flock to Paris for the World Cup, the city must think about its tax policies. While Paris may not lower its tax rates, it will likely invest this revenue in improving the tourism experience, including enhancing infrastructure and services.
It’s also worth mentioning that Paris has a standard VAT rate of 20%, which is applied to most services, including accommodation. The city could consider offering tax exemptions for specific tourism services during large events, which would reduce costs for visitors and increase overall tourism demand.
Barcelona is one of Europe’s hottest tourist destinations, and the 2025 World Series will bring even more visitors to this Spanish gem. To cope with the expected increase, Barcelona imposes a tourist tax on hotel stays. This tax varies based on the type of accommodation, from budget hostels to luxury hotels. The revenue generated from this tax helps maintain the city’s infrastructure and public services.
Like other cities, Barcelona is considering temporary tax reductions or exemptions for certain types of accommodation. By doing so, the city aims to attract more visitors while ensuring that tourists can enjoy their stay without feeling burdened by high taxes. Moreover, Spain’s standard VAT rate of 21% applies to most services, which could affect the cost of travel-related services in the city.
Amsterdam, with its beautiful canals and vibrant culture, is a top destination in Europe. The city imposes a tourist tax on overnight stays, which is calculated as a percentage of the accommodation cost. The more expensive the accommodation, the higher the tax. For the World Cup and World Series visitors, this means they could face a significant increase in the total cost of their trip. However, Amsterdam is considering adjusting these taxes during major events to ensure it remains an attractive destination.
The city also applies a standard VAT rate of 21% on most services, including tourism-related services. However, the government may consider offering reduced VAT rates or exemptions for certain services during high-demand periods to boost tourism further.
Rome, with its ancient ruins and vibrant culture, is set to welcome even more visitors in 2025. Rome imposes a city tax on overnight stays, which varies based on the type of accommodation. Visitors staying in higher-end hotels will pay a higher tax, while those opting for budget options will pay less. The city is expected to adjust these taxes during major events to ensure that it remains an affordable destination for all types of tourists.
Rome’s VAT rate is 22%, one of the highest in Europe. However, like other cities, it may reduce or exempt taxes for certain tourism services to keep visitors happy. The revenue from these taxes is crucial for the city’s infrastructure and public services, ensuring that Rome remains a top choice for travelers from around the world.
Tourism taxes are crucial to a city’s economy. The revenue generated from these taxes helps maintain and improve infrastructure, public services, and local businesses. However, cities must be careful not to overburden tourists with high taxes, especially during peak seasons like the World Cup and World Series.
If taxes are too high, tourists may choose to visit other cities with lower costs. However, by adjusting tax rates or offering exemptions for certain services, cities can attract more visitors without significantly impacting their overall revenue. The key is finding the right balance between generating income and maintaining competitiveness.
For instance, some cities may lower their occupancy taxes temporarily during major events. This would make hotel stays more affordable and encourage tourists to visit. Others may implement special VAT rates or reduce taxes on transportation and dining services to make the overall trip more affordable.
By investing the revenue generated from these taxes into improving the city’s infrastructure, cities can offer a better experience for tourists. This can include better public transportation, cleaner streets, and more tourist-friendly amenities. It’s all about making sure that the city remains attractive to visitors while ensuring that the local economy benefits from the tourism boom.
Sustainability is becoming a major focus for many cities, and tourism taxes are one way to fund green initiatives. For example, Berlin has made efforts to focus on eco-friendly tourism, and it may use tourism tax revenue to fund sustainable transportation options and improve the city’s environmental footprint.
Sustainable tourism taxes could include charges for using public transport, renting bikes, or even for entering certain cultural or heritage sites. These taxes aim to reduce the environmental impact of mass tourism while still allowing visitors to enjoy everything the city has to offer. Cities like Amsterdam and Barcelona may also introduce similar policies to make their tourism sectors more eco-friendly.
As the 2026 World Cup and the 2025 World Series draw nearer, European cities will continue to refine their tourism tax policies. These changes will not only affect the visitors coming for these major events but also shape the tourism landscape for years to come.
The key for cities will be to strike a balance between welcoming visitors and maintaining the quality of life for residents. Adjusting tourism taxes in a way that maximizes revenue while enhancing the visitor experience is crucial for future success. Cities must be agile, responsive to the needs of both tourists and residents, and focused on sustainable practices that ensure tourism benefits everyone.
The travel demand for these world-class events will undoubtedly change the way European cities operate. By implementing the right tax policies, cities can boost their economy, enhance the tourist experience, and create a sustainable future for all.
The tourism tax landscape in Europe’s key cities is about to change in exciting ways. With the expected rise in travel demand due to the World Cup and World Series, cities like Berlin, Paris, Barcelona, and Amsterdam will need to adjust their tax policies to accommodate the influx of visitors. These changes will not only impact the local economy but also shape the future of tourism in Europe.
By carefully managing tourism taxes, cities can ensure they remain attractive to visitors while supporting their economy and infrastructure. The future of European tourism looks bright, and with smart tax policies, these cities can continue to thrive as top destinations for travelers around the world.
The post Berlin Joins Paris, Barcelona, Amsterdam, and Rome: How Rising Tourism and Tax Policies Will Transform European Travel in 2025 appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The Middle East, with Dubai and the UAE at the forefront, is rapidly reshaping the global hospitality landscape. Known for its luxury, advanced technologies, and commitment to sustainability, this region is not only keeping pace with global shifts but defining them. Hospitality in this region is undergoing a transformation fueled by artificial intelligence (AI), regenerative design, and well-being tourism. These factors are blending traditional values with modern technologies, creating new benchmarks for global tourism and travel experiences.
As the Middle East pushes boundaries with AI-driven guest services, advanced sustainable travel models, and innovative foodservice concepts, travelers are increasingly drawn to the region’s cutting-edge offerings. With Dubai spearheading this revolution, it’s clear that the region is setting the tone for future developments in hospitality worldwide.
The Middle East has always been a hub of luxury and tourism. But in recent years, this region, particularly Dubai and the UAE, has elevated its status through sustainability commitments and luxury brand partnerships. These efforts are being integrated into the region’s hospitality models, creating unique experiences for visitors. From regenerative design in hotels and resorts to AI technology that personalizes guest interactions, the Middle East is becoming the place where luxury, innovation, and sustainability converge.
Dubai’s commitment to adopting AI technologies for enhancing the guest experience is one of the primary drivers of this transformation. The integration of AI-driven solutions helps hotels deliver personalized services, making it easier for guests to plan their stays, manage services, and enjoy enhanced experiences. This adoption of technology has not only improved convenience but also efficiency, creating a seamless experience for guests.
The Middle East’s hospitality industry is also increasingly focused on wellness tourism and sustainability. With green building technologies and eco-conscious services, the region is introducing initiatives aimed at reducing its environmental footprint while enhancing the travel experience. Leading hotel chains are embracing sustainable luxury, where guests can enjoy high-end services without compromising their environmental values.
Moreover, the regenerative design movement has begun influencing hotel architecture and design across the Middle East. This design philosophy goes beyond green building standards by focusing on creating spaces that heal and regenerate the environment. Such innovations are becoming popular among eco-conscious travelers who want their stays to contribute positively to the planet.
As AI technologies revolutionize the hospitality industry, one question remains: can hospitality retain its human touch in an AI-driven world? The Middle East has taken steps to strike a balance between technology and personal service. While AI helps streamline services, hotel staff are still trained to provide a high level of personalized service that ensures the human connection is never lost. In fact, AI is being used to enhance rather than replace human interaction, ensuring guests enjoy both the convenience of technology and the warmth of human service.
Technology is also making a significant impact in the foodservice sector. With innovations like AI-powered food delivery and robotic chefs, dining experiences in the Middle East are becoming more convenient and engaging. These new technologies not only improve the speed and efficiency of foodservice but also offer unique dining experiences that blend traditional flavors with cutting-edge innovation.
Travelers heading to the Middle East, particularly Dubai, should prepare for a hospitality experience that blends luxury with futuristic technology and sustainability. Whether staying in a green-certified hotel, enjoying a wellness retreat, or experiencing AI-driven services, guests will find a hospitality ecosystem that prioritizes innovation while maintaining strong human connections.
For those seeking a seamless experience, many hotels offer smart rooms that adjust temperature, lighting, and even entertainment systems based on guest preferences, all controlled via a mobile app or voice assistant. Additionally, travelers will notice a significant focus on wellness, with spas, yoga studios, and meditation zones becoming integral parts of many hotels.
The future of hospitality in the Middle East is being defined by a blend of advanced technologies, sustainability, and human-centered experiences. With cities like Dubai leading the way, the region is setting new trends that the rest of the world is beginning to follow. As artificial intelligence, well-being tourism, and regenerative design continue to evolve, travelers can expect even more exciting innovations in hospitality, making the Middle East a must-visit destination for those seeking both luxury and sustainability.
The hospitality revolution underway in the Middle East is not just about luxury; it’s about creating an experience that connects with the needs and values of today’s travelers. Whether through advanced technologies or green designs, the Middle East is leading the charge in creating a hospitality experience like no other.
The post How Dubai, UAE, and the Middle East are Shaping the Future of Global Hospitality Through AI, Eco-Friendly Design, and Wellness-Focused Tourism appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Malaysia tourist numbers highlight a strong recovery for the nation’s tourism industry. Kuala Lumpur International Airport (KLIA) received a 16.4% rise in visitors between January and August, further solidifying Malaysia as a top destination for business and leisure travelers. The increasing flow of overseas visitors, driven by the nation’s leadership as ASEAN Chair, is redefining the tourism scene and placing Malaysia on the world map as an ever more desirable and internationally known destination.
Malaysia’s tenure as ASEAN Chair has provided a significant boost to its tourism sector, contributing to the increased number of foreign visitors. The hosting of regional meetings, high-level summits, and business forums has not only attracted delegates but also increased international awareness of Malaysia’s tourism offerings. As a tourism hub in Southeast Asia, Malaysia has strengthened its position on the global tourism map, providing business tourism and cultural exchange opportunities for delegates and their teams. The ASEAN Chairmanship has showcased Malaysia’s capacity to host large-scale events, further enhancing its reputation as a business and leisure destination.
In addition to being a key MICE destination, Malaysia continues to diversify its tourism offerings, appealing to a wide variety of global tourists. The country’s natural beauty, rich cultural heritage, and modern amenities provide something for every type of traveler, from luxury tourists to adventure seekers.
The growing role of technology in tourism continues to shape the visitor experience in Malaysia. The government has embraced digital tools such as mobile apps, online booking platforms, and interactive virtual tours to improve accessibility and visitor satisfaction. Initiatives like the “Visit Malaysia Year” digital campaign, which integrates social media, online travel guides, and virtual event promotions, are designed to reach a global audience, allowing tourists to explore Malaysia’s offerings before they even arrive.
Moreover, the government has been integrating smart tourism technologies to help travelers plan and navigate their trips more efficiently. For instance, the “maiMalaysia” app is a personalized travel assistant, helping visitors discover the country’s hotels, restaurants, tourist attractions, and transportation options in real-time, while also offering safety features and emergency assistance for tourists. These efforts showcase Malaysia’s commitment to providing a seamless and modern travel experience.
In line with global trends, sustainability remains a key focus for Malaysia’s tourism sector. The government has taken a proactive stance on eco-tourism by investing in green tourism initiatives aimed at minimizing the environmental footprint of tourism activities. By promoting eco-friendly accommodations, sustainable tourism practices, and local cultural preservation, Malaysia is ensuring that its tourism sector thrives in an environmentally responsible way.
Through collaborations with international organizations and local stakeholders, Malaysia has developed tourism initiatives focused on conservation, wildlife protection, and resource management, all of which help preserve the natural beauty that draws millions of visitors each year. Sustainable practices are also helping to ensure that the tourism industry supports local communities, creating a positive impact on rural development and economic sustainability.
Malaysia’s tourism sector is well on its way to meeting its long-term goals of attracting 12 million tourists annually by 2040. The 2024 growth in tourism arrivals, paired with continued investment in tourism infrastructure, smart technologies, and sustainable practices, positions the country for even greater success in the coming years.
As Malaysia continues to develop as a leading destination in Southeast Asia, the focus will be on diversifying its tourism offerings, enhancing the quality of visitor experiences, and ensuring that local communities benefit from the economic opportunities generated by tourism growth. By maintaining a balance between economic growth and environmental sustainability, Malaysia will continue to serve as a world-class destination for travelers seeking both luxury and authenticity.
With Malaysia’s tourist industry growing from strength to strength, the nation’s increasing fame as a global destination bears testament to the work undertaken by the government, tourism operators, and local communities. With its cultural diversity, natural scenery, eco-tourism attractions, and investment in infrastructure, Malaysia is poised to retain its status as a leading destination for both tourists and business travelers. The nation’s continued support for sustainability, digitalization, and innovation in tourism will guarantee that the future of Malaysia’s tourism is bright, robust, and economically sustainable for many years to come.
The post Malaysia Tourism Sector Sees More than Sixteen Percent Increase in its Visitor Arrivals, Driven by New Government Initiatives, Infrastructure Investments and Sustainable Tourism appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Kinabatangan in the Northeastern part of Borneo Island has an important SPNCA wildlife conservation area. The 2632 hectares of the SPNCA in the Borneo Bird Festival, which was recently conducted in the Rainforest Discovery Centre, have catapulted the sanctuary into one of the top spots for bird watching and wildlife. The area has a unique wildlife biodiversity, an important sanctuary for 28 protected bird species, which probably includes the rarest hornbills and storks in Borneo. Exploring the island has proven most fulfilling for wildlife enthusiasts and bird watchers.
Kinabatangan has a variety of unique bird species for the enthusiasts to enjoy. The Sungai Pin conservation area, SPnCA, is well known for the multitude of birds and wildlife in its vast pancake of riverside and peatland forest. This importance was highlighted at the Borneo Bird Festival. Wildlife enthusiasts, advocates and bird lovers gathered to promote the works to save rare species. People participating in the event got a taste of the importance of conservation, as well as the preservation of natural areas.
For those interested in observing rare birds, the SPnCA possesses some of the most challenging birds of Borneo to locate. These include the Bornean Bristlehead, Rufous-winged Philentoma, several species of hornbills like the White-crowned and Rhinoceros Hornbills, and other Storks and wetland birds in the region. Visitors can take part in guided birdwatching and photography tours to see them in their natural environment.
A Borneo hot spot for biodiversity
The region surrounding the Kinabatangan River is one of Borneo’s most biodiverse regions which easily rival its avian population. Other than birds, the river and its surroundings are rich in wildlife like proboscis monkeys, orangutans, elephants and even a plethora of slithering and crawling reptiles and insects. The region’s ecosystems of riverside forests, swamp forests, and mangroves are so rich in variety that it hosts rare and diverse species. As a UNESCO Biosphere Reserve, the region’s conservation efforts are crucial to the area’s ecological balance.
Eco-tourism opportunities abound in Kinabatangan and its surroundings. Guests can participate in river cruises over the Kinabatangan with its stunning wildlife and landscapes. Accompanied by a guide, visitors can also take safaris in the Sungai Pin Conservation Area and traverse the peatland forests and wetlands while experiencing the rich biodiversity of Borneo.
The Destination for Responsible Travel
“It’s no wonder Kinabatangan is a major attraction for any traveller interested in eco-tourism and sustainable travel. Kinabatangan’s implementation of responsible tourism and the development of its unique ecosystems is vital for it’s noted success. These efforts in eco-tourism focus on the Sungai Pin Conservation Area and nearby reserves, which allow travellers to enjoy the natural wonders of Borneo while funding conservation efforts in the region.”
Events such as the Borneo Bird Festival and others make significant contributions to the area by increasing awareness of the surrounding environment and the need for conservation. The Kinabatangan region is featured in the festival, encouraging visitors to interact with the eco-system mindfully.
This snippet covers travel to Kinabatangan and its surroundings.
In the country of Malaysia, the Kinabatangan area can be quickly reached via the main town of Sandakan, which has its own airport. Sandakan Airport has domestic flights to many cities in Malaysia, one of which is Kota Kinabalu, the capital of Sabah. Kinabatangan can be reached via land from Sandakan or by going on one of the river cruises to see wildlife.
In Kinabantangan, one is able to stay in places from more pricey resorts to eco lodges and other mid range options. The places that one can stay at have a unique design where they incorporate the surroundings. The more eco friendly resorts and lodges give the option of tours, birdwatching trips and river safaris which get one acclimated to the natural scenery and animals.
Tourists who come on a tourism package deal get a pre set itinerary which is assisted by guides to tour places such as the Kinabatangan River and the Sungai Pin Conservation Area which is a wildlife concentrated area. The guides are very essential in making sure the tourists have a great experience while also educating them on the importance of preserving ecotourism.
Encouraging Responsible Ecotourism on Borneo
These eco-tourism programs are in sync with Borneo’s strategic aims in sustainable tourism. In step with Borneo’s growing tourism industry, there is a greater effort to advocate for conservation aligned with the Region’s natural heritage. The Sungai Pin Conservation Area is an example of eco-tourism that helps protect important natural areas while providing economic opportunities for the local population.
Kinabatangan is in the forefront of promoting sustainable tourism in Southeast Asia. Travellers to the region are encouraged to make donations to local conservation initiatives and can engage in activities that serve the local ecology and economy.
Conclusion: Kinabatangan and Increasing Wildlife Tourism
Southeast Asia’s most unique river, Kinabatangan, and the adjoining Sungai Pin Conservation Area, are examples of how, with careful management, tourism can contribute to the preservation of endangered species and ecosystems. Kinabatangan is a prime site for bird watching and combines the region’s wild life safaris and rich cultural heritage. This makes the region a great place for adventurous travellers to experience one of the most biodiverse areas in the world. Kinabatangan and its conservation areas should remain as focal points of eco-tourism as Borneo’s growing tourism industry expands.
The post Eco-Tourism at Its Best: Explore Kinabatangan and Its Rich Flora and Fauna in Borneo appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The post XRP Left Behind Again as Solana, Hedera, and Litecoin ETFs Set To Go Live Tomorrow appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
In a surprising turn of events, spot ETFs for Litecoin (LTC) and Hedera (HBAR) are now officially effective and will begin trading on NASDAQ tomorrow, according to Canary Funds CEO Steven McClurg. Litecoin and Hedera are the next two token ETFs to go effective after Ethereum, and Canary Funds has confirmed their launch tomorrow.
Additionally, Bloomberg’s Senior ETF Analyst Eric Balchunas confirmed that the NYSE has certified the 8-A filings for multiple crypto ETFs, including Bitwise’s spot Solana ETF (SOL) and Grayscale’s GSOL, which will convert on Wednesday.
He said that the Exchange has posted listing notices for Bitwise Solana, Canary Litecoin, and Canary HBAR to launch tomorrow, and Grayscale Solana to convert the day after. Unless there is last-minute SEC intervention, the launches are moving forward.
This set of ETF approvals has raised questions about how such progress is possible during the ongoing U.S. government shutdown. Journalist Eleanor Terrett explained that certain legal provisions allow ETFs to move forward without active SEC oversight.
Under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Form 8-A filing formally registers ETF shares for exchange trading, while the S-1 filing registers them under the Securities Act of 1933.
The NYSE certified all relevant 8-A filings this morning, marking the final procedural step before trading begins. As for the S-1s, issuers included language allowing their registration statements to automatically go effective 20 days after filing, bypassing the need for manual SEC approval.
This mechanism means ETFs can legally go live even when the SEC staff is unavailable, allowing launches to continue uninterrupted despite the shutdown.
However, not every digital asset community is celebrating.
While the crypto market welcomes new ETF launches, XRP investors are once again left behind. Legal expert Bill Morgan noted that delays around XRP have become a recurring theme and that the asset continues to be excluded from major developments.
I had a strong feeling XRP Spot ETFs would not be next. There are always delays when it comes to XRP. Always held back. https://t.co/7Vhzi6Cesv
— bill morgan (@Belisarius2020) October 27, 2025
He also said that XRP’s price generally mirrors Bitcoin’s movements, explaining that even multiple ETF approvals would not necessarily drive the token higher if Bitcoin were to fall.
vivo unveiled the S30 and S30 Pro mini in May, and if you know anything about Chinese smartphone makers, you know that they hate the number 4, due to prevailing tetraphobia in China. So it won't surprise you to find out that there will be no S40 series, but that vivo is already working on the S50 family. A few details about these have been outed today. The S50 Pro mini will keep the exact same display size its predecessor has - 6.31". On the other hand, the S50's screen will shrink to 6.59" from the S30's 6.67". Both of the new phones have "1.5K" resolution and flat panels. vivo...
OnePlus has just announced the 15 and the Ace 6 in China, but it's also working on a new series of devices, which was previously rumored earlier this month. The first phone in this line will be called OnePlus Turbo, and today its specs have been leaked. It will allegedly sport a 6.7-inch OLED screen with "1.5K" resolution and 165Hz refresh rate, the Snapdragon 8 Gen 5 SoC at the helm, and a gigantic 8,000 mAh battery with support for 100W wired charging. OnePlus Ace 6 On the rear will be a 50 MP main camera and an 8 MP ultrawide. The device will also pack an X-axis linear vibration...
Lionel Messi has been one of the defining figures in soccer over the past two decades, breaking countless records and establishing himself as the most decorated player in history. Yet the Argentine icon still holds deep admiration for the legends who came before him. When asked about the Greatest of All Time (GOATs), Messi didn’t hesitate to compare a soccer legend to NBA icon Michael Jordan.
Throughout his career, Messi has often spoken about his admiration for former Argentina midfielder Pablo Aimar, someone he idolized growing up. Still, when it comes to the true “GOAT” debate, the Inter Miami star believes only a few transcendent figures belong in that conversation, and he included one from soccer and one from basketball.
In an interview with NBC News’ Tom Llamas, Messi was asked about the GOATs he’s studied or looked up to. His answer was clear: “Of course, for us Argentinians, (Diego) Maradona was always the one, our greatest legend, the greatest player for what he represented to all of us. Although I was young and saw him play live only a little, Diego transcended everything, he was something bigger than any boundaries.“
The Inter Miami star then shifted the conversation beyond soccer, immediately drawing a parallel with another icon. “If we talk about another sport, I think it was similar with Michael Jordan, yes,” Messi said, likening Maradona’s influence on soccer to Jordan’s legendary status in basketball.
Messi was just 10 years old when Maradona retired in 1997 and was coming through La Masia in 2003 when Jordan played his final NBA game. Still, the eight-time Ballon d’Or winner recognizes that their legacies continue to shape their sports, a feeling he’ll undoubtedly experience himself once he decides to hang up his boots.
Since his debut at FC Barcelona, Messi’s focus has always been on soccer, rarely crossing paths with other sports. Now at Inter Miami, the Argentine legend has broadened his horizons, attending events like Super Bowl LIX, a surreal moment that would have seemed impossible just a few years ago.
When it comes to tennis, Messi didn’t hesitate to praise the “Big Three”: “I also greatly admire tennis players like Nadal, Federer, Djokovic because they made the competition much greater than it was. Competing all this time to be the best and trading the top spot among themselves made everything more spectacular. I don’t know, I’m sure I forgot to mention many athletes, but to highlight a few, I think I’d choose these.“
He also shared his thoughts on basketball, mentioning two current NBA superstars and future Hall of Famers. “In basketball, for example, LeBron James and Steph Curry are players I’ve admired a lot, and I think they’ve contributed so much to the sport they each play in their own field,” Messi concluded.
Lionel Messi has arguably made the biggest impact of any player in Major League Soccer history, not only through his on-field performances, but also by transforming TV deals, attendance figures, and the league’s global visibility. More than two years after joining Inter Miami, the Argentine legend reflected on his influence in the United States and shared his thoughts on what MLS must do to take the next step forward.
On Thursday, October 23, Inter Miami announced the renewal of Messi’s contract, extending his stay with the Herons through 2028. The decision represents a landmark moment not just for the club, but for the league as well, which continues to benefit from the presence of its most recognizable face. Messi’s performances have redefined expectations for a Designated Player, and another MLS MVP award already seems within reach.
In an interview with NBC News, journalist Tom Llamas asked Messi whether he believes he has succeeded in elevating Inter Miami’s global profile: “I think so, yes. Today, the Inter Miami brand has become very strong, not only in the USA but also on a global level. I believe the club has undergone a significant transformation and has grown in every aspect: athletically, institutionally, and organizationally. And I think there is even more room for it to continue growing and improving in all aspects.”
Messi also addressed the development of MLS itself, emphasizing that the league’s potential depends on taking bolder steps. “As for the development of football in the USA, I see it as possible, but major changes are necessary for teams to continue growing. The clubs are ready and genuinely want to achieve this growth, and I believe the time is right for it now,” he stated.
Among the changes he believes are essential, Messi highlighted one major rule that could reshape the league: “For this development to begin, every team must have the freedom to bring in the players they want and sign them without restrictions or regulations limiting that.
“Today, all the teams and clubs in the USA have the resources and capability to do so, and I believe that if they were given this freedom, many great players would come, which would greatly help in the development of football in America,” Messi concluded.
Messi’s impact in MLS has been magnified by the arrival of other global stars like Son Heung-min and Thomas Müller, both of whom have expressed admiration for the Argentine. However, one of the most consistent frustrations voiced by Inter Miami players, including Messi, has been the league’s strict salary cap.
Back in February, Luis Suárez spoke about the challenges Inter Miami faced ahead of the FIFA Club World Cup, admitting that MLS roster rules limited the club’s ability to compete with international powerhouses. Even when Neymar was rumored to be a potential signing, head coach Javier Mascherano publicly acknowledged that the club was constrained by MLS financial regulations.
Then, in an April interview with the Simplemente Fútbol YouTube channel, Messi himself admitted that the league’s growth was being slowed by “many restrictions” on player acquisitions. Despite these limitations, the eight-time Ballon d’Or winner has committed his future to Inter Miami, but he made it clear that he believes the rules must evolve for MLS to reach its full potential.
Bitcoin’s recent liquidity flush has stirred volatility across the market, leaving traders cautious as Ethereum shows signs of a potential recovery. While BTC struggles to stabilize after clearing key liquidity levels, ETH is attempting to reclaim crucial resistance, setting the stage for what could be the next major directional move in the crypto market.
Can Özsüer, in his latest BTC 1H Current Chart update shared on X, highlighted that the hourly chart of Bitcoin shows little to no bullish reflection at the moment. He pointed out that market sentiment has weakened, particularly after the $116,000 liquidity zone was cleared, which further dampened the outlook across the broader crypto market.
According to Özsüer, the overall setup remains fragile, and taking scalp long positions in such conditions could be risky until a clearer reversal structure begins to form. Özsüer identified the $111,000 level as a potential zone for an initial reaction buy, suggesting that some short-term support could emerge around this point. However, he cautioned that if this level fails to hold, Bitcoin could experience a sharper decline toward the trendline support near $109,000.
He further advised that traders should construct their strategies carefully, focusing on the zones within what he referred to as “box number 1.” This area could provide a technical framework for identifying potential entry points and managing risk effectively.
To conclude, Özsüer noted that the cleanest and safest approach would be to align trading plans around optimal price levels while ensuring that positions remain protected above the defined support structure.
While Bitcoin faces a potential drawdown, crypto analyst Ted Pillows revealed that ETH is currently engaged in a critical fight to reclaim the $4,200 resistance zone. The success of this immediate technical battle is crucial, as it will determine the asset’s trajectory in the days to come.
Ted pillows outlined the condition for a continuation of the rally; if Ethereum is able to decisively reclaim and hold the $4,200 level, traders should “expect more bullish continuation.” Conquering this resistance would likely signal a clear path to the next higher price targets.
Conversely, should ETH fail to secure the $4,200 zone, the price will likely retreat. The analyst predicts that this failure would trigger a necessary retest of the $4,000 level before the market can attempt any further upward moves, indicating that $4,000 acts as the crucial defense line against a deeper correction.
Bitcoin (BTC) is showing renewed strength, reclaiming the $115,000 level after weeks of volatility and uncertainty. Bulls are attempting to build momentum for a potential impulse move higher, aiming to confirm a sustained bullish structure after the recent consolidation phase.
On-chain data continues to reveal a clear and repeating pattern tied to investor behavior and market cycles. Historically, when the percentage of Bitcoin supply in profit climbs above 95%, the market tends to enter an overheated phase, often leading to sharp corrections. These pullbacks serve as natural cooling periods, resetting sentiment and liquidity before the next major leg up.
Interestingly, each correction cycle has shown consistent bottoming zones around the 75% threshold, where long-term holders reaccumulate and market confidence begins to rebuild. More specifically, data highlights profit supply lows of 73% in September 2024, 76% in April 2024, and a recent rebound from 81%, signaling a potential mid-cycle recovery phase.
Bitcoin Supply in Profit Rises to 83.6% — Momentum Rebuilds Ahead of Key ThresholdAccording to top analyst Darkfost, the percentage of Bitcoin supply in profit has started to climb again, currently standing at 83.6%. This steady rise indicates that a growing share of Bitcoin holders are once again sitting on unrealized gains — a trend that often reflects improving sentiment and renewed market confidence.
Darkfost notes that this level can be interpreted as encouraging, suggesting that investors are willing to hold their BTC instead of realizing profits, anticipating further upside in the near term. Historically, such behavior has been characteristic of mid-cycle recovery phases, when fear starts to fade and accumulation resumes across both retail and institutional segments.
This stage of the cycle is considered healthy for rebuilding momentum, as it allows the market to stabilize after large corrections. Holders who previously capitulated often reenter at this stage, while long-term participants strengthen their positions, creating a more resilient market structure.
However, Darkfost cautions that once the supply in profit surpasses 95%, it typically signals overheated market conditions — a point where euphoria tends to replace rational conviction. In such phases, Bitcoin historically faces increased volatility and sharp corrections as overleveraged traders and short-term speculators take profits.
Bitcoin (BTC) is showing renewed bullish momentum, trading around $115,443 and successfully reclaiming key short-term support levels after weeks of consolidation. The daily chart highlights a strong recovery structure, with BTC breaking above both the 50-day and 100-day moving averages, signaling a shift in short-term market sentiment.
The next critical test lies at $117,500, a historical resistance zone that previously rejected multiple attempts in September and early October. A clear breakout and daily close above this level would likely confirm an impulse continuation toward $120K–$125K, opening the door for a more sustained uptrend.
Momentum indicators suggest strengthening buying pressure, while the recent bounce from the 200-day moving average near $107K underscores the market’s resilience. This level acted as a springboard for the current rally, aligning with the broader pattern of accumulation seen on-chain, where investor profitability is rising steadily.
However, BTC remains within a range-bound structure, and rejection at $117.5K could trigger short-term consolidation back toward $111K–$112K. Overall, Bitcoin’s technical outlook appears constructive — if the bulls can sustain above $115K and confirm strength above $117.5K, the market could transition into a new bullish leg, supported by improving investor sentiment and on-chain health.
Featured image from ChatGPT, chart from TradingView.com
Are cryptocurrencies still the ultimate game-changer in finance? Cardano (ADA) continues to spark curiosity among investors, developers, and crypto enthusiasts, as it hovers around $0.689, up 6.09% weekly. The burning question remains whether ADA will surge to new heights or slide into downside fears.
Interestingly, while Cardano draws attention with its blockchain innovations, MoonBull stands out as the best crypto presale, attracting early investors with massive ROI potential. Comparing both highlights the contrast between established tokens like ADA and emerging opportunities with explosive early gains. Market trends, whales, and community buzz are driving both ecosystems, fueling speculation.
MoonBull dominates as the best crypto presale with a launch designed to reward early investors and protect holders. After the final presale stage, liquidity will be supplied to decentralized exchanges, and all $MOBU tokens will be fully claimable immediately following a 48-hour lock, with no vesting delays.
To stabilize the launch, a 60-minute claim delay requires any sell to be matched with a buy, preventing price drops and immediate dump pressure. Built on Ethereum’s ERC-20 standard, $MOBU ensures deep liquidity, seamless wallet access, staking, reflections, burns, and sell taxes. Leveraging Ethereum’s validator network and audit infrastructure, MoonBull thrives with scalability, cross-chain tools, governance frameworks, and broad ecosystem interoperability.
MoonBull’s $MOBU presale is heating up, currently in Stage 5 with a price of $0.00006584, over $500K raised, and 1,500+ token holders. Early buyers already enjoy 163.36% ROI, while Stage 5 to listing at $0.00616 projects a staggering 9,256% return. Investing $500 now secures 7,594,167.68 $MOBU tokens, potentially earning $46,780 at listing.
Each presale stage rises by 27.40% until Stage 22, with Stage 23 increasing 20.38%. The presale’s structured growth and limited supply create urgency and FOMO, making MoonBull a must-watch opportunity for crypto enthusiasts seeking high early-stage returns and maximum ROI potential.
Cardano (ADA) today’s price stands at $0.689766 with a 24-hour trading volume of $837 million, reflecting steady demand despite broader crypto market swings. The seven-day price movement shows a 6.09% increase, indicating short-term momentum in ADA trading. Analysts note that institutional participation and staking adoption are supporting the current price. Cardano (ADA) live price movements suggest that technical levels near $0.77 may serve as resistance, while $0.60 remains critical support.
Crypto developers and financial analysts monitor these metrics to anticipate potential breakouts or corrections. With the ecosystem maturing and DApps gaining traction, Cardano’s crypto price presents a blend of opportunity and caution, especially as new investors compare it with presales like MoonBull.
Cardano (ADA) price forecast for 2025 points to a potential trading range between $0.76 and $1.80, depending on adoption and market sentiment. Optimistic projections suggest ADA could reach $2 if blockchain developments such as scalability upgrades and interoperability features succeed. Analysts argue that if Cardano maintains support levels, institutional inflows may accelerate growth.
Conversely, risks include market volatility, regulatory changes, and short-term corrections. Social media chatter and retail sentiment indicate cautious optimism, with many investors eyeing ADA as a long-term hold. Compared to MoonBull, which has explosive presale stages and an early ROI of 9256%, ADA may seem slower, yet it offers stability and proven blockchain infrastructure, making it suitable for moderate risk investors.
Technical analysis of Cardano (ADA) highlights a symmetrical triangle pattern, with resistance near $0.77 and support at $0.60. Breaking above $0.77 could indicate bullish momentum, while falling below $0.60 may trigger short-term declines. Trading volumes have slightly declined, signaling the need for buyers to push momentum higher.
Price indicators such as the RSI suggest ADA is not overbought, leaving room for gradual appreciation. Historically, ADA has seen repeated cycles of growth and corrections, and investors are advised to monitor trendlines closely. Meanwhile, MoonBull dominates as the best crypto presale by offering structured stages, increasing prices by 27.40% per stage, making early entry a high-risk, high-reward contrast to ADA’s measured market moves.
In conclusion, Cardano (ADA) offers a solid, mature blockchain with potential upside, supported by institutional interest and upcoming network upgrades. Its price forecast for 2025 ranges from $0.76 to $1.80, appealing to long-term investors seeking stability. In contrast, MoonBull dominates as the best crypto presale, providing early participants with significant ROI and FOMO-driven urgency.
Both present valuable opportunities: ADA with measured growth and MoonBull with explosive potential. Investors must weigh risk tolerance, investment goals, and market timing. Whether focusing on Cardano’s blockchain fundamentals or MoonBull’s presale hype, informed research remains key to navigating the evolving crypto landscape successfully.
Website: Visit the Official MOBU Website
Telegram: Join the MOBU Telegram Channel
Twitter: Follow MOBU ON X (Formerly Twitter)
The best crypto to buy now depends on risk appetite and market conditions. Presales with structured stages like MoonBull offer high ROI potential, while established coins like Cardano provide more stability and long-term growth prospects.
Monitoring presale structures, social engagement, and blockchain fundamentals helps identify breakout crypto. MoonBull presale demonstrates early-stage growth, whereas established coins rely on adoption and institutional interest to drive price.
Presales with tiered pricing and strong community incentives deliver maximum early-stage gains. MoonBull presale stages, increasing 27.40% per stage, ensure early investors can achieve substantial ROI compared to other cryptos.
Institutional participation improves liquidity, stability, and market confidence. Cardano benefits from ETF and large fund interest, whereas presales like MoonBull rely on retail investors and community hype to fuel momentum.
Established coins like ADA offer security, proven tech, and steady growth. New presales like MoonBull dominate the hype space, providing high ROI but with increased risk. Diversified strategies are often recommended.
ADA: Native token of the Cardano blockchain.
ERC-20: Ethereum standard for creating tokens.
Liquidity Pool: Funds locked in smart contracts for decentralized trading.
Staking: Locking tokens to support blockchain network operations.
Presale: Early offering of a crypto token before public trading.
This article analyzed Cardano (ADA) price prediction for 2025, including market trends, technical analysis, institutional interest, and upcoming upgrades. MoonBull dominates as the best crypto presale, providing structured stages, massive ROI, and Ethereum security. While ADA offers stability, MoonBull brings explosive potential, allowing investors to balance risk and reward in the evolving crypto market.
Read More: Cardano Price Prediction: Could ADA Hit $2 While MoonBull Surges With 9,256% ROI as the Best Crypto Presale in Q4 2025?">Cardano Price Prediction: Could ADA Hit $2 While MoonBull Surges With 9,256% ROI as the Best Crypto Presale in Q4 2025?
Ever notice how crypto news now reads like a movie trailer? Bitcoin smashing $115K, Avalanche breaking $20, and a newcomer called BullZilla roaring through presale milestones, it’s a full-blown blockbuster. This November, the market’s rhythm feels electric, driven by ETF inflows, election speculation, and new-age presales redefining investing. Whether you’re holding Bitcoin or hunting the next big presale gem, the action is heating up. Amid this chaos, investors are asking: which project truly stands tall among the top crypto to buy for November?
Bitcoin’s steady climb has re-ignited faith in digital gold, Avalanche is fueling DeFi revival, and BullZilla is engineering the presale era’s most explosive ROI mechanism. From traders chasing stability to investors eyeing early-stage profits, these three projects dominate November’s spotlight. Bitcoin brings scale and certainty, Avalanche carries DeFi speed, and BullZilla delivers early-entry advantage. Together, they define the evolving balance between security and opportunity. But only one offers structured scarcity designed for exponential returns, and that’s where the BullZilla story begins.
Bitcoin (BTC) surged 2.89% over the past 24 hours to reach $115,015, accompanied by a remarkable 169% spike in daily trading volume to $59.58 billion. This sharp increase reflects renewed investor confidence driven by institutional inflows and strong ETF demand. Analysts attribute Bitcoin’s momentum to improving macroeconomic conditions, lower Treasury yields, and growing optimism surrounding broader crypto adoption. As the leading digital asset, Bitcoin remains the ultimate benchmark for market sentiment and liquidity. Its gradual climb toward the $126K peak demonstrates sustained strength amid global uncertainty. Despite smaller percentage moves than those of emerging altcoins, Bitcoin continues to serve as a stabilizing force for portfolios worldwide, offering long-term security, deep liquidity, and unmatched recognition as the cornerstone of the modern crypto economy.
Bitcoin’s surge is fueled by strong ETF inflows, rising institutional participation, and easing macroeconomic pressures. These factors have restored investor confidence, propelling BTC closer to its previous $126,000 all-time high.
Yes. Bitcoin remains the most secure and recognized cryptocurrency, backed by deep liquidity, regulatory clarity, and institutional adoption, making it a stable long-term store of value compared to emerging altcoins.
BullZilla ($BZIL) isn’t just another presale; it’s redefining what the top crypto to buy for November truly means. Now in Stage 8 (Echoes of the Bull-A, Phase 2), each token trades at $0.00019906. The project has already raised over $980,000, sold 31 billion tokens, and attracted more than 3,300 holders globally. Analysts forecast a 2,548.15% ROI to its $0.00527 listing, while early entrants already enjoy 3,361.91% gains. A $1,000 investment secures 5.023 million tokens before the next 3.35% surge hits. Through The HODL Furnace, investors can stake tokens for flexible durations, earning compounding rewards while contributing to deflation. With over 32 billion tokens allocated for staking, holders generate passive income while strengthening liquidity and project resilience.
A $1,500 investment at the current Stage 8 price nets around 7.53 million $BZIL tokens. If projections to the $0.00527 listing hold, this could translate to roughly $39,700 in value, a 2,548% increase. Such exponential potential stems from BullZilla’s Progressive Price Engine, which lifts value every 48 hours or when $100K is raised. Coupled with the Roar Burn mechanism and staking features, it builds mechanical scarcity into the ecosystem, driving both long-term token appreciation and short-term presale demand.
Start by setting up a Web3 wallet, such as MetaMask or Trust Wallet. Buy ETH on an exchange such as Binance or Coinbase, then transfer it to your wallet. Then visit BullZilla’s official presale site, connect your wallet, and swap ETH for $BZIL. Your tokens will be securely locked until the presale ends, then claimable. Vesting schedules are fully transparent on the platform. Joining early ensures the highest ROI potential and access to referral rewards through the exclusive Roarblood Vault program.
BullZilla stands out with its 24-stage burn model, Roar Burn mechanism, and Progressive Price Engine, ensuring automatic scarcity, transparent growth, and consistent upward pricing rarely seen in conventional meme or presale tokens.
BullZilla’s smart contracts are fully audited and transparent. Investors maintain complete wallet control, while vesting mechanisms promote fairness and protect against early dumps or sudden market volatility.
Yes. Through the Roarblood Vault, investors can earn up to 12% referral bonuses for bringing in new buyers, strengthening community growth and increasing presale participation before the token listing.
Avalanche (AVAX) recently broke through the critical $20 threshold after weeks of consolidation, confirming the start of a sustained bullish continuation. Currently trading at $19.71 and up 1.66% in the last 24 hours, AVAX appears poised for a potential rally toward the $30 zone. Analysts believe that once it clears the $22 resistance level, roughly $40 million in short positions could be liquidated, accelerating upward momentum. With a robust DeFi footprint and expanding subnet ecosystem, Avalanche continues to attract developers, institutional investors, and liquidity providers. Consistent higher lows since $18.50 reinforce its strong technical foundation, positioning it as one of the most resilient, innovative, and scalable blockchain networks in 2025, capable of driving long-term growth across decentralized applications and cross-chain integrations.
Avalanche’s move past $20 highlights renewed investor confidence driven by its scalable architecture, ultra-fast transactions, and expanding DeFi ecosystem, positioning AVAX as one of the most efficient and adopted Layer-1 networks.
If Avalanche sustains momentum above $22, analysts anticipate a breakout toward the $25–$30 range, supported by increasing institutional accumulation and strengthening on-chain activity across DeFi and enterprise integrations.
Bitcoin’s 2.89% jump reflects renewed macro optimism, Avalanche’s $20 breakout signals DeFi resurgence, and BullZilla’s Stage 8 success redefines what presale strength looks like. Together, these cryptos show a market evolving beyond volatility into structured opportunity. The November narrative highlights balance, stability from Bitcoin, scalability from Avalanche, and exponential growth from BullZilla. As the presale scene matures, projects offering real mechanics, transparency, and utility stand out as the actual top crypto to buy for November.
BullZilla’s engineered scarcity and price progression present a modern blueprint for long-term value creation. While Bitcoin and Avalanche attract traditional confidence, BullZilla captures the excitement of structured ROI. Its 24-stage burn mechanism, staking systems, and referral rewards create a balanced ecosystem of reward and scarcity. As the next 3.35% price rise nears, the presale’s explosive start underscores one message: opportunity favors the early. BullZilla might just be the beast leading the next bull wave.
Follow BZIL on X (Formerly Twitter)
Read More: Crypto Price Today (27th Oct): BTC Nears $116K, AVAX Eyes $30, Yet All Eyes are On BullZilla, The Top Crypto to Buy for November">Crypto Price Today (27th Oct): BTC Nears $116K, AVAX Eyes $30, Yet All Eyes are On BullZilla, The Top Crypto to Buy for November
© Joe Giddens/PA
Experts say drug-laced Halloween candy is an urban legend, but police in Warren, Michigan said the
© Warren Police Department
Communities continue to be denied vital amenities such as GP surgeries and schools because of flaws in processes intended to secure fair financial contributions from developers
© Steve Parsons/PA
The list, curated by clinicians, covers everything from wills to wakes and what we might want to happen to pets
© PA
Consumers struggling with cost of living crisis now also face fresh wave of so-called shrinkflation
© PA
Letters will be dropping on doormats across England and Wales from Tuesday
© PA Wire
Jordan's Queen Rania has praised Donald Trump for his 20-point peace plan for Gaza.
© BBC
Watch the moment a dog is rescued by police officers from a storm drain in New Jersey.
© Wall Township Police Department
Satellite imagery shows the “monster” eye of Hurricane Melissa, the most powerful storm recorded this year, that is currently hurtling towards Jamaica.
© CIRA
© REUTERS/Mike Segar
© Kevin Dietsch/Getty Images
A double murderer took four children to McDonald’s just hours after killing their parents.
© Sussex Police
Starting October 27 until October 30, Hatteras Island, Carolina has been experiencing large breaking waves, rip tides and coastal flooding in shallow areas. National Weather Service (NWS) has done a good job in warning against such dangerously emerging conditions on new Hatteras. Hatteras’ exotic coasts have been attracting hordes of tourists for decades now. This High Surf Advisory comes along with new restrictions being placed on tourists, such as controlling where they can surf. This Advisory goes for Hatteras residents and tourists, as they are also in harms way.
For visitors planning trips to Hatteras Island, the NWS has outlined two primary threats:
Additionally, the Beach Hazards Statement warns of rip currents, which are expected to be strongest a couple of hours before and after low tide (around 6 AM and 7:30 PM on Tuesday, October 28).
Hatteras Island, located on North Carolina’s Outer Banks, is a popular destination for beachgoers and adventure seekers alike. Famous for its natural beauty and serene atmosphere, it also attracts surfers, fishermen, and tourists interested in exploring the Cape Hatteras National Seashore and other local attractions.
However, during this storm event, many of these key spots may face disruptions due to hazardous weather conditions:
The NWS has issued several important safety protocols for tourists and residents. The first recommendation is to avoid the water. Due to the dangerous conditions, even the most experienced swimmers are advised to stay out of the surf. In particular, rip currents can be deadly. If you are caught in one, remember to:
For those visiting the beach, the shore break, a sudden wave that crashes directly on the sand, can be extremely hazardous. To prevent neck and back injuries, it’s essential to keep your hands in front of you when in breaking waves. Experts strongly urge swimmers to stay alert and protect themselves at all times.
Flooding in low-lying areas may lead to road closures. The NWS cautions against attempting to drive around barricades or through water of unknown depth. If you must travel, ensure you are prepared for road disruptions. Keep in mind that some homes, businesses, and infrastructure near the coast may experience significant inundation.
Tourists heading to Hatteras Island for outdoor activities, surfing, or beach vacations should reconsider their plans or take extra precautions. The combination of high surf, dangerous rip currents, and flooding means that the island’s beaches could be unsafe, particularly for those unfamiliar with these natural dangers.
While some areas may remain open for sightseeing, the most popular activities, beach swimming and surfing, are strongly discouraged during the advisory period. Always check the latest updates from the NWS for real-time alerts and ensure your accommodations are fully informed about the weather.
As for other visitors to Hatteras Island, this High Surf Advisory should to emphasize the stark reality of the risks involved to anyone (and especially this particular group) during the most violent times of the year.Day-trippers and visitors to the Outer Banks sharnder go through the available weather reports thoroughly and reports coming from other noted agencies such as the NWS. Understand the fact that the stormy weather might cause temporary disruptions. Proper foresight can assist would-be visitors in accomplishing game plans, which would include safety as a paramount goal. Protect your residential property, abandon zones of perilously wobbly surf, and do not worayabout the attitude of nature.
The post High Surf Advisory Issued For Carolina, US Along With Rip Tides And Coastal Flooding: Here’s What Tourists Need To Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The Caribbean tourism industry is on high alert as Hurricane Melissa, now a Category 5 storm, moves toward Jamaica, threatening one of the region’s busiest travel corridors. The hurricane, which was officially named on October 21, has already prompted hurricane warnings across Jamaica and eastern Cuba, while the Bahamas and Turks and Caicos remain under hurricane watch.
Major resort operators across the region are enacting their emergency protocols, with hotels reinforcing structures, securing supplies, and offering accommodations for stranded travelers. Meanwhile, travel agencies and insurers are coordinating to assist affected tourists and rebook postponed trips.
The powerful storm highlights the growing challenges Caribbean destinations face in maintaining tourism operations amid intensifying tropical systems fueled by climate change.
With thousands of international visitors expected during this peak travel season, Jamaica’s tourism industry is working around the clock to ensure guest safety. Leading resort chains such as Sandals Resorts International, which operates several Sandals and Beaches properties across the island, have implemented long-established hurricane response plans. Staff have been trained to handle severe weather situations, and facilities are being used as temporary shelters for guests who are unable to depart due to flight disruptions.
Similarly, properties such as Round Hill Hotel and Villas in Montego Bay, Moon Palace Jamaica in Ocho Rios, and Excellence Oyster Bay have reported full readiness, reinforcing safety shelters and maintaining constant communication with local emergency management agencies. Smaller boutique resorts like Tensing Pen in Negril have opted for complete evacuation until post-storm assessments are completed.
Across all establishments, the primary focus remains guest safety, staff protection, and continuity of essential services.
As Melissa’s path became clearer, travel advisors across the United States began monitoring itineraries for clients with upcoming trips to the Caribbean. Many agencies used real-time tracking tools and internal reporting systems to identify travelers potentially affected.
According to industry reports, proactive communication helped several tourists reschedule or postpone their vacations before the storm intensified. Advisors are following standard procedures for weather-related disruptions, ensuring that clients have up-to-date information from trusted sources such as the National Hurricane Center (NHC) and official government advisories.
This proactive coordination highlights how vital travel advisors have become in mitigating the impact of natural disasters on tourism-dependent economies like Jamaica’s.
For travelers who purchased travel insurance before October 21, financial protection is generally available for disruptions caused by Hurricane Melissa. Insurance typically applies in scenarios where:
Most standard policies reimburse up to 100% of nonrefundable travel costs, though travelers must present receipts and cancellation proof to file claims successfully. Those purchasing insurance after the storm was named will not be covered for losses related to Melissa, as insurers classify such events as foreseeable.
Travel experts emphasize the importance of securing insurance early, particularly during the Atlantic hurricane season, which typically runs from June through November.
As of Monday afternoon, the National Hurricane Center confirmed that hurricane warnings remain in place for:
Hurricane watches have been extended to parts of the southeastern and central Bahamas and the Turks and Caicos Islands, while tropical storm warnings are active for Haiti and Cuba’s Las Tunas province.
Authorities in Jamaica have activated national disaster preparedness teams, and local shelters are being readied for both residents and tourists. Several airports, including Sangster International in Montego Bay, may experience temporary closures depending on the storm’s trajectory.
For visitors currently in the Caribbean or planning trips in the coming weeks, experts recommend the following safety steps:
Tourists are also encouraged to book stays at established resorts with strong emergency protocols and to check refund or rebooking policies before travel.
Historically, Jamaica and its neighboring islands have shown remarkable resilience in rebuilding tourism infrastructure after hurricanes. Recovery efforts often begin immediately following the storm, led by hotel groups, local communities, and nonprofit organizations.
Resort foundations and regional aid agencies are already mobilizing to assess potential damage and provide assistance to affected areas. While the short-term tourism impact is likely to be significant, experts expect visitor arrivals to rebound once safety assessments confirm that conditions are stable.
As Caribbean nations continue to adapt to stronger and more frequent storms, the travel industry’s growing focus on disaster readiness and sustainable infrastructure will play a critical role in protecting both visitors and communities.
The post Caribbean Tourism on Alert as Hurricane Melissa Moves Toward Jamaica, Cuba, and the Bahamas – Here’s What Travelers Need to Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The International Air Transport Association (IATA) has rolled out the 2026 editions of its crucial industry manuals for cargo, ground operations, and animal welfare. The updates introduce nearly 100 major changes to align with emerging global standards. From battery shipping regulations to animal welfare protocols, these revisions are set to elevate air transport safety, efficiency, and sustainability.
In 2026, IATA’s Dangerous Goods Regulations (DGR) and Battery Shipping Regulations (BSR) are receiving significant updates, particularly focused on lithium batteries. The air transport of lithium batteries has risen by 25% in recent years, contributing to increased safety risks. These updates address a series of high-profile incidents involving overheating power banks and new hybrid battery chemistries.
The key changes in DGR include formal shipping names for hybrid-powered vehicles, clearer recommendations for passengers using power banks in cabins, and new variations for countries like Thailand, France, and the UK. The BSR updates introduce stricter charge limits for lithium-ion batteries packed with equipment, a shipper compliance checklist, and additional guidelines for Designated Postal Operators accepting lithium battery shipments.
IATA’s Live Animals Regulations (LAR) have undergone a major update, aimed at improving the welfare of animals transported by air. In 2024, over 200,000 non-domestic animal shipments were made, highlighting the growing demand for improved care and safety standards. Key updates include guidelines for attendants on providing safe care during transit, with competency-based training becoming a standard practice.
New specifications for animal containers focus on ventilation and material quality. Brazil has now officially adopted the LAR guidelines. Additionally, there are updated requirements for transporting specific species like poultry, pangolins, and hooded raptors. These changes reflect IATA’s ongoing commitment to animal welfare in the transport sector.
The 2026 edition of IATA’s Ground Operations Manual (IGOM) introduces a host of updates designed to streamline airport operations and enhance safety. Notably, new guidelines for handling passengers with special needs, such as unaccompanied minors, unruly passengers, and those requiring medical assistance, have been incorporated.
Furthermore, baggage tracking standards have been aligned with IATA’s Resolution 753 to ensure that all checked bags are tracked through the entire journey. There are also revised procedures for preparing, collecting, and transporting potable water to improve operational efficiency. Aircraft turnaround procedures have been updated to ensure faster, safer handling of flights, reducing delays and improving customer service.
In response to the growing need for real-time access to regulatory information, IATA has launched several digital tools for industry professionals. These digital tools make it easier for cargo operators, shippers, and freight forwarders to stay compliant with updated regulations.
The new LAR Verify online portal offers airlines and freight handlers a streamlined way to access the LAR and receive automated compliance checks. Additionally, IATA has made available a comprehensive list of dangerous goods in a digital format and an improved battery classification tool. This tool now includes classifications for emerging battery technologies, such as sodium-ion batteries, helping professionals stay ahead of industry trends.
The 2026 updates to IATA’s key industry manuals mark a significant step forward for the aviation sector. These changes are crucial for improving safety, enhancing operational efficiency, and promoting environmental sustainability. With regulations around battery shipments becoming stricter, animal welfare standards being upgraded, and new digital tools improving compliance, the air transport industry is poised to evolve in response to the growing demands of both safety and sustainability.
As air traffic continues to rise, particularly with the expansion of e-commerce and global logistics, these revisions ensure that the aviation industry remains well-equipped to handle the complexities of modern transportation. From improved animal care to more efficient ground operations, the 2026 IATA manuals are shaping the future of air travel.
IATA’s updates to its 2026 manuals demonstrate a clear commitment to enhancing air travel safety and efficiency. These revisions not only address immediate industry challenges but also lay the groundwork for long-term improvements. Whether it’s safer shipping of lithium batteries, better care for live animals, or more efficient ground operations, the 2026 manual updates are vital for keeping the air transport industry aligned with global standards.
For air transport professionals, staying informed and compliant with these changes is now more important than ever. The 2026 updates offer an invaluable resource for ensuring that safety and operational excellence remain at the forefront of the industry.
The post IATA 2026 Manuals Update: Key Changes to Cargo, Ground Operations, and Animal Welfare appeared first on Travel And Tour World.As Cyclone Montha advances over the Bay of Bengal, several regions across South and East India are bracing for intense weather conditions. The storm, currently intensifying into a severe cyclonic system, is forecast to make landfall along the Andhra Pradesh coast on October 28, bringing winds up to 110 kmph and widespread rainfall. The India Meteorological Department (IMD) has issued Orange and Yellow alerts for parts of Tamil Nadu, Odisha, and West Bengal, urging residents and travelers to exercise caution. For those planning trips to the eastern coastline, especially in Visakhapatnam, Chennai, and Gopalpur, travel disruptions and safety advisories are expected to remain in effect for several days. This article explores the cyclone’s path, its expected impact, and essential travel guidance for both domestic and international tourists in the region.
According to the latest IMD updates, Cyclone Montha has developed from a deep depression over the Bay of Bengal, now positioned approximately 600 km east-southeast of Chennai, 680 km south-southeast of Kakinada, and 710 km south-southeast of Visakhapatnam. The system is forecast to intensify into a severe cyclonic storm before making landfall near coastal Andhra Pradesh today.
Wind speeds are expected to reach 90–100 kmph, with gusts up to 110 kmph, particularly over north coastal Tamil Nadu, south coastal Odisha, and adjoining Andhra districts. The storm is likely to continue its movement toward the north-northwest, potentially bringing heavy to very heavy rainfall between October 28 and 31 across West Bengal, Odisha, and Vidarbha.
The Andhra Pradesh government has activated an extensive preparedness plan to ensure uninterrupted supply of essential commodities, including fuel, food, and medicines, to cyclone-prone areas. Relief shelters have been equipped with emergency provisions, and coastal evacuation drills have been conducted in vulnerable zones.
In Tamil Nadu, the IMD has issued Orange alerts for several coastal districts, warning of extreme rainfall and strong winds over the next four days. Meanwhile, Odisha’s coastal administration has placed disaster management teams on standby, particularly around Gopalpur and Puri.
Fishermen have been strictly advised to avoid venturing into the Bay of Bengal, as sea conditions are expected to be very rough to high until the cyclone weakens post-landfall.
Travelers should anticipate flight and train delays, especially from Chennai, Visakhapatnam, and Bhubaneswar airports. It is advisable to confirm travel schedules directly with airlines and railway operators before departure.
Tourists currently staying in coastal hotels or beach resorts are advised to move to inland accommodations until weather conditions stabilize. Hotels in affected areas are offering flexible booking changes due to the cyclone warning.
Foreign visitors in Andhra Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, or Odisha are encouraged to register with local embassies and follow local advisories. Travel insurance policies covering natural disasters and weather disruptions are recommended.
Although Cyclone Montha is expected to bring short-term disruption, regions like Andhra Pradesh’s coastal belt, Odisha’s beaches, and Tamil Nadu’s temple towns remain significant tourist attractions. Once conditions normalize, the lush landscapes post-rainfall often provide scenic opportunities for photography and eco-tourism.
Tourism authorities are preparing to conduct rapid infrastructure checks and clean-up operations immediately after the cyclone passes, ensuring the resumption of normal tourism activities within days.
Travelers are advised to track updates from the India Meteorological Department (www.imd.gov.in) and State Disaster Management Authorities (SDMA). Major airlines and Indian Railways also provide real-time alerts through their mobile applications. Keeping emergency contacts and embassy numbers handy can significantly enhance personal safety during such events.
While Cyclone Montha poses immediate challenges, India’s eastern coastal states have improved their disaster response systems significantly in recent years. With coordinated preparedness, prompt alerts, and community awareness, the region continues to demonstrate resilience in facing such natural events. For travelers, caution and preparedness remain key to staying safe while exploring these culturally and geographically rich destinations.
The post Cyclone Montha to Strike Andhra and Tamil Nadu Coasts: Heavy Rains Forecast for Odisha and West Bengal, Travel Caution Issued Across Eastern India appeared first on Travel And Tour World.At the Greater Bay Area Conference 2025 held at Hong Kong, the province of Yunnan lured the participants with a mouth-watering and stunning presentation of its distinctive cultural and gastronomic inheritance. Supporting the Hong Kong Coalition, China Daily collaborated with it to organize the event on October 23, 2025, which showed the increasing importance of Yunnan as a world destination for tourism and culinary innovation. While presenting itself under the theme ‘Yunnan: A Many-Splendored Life‘, the province gave the public a peek into its enchanting world through a variety of exquisite products, such as fragrant teas and rare coffees, wild mushrooms and even biscuits influenced by the local flavors. This event was a significant turning point in Yunnan’s struggle for recognition as a global tourist magnet endowed with abundant biodiversity and cultural heritage.
At the conference, the Yunnan Provincial Department of Culture and Tourism presented an array of the province’s most cherished specialties. Among the most popular offerings were Yunnan’s coffee and black tea, with the highlight being the flower-fermented coffee, a product that left a lasting impression on international guests. This unique coffee is made using a process that incorporates flowers, giving it a distinctive aroma and taste that stood out at the event. As Yunnan has long been known as the “Hometown of Chinese Coffee”, its coffee culture is gaining significant attention both domestically and internationally.
Adding to the allure, Yunnan’s tea culture was also prominently featured. With its rich history of tea production, the province has seen increasing demand for its specialty teas in markets like Hong Kong. The city’s strong tea-drinking culture makes it an ideal base for Yunnan’s tea brands to introduce their products. At the event, attendees were introduced to Chen Sheng Hong Tea, a notable Yunnan tea brand that is expanding its footprint in the Hong Kong market. The tea‘s smooth taste and rich heritage were a perfect introduction to the growing tea tourism experience in the region.
In addition to coffee and tea, the event also showcased Yunnan’s culinary innovation with wild mushroom biscuits and sauces. These unique products, derived from Yunnan’s rich biodiversity, demonstrate the province’s commitment to blending traditional flavors with modern culinary techniques. Yunnan’s diverse ecosystems allow for a wide range of wild mushrooms and other ingredients, which are now being creatively incorporated into local cuisine. These products are part of Yunnan’s efforts to upgrade its food industry while promoting its sustainable agricultural practices. Visitors to the event were not only able to sample these delicacies but were also invited to explore the province’s growing culinary tourism offerings.
Beyond food, Yunnan’s intangible cultural heritage was also celebrated during the event. A mesmerizing dance performance by the Yunnan Gengma National Song and Dance Troupe took center stage, captivating the audience with the Water-Splashing Dance, a tradition performed by the Dai people during the Water-Splashing Festival. This performance highlighted the province’s rich cultural traditions and its role in preserving ethnic diversity through the performing arts. Such performances are a testament to Yunnan’s ability to weave together modern tourism with cultural preservation, offering travelers a unique glimpse into the province’s vibrant heritage.
As Yunnan’s cultural tourism continues to grow, the province is positioning itself as a key destination for travelers seeking to explore authentic, immersive experiences in both nature and culture. Visitors to Yunnan can not only enjoy its stunning landscapes but also engage with its rich cultural practices that have been passed down through generations.
The success of the Greater Bay Area Conference 2025 underscores Yunnan’s growing importance in global tourism. With increasing numbers of Hong Kong residents traveling to Yunnan for both leisure and cultural exploration, the province is becoming a bridge for cross-border tourism. The event served as an excellent platform for Yunnan to connect with international buyers and industry leaders, further cementing its reputation as a world-class destination for travelers looking for more than just typical tourist attractions.
By promoting products such as flower-fermented coffee and tea, alongside cultural performances and unique food products, Yunnan is positioning itself as a destination where visitors can experience not only the beauty of its landscapes but also its rich traditions and culinary creativity. As the province continues to develop its tourism infrastructure, more and more travelers will find Yunnan to be the next must-visit destination on their travel lists.
The Greater Bay Area Conference 2025 emphasised Yunnan’s increasing presence on the international scene and the region’s showing its diversity, cultural legacy, and excellence in food. The province is making its way into the hearts of tourists and industry insiders through its wide range of products from flower-fermented coffee to wild mushroom biscuits. The area is now developing into a major tourist destination that offers every type of traveller something: culture, food, or outdoor activities. Yunnan’s leading position in tourism is going to be more apparent, and its global allure will be proportionate to the growing desire of people to visit places that are sustainable and authentic.
The post Yunnan’s Rich Cultural and Culinary Heritage Captivates at the Greater Bay Area Conference 2025: What You Need To Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The Global Sources Sports & Outdoor Show, which is currently taking place in Hong Kong, will turn out to be a landmark event in the outdoors and sports tourism industries. The show, which takes place until October 30, 2025, at AsiaWorld-Expo, will exhibit over 600 exhibitors from throughout Asia displaying the latest inventions in sports equipment, outdoor gear, and apparel, with new trends like pickleball and World Cup-themed products receiving special attention. The event is likely to be the main attraction for about 15,000 professional buyers; thus, it not only emphasises the prosperous outdoor recreation market but also the flourishing global sports tourism industry.
One of the standout trends at this year’s show is the rapid growth of pickleball, a sport that has seen a meteoric rise in popularity worldwide. With 48 million active players globally and projections to reach 100 million by 2030, pickleball is increasingly becoming a significant force in the sports industry. As China leads the way in manufacturing pickleball paddles, producing over 70% of the world’s supply, the Global Sources Sports & Outdoor Show offers a comprehensive pickleball ecosystem to cater to both recreational players and professional athletes.
Exhibitors are displaying a wide range of pickleball products, including high-performance paddles made from carbon fiber, fibreglass, and polymer composites, as well as competition balls that meet international tournament standards. The Pickleball Expo Cup 2025, which features corporate and open divisions, is set to make waves in the industry. Visitors to the show will also have the opportunity to watch live demonstrations by Hong Kong’s top-ranked pickleball players, offering an immersive experience for tourists and buyers alike.
With its blend of competitive and recreational elements, pickleball represents an exciting growth opportunity for sports tourism. The sport is attracting travelers who are not only seeking new activities but also exploring unique destinations where they can enjoy their favorite pastime. This trend will continue to grow as more resorts, hotels, and tourism boards recognize the appeal of pickleball-friendly travel experiences.
Looking ahead to 2026, the World Cup will generate a surge of international tourism and product demand, and the Global Sources Sports & Outdoor Show is already tapping into this momentum. A special World Cup-themed area at the event showcases football equipment, match support merchandise, and customized football-themed souvenirs, all made with eco-friendly materials. Visitors will find a wide range of professional football apparel and customized products like team jerseys, scarves, and flags, which are expected to be popular for match viewing parties and fan experiences.
The show also emphasizes personalized football merchandise, offering buyers flexible customization services for small-batch production and rapid sampling, ideal for the growing football tourism market. As tourists flock to World Cup host countries, these products will allow them to engage with the event on a deeper level, creating an immersive experience for fans. The football experience zone at the show allows buyers to actively participate in football activities, offering a taste of the excitement that will soon captivate the world in 2026.
In addition to sports equipment, the Global Sources Sports & Outdoor Show features a wide array of innovative outdoor products. As outdoor tourism becomes more popular, this showcase offers everything from multifunctional backpacks and high-performance camping stoves to portable water bottles and camping refrigerators. Products are designed with the adventurous traveler in mind, from ergonomic backpacks made with waterproof, abrasion-resistant materials to lightweight camping carts that combine portability with rugged durability.
As sustainable tourism continues to grow, eco-friendly outdoor products are becoming a key focus at this year’s show. Companies are showcasing intelligent, sustainable innovations designed to meet the needs of travelers who prioritize both adventure and environmental responsibility. The introduction of solar-powered camping gear, recycled materials for outdoor equipment, and energy-efficient solutions helps ensure that outdoor experiences remain accessible while minimizing their environmental impact.
The Global Sources Sports & Outdoor Show emphasizes interactive experiences to engage visitors in a hands-on way. The Indoor Triathlon Invitation Competition simulates skiing, cycling, and rowing challenges, giving attendees the chance to experience the thrill of these sports using professional equipment. These competitions add an exciting dimension to the event and offer tourists an immersive way to participate in global sports trends.
In addition, the Sports Innovation Forum during the event will explore the future of sports tourism, discussing sustainable material applications, sportswear design, and how performance enhancement intersects with travel experiences. This forum will provide key insights into how sports tourism can evolve to meet the growing demand for sustainable, active travel options.
The Global Sources Sports & Outdoor Show held in Hong Kong is not only a trade fair; it is also a major event for the development of the sports and outdoor tourism industry. The exhibition, which covers a wide range of products, including pickleball paddles, football merchandise, and advanced outdoor equipment, gives the visitor an insight into the changing face of sports tourism. The event takes the active and eco-friendly travel experience trend and makes it the norm, which will give the world outdoor activities and sports tourism in the next decade.
The post Global Sources Sports and Outdoor Show: A Hub for Emerging Sports Tourism, What You Need To Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Zhengzhou, a city rich in culture, has become the place to be for the combination of preservation of the past with urban development. The Global Mayors Dialogue and the International Mayors’ Forum on Tourism 2025 were held in the city from October 22 to 25, 2025. More than 300 mayors, experts and scholars from all over the world gathered for the discussion of sustainable urban renewal. The forum’s topic, ‘Preserving the Cultural Legacy of Ancient Capitals and Driving Urban Renewal‘, was an eye-opener to the global situation of how to keep the past and the present in a nice balance, thus preventing the one from choking the other.
Zhengzhou has pioneered a model for cultural heritage integration into urban planning. The city is leading the charge with its ‘archaeology first, construction later‘ approach, ensuring that historical relics and archaeological sites are protected during modern development projects. This forward-thinking model has allowed Zhengzhou to preserve its ancient history while advancing urban growth.
One of the key projects discussed during the forum was the Zhengzhou Shang City Archaeological Site Park. Here, 3,600-year-old Shang Dynasty city walls have been seamlessly incorporated into modern city life. The park offers an interactive experience, inviting visitors to engage with the history of the Shang Dynasty while enjoying a contemporary urban environment. The integration of this archaeological site into the fabric of modern Zhengzhou showcases how cities can evolve without losing touch with their roots.
The Fuminli cultural block is another prime example of how cultural industries can thrive alongside historical preservation. The project aims to preserve the original street layout while incorporating modern cultural elements, creating a thematic space where tradition and modernity coexist. This innovative approach ensures that Zhengzhou retains its authentic cultural charm while offering unique, immersive tourism experiences.
The forum provided a platform for global leaders to share experiences and strategies on how best to integrate heritage preservation with tourism. Delegates from cities such as Asti, Italy, Palomeque, Spain, and Rotorua, New Zealand, shared their approaches to cultural tourism and urban development.
For example, in Asti, Italy, the city has transformed historical sites into cultural hubs, leveraging its winemaking tradition to offer experiential tourism that not only preserves its history but revitalizes the local economy. Similarly, Palomeque in Spain has embraced proactive protection, integrating modern elements into traditional streetscapes, allowing the city’s historic areas to thrive alongside contemporary urban developments.
Rotorua, a city known for its indigenous Maori culture, has used modern technology to breathe new life into traditional cultural practices, creating economic opportunities while promoting sustainable tourism. These examples highlight how cities around the world are finding innovative ways to preserve their cultural heritage while supporting modern economic growth and tourism.
As cities continue to face the pressures of modernization, Zhengzhou has shown that it is possible to create a sustainable urban model that incorporates cultural heritage. The city’s approach to urban renewal is not about mere reconstruction but rather about fostering organic growth—allowing for the preservation of history while embracing innovation. This philosophy offers a balanced path forward for cities worldwide that are seeking to respect their cultural roots while moving toward a modern future.
Zhengzhou’s vision for urban renewal is an inspiring example of how ancient cities can shape the future of urban development and tourism. By blending cultural heritage with modernity, the city offers a unique travel experience, where history is not only preserved but integrated into the modern urban landscape. As more cities around the world look for sustainable models of growth, Zhengzhou’s approach provides valuable insights into how cultural tourism can play a central role in the future of urban development.
In this cooperative conversation, Zhengzhou is asserting its status as a cultural tourism leader by providing tourists with the chance to witness the coexistence of ancient customs and modern creativity in one of the most significant cities in China’s history. This strategy is not only changing Zhengzhou but is also opening the door for cities around the world to go down the same path and find their own ways between heritage preservation and urban renewal.
The post Zhengzhou’s Unique Blend of Heritage and Urban Renewal Inspires Global Dialogue: What You Need To Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.From 3 A.M. to 9 A.M. MDT on Tuesday, October 28, the National Weather Service (NWS) predicts subfreezing temps as low as 30 degree Fahrenheit for Espanola Valley in New Mexico. This has warranted a frost warning, the first in the state. Such extreme temperatures, if experienced, will impact agriculture, tender plants, and pose a risk for external plumbing thralls. For October 27, 6.44 PM MDT, the above was noted.
With these conditions, tourists planning to visit or staying in Espanola Valley during this time must take necessary precautions to avoid any mishaps. Local officials have urged visitors to be aware of the impending frost and freeze conditions, which could result in significant disruptions. The warning serves as a reminder to not only protect crops and plants but also ensure that safety measures are in place for outdoor activities and tours.
Several popular tourist attractions across Espanola Valley are expected to face challenges due to the freezing temperatures. These destinations, which draw visitors to the region throughout the year, include:
The freeze warning is expected to affect the local tourism industry, especially for those visiting outdoor sites during early mornings. As temperatures drop below freezing, several outdoor attractions may be temporarily inaccessible, and early-morning activities such as hiking, fishing, or golfing could become challenging due to icy conditions.
Local businesses that rely on tourism, particularly those in agriculture, are also at risk. The NWS warning highlights the potential for frost to kill crops, which could lead to financial losses for farmers who rely on seasonal harvests. Visitors to vineyards or those staying at agritourism accommodations may face delays or cancellations due to the freeze’s effect on crops.
The National Weather Service has provided clear instructions for tourists and locals to follow during these severe freeze conditions. Here are the critical safety protocols for visitors to Espanola Valley:
In addition to these measures, visitors to vineyards and outdoor event venues should be aware of any last-minute changes or cancellations to scheduled tours or activities. It is also advised to stay indoors early in the morning until temperatures rise above freezing, especially for those unfamiliar with how to handle frost conditions.
As Espanola Valley, New Mexico, prepares for freezing temperatures, local tourism stakeholders are working alongside the National Weather Service to inform tourists and protect them from the effects of the frost. With proper precautions, visitors can still enjoy the rich cultural heritage and stunning natural landscapes of the region.
The freeze may disrupt some planned outdoor activities, but by staying informed and taking the necessary steps to protect sensitive plants and outdoor amenities, tourists can still make the most of their visit to Espanola Valley. It’s essential to stay alert to the evolving weather conditions and follow the safety protocols to ensure a safe and enjoyable travel experience.
Following protocol set out by the national weather service by taking action now will reduce the impact the freeze will have on your health and the health of your family as well as the ecosystem, all while preserving the pristine beauty of New Mexico for tourism purposes.
The post Freeze Warning Issued For New Mexico, US: What Tourists Need To Know! appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The First Group Hospitality has announced the strategic rebranding of three flagship hotels in Dubai under Marriott International’s renowned Tribute Portfolio and Autograph Collection brands. This collaboration strengthens The First Group’s expanding relationship with Marriott and underscores its commitment to offering world-class hospitality experiences. Following the successful debut of The First Collection at Jumeirah Village Circle in 2024, these rebranded hotels in Dubai Marina, Business Bay, and Jumeirah Village Triangle offer distinctive luxury experiences for both business and leisure travellers.
The First Group Hospitality’s move to rebrand three key Dubai properties with Marriott International’s Tribute Portfolio and Autograph Collection marks an exciting new chapter for the hotel management company. This strategic collaboration highlights their commitment to providing extraordinary hospitality experiences that attract both global and regional guests. With these rebrands, The First Group elevates its offerings, aligning with Marriott’s global reputation for luxury, and further enhancing the UAE’s hospitality sector.
The three rebranded hotels – The First Collection Marina, Dubai; The First Collection Waterfront, Dubai; and Hotel Local Dubai, Jumeirah Village Triangle – each represent a unique facet of the city’s diverse appeal. These properties are strategically located in some of Dubai’s most vibrant and popular districts, ensuring easy access to the city’s top attractions and business hubs. With this partnership, guests now have access to Marriott’s powerful loyalty program, giving them even more reasons to enjoy their stays.
The First Collection Marina, Dubai, is a stunning addition to the Tribute Portfolio. Located in the heart of Dubai Marina, this property rises above the iconic waterfront with modern rooms, a rooftop swimming pool, a spa, and fitness facilities. Its sophisticated design caters to the urban traveller who seeks a cosmopolitan experience with an unforgettable view of the Marina. Whether you’re relaxing by the pool, dining in the chic restaurants, or indulging in rejuvenating spa treatments, The First Collection Marina promises a luxurious stay.
The First Collection Waterfront, Dubai, situated in Business Bay, offers stylish guestrooms and a range of flexible facilities tailored to both business and leisure travellers. The hotel’s proximity to Burj Khalifa and Dubai Mall makes it a prime choice for guests looking to explore the city’s architectural marvels and shopping landmarks. With carefully curated dining concepts and spaces for business events, The First Collection Waterfront provides a perfect balance between work and relaxation.
Hotel Local Dubai in Jumeirah Village Triangle brings a refreshing twist to the city’s hospitality scene. As part of Marriott’s Autograph Collection, this hotel is designed with a community-first approach. It features modern accommodations, a wellness centre, an outdoor pool, and vibrant social spaces that cater to culturally curious travellers. Guests seeking authentic local connections can immerse themselves in a truly unique experience, while enjoying the property’s inviting and contemporary design.
Hotel Local Dubai stands as a vibrant social hub where guests can interact, network, and explore the true essence of Dubai’s local culture. Whether it’s relaxing by the pool or engaging in community events, this property provides an enriching experience for those seeking both relaxation and cultural exploration. The hotel’s focus on wellness and social spaces makes it ideal for guests looking to enjoy a dynamic yet peaceful stay in one of Dubai’s most sought-after areas.
Dining is an essential part of the guest experience at The First Group’s rebranded hotels, with each property offering diverse culinary delights. At The First Collection Dubai Marina, A Tribute Portfolio Hotel, guests can enjoy Tuscan specialties at Alloro, or indulge in hearty fare at The Blacksmith Bar & Eatery. For those staying at The First Collection Waterfront, A Tribute Portfolio Hotel in Business Bay, Local serves as a casual all-day dining hub, offering international favourites that cater to all tastes.
Meanwhile, Hotel Local Dubai, Autograph Collection, focuses on bringing people together through its social dining concepts. Farmers Commons and Neighbourhood Brew reinforce the property’s identity as a vibrant community hub, where guests can gather, dine, and connect. These innovative dining concepts not only enhance the guest experience but also reflect The First Group Hospitality’s mission to offer authentic and memorable experiences across its portfolio.
Guests of all three hotels also enjoy access to Soluna Restaurants and Beach Club on Palm Jumeirah. Here, they can unwind by the pools lined with sun loungers and cabanas or relax on the private beach. This Mediterranean-inspired destination features the Énas restaurant and the award-winning Risen Café & Artisanal Bakery, recently named the UAE’s Favourite Café at the What’s On Dubai Awards.
This rebranding milestone underscores the growing collaboration between The First Group Hospitality and Marriott International. With the integration of these three Dubai hotels into Marriott’s Tribute Portfolio and Autograph Collection, The First Group continues to strengthen its position as a leader in the region’s hospitality sector. Rob Burns, CEO of The First Group, expressed the company’s pride in deepening its relationship with Marriott through these exciting rebrands.
The partnership leverages Marriott’s global brand strength and loyalty platform, offering guests unparalleled access to a world-class hotel experience. Saahil Lalit, Vice President of Development for the Middle East at Marriott International, also highlighted the mutual commitment of both companies to delivering unique, elevated guest experiences. With these three rebranded properties, Marriott’s global reach and loyalty program enhance the value and appeal of The First Group’s offerings, ensuring guests experience exceptional service and hospitality.
The strategic rebranding of three flagship properties in Dubai under Marriott International’s Tribute Portfolio and Autograph Collection marks a significant milestone for The First Group Hospitality. This partnership reflects the company’s dedication to providing luxury, unique, and community-focused experiences in some of Dubai’s most vibrant districts. With exceptional accommodations, innovative dining options, and access to Marriott’s award-winning loyalty program, these rebranded hotels offer a memorable and elevated guest experience. As The First Group continues to expand and collaborate with Marriott, guests can expect even more exciting developments in the future.
The post The First Group Hospitality Rebrands Three Dubai Hotels with Marriott, Elevating Guest Experiences appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The 20th Hospitality India Annual International Awards 2025 celebrated the incredible achievements in the tourism, travel, and hospitality sectors, gathering prominent figures from across India and around the world. Held at Hotel The Ashok in Chanakyapuri, New Delhi, this prestigious event brought together over 400 distinguished guests, including politicians, industry leaders, and hospitality experts. The ceremony honored exceptional contributions from various sectors like education, real estate, and airlines, among others. As one of the most important events of the year, the awards served as a powerful platform to acknowledge those shaping the future of the travel and tourism industry, enhancing India’s position on the global tourism map.
The Hospitality India Annual International Travel Awards 2025 recognized a broad range of professionals and organizations for their outstanding efforts in shaping the hospitality landscape. The event was organized by DLK Publication Pvt. Ltd., in collaboration with Singh Travels, a leading Destination Management Company (DMC) from Georgia. The prestigious awards ceremony took place at the renowned Hotel The Ashok in New Delhi, a fitting venue for the celebration of tourism, hospitality, and travel excellence.
The awards not only acknowledged top performers in the hospitality industry but also recognized leaders from other key sectors such as airlines, education, real estate, and healthcare. These awards emphasized the diverse contributions driving India’s tourism sector forward, including those fostering innovation, sustainability, and exceptional customer experiences.
The event was graced by several eminent personalities from both the political and business spheres. Among the key figures present were Ms. Bansuri Swaraj, a Member of Parliament from New Delhi; Shri Vijay Goel, Vice Chairman of BJP; and Mr. Harvansh Chawla, Founder & Managing Partner at K.R. Chawla & Co.. Other dignitaries included Smt. Madhu Bhatt, Vice President of the Uttarakhand Culture Council, and Mr. Sunil Kumar R, President of the Travel Agents Association of India (TAAI). Their presence underscored the importance of tourism and hospitality in India’s growing global influence.
The ceremony also welcomed industry leaders like Mr. Ashok Kumar Singh, Chairman & MD of Himalaya Construction Co., and Mr. Pradeep Jain, Founder of Parsvnath Developers, among others. These esteemed guests further demonstrated the strong connection between hospitality and other business sectors.
This year’s awards were special as they acknowledged the efforts of individuals and organizations that have raised the bar in customer service, sustainability, and innovation within the tourism and hospitality industry. The awardees included some of the most respected names in the hospitality sector, such as ITC Group of Hotels, Radisson Group, Marriott, and Accor Hotels. These companies have consistently delivered superior services and experiences to travelers, setting new standards in the global hospitality landscape.
Apart from hotels, other awardees came from sectors like real estate, education, and airlines, further emphasizing the interconnectedness of the various industries that contribute to a thriving travel ecosystem.
Beyond the awards, the evening included a vibrant cultural program that featured dance performances and a fashion show by renowned designer Rosy Ahluwalia. This addition of entertainment provided guests with a chance to relax and enjoy the rich cultural diversity that India is known for, adding a unique touch to the event.
The Hospitality India Awards have long been a platform to highlight India’s tourism sector and its potential as a global destination. As the country continues to grow as a hub for tourism and business, such events provide an important opportunity to recognize the individuals and organizations who play a pivotal role in this development.
The awards are also a testament to the vision of Suneet Kalra, Managing Director of Hospitality India Publications, who continues his late father’s legacy of promoting hospitality excellence. His commitment to showcasing India’s warmth, culture, and world-class hospitality has been a driving force behind the success of the Hospitality India Awards.
For those inspired by the celebration of India’s tourism and hospitality industry, here are some travel tips for making the most of a visit:
The 20th Hospitality India Annual International Travel Awards 2025 was not just an event—it was a celebration of the hard work, dedication, and innovation that drives the tourism and hospitality sectors forward. With influential leaders, a vibrant cultural program, and the recognition of the industry’s best, the event helped showcase India’s growing significance in the global travel landscape. As these awards continue to evolve, so too does the promise of a bright future for the tourism and hospitality industries in India and beyond.
The post Celebrating Excellence in Global Tourism: The 20th Annual Hospitality India Awards in New Delhi with Honorees from Goa, Mussoorie, and Georgia, Sharing the Details of the Event appeared first on Travel And Tour World.
It’s kind of funny. Back when OpenAI was first founded, Elon Musk and Sam Altman were thick as thieves. Both supposedly had a similar mission when it came to artificial intelligence. However, fast forward to today, and both parties appear to be bitter enemies. But despite their differences, they both seem to be working towards a similar goal. Elon Musk has Neuralink, and now Sam Altman is reportedly working on his own brain interface as well.
According to The Verge’s Alex Heath in his Sources newsletter, it appears that OpenAI’s CEO, Sam Altman, is building his own brain interface that could rival that of Elon Musk’s Neuralink. The report claims that Altman has tapped Mikhail Shapiro, an award-winning biomolecular engineer.
Shapiro will join Merge Labs, which is a brain-computer interface startup by Altman and Alex Blania. At the moment, not much is known about what this company is about. However, based on Shapiro’s work, it suggests that Altman could leverage his expertise to create a device that could link to the human brain using noninvasive techniques. To be more specific, it could use sound waves.
This is based on a recent talk Shapiro gave, where he said that sound waves and magnetic fields could be used to create a brain-to-computer interface. If that’s true, it could make Altman’s startup a whole lot more attractive compared to Neuralink.
For those unfamiliar, Neuralink is a company founded by Musk. The company’s goal is to create a way for people to interact with their computers or phones using their thoughts. It sounds quite high-tech, almost sci-fi-like. However, the problem with Neuralink is that it’s not exactly the most user-friendly.
In order for Neuralink to work, the user has to undergo open-skull surgery. This is where the electrodes are implanted into the brain to allow the user to control their devices. Any type of brain surgery has its risks. But to ask someone to undergo surgery just so they have a hands-free way of using their computers? That’s a huge ask.
If Altman’s new startup can indeed create an interface that uses sound waves, it’s a no-brainer (pun intended) that more people might prefer.
The post Sam Altman Reportedly Developing Noninvasive Brain Interface to Rival Elon Musk’s Neuralink appeared first on Android Headlines.
Meta has been increasingly focused on Threads in the recent past, and it’s visible in how frequently it’s been adding new features to the platform. Early last month, the social media app announced long-form posts. As part of that feature, users can now post up to 10,000 characters in one go. Now, Threads is getting a “disappearing post” feature, which Meta calls “ghost posts.” Meta started testing this feature back in April, alongside other features that are now available on Threads.
Threads’ new ghost posts feature enables you to share your thoughts or engage in conversation that vanishes after 24 hours. You’ll be able to create a ghost post on mobile by enabling the toggle that has the new “ghost” icon on the app’s compose screen. The feature is a handy addition for anyone who likes to post something but doesn’t want it to appear on their Threads profile.
Every time you publish a ghost post on Threads, others will see it having a dotted bubble around. This gives an idea to others that it’s a disappearing post. What’s interesting is that the replies on such posts land directly into your DMs and don’t appear on your timeline.
Another thing to note is that other Threads users can’t see the number of likes, replies, or the names of ghost post viewers. However, they can still see smiley-face icons below the disappearing posts. This gives an idea to people that others have replied to or liked the posts.
Not to forget, you can still check ghost posts from the “archived” section of the Threads’ settings menu. Think of this feature as Instagram Stories that are only available for 24 hours. Meta, in the announcement post, notes that this feature is for those who want to “share unfiltered thoughts and fresh takes without the pressure of permanence or polish. Here today and gone tomorrow, you can feel confident trying new things and posting spontaneous thoughts.”
The post Threads Gets 'Ghost Posts' That Vanish After 24 Hours appeared first on Android Headlines.
Apple’s iPhone 18 series is still months away from seeing the light of day, but the rumor mill has started giving a glimpse of what’s to come. The iPhone 18 Pro models may gain satellite 5G support. Apple will also introduce a new A20/A20 Pro chip, which may significantly increase the prices of the phones. While that’s for hardware, a new leak sheds light on the iPhone 18 Pro design for the first time.
Leaker Digital Chat Station has detailed what to expect in terms of the iPhone 18 Pro and iPhone 17e designs. In a Weibo post talking about iPhone 18 Pro’s camera upgrades, the leaker in comments says the new model will feature the same rear camera design as this year’s iPhone 17 Pro. This means we’ll see the same large horizontal module taking up a large portion of the back panel.
This makes sense considering Apple just redesigned its flagship models this year, and it usually sticks to the same for at least a few years. It’s unclear whether the glass cutout below the module will see any changes. The leaker previously mentioned that it will have a slightly modified transparent look on the iPhone 18 Pro.
Furthermore, the leaker says that he hasn’t come across the design details for the iPhone 18 model yet.
Moving to iPhone 17e, Digital Chat Station says the display will finally shift to Dynamic Island. In comparison, the current iPhone 16e uses a dated notch design. This should bring the low-cost iPhone more in line with the flagship models.
However, the display will only support a 60Hz refresh rate, as per the leaker. This isn’t surprising, as Apple brought ProMotion to the base iPhone 17 model only this year. We may have to wait at least another year before we see ProMotion for the budget ‘e’ model.
The post New Leak Sheds Light on iPhone 18 Pro and iPhone 17e Designs appeared first on Android Headlines.
Canon is teasing what appears to be a new camera launch set for November 6. While the company did not provide any details, there is a bit that can be extracted from what little it has shown. Namely, this looks like it will be a photo-focused camera.
According to a new report, Apple is about to launch four new apps for iPadOS. These are Pixelmator Pro, MainStage, Motion, and Compressor. They would join Apple's Final Cut Pro and Logic Pro, both of which arrived on iPadOS in 2023. The four apps that are supposedly coming to an iPad near you are at the moment only available on macOS. Apple acquired professional image editing app Pixelmator Pro this year, while MainStage is a Logic Pro companion app for live performances, Compressor is a Final Cut Pro companion app for compressing audio and video files, and Motion is a Final Cut Pro...
Samsung is now rumored to have delayed the start of the beta program for its upcoming One UI 8.5 Android skin . This is what the Galaxy S26 series is expected to launch running. Samsung should have released the first beta build of One UI 8.5 in November. However, this is now very unlikely to happen, a tipster on X says. The rollout is delayed, and it's all connected to the Galaxy S26+. This model was initially scrapped by Samsung, only to be brought back to life recently in the face of the Galaxy S25 Edge's dismal sales (the S26 Edge was supposedly replacing the S26+, but now the S26 Edge...
Excitement for the 2026 World Cup continues to build ahead of what’s set to be the biggest edition of the tournament so far, with national teams currently securing qualification. With several spots still up for grabs, FIFA has now opened a new ticket window for fans, including some exclusive options available for a limited time.
On Monday, October 27, FIFA launched the second phase of ticket sales, offering one million tickets. This phase, compared to the first, includes an exclusive window for fans residing in the host countries, the United States, Canada, and Mexico.
This latest ticket phase will run until Friday, October 31, at 11 a.m. Eastern Time. While there is a domestic exclusivity period for residents of the host nations, the window will still be open to fans worldwide. Successful applicants will receive confirmation emails between mid-November and early December.
In a statement published on FIFA’s website, World Cup Chief Operating Officer Heimo Schirgi said: “We already have seen massive interest from around the world for this tournament, and especially from within the host countries as Canada, Mexico and the United States prepare to host the biggest FIFA World Cup yet. This second phase, with its host country domestic exclusivity time slot, will allow us to say ‘thank you’ to these local fans, while ensuring global opportunity as well.“
Following the October international break, the number of national teams that have qualified for the World Cup rose to 28. With 20 spots still available and the tournament set to kick off on June 11, fans now have another opportunity to secure their place at what promises to be a historic edition of the competition.
The first phase of ticket sales for the 2026 World Cup, which opened in September, was reserved exclusively for Visa cardholders aged 18 and older. The second phase now gives priority to fans in the host countries. However, fans who miss out on these rounds will still have another chance to buy tickets.
According to FIFA, Phase 3 of ticket sales will open after the World Cup group-stage draw on December 5. With most national teams already qualified and the remaining playoff rounds still to be played, fans will soon be able to purchase tickets for specific matches — with opponents, dates, and venues already set.
In a bid to revitalize their prospects, Manchester United revamped their roster during the recent transfer window. Initially, the Red Devils struggled to gain momentum, but they have since secured three consecutive victories, showcasing a dynamic style that could shift their fortunes. Wayne Rooney, a club legend, eagerly praised Ruben Amorim’s latest signing, a player who has been unstoppable since joining the team.
Bryan Mbeumo joined Manchester United from Brentford in a much-criticized $94 million transfer but has quickly silenced critics with his stellar performances. The Cameroonian star has emerged as the Red Devils’ top scorer early in the season, netting five goals and adding an assist in just ten games under Ruben Amorim. His remarkable form even caught the attention of club legend Wayne Rooney, who lauded the forward’s impact.
“His energy, his work-rate, his desire, is what you need to be a United player. I did say that I was a little bit unsure, but I think what he’s shown is he belongs there… He’s been consistent with his performances, I think that’s the main thing. If you’re consistently getting into the right positions, and getting chances, you will score 20 goals a season,” Wayne Rooney said in this podcast.
While Bryan Mbeumo thrives as a goalscorer, he’s not your typical center forward. From his Premier League debut, he has excelled as a second striker, needing a leading partner to maximize his impact. Coach Ruben Amorim understands this dynamic perfectly, pairing him with Matheus Cunha behind Benjamin Sesko, allowing him to shine.
Bryan Mbeumo has emerged as a crucial figure at the start of the 2025-26 Premier League season, showcasing his prowess not just as a goalscorer. His presence fills the gap in the Red Devils’ inside game, crucially complementing Bruno Fernandes and Casemiro in midfield while keeping as a scoring powerhouse. Acknowledging his dual impact, coach Ruben Amorim praised his synergy with Amad Diallo, highlighting the Cameroonian’s influential role.
“He’s a working machine. He’s so good in transitions. He’s improving when we are organizing the final third,” Ruben Amorim said, after the lastest victory. Then, he deepens on his on-field chemistry with Amad Diallo, saying: “[It] is really hard to beat these two guys because they change positions, they are really fast, they are good in one against one.”
Diallo may not boast eye-popping statistics, but his impact on the team is undeniable. Transitioning seamlessly from right winger to right wing-back, the Ivorian has cemented his status as a vital asset for the Red Devils. As one of Mbeumo’s premier partners in attack, he skillfully creates the space that enables the striker to flourish. This dynamic duo promises to spearhead Manchester United’s rebuilding journey.
Kylian Mbappé was one of the standouts in Real Madrid’s win over FC Barcelona in Sunday’s El Clásico, marking his name on the scoresheet. However, bad news didn’t take long to strike Los Blancos, as one of their key players has now suffered a major injury setback.
El Clásico at the Santiago Bernabéu ended Barcelona’s run of four consecutive wins in the 2024-25 season, setting a new tone for the 2025-26 campaign. Real Madrid now sit at the top of La Liga with 27 points from 10 games, but they’ve been dealt yet another significant blow within the squad.
Real Madrid have confirmed that right back Dani Carvajal will be sidelined due to another injury to his right knee. The Spanish defender missed most of the 2024-25 campaign after suffering an ACL tear, and despite a careful recovery, Carvajal has suffered an unexpected setback upon his return to the field.
The club released an update on their captain Monday, detailing the severity of the issue and outlining the next steps. “Following tests carried out on our captain Dani Carvajal by the Real Madrid Medical Services, he has been diagnosed with the presence of a loose body in his right knee joint. Carvajal will now undergo an arthroscopy,” the statement read.
Carvajal entered El Clásico in the 72nd minute, replacing Federico Valverde, who appeared to have picked up a knock. Having logged just 443 minutes across eight matches (an average of 55 per game) in the 2025-26 season, reports from Spanish outlets suggest that, due to the nature of the injury, Mbappe could be without one of his captains for between two and three months.
Despite discomfort with the role, Federico Valverde had been assigned by Xabi Alonso to play at right back due to Trent Alexander-Arnold’s injury, with Carvajal only fit enough to serve as a substitute. The Spanish defender featured for 18 minutes with the score still 2-1, helping to secure the win, but he also became the center of controversy once the final whistle blew.
With Lamine Yamal having stirred up tension before the match, Carvajal immediately confronted the 18-year-old after the game, appearing to gesture that he “talks too much.” Soon after, Vinicius Junior, Thibaut Courtois, and other Real Madrid players followed Carvajal’s lead, with Yamal ultimately escorted to the locker room as tempers flared.
Amidst a wave of injuries, Barcelona was decisively defeated by Real Madrid, who, despite not dominating possession, commanded the offensive play. While the defensive sector left many questions unanswered, it was Lamine Yamal who bore the brunt of the criticism after his regular performance. Even former player Rafinha joined in, leaving his clear perspective on his pre-game statements.
On DAZN’s broadcast, former Barcelona player Rafinha analyzed Lamine Yamal’s situation, offering a clear perspective. “He sinned through youth and a lack of maturity in saying what he said. His words gave extra motivation to Madrid,” he said. Adding to the opinion, former Real Madrid star Guti said, “Lamine Yamal is too young to know the history of Real Madrid and Barça. I too would have called him out on his words.”
Ahead of the match, Lamine Yamal participated in a Kings League Spain event, representing La Capital CF. During his speech, he criticized Real Madrid, saying they ‘stole and complained a lot,‘ a remark that incensed both fans and players like Vinicius and Dani Carvajal, who confronted him post-game. For that reason, Rafinha Alcantara noted that his comments inadvertently spurred Real Madrid players, fueling their motivation to secure a victory.
Blaming an 18-year-old for Barcelona’s defeat, despite Lamine’s imprecise words, seems misguided. Moreover, Yamal has been dealing with groin pain, which understandably affects his performance, highlighting the unfairness of criticism focused on pressure instead of his physical condition. On top of that, the absence of standout players like Robert Lewandowski and Raphinha notably impacted the Culers’ chances.
Following his injury during the UEFA 2026 World Cup qualifiers with Spain, Lamine Yamal made his return on October 18, featuring in pivotal matches against Girona and Olympiakos. Despite his offensive contributions, his physical sharpness seemed lacking, a fact underscored in the recent clash with Real Madrid. Now, a report sheds lights on his physical readiness previous the last game.
According to Gerard Romero at Jijantes FC, Lamine Yamal’s entourage informed Barcelona 15 days ago about the young player’s serious pubic discomfort. In response, the club is actively consulting medical specialists to prevent a potential injury relapse. Consequently, he might miss upcoming games to focus on a full recovery, with Raphinha targeting a November 1 return and the promising emergence of Roony Bardghji.
The Bitcoin price is positioning for a potentially explosive move that could take it well beyond its previous all-time highs. Analysts are closely watching a critical resistance level near $116,000, which may serve as the final hurdle before BTC catapults into uncharted territory above $126,000.
Crypto analyst Donny Dicey revealed in an X social media post this week that the $116,000 price level is the decisive zone Bitcoin must breach to confirm a breakout toward a new all-time high. His technical analysis suggests that once BTC achieves a clean break above this resistance area, momentum could swiftly carry it above $126,000.
Notably, Bitcoin set a new ATH on October 6, 2025, after breaking through its previous record above $124,000 and climbing past $126,000. Since achieving this level, the price of BTC has fallen dramatically to $115,000. Dicey’s accompanying chart shows the market steadily recovering after testing support near $108,000, marked as a “market structure break” region, with bullish price action consolidating above $109,000.
The analyst has emphasized that each day Bitcoin maintains a close above $109,000 strengthens the probability of a strong upward swing as the market heads into November. This period coincides with the Federal Open Market Committee’s (FOMC) next meeting, where investors are anticipating dovish signals such as rate cuts or the formal end of Quantitative Tightening (QT).
Dicey also notes that bullish S&P 500 earnings, easing global trade tensions from a potential agreement between US President Donald Trump and China’s President Xi Jinping, and improving ISM manufacturing data point to a macro environment supportive of risk assets. A community member commented that whales may have underestimated how much BTC’s demand tends to persist during these conditions. Dicey responded that the same whales might become “exit liquidity” as Bitcoin accelerates higher, possibly missing out on the strongest phase of this cycle.
In a follow-up analysis, Dicey highlighted Bitcoin’s remarkable stability above its January highs, describing its price structure as “unbreakable” amid global macroeconomic uncertainty. He pointed to several converging factors that reinforce BTC’s resilience, including ongoing fiscal and monetary expansion, a weakening US dollar, and renewed confidence in the global business cycle.
The analyst also emphasized that geopolitical tensions tied to US-China relations appear to be subsiding. At the same time, ETF inflows and exponential growth in the Artificial Intelligence (AI) sector contribute to acting as tailwinds for digital assets. He disclosed that despite strong underlying fundamentals, skepticism remains widespread in the market.
According to him, many still believe in the traditional four-year cycle narrative, while retail enthusiasm has not fully returned. Furthermore, the Russell 2000 index has yet to breakout, and rotation from traditional assets, such as the S&P 500 and gold, into Bitcoin remains limited. With these developments subduing broader market participation, Dicey suggests it creates the perfect setup for a powerful rally in BTC once sentiment shifts decisively.
After months of growing uncertainty and anticipation, the debut of exchange-traded funds (ETFs) for Hedera (HBAR) and Litecoin (LTC) is set to commence tomorrow, as confirmed by Canary Capital’s CEO Steven McClurg on Monday.
Crypto reporter Eleanor Terret shared the news on X (formerly Twitter), revealing that the ETF launches for Litecoin and Hedera are imminent, with a statement from McClurg underscoring the excitement for the upcoming launch.
Notably, the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) has also made significant moves in the ETF sector by certifying 8-A filings and issuing listing notices for Bitwise Invest’s spot Solana (SOL) ETF launch tomorrow and Grayscale’s GSOL conversion slated for Wednesday.
Despite the ongoing government shutdown, these ETF debuts are proceeding smoothly, Terret confirmed. The legal processes behind ETF launches, including the crucial 8-A filings, have been completed successfully, paving the way for the launch of these investment vehicles.
Addressing concerns about Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) approval during the shutdown, a key detail emerged: the issuers strategically included provisions in their amended S-1 filings, enabling automatic effectiveness 20 days post-filing. This ensures a seamless transition to trading without manual SEC approval.
Bloomberg’s ETF expert, Eric Balchunas, further corroborated this development on social media, confirming the listing notices for Bitwise, Canary, to launch imminently, with grayscale Solana’s conversion scheduled shortly after. Balchunas stated, “Assuming there’s not some last min SEC intervention, looks like this is happening.”
The news has sparked a recovery in HBAR and LTC prices. Litecoin has regained the key $100 mark with a 2% surge in the 24-hour time frame, while Hedera has seen similar gains of 2.1% during the same period.
Featured image from DALL-E, chart from TradingView.com
YouTube launched Ask Studio, an AI assistant in YouTube Studio that analyzes channel data to surface comment insights, performance analysis, and content ideas.
The post YouTube Introduces ‘Ask Studio’ AI For Channel Analytics appeared first on Search Engine Journal.
OpenAI is telling companies that “relationship building” with AI has limits. Emotional dependence on ChatGPT is considered a safety risk, with new guardrails in place.
The post OpenAI Flags Emotional Reliance On ChatGPT As A Safety Risk appeared first on Search Engine Journal.
© Albanian Prime Minister's Office
Newly released docs reveal Chelsea Berg confronted her boyfriend about her son’s bruises a month before he was hospitalized
© Collin County Jail
The Independent has previously spoken to survivors who faced the impossible choice of remaining in debt or risking their abusers finding out where they live
© Getty/iStock
The suspected armed robbers targeted a home in Jurupa Valley, California
© Getty/iStock
Canadian singer said, ‘Accounts shud be suspended for body shaming en masse’
© Getty
© Russian Defence Ministry
The world’s first AI minister is “pregnant with 83 children”, Albania’s prime minister has announced.
© Albanian Prime Minister's Office
Rather than responding immediately to the call, police sergeant Kevin Bollaro allegedly drove two miles in the opposite direction and stopped to get cash and a slice
© Google Maps
A Louvre security guard has described how he found a £10m royal crown on the floor outside the museum, after four thieves wielding power tools broke into the building in broad daylight.
© AFP via Getty Images
© Copyright 2023 The Associated Press. All rights reserved.
‘We’re dealing with what’s possibly a serial killer,’ investigators said
© Wood County Sheriff's Office/FindJodi.com/Wood County Sheriff
Muniz first met Duff alongside her mother on the set of the Disney Channel sitcom, ‘Lizzie McGuire’
© Getty Images
© AP Photo/Charlie Riedel, File
© Kentucky Police
The star-studded drama recently finished shooting in France
© Getty Images
Hong Kong Wine and Dine Festival 2025 returns with a lively theme, “REMIX. BEST OF ALL WORLDS”, highlighting the city’s gastronomic charm and cementing its position as a worldwide culinary hub. Organized by the Hong Kong Tourism Board (HKTB), its annual flagship edition from October 23 to 26, 2025, is more than about food and beverage—it’s about making memories for tourists and celebrating the confluence of gastronomy, tourism, and business travel. The festival is a key component of the HKTB’s long-term strategy to establish Hong Kong as a leading tourism destination, with a focus on high-yield tourism and luxury travel.
The Hong Kong Wine & Dine Festival plays a pivotal role in establishing the city as a leading epicurean capital. Gastronomy tourism, where food and culinary experiences become key elements of the travel experience, has seen exponential growth globally, and Hong Kong is capitalizing on this trend by showcasing its rich cultural diversity, culinary traditions, and world-class restaurant scene. Visitors from all over the world travel to Hong Kong to indulge in its vibrant food culture, ranging from street food markets to Michelin-starred dining experiences.
Hong Kong’s culinary offerings extend beyond food alone; the city is a melting pot of flavors and international influences, blending local Cantonese cuisine with global flavors brought by international chefs. From dim sum and roast goose to international wine pairings, the festival celebrates this fusion of cultures and provides a unique space for food lovers, tourists, and gastronomists to experience new tastes and creative interpretations of traditional dishes.
A major component of this year’s festival was its integration with MICE tourism—a rapidly growing segment in the global tourism market. Business tourism and conventions are crucial drivers of high-yield travel, and the HKTB strategically used the festival as an opportunity to engage top-tier travel agents, convention organizers, and business partners from around the world.
By hosting an exclusive sommelier wine-pairing private tour and the “Toast to Success: Hong Kong Top Travel Agents Celebration & Gala Dinner,” the HKTB highlighted Hong Kong’s capacity to host premium events and high-profile guests. The gala dinner, featuring an exquisite Cantonese tasting menu curated by five master chefs, not only celebrated culinary excellence but also emphasized Hong Kong’s dual identity as a luxury travel destination and a global MICE powerhouse.
In tandem with the festival, the HKTB launched the “Hong Kong Incentive Playbook 2.0: New Discovery Product Update” at the Ocean Park Marriott Hotel. This initiative aims to drive high-yield MICE tourism through the introduction of innovative incentive products and tailored experiences for corporate events and incentive groups. By offering customized itineraries, luxury hotel stays, and exclusive gastronomic experiences, the Incentive Playbook 2.0 positions Hong Kong as a leading destination for incentive travel and corporate meetings.
The program also includes strategic partnerships with major airlines, hotels, and event planners to offer a seamless tourism experience for corporate clients. This innovative approach to MICE tourism not only caters to business visitors but also promotes Hong Kong’s global tourism appeal, encouraging high-spending tourists and business delegations to experience the city’s cultural richness alongside its luxury offerings.
The growing interest in sustainable tourism is a significant trend in the global tourism industry, and the Hong Kong Wine & Dine Festival addresses this by promoting eco-friendly practices and sustainable culinary tourism. With a focus on local sourcing, organic ingredients, and sustainable food practices, the festival underscores Hong Kong’s commitment to becoming a sustainable tourism destination. Local chefs and restaurant owners are encouraged to embrace eco-friendly practices, from zero-waste cooking to responsible sourcing of ingredients, ensuring that the culinary sector contributes to both economic growth and environmental sustainability.
The festival also emphasizes the importance of promoting sustainable tourism in local communities. By encouraging responsible travel and highlighting local food producers, farmers, and artisans, the event supports local economies while offering tourists an authentic and sustainable experience of Hong Kong.
The Hong Kong Wine & Dine Festival is more than just a celebration of food—it is a platform for cultural exchange. Food tourism fosters cross-cultural understanding, as tourists can experience a destination’s cultural diversity through its culinary offerings. Hong Kong’s multicultural environment makes it a perfect location for showcasing how gastronomy can be a vehicle for cultural diplomacy and international collaboration. The festival brings together chefs, food experts, and international tourists, allowing them to share their culinary traditions, try new dishes, and learn from each other.
The Wine & Dine Festival is part of HKTB’s larger strategy to increase year-round tourism in Hong Kong. By offering seasonal events such as the festival alongside year-round culinary experiences, the HKTB is helping to extend the appeal of Hong Kong as a culinary tourism destination. Whether it’s a Michelin-starred meal, a street food tour, or a private dining experience, Hong Kong’s gastronomy scene remains a year-round attraction for both tourists and business travelers.
With its exclusive combination of gastronomy, luxury tourism, and MICE tourism, the Hong Kong Wine & Dine Festival 2025 has re-established Hong Kong as a top global tourist destination. The HKTB’s multi-pronged strategy of tourism promotion through high-yield tourism, sustainable tourism, and culinary innovation puts Hong Kong in a cutting-edge position in the global tourism industry. With the city developing world-class tourism infrastructure and gastronomy offerings, it is poised to attract high-value travelers, business delegations, and foodies in search of an exciting, immersive destination for business and leisure travel.
The post Hong Kong Wine and Dine Festival of this Year Celebrates Gastronomy Tourism, Blending the Culinary Experiences with Luxury Travel, MICE, and Sustainability appeared first on Travel And Tour World.As the world awakens from the pandemic-induced pause, adventure travelers are increasingly looking for unique and adrenaline-pumping experiences in some of the world’s most majestic natural landscapes. We Ramblers, a prominent adventure travel company with offices in Kathmandu and Bangalore, is leading the way in 2025 with its guided climbs of Mera, Island, and Lobuche Peaks in the Himalayas. Offering a rare opportunity to summit some of Nepal’s most iconic peaks, these expeditions provide the perfect blend of safety, expert guidance, and breathtaking mountain views.
We Ramblers has a long-standing legacy of delivering world-class adventure experiences across Nepal, Bhutan, Tibet, and India. Their team of expert guides ensures each expedition is well-organized, emphasizing safety without sacrificing the adventure. Whether you’re an aspiring mountaineer or an experienced climber, the company’s 2025 climbing expeditions promise an unforgettable journey in the heart of the Himalayas.
At 6,476 meters (21,247 feet), Mera Peak stands as the highest trekking peak in Nepal and one of the most popular climbing destinations in the Himalayas. Located in the remote Hinku Valley, Mera Peak is often chosen by trekkers seeking their first high-altitude climb. This challenging yet non-technical peak offers climbers the rare chance to experience the majesty of the Himalayas, with panoramic views of Everest, Lhotse, Makalu, Cho Oyu, and Kanchenjunga – some of the highest mountains on the planet.
Unlike traditional technical climbs, Mera Peak is accessible to those with basic mountaineering skills. This makes it an ideal first peak for many trekkers and adventure enthusiasts eager to experience the thrill of Himalayan summiting. Along the way, climbers will be treated to scenic trekking routes, pass through traditional Sherpa villages, and walk across glaciers, all while immersing themselves in the unique culture of Nepal’s mountain communities.
The best times to embark on the Mera Peak Climb are during the spring (April to May) and autumn (October to November) seasons. During these periods, the weather in the Himalayas is stable, offering clear skies and spectacular views. In spring, trekkers will witness the blooming rhododendron forests and experience warmer daytime temperatures, making it the perfect time for those seeking vibrant landscapes and a bit of warmth. Autumn, on the other hand, presents crisp weather, cool nights, and some of the clearest panoramic views of the Himalayan peaks, which are unmatched in any other season.
Climbers should avoid the monsoon months (June–August), as heavy rainfall and muddy trails increase the risk of landslides. Similarly, winter (December–February) poses additional challenges with extreme cold, heavy snowfall, and dangerous conditions for those attempting to summit.
We Ramblers has announced fixed group departures for the Mera Peak climb in autumn 2025. These group climbs ensure participants receive full logistical support, including expert guidance, accommodation, permits, and all necessary equipment. By joining a guided group, climbers also get the added benefit of safety and camaraderie, making it an ideal option for first-time adventurers.
Island Peak (6,165 meters / 20,228 feet) is one of Nepal’s most famous climbing peaks. Located in the Everest region, Island Peak offers climbers an ideal combination of a challenging ascent with non-technical climbing skills required. Its unique, pyramidal shape makes it one of the most visually striking peaks in the Himalayas, and the climb itself provides a solid introduction to more technical climbs for mountaineers aspiring to tackle Everest.
Similar to Mera Peak, the most favorable times to attempt Island Peak are in the spring and autumn months. This ensures a safer ascent with optimal weather and clarity for viewing Everest and its surrounding peaks.
Lobuche Peak, at 6,145 meters (20,161 feet), is another iconic climb located in the Everest region. Though slightly less frequented than Mera and Island Peaks, Lobuche offers a more technical challenge and attracts climbers with a higher level of mountaineering experience. Reaching Lobuche’s summit involves crossing glaciers, navigating steep rock faces, and using technical climbing tools.
However, the views at the summit are nothing short of spectacular. With Everest looming on the horizon and the surrounding Khumbu Glacier stretching out below, Lobuche Peak offers a sense of achievement that is truly unrivaled.
Lobuche is best climbed in spring and autumn when the weather is stable. Winter climbing is not recommended due to the extreme cold and technical difficulty, while the monsoon months create risky conditions with heavy rainfall.
Climbers embarking on the 2025 expeditions with We Ramblers will enjoy meticulously planned and fully supported climbs. From airport pickups to permits, accommodation, and expert guides, We Ramblers ensures a stress-free experience. The company’s dedicated guides are not just experts in mountaineering but also intimately familiar with Nepal’s high-altitude regions. They offer a unique cultural and educational perspective, helping participants understand the history, geography, and traditions of the mountain communities.
Moreover, We Ramblers’ commitment to safety is paramount. The company works closely with government authorities and local agencies to ensure that all expeditions adhere to the highest safety standards. This includes weather monitoring, medical support, and ensuring that every climber is physically prepared for the challenges ahead.
For those looking to push their limits and experience one of the world’s most breathtaking mountain ranges, the 2025 climbing expeditions to Mera, Island, and Lobuche Peaks are the opportunity of a lifetime. With world-class support, expert guides, and the opportunity to summit some of Nepal’s most stunning peaks, We Ramblers offers a truly life-changing adventure. Don’t miss your chance to be part of these extraordinary expeditions in 2025!
The post Embark on Epic Himalayan Journeys with We Ramblers 2025 Peak Climbing Expeditions: Everything You Need to Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Uttarakhand, one of India’s most captivating Himalayan states, continues to dominate domestic travel trends with its rich blend of spirituality, adventure, and pristine landscapes. In response to increasing visitor demand, a well-established travel service based in Haridwar has introduced a series of new discounted packages designed to make travel across Uttarakhand more affordable and accessible. These packages include guided tours to major destinations such as Auli, Chopta, Haridwar, and the Char Dham circuit, ensuring a seamless experience for travelers seeking both spiritual fulfillment and natural beauty.
With a strong foundation in personalized tour planning, the agency has earned a reputation for reliability, transparent service, and authentic local experiences. Unlike commercially packaged tours offered online, these travel programs are thoughtfully curated to reflect Uttarakhand’s culture, traditions, and breathtaking mountain terrain while maintaining cost efficiency. Travelers benefit from tailored itineraries, expert guidance, and round-the-clock assistance that enhance safety and comfort throughout their journey.
Over the past few years, Uttarakhand has experienced a dramatic spike in visitor footfall. Often referred to as the Dev Bhoomi or Land of the Gods, the state serves as a gateway to some of India’s most sacred Hindu pilgrimage sites and revered Himalayan peaks.
The new travel packages aim to respond to this demand by combining affordability with local expertise, ensuring travelers come away with meaningful and memorable experiences.
Among the most popular offerings is the 4 Nights/5 Days Auli–Chopta Tour starting from Haridwar. Designed for travelers seeking a balance of mountain adventure and serene landscapes, this journey allows participants to enjoy majestic views, peaceful meadows, and hidden alpine beauty.
| Day | Route | Highlights |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Haridwar → Chopta | Scenic mountain drive |
| 2 | Tungnath & Chandrashila | Trekking and temple visit |
| 3 | Chopta → Joshimath | Leisure and local exploration |
| 4 | Joshimath → Auli | Skiing, cable ride, Nanda Devi views |
| 5 | Return to Haridwar | Via Rudraprayag and Devprayag |
Hassle-free transfers, comfortable hotel stays, and safety-first travel coordination make this tour ideal for families, couples, and group adventurers alike.
Haridwar remains a centerpiece of Uttarakhand tourism due to its deep-rooted spiritual identity. Visitors arrive by the millions to take part in sacred rituals on the ghats of the Ganga, seek blessings in ancient temples, and experience traditional Himalayan culture.
Affordable Haridwar packages include guided visits, customized tour options, and add-ons for Rishikesh rafting or spiritual camps.
No pilgrimage in India is as revered as the Char Dham Yatra, a spiritual journey through the Himalayas. The new pilgrimage packages include:
These packages simplify complex Himalayan terrain travel and include registration assistance, comfortable transport, experienced support teams, and emergency care options.
Travelers can reach Uttarakhand easily from major cities:
Uttarakhand offers an unmatched combination of spiritual peace, breathtaking mountains, and Himalayan adventure. The introduction of affordable and thoughtfully designed travel packages makes it easier for travelers to explore deeply, safely, and meaningfully. Whether it is the serenity of Haridwar, the icy slopes of Auli, the alpine trails of Chopta, or the divine path of the Char Dham, Uttarakhand promises unforgettable journeys for every traveler.
The post India Tourism Sees Rising Interest in Uttarakhand as New Haridwar Travel Packages Open Affordable Routes to Auli Chopta Haridwar and Char Dham Yatra appeared first on Travel And Tour World.As a software company that provides solutions for hospitality, Agilysys, Inc Announces during the second quarter of its Fiscal 2026 that for the second quarter the company’s’ revenue increased. Achieving the record revenue for the 15th consecutive quarter. As the company is focused on providing technology solutions towards improving client interaction in the hospitality and tourism sector, Agilysys, Inc. has reported a net revenue of 79.3 million dollars. Achieving a 16.1 increase in revenue compared to fiscal 2025. The increase in revenue is due to the increase of available subscription services, showing that there is increased demand for cloud hospitality solutions.
The increase of Agilysys’ subscription revenue is exceptional as it increased 33.1 subscription based revenue as the hospitality industry is adopting cloud systems, showing how rapidly the industry is evolving. Subscription revenue accounts for 65.5 of the total recurring revenue which showcases the transforming fundamental changes in the tourism sector.
Agilysys is particularly well-positioned to support the tourism sector’s post-pandemic recovery with its cloud-native ecosystem of hospitality solutions. These solutions cater to the specific needs of hotels, resorts, and travel businesses, offering services such as booking management, guest engagement, and operational efficiencies. The shift towards modernised technology, like Agilysys’ software platforms, aligns with the tourism industry’s increasing focus on enhancing customer experience through seamless, tech-driven solutions.
The surge in subscription revenue, which now accounts for over 64 percent of total net revenue, reflects the growing shift in the tourism industry towards long-term digital partnerships. This growth trajectory has positioned Agilysys as an essential player in the ongoing transformation of the global hospitality sector, enabling businesses to optimise their operations and improve guest experiences.
Agilysys has been actively shaping the future of the tourism industry by providing advanced software solutions that offer flexibility, scalability, and security for hospitality businesses. Its suite of cloud-based tools enables travel and tourism companies to streamline operations, reduce costs, and boost revenue. This is particularly important as the sector continues to recover from the impacts of COVID-19 and faces increasing demand for more efficient, digital-first solutions.
With cloud technology allowing tourism businesses to manage reservations, billing, and customer interactions remotely, Agilysys plays a crucial role in fostering a more connected and resilient tourism ecosystem. The adoption of such modern systems allows businesses in the sector to provide more personalised, responsive services to their customers, which is increasingly important as travellers expect a seamless and digitally integrated experience.
Looking forward, Agilysys has raised its full-year revenue guidance to a range of 315 million dollars to 318 million dollars, up from previous estimates. The company also increased its subscription revenue growth expectations to 29 percent, reflecting the strong demand for its solutions in the hospitality and tourism sectors. Despite this optimistic outlook, Agilysys has indicated that their guidance excludes any substantial revenue from a large-scale Property Management System (PMS) project currently under development.
This optimistic forecast highlights Agilysys’ role in driving continued growth within the tourism industry, particularly through its subscription-based software solutions. As travel and tourism businesses increasingly look to digital technologies to support operational growth and enhance customer experience, Agilysys’ offerings are well-aligned with market demands.
The company’s robust financial performance in the second quarter of Fiscal 2026 is further reinforced by its strong cash flow and healthy balance sheet. Agilysys generated free cash flow of 15.0 million dollars in Q2, up significantly from 5.9 million dollars in the same period last year. While its cash balance decreased slightly to 59.3 million dollars at the end of Q2, this was largely due to investments in growth initiatives, including the continued development of its hospitality software products.
Agilysys’ solid financial standing enables it to continue investing in technology advancements that will further benefit the tourism industry. As it continues to build on its strong momentum, the company is poised to capture a larger share of the growing demand for innovative, cloud-based hospitality software solutions.
Agilysys’ outstanding revenue growth and increased expectations for Fiscal 2026 Show how technology-driven solutions in the tourism sector are growing in importance over time. As more organizations in the sector try to move to cloud-native software solutions, Agilysys impact towards the transforming future of hospitality grows. Its business strategy of continuous investment in the development of technology and subscription-based services gives it the position of a dominant player in shaping the future of tourism at the global level.
The post Agilysys Experiences Significant Growth From Subscription-Based Solutions appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The city of Toronto, Canada played host to the release of new comprehensive global guidelines for airport development concession agreements by Airports Council International (ACI) World and ACI Latin America and the Caribbean on October 27, 2025. The unveiling took place during the 2025 ACI North America & ACI World Annual General Assembly, a critical global forum for airport leaders held at Toronto Pearson International Airport, with support from Billy Bishop Toronto City Airport. This landmark publication provides practical, globally informed guidance to governments, airport operators, private investors, and other stakeholders involved in public-private partnerships (PPPs), aiming to fortify airport infrastructure development during a period of historic air travel growth.
As international air travel reaches unprecedented levels, governments face growing fiscal pressures to expand, modernize, and sustainably operate airport infrastructure. With over eight hundred fifty airports in more than ninety countries currently incorporating private-sector involvement through one hundred thirty two projects under way globally by early 2025, the need for clear, standardized frameworks to govern these partnerships has never been more urgent. The guidelines aim to equip all parties with best practices that balance public interests with investment opportunities, ensuring airports remain efficient, secure, and competitive hubs for global connectivity and tourism growth.
The guidelines span the complete airport concession lifecycle, starting with project feasibility, through contract negotiation, and onto active management and performance monitoring. They include detailed models for risk identification and allocation addressing financial, operational, and demand-related uncertainties. This ensures transparent, balanced agreements that align the priorities of governments, concessionaires, and communities for long-term value creation. These tools are essential in minimizing conflicts, ensuring effective governance, and safeguarding traveler and public welfare.
Sustainability forms a cornerstone of the new guidelines, underlining the integration of environmental stewardship and social value into airport infrastructure projects. Encouraging the adoption of green technologies, community engagement, and responsible development, the framework supports airports in maximizing positive local economic and social outcomes, vital to fostering inclusive tourism ecosystems around airports. This reflects a global commitment to sustainable tourism growth and climate-conscious infrastructure planning.
The publication draws on decades of regional and international expertise, featuring case studies highlighting successes and challenges from diverse airport concession models worldwide. This evidence-based approach provides governments and investors with adaptable, context-sensitive strategies that foster resilience and operational excellence amid varying regulatory environments.
By promoting smarter partnership structures and improved communication among stakeholders, these guidelines enhance financial sustainability for airports globally. Transparent negotiation processes and risk-sharing mechanisms are instrumental in driving investor confidence and maintaining alignment between public goals and private sector incentives, fostering airport projects that deliver lasting benefits for users and local economies.
The event’s setting, Toronto Pearson International, Canada’s busiest airport, symbolized the convergence of global airport leadership committed to evolving the air transport sector. Gathering over twenty-three hundred delegates, the conference highlighted collaboration as key to advancing airport infrastructure and operational standards critical to tourism and economic growth.
The launch of these new global guidelines heralds a pivotal moment in shaping the future of airport infrastructure development amid ongoing air travel expansion. By offering comprehensive tools for structuring, managing, and governing airport concessions with a focus on sustainability and public value, Airports Council International empowers airports and governments worldwide to meet burgeoning passenger demands efficiently and responsibly. This initiative supports the continued growth of global tourism by fostering airports as modern, resilient gateways that enhance travel experiences and economic prosperity within their communities.
The post Toronto Hosts ACI World Launch of Global Airport Development Concession Guidelines Amid Surge in Air Travel: What You Need to Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The Phantom Fall Fest at Lake Compounce in Bristol was an unforgettable Halloween experience, offering a thrilling blend of family-friendly fun and spine-chilling scares. Running from September 20 to October 26, the festival captivated visitors of all ages, transforming the iconic amusement park into a Halloween wonderland. From youngsters enjoying lighthearted activities during the day to daring guests seeking terrifying thrills after dark, the event proved to be a must-visit for those looking to celebrate Halloween in a memorable way.
Family Fun and Frights for All Ages
One of the standout features of the Phantom Fall Fest was its ability to cater to all age groups. During the day, families with young children could enjoy a delightful trick-or-treating experience through Kiddie Land. This area was transformed into a safe and spooky environment, perfect for little ones to collect candy and enjoy the Halloween spirit without the fear factor. The gentle atmosphere allowed families to experience the holiday festivities in a fun, non-scary way.
For the parents or older children accompanying the younger guests, Kiddie Land provided light-hearted fun, such as themed games and interactive experiences that fit perfectly with the autumn season. The whole family could engage in the festive activities, making it the ideal daytime Halloween adventure for all.
However, as the sun set and the clock struck 6 p.m., the park’s transformation into a haunted haven began, and the event shifted gears from family fun to full-on fright. The thrilling aspect of the event was not only the exhilarating rides and attractions but also the transition into a much spookier atmosphere, giving visitors the best of both worlds.
Terror Takes Over with Haunted Houses and Scare Zones
As darkness fell over Lake Compounce, the atmosphere turned eerie. The Phantom Fall Fest truly embraced the Halloween spirit with its five haunted houses, each offering its own terrifying theme. One of the highlights of this year’s festival was the debut of Project Nightmare. Touted as the most terrifying attraction in the park’s history, this haunted house pushed the boundaries of horror. The chilling atmosphere, creepy sound effects, and unsettling visuals made Project Nightmare an unforgettable experience for thrill-seekers.
Along with the haunted houses, visitors were also invited to explore two scare zones, designed to increase the level of fear and excitement. These zones featured lurking creatures, eerie figures, and sudden scares around every corner, ensuring that there was never a dull moment. The frightful ambiance was heightened by the haunting sounds and dark shadows, which kept guests on edge as they made their way through the park.
Phantom Fall Fest’s haunted houses and scare zones were perfect for those who wanted an adrenaline rush, providing a terrifyingly fun experience for those brave enough to step into the unknown.
A Themed Halloween Experience with More to Explore
The excitement didn’t end with the haunted houses. The event also offered a range of fall-themed treats, further enhancing the seasonal atmosphere. Guests could enjoy pumpkin-flavored snacks, warm apple cider, and other Halloween-themed goodies that complemented the spooky surroundings. These tasty bites were perfect for recharging after a nerve-wracking journey through the haunted houses or scare zones.
The park also featured more than 20 rides and attractions, making it much more than just a Halloween event. Whether visitors were looking to ride roller coasters, go on the Ferris wheel, or enjoy other thrill rides, there was something for everyone. For those who loved the Halloween theme but weren’t interested in the frightful attractions, the rides offered a fun escape while still being immersed in the autumn vibe.
The combination of haunted houses, festive foods, and thrilling rides created an all-encompassing Halloween experience that kept visitors entertained for hours. It was clear that Phantom Fall Fest was designed to ensure that no two visits were alike, as new scares and surprises popped up around every corner.
A Season Full of Scares, Surprises, and Fun
Phantom Fall Fest truly stood out as one of the best Halloween-themed events in the region, thanks to its variety of attractions and the overall atmosphere it created. This year, the event had more scares, more surprises, and more Halloween fun than ever before. It offered a unique take on the traditional haunted house event by expanding into a full-fledged Halloween festival that embraced both family-friendly activities and adrenaline-pumping thrills.
For those looking for a memorable Halloween adventure, the Phantom Fall Fest was the place to be. It brought together the best elements of Halloween—spooky haunts, themed food, fun rides, and the excitement of the season—into one thrilling package. Whether it was the terror of the haunted houses, the fun of Kiddie Land, or the autumn-themed delights, there was something for everyone at the festival.
With its combination of scares and surprises, the Phantom Fall Fest proved to be a Halloween destination that lived up to its name. It was more than just a Halloween event; it was a place where visitors could create lasting memories and experience Halloween like never before.
The post Bristol’s Phantom Fall Fest: A Halloween Adventure Like No Other appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Hawaii has officially joined California, Colorado, Oregon, and Alaska in the sustainable travel revolution, reshaping United States tourism for a greener future. As these states push the boundaries of eco-conscious travel, Hawaii steps up to lead by example, offering travelers an environmentally responsible way to explore its breathtaking landscapes.
From green hotels to sustainable tourism practices, Hawaii is setting the stage for a new era in tourism where nature preservation and adventure go hand in hand. By aligning with California, Colorado, Oregon, and Alaska’s green initiatives, Hawaii is ensuring that the future of U.S. tourism is rooted in sustainability. What’s holding you back from embracing this exciting movement? Join the sustainable travel revolution today and experience the beauty of Hawaii and other eco-conscious destinations across the U.S., all while making a positive impact on the environment. Read on to discover how this change is transforming U.S. tourism for the better.
Sustainable travel has swiftly become an integral component of the global tourism industry, driven by increasing environmental concerns and the growing recognition of the need to preserve our planet’s natural resources. In the United States, several states are at the forefront of implementing eco-conscious tourism practices, ensuring that tourism grows while respecting the environment. These efforts focus on reducing carbon emissions, fostering renewable energy, and promoting eco-friendly practices to maintain the natural beauty of each state. From Hawaii’s Green Fee to California’s electric vehicle (EV) infrastructure, states across the U.S. are finding innovative ways to balance tourism growth with environmental protection.
This article dives into the sustainability initiatives across 10 key U.S. states, including Hawaii, California, and Colorado, and explores how these strategies are shaping the future of travel and influencing the tourism industry worldwide.
Hawaii, Leading the Way with the Green Fee Initiative
Hawaii, an idyllic archipelago known for its breathtaking beaches, volcanic landscapes, and rich biodiversity, has been a pioneer in sustainable tourism. In an effort to reduce the environmental impact of tourism, Hawaii introduced Senate Bill 1396, which establishes a Green Fee. Starting January 1, 2026, this fee will increase the Transient Accommodations Tax (TAT) by 0.75% to generate funds for vital climate resilience projects. These projects will include beach replenishment, wildfire prevention, and shoreline restoration—all crucial steps in addressing the environmental challenges caused by tourism.
By implementing the Green Fee, Hawaii is reinforcing its position as a leader in eco-conscious tourism. The introduction of this fee will not only help preserve the islands’ fragile ecosystems but also encourage tourists to contribute directly to these conservation efforts. This initiative may change how travelers choose their destinations in the future, with a stronger preference for locations that prioritize sustainability.
California, Pioneering the Use of Electric Vehicles and Renewable Energy
California has consistently been a leader in promoting environmental sustainability, and its tourism industry reflects this commitment. The state has introduced multiple sustainable tourism initiatives, such as encouraging the use of electric vehicles (EVs) and integrating renewable energy sources into tourist accommodations. The state’s Sustainable Policy and Best Management Practices Manual outlines measures to reduce carbon emissions, promote green transportation, and encourage waste-reduction programs across the tourism sector.
California’s commitment to sustainability is setting a global benchmark for eco-friendly tourism. As green tourism becomes increasingly important to travelers, California’s approach is influencing other states to adopt similar sustainable practices. By prioritising the environment and encouraging green travel, California is shaping the future of tourism across the U.S. and beyond.
Colorado, Fostering Sustainable Outdoor Recreation
Colorado, renowned for its majestic Rocky Mountains and abundant opportunities for outdoor recreation, is integrating sustainability into its tourism strategy through the 2025 Destination Blueprint. This plan, introduced by the Colorado Tourism Office, encourages local destinations to develop sustainable growth strategies that balance tourism development with the preservation of natural resources.
By positioning itself as a destination for eco-tourists, Colorado ensures that its wildlife and landscapes are protected, securing the long-term health of its outdoor spaces. The state’s approach to sustainable tourism balances economic growth with environmental stewardship, setting an example for other states to follow.
Oregon, Urban Sustainability and Green Transportation
Portland, Oregon, is widely regarded as one of the most eco-friendly cities in the U.S., with a strong commitment to urban sustainability and green travel. The city’s Bicycle Plan for 2030 outlines ambitious goals to increase cycling infrastructure and make cycling the primary mode of transportation for residents and tourists alike. Additionally, Portland promotes green transportation, such as electric buses, to reduce the environmental impact of tourism.
Portland’s approach has positioned it as a global leader in urban sustainability, proving that it’s possible to integrate eco-conscious practices into urban tourism. For travelers seeking responsible travel options, Portland stands out as a top choice.
Alaska, Promoting Eco-Tourism and Wildlife Conservation
Alaska’s vast and untamed wilderness is a significant part of its appeal, and the state places great importance on eco-tourism. Through the Statewide Comprehensive Outdoor Recreation Plan, Alaska has developed initiatives to protect its wildlife and natural beauty while promoting sustainable tourism practices. Alaska offers eco-lodges, low-impact cruises, and nature-based activities, such as wildlife watching and hiking, to ensure that tourism does not harm its fragile ecosystems.
Alaska’s eco-tourism initiatives provide travelers with an opportunity to enjoy its remarkable landscapes while supporting efforts to preserve its natural resources. The state serves as a model for other regions with sensitive ecosystems, showing that tourism can thrive without compromising the environment.
Vermont, Leading in Renewable Energy and Waste Reduction
Vermont has earned a reputation as one of the most eco-conscious states in the U.S. The state has developed the Resilience Implementation Strategy, which outlines Vermont’s commitment to renewable energy, waste reduction, and community-driven environmental initiatives. Vermont also leads in promoting sustainable agriculture, supporting local food systems, and encouraging farm-to-table dining that has minimal environmental impact.
Vermont’s sustainable tourism initiatives not only benefit the environment but also attract eco-conscious travelers seeking responsible and green travel experiences.
Washington, Sustainable Conservation and Recreation
Washington has firmly committed to conserving natural resources while promoting sustainable tourism. The state’s Recreation and Conservation Plan ensures that outdoor recreation opportunities are developed without compromising the integrity of public lands. Washington also promotes green transportation, such as electric vehicles, and eco-friendly activities like kayaking, hiking, and wildlife watching.
Washington’s tourism strategy promotes a balanced approach to conservation and recreation, ensuring that the state’s natural wonders remain protected for future generations.
New York, Urban Sustainability and Green Travel
New York City has become a leader in green tourism, driven by its focus on urban sustainability. The city’s public transportation system, which includes electric buses and subways, helps reduce the carbon footprint of tourism. Additionally, New York has introduced policies that reduce the carbon footprint of hotels, restaurants, and tourist activities, ensuring that the tourism sector operates environmentally responsibly.
New York’s commitment to green tourism sets an example for other cities globally, showing that even in densely populated areas, sustainability can be integrated into the tourism sector.
Maine, Marine Conservation and Eco-Tourism
Maine has become a leader in eco-tourism, with a focus on marine conservation and sustainable travel practices. The state encourages activities like sustainable fishing, wildlife watching, and eco-tourism experiences, such as kayaking and hiking, that minimize environmental impact. Maine is committed to protecting its coastal ecosystems, ensuring that visitors can enjoy its natural beauty while preserving it for future generations.
Maine’s sustainable tourism efforts provide eco-conscious travelers with opportunities to experience its wild coastline and protected environments in a responsible way.
Michigan, Protecting Water Resources and Promoting Eco-Tourism
Michigan places significant importance on eco-tourism, particularly in the preservation of its Great Lakes and other natural resources. The state promotes wildlife watching, sustainable boating, and eco-friendly resorts that minimize environmental impact. Michigan’s efforts focus on water conservation and wildlife protection, ensuring the state’s freshwater ecosystems are preserved for future generations.
Michigan’s commitment to sustainable tourism ensures that its water resources and natural landscapes are preserved, providing eco-friendly travel options for future generations.
Impact of Sustainable Tourism
The shift towards sustainable tourism in these states signifies a larger trend in the global tourism sector. As travelers become increasingly conscious of their ecological footprint, demand for eco-conscious destinations continues to rise. These states are setting the standard for responsible tourism by implementing innovative measures to reduce the environmental impact of tourism, such as green fees, electric vehicles, and sustainable activities.
The tourism industry is undergoing a transformation as more destinations adopt eco-friendly policies and embrace sustainability in their practices. These efforts are contributing to the long-term health of the environment and the tourism industry, creating a positive relationship between travelers and the places they visit.
A Path to a Sustainable Travel Future
The sustainable tourism initiatives introduced by these U.S. states represent a major shift towards eco-conscious travel. By implementing green practices, encouraging responsible travel, and prioritising environmental protection, these states are setting a global example for how tourism can contribute to the preservation of natural resources. As the tourism sector continues to embrace sustainability, eco-tourism will play an increasingly important role in shaping the future of travel. Through these efforts, the travel industry will ensure that future generations can enjoy the natural beauty of these states while maintaining a commitment to environmental conservation.
These initiatives show that sustainable tourism is not only possible but necessary for the long-term health of the planet and the tourism industry. By leading the way in eco-tourism, these states are demonstrating that tourism and environmental protection can go hand in hand, ensuring a sustainable future for both travelers and the destinations they visit.
The post Hawaii Joins California, Colorado, Oregon, and Alaska in Sustainable Travel Revolution, Reshaping United States Tourism for a Greener Future, What’s Holding You Back appeared first on Travel And Tour World.VSE Corporation is well-known for aircraft aftermarket distribution and repair services. They have also signed a definitive agreement to gain Aero 3, a major provider of Maintenance, Repair, and Overhaul (MRO) services. The acquisition will deepen VSE’s constellations in wheel and brake services globally and add value to its aviation portfolio in North America and Europe.
Strategic Expansion in Global Aviation Services
This acquisition marks a significant step in VSE’s strategy to increase its global footprint in aviation services. With the addition of Aero 3’s operations, VSE will now manage 12 wheel and brake repair facilities strategically located in the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom. The acquisition will extend VSE’s service capabilities to a wider international customer base, including commercial, regional, and business aviation operators.
Aero 3, headquartered in Manchester, New Hampshire, operates nine MRO facilities and serves over 750 global customers, completing approximately 50,000 MRO events annually. The company’s expertise in wheel and brake repair, OEM distribution, and proprietary solutions aligns seamlessly with VSE’s strategic goals.
Strengthening Distribution and Repair Services
The combination of VSE and Aero 3 enhances the distribution of Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheel and brake components, positioning VSE as a trusted OEM partner. The acquisition also extends VSE’s offering of proprietary solutions, including custom-designed repair services and manufactured aircraft components. With a broader range of services, VSE will be better equipped to serve the diverse needs of the aviation industry.
VSE’s acquisition of Aero 3 will provide a unified solution for fleet operators, combining tire repair and replacement services from its 2023 acquisition of Desser Aerospace with the wheel and brake services from Aero 3. This integrated offering will streamline operations for aviation customers, ensuring efficient, high-quality service delivery.
Enhanced Capabilities for High-Margin Solutions
Aero 3’s capabilities in engineering and producing proprietary solutions are expected to elevate VSE’s portfolio, enabling the company to offer higher value, differentiated products. This development aligns with VSE’s objective to accelerate growth in the high-margin proprietary products sector, which is expected to contribute significantly to the company’s overall expansion.
As VSE continues to expand its services, it will also enhance its support for OEMs, a crucial aspect of its long-term strategy. With the addition of Aero 3’s facilities, VSE will have access to one of the most comprehensive global aftermarket platforms in the industry, specialising in aircraft wheels and brakes.
Global Market Leadership
The strategic acquisition strengthens VSE’s position as a leader in the global aviation aftermarket services market, specifically in the wheel and brake sector. With Aero 3 now part of VSE’s portfolio, the company will leverage its extended network of repair and distribution facilities to cater to a larger, more diverse customer base.
In addition to its market-leading MRO services, the acquisition will further solidify VSE’s standing as an OEM-aligned partner. With expanded operational reach, the company will be able to deliver integrated solutions for aviation operators, ensuring they receive the highest quality products and services.
The addition of nine new MRO facilities in key international locations will also enhance VSE’s ability to serve commercial aviation customers in Europe, North America, and beyond. These locations will allow VSE to provide closer proximity to aviation hubs, enabling more efficient service delivery and improved turnaround times.
Financial Impact and Future Growth Prospects
The transaction, valued at approximately 350 million dollars, is expected to close in the fourth quarter of 2025, pending regulatory approvals. Aero 3’s estimated annual revenue for the trailing twelve months ended August 2025 stands at 120 million dollars, with adjusted EBITDA margins exceeding 20 percent. The acquisition is set to contribute significantly to VSE’s growth, with its consolidated adjusted EBITDA margin expected to increase by over 50 basis points on a pro forma basis.
The financial backing for this acquisition will come from VSE’s anticipated equity financing and/or borrowings from its existing credit facility. VSE expects that the combined strength of its operations will lead to significant sales synergies and continued growth in the global aviation aftermarket sector.
A Stronger Future for Aviation Aftermarket Services
After acquiring Aero 3, VSE Corporation seems ready to broaden its global reach and improve its aviation after-market services. Aero 3 strengthens VSE’s already highly competitive position in the market by adding new capabilities in wheel and brake MRO services, OEM distribution, and proprietary product solutions.
Aero 3 and VSE’s combined expertise will deliver unparalleled value to aviation customers worldwide, providing dependable and high-quality services far into the future. VSE’s growing global presence and its continued expansion into new regions will enhance the value of the civil aviation market and surely make VSE one of the key players in its future growth.
The post VSE Expands Wheel And Brake Services With Aero Three Acquisition appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The Four Seasons Hotel Austin has always been adored for its lakeside retreat, but this holiday season it is set to transform into a winter wonder land. With the Ice Rodeo set to return, it will run from November 21st 2025 to January 4th 2026 along with a plethora of new holiday experience offerings. Designed to create magical memories, the event is sure to attract travellers. This year there is even more delightful family friendly programmed being offered alongside new additions to festive food and merriment.
Beverly Magee, the Regional Vice President and General Manager of the hotel, shared her excitement about the return of the Ice Rodeo, stating that it has become an important part of many families’ traditions. She expressed that seeing the joy of people of all ages coming together to celebrate the holiday season at the Ice Rodeo truly captures the warm spirit that defines Austin.
One of the key attractions of the Ice Rodeo is the 3,360-square-foot outdoor ice skating rink. Built atop the hotel pool, this real ice rink provides guests with a chance to skate beneath Austin’s crisp winter skies, with a stunning view of Lady Bird Lake. The rink is cooled by state-of-the-art chillers, offering an authentic ice-skating experience that draws in both locals and tourists.
After an exhilarating skate, guests can head to The Point, a charming outdoor lounge offering hot toddies, gourmet snacks, and treats from nearby food trucks. With sparkling lights and firepits to keep warm, The Point becomes the perfect setting for sharing s’mores with friends and family, providing a uniquely festive experience that embodies the welcoming atmosphere of Austin.
For many, the outdoor lounge and ice rink provide not only an enjoyable pastime but an opportunity to experience Austin in a way that blends both the holiday cheer of winter and the laid-back Texan charm.
For those seeking a more private experience, Four Seasons Hotel Austin is offering rinkside cabins, designed with a lodge-inspired aesthetic to create a festive, intimate atmosphere. These cabins, which can accommodate up to six guests, are available for rent throughout the holiday season and offer a range of curated experiences.
With plush seating, seasonal décor, and personalised service, these cabins are perfect for a family celebration or a romantic evening for two. The cabins, which start at 450 USD for a two-hour rental, also include food and beverage options such as Champagne, shareable plates, and even tableside ensuring that guests have a memorable and festive experience during their visit.
The holiday décor at Four Seasons Hotel Austin is sure to captivate visitors, as the hotel is adorned with thousands of twinkling lights, a 120-foot tunnel of lighted stars, and an array of Texas-themed art installations scattered throughout the property. For travellers looking to capture the magic of the season, the elaborate décor creates the perfect backdrop for holiday photos and makes exploring the property a magical experience.
The highlight of the outdoor holiday display is the towering 30-foot Christmas tree, which stands proudly on the back lawn, giving guests the chance to take in the splendour of the season while enjoying the festive atmosphere.
Indoors, guests will find the hotel’s famous gingerbread display, a yearly tradition that never fails to wow visitors. Executive Pastry Chef Amanda Pallagi and her team craft this magical creation each year, and this time, the hotel will transform its lobby into a Polar Express-inspired adventure with a Texan twist. Past creations have included life-sized replicas of the city and oversized ornaments; this year’s gingerbread masterpiece promises to be just as delightful and a perfect addition to the holiday festivities.
Those looking to unwind with a bird’s-eye view of the holiday festivities can visit The Deck, the hotel’s seasonal pop-up lounge located on the outdoor balcony of Live Oak. Open daily from 1:00 pm to midnight, The Deck features a curated menu of specialty cocktails, Champagne, caviar, and light bites, all designed to enhance the refined yet relaxed setting. With comfortable seating and winter-inspired décor, it is an ideal spot for both tourists and locals to gather and take in the magic of the season.
In addition, A-Tea-X, the hotel’s renowned afternoon tea service, will return on December 1, 2025, offering a festive twist with hot teas, tea-inspired cocktails, and a selection of holiday treats. Guests can enjoy this special experience daily from 1:00 pm to 3:00 pm in the hotel’s stylish bar.
For those in need of relaxation after an exciting day of holiday festivities, The Spa at Four Seasons Hotel Austin is offering seasonal treatments such as the Fire and Ice Ritual. This full-body treatment combines the soothing warmth of basalt stones with the cooling benefits of marble stones, ensuring a rejuvenating experience for guests.
Additionally, The Hidden Flask, a speakeasy hidden within one of the hotel’s specialty suites, will reopen for the season. Guests can unwind by the fireplace while sipping festive cocktails and indulging in a menu of holiday-inspired bites.
The return of Ice Rodeo brings a wealth of new opportunities for tourists and locals alike. With a variety of activities, from ice skating and holiday-themed food trucks to private cabin rentals and luxurious spa treatments, Four Seasons Hotel Austin is positioning itself as the go-to destination for holiday getaways. This festive celebration of winter and Austin’s charm is expected to significantly boost tourism by attracting both domestic and international visitors, eager to experience the city’s unique blend of holiday cheer and Texas hospitality.
Like with other events hosted by the Four Seasons, the Ice Rodeo will be a great opportunity for travellers during the holidays, especially with the newly added features. With the promise of increasing tourism throughout Austin, the opportunity for unforgettable memories is high for this event, especially given the real ice Rockette and cabin features. The opportunity for January 1st as a re-engagement event, people watching will meet skaters while others will be warming themselves with steaming cups of holiday drinks, will offer a unique way to showcase Texas charm.
Image Credit: Four Seasons Hotel, Austin
The post Austin’s Four Seasons Hotel Reintroduces the Magical Ice Rodeo for 2025: A Winter Wonderland Full of New Experiences for Tourists appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Passengers embarking on cruises with Azamara Cruises, Emerald Cruises and Tours, and Scenic Luxury Cruises and Tours can now take advantage of a luxury luggage shipping service thanks to a new partnership with Ship&Play, the specialist provider behind ShipSticks. Starting November 1 for Azamara and November 15 for Emerald and Scenic cruises, travelers will have the option to ship their luggage from home directly to their shipboard suite and back after their voyage. This innovative service removes the burden of managing bulky bags during transfers, instantly elevating the onboard experience.
Ship&Play provides a smooth, fully insured, and trackable luggage delivery service designed to function as a bespoke concierge offering for cruise passengers. By taking care of baggage logistics, the partnership promises to minimize travel stress and allow guests to focus entirely on their holiday journey. Whether for round-trip or one-way travel, the service is especially beneficial for those who prefer not to handle luggage after a journey or after indulging in onboard shopping.
Azamara, Emerald, and Scenic, renowned for their premium cruise itineraries including destinations such as the Mediterranean, Caribbean, and Baltic regions, view the integration of Ship&Play as a step toward redefining luxury and convenience in cruising. The service fosters a superior guest experience by ensuring luggage arrives smoothly and securely, ready in suites upon arrival, allowing passengers to immediately immerse in the destination experiences provided by these cruise lines without the distraction of baggage.
Passengers have the flexibility to book return shipments while still onboard, simplifying the end-of-cruise process. This seamless luggage transition aligns perfectly with the premium service standards of Azamara, Emerald, and Scenic. In addition, travel advisors promoting the service can earn commissions starting at ten percent per booking, providing an attractive business opportunity that further incentivizes premium travel solutions.
By removing a significant logistical hurdle, the collaboration between Ship&Play and these leading cruise operators encourages increased uptake of luxury cruise holidays. Travelers valuing time, comfort, and reliability are likely to be attracted to this enhanced offering, supporting tourism growth in regions serviced by the Azamara, Emerald, and Scenic fleets. This improvement dovetails with broader trends toward personalized, hassle-free travel and strengthens these cruise lines’ competitive edge in the luxury segment.
The service’s fully trackable nature and insurance coverage provide peace of mind to passengers entrusting their belongings to Ship&Play. Transparent logistics updates and guaranteed protection lower barriers for those hesitant about shipping luggage, highlighting the company’s commitment to quality and safety. This reliability complements the overall cruise experience, where attention to detail and guest care are paramount.
The Ship&Play partnership with Azamara, Emerald, and Scenic illustrates a growing trend of integrating tech-driven concierge services into the luxury cruise market. Such collaborations are expected to expand in coming years, as cruise lines seek innovative ways to streamline journeys and heighten guest satisfaction. Detangling traditional pain points like luggage management meets evolving traveler expectations and promotes sustainable tourism by potentially reducing airport congestion and transportation logistics.
The launch of Ship&Play’s luggage shipping service aboard Azamara, Emerald, and Scenic cruises marks a transformative advancement in cruise travel convenience starting fall 2025. By enabling passengers to ship bags directly from home to cruise suites and back, the companies create a frictionless travel experience that fits seamlessly with their luxury offerings. This service not only enhances guest comfort but also amplifies the tourism appeal of the diverse destinations visited by these cruise lines, fostering greater satisfaction and confidence in upscale cruise holidays globally.
Image Credit: Scenic
The post Azamara, Emerald, and Scenic Cruises Enhance Luxury Travel with Ship&Play Luggage Shipping Service: What You Need to Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.David Beckham has heaped praise on Trent Alexander-Arnold, drawing striking parallels between their styles of play and calling the Real Madrid and England star a modern-day reflection of himself. Speaking on the Rio Ferdinand Presents podcast in a video uploaded on X, Beckham admitted that among today’s players, Trent reminds him the most of his own approach to football.
He said:
I suppose if there was one player where I look at and think, ‘he’s very similar in the way he delivers the ball, crosses or passes,’ it has to be Trent.
When Ferdinand suggested Kevin De Bruyne as a possible comparison, Beckham disagreed slightly, noting that while the Belgian is exceptional, Alexander-Arnold’s technique and passing vision feel more personal to him.
He explained:
It’s the way he puts the ball in, those long passes balls some players don’t even think about. That’s what I love about him.
The comparison carries even more weight given Alexander-Arnold’s evolution. Softfootball understands that since leaving Liverpool for Real Madrid in May 2025, he has hoped to redefine the full-back role much like Beckham redefined the wide midfielder’s position at Manchester United decades ago; however, muscle problems continue to hinder his progress at the club.
Watch the video below:
David Beckham describes the current Real Madrid player who is most similar to his playing style
— Rio Ferdinand Presents (@RioMeets) October 26, 2025
CC: @rioferdy5, #ElClasico pic.twitter.com/oFoLFPiaS4
During his Liverpool career, Trent registered 60 Premier League assists (a record for a defender) and 23 goals in 354 appearances, helping the Reds win two league titles (2020, 2025) and a Champions League (2019).
Beckham, who notched 142 goals and assists as a non-forward during his own Premier League era, clearly sees a kindred spirit two players who turned dead balls and long passes into art forms. Softfootball even wrote an article suggesting that Salah’s struggle this season might be as a result of Trent’s move to Madrid.
From Beckham’s right foot to Trent’s, the tradition of English precision and flair seems alive and well. As Beckham put it, Trent has that kind of vision that changes games.
A Chelsea fan has voiced his frustration on X following the team’s 2–1 home loss to Sunderland, blaming manager Enzo Maresca’s tactical choices and the team’s lack of creativity in attack, Softfootball reports.
The defeat, which exposed glaring issues in defence and decision-making, has once again left supporters questioning the club’s direction under the Italian coach.
After the game Chelsea posted on their official X handle, a post match photo with the caption “defeat” which gave a lot of fans the room for give their reactions. They posted:
Removing Achempong for uncle Tosin is not wise at all .Chelsea is so bad in breaking defensive side , only Palmer is good with one on one situation, decision making in the final third in not encouraging, joao Pedro doesn't even remember he is an attacker . Chelsea missing Palmer…
— Chelsea Diehard (@lappoosky) October 25, 2025
A supporter identified as Chelsea Diehard sparked the conversation under the post online after, criticising Maresca’s choice to replace Acheampong with Tosin Adarabioyo during the game, he posted;
Removing Acheampong for uncle Tosin is not wise at all. Chelsea is so bad in breaking defensive sides. Only Palmer is good with one-on-one situations. Decision making in the final third is not encouraging. João Pedro doesn’t even remember he’s an attacker. Chelsea are missing Palmer’s creativity to be honest.
His post quickly gained traction as fellow fans echoed his frustration.
One user, ChelseaFan Boy, replied:
He did well against Xhaka in 1v1 defending but no — let’s put uncle Tosin that has conceded in 1v1 countlessly.
Son of Thunder was even more direct:
You need a goal and you’re substituting your defenders? The defender who saved the team from two clear goals! It seems Maresca placed a bet on Chelsea to lose.
Another fan, Oasis, lamented Chelsea’s inconsistency:
We’re bad at breaking defensive sides and equally bad at breaking attacking sides. After we scored, Sunderland pressed high to equalise, but instead of finishing the job, we relaxed like it was already over.
Mister Koto added:
Acheampong was gassed and it was evident… But Tosin, man, I have no words for that guy. It’s just pathetic.
While Andromen summed up the general mood:
I seriously don’t know what Tosin is doing as a professional defender… I’ve said that countless times.
Chelsea’s 2–1 loss to Sunderland at Stamford Bridge has reignited fan frustration over Maresca’s tactics and squad choices. Many pointed to the ongoing absence of Levi Colwill, who remains out with a long-term injury, as a key reason for the team’s defensive frailty.
The defeat leaves supporters questioning whether Maresca’s methods are truly working and once again, it was Cole Palmer’s absence and creativity that dominated post-match discussions among the Blues faithful.
Reliance Global Group Inc. (NASDAQ: RELI) has expanded its cryptocurrency portfolio with the addition of Solana (SOL), marking another step in its ongoing digital asset treasury strategy.
The move positions the company among a growing list of publicly traded firms integrating blockchain-based assets into their corporate balance sheets.
The announcement, made on October 27, 2025, confirms that Reliance now holds five of the top ten cryptocurrencies by market capitalization — Bitcoin, Ethereum, Cardano, XRP, and Solana.
The addition underscores the company’s belief in the long-term potential of blockchain technology and its applications in both finance and enterprise innovation.
Reliance’s decision to purchase Solana represents a milestone in its broader digital asset diversification strategy.
The company described the acquisition as part of its disciplined approach to building exposure across major blockchain ecosystems.
“By adding Solana alongside Bitcoin, Ethereum, Cardano, and XRP, we continue to execute our disciplined strategy of diversifying across leading blockchain ecosystems,” said Moshe Fishman, a member of the Reliance Global Group Crypto Advisory Board and Director of Insurtech at Reliance. “Solana represents the next generation of blockchain performance — built for real-world adoption and institutional-scale applications.”
Solana, currently the sixth-largest cryptocurrency by market capitalization at over $110 billion, has become increasingly attractive to corporate treasuries and institutional investors.
Known for its hybrid Proof-of-Stake and Proof-of-History consensus mechanisms, Solana can process over 65,000 transactions per second, with blocks confirming in about 400 milliseconds.
The blockchain’s scalability and efficiency have made it a favored platform for decentralized finance (DeFi), non-fungible tokens (NFTs), and Web3 applications.
Fishman noted that expanding into Solana aligns with Reliance’s commitment to innovation while maintaining a balanced approach to governance, security, and compliance.
Solana’s inclusion in Reliance’s treasury comes amid growing institutional and corporate interest in the blockchain.
Its expanding ecosystem — spanning DeFi protocols, tokenized real-world assets, and NFT platforms — continues to drive adoption.
Market analysts point to the increasing appeal of Solana as a potential treasury asset, bolstered by the anticipation of regulatory approval for spot Solana exchange-traded funds (ETFs).
The token traded near $200 on October 27, reflecting broader optimism surrounding blockchain utility and scalability.
Reliance’s move follows similar announcements by other public companies in recent months, as corporate treasuries diversify away from traditional assets to hedge against inflation and capture long-term value in digital markets.
The addition of Solana to Reliance Global Group’s treasury is a strategic effort that many other public companies have tapped into across the market.
SOL’s price has largely benefited from the sentiment around these efforts.
While DeFi, NFTs and RWA traction stands out, Solana’s native token has received notable upside momentum from the growing treasury asset plays.
Forward Industries, Solana Company, Upexi, DeFi Development Corp, Sol Strategies and Sharps Technology are among the top SOL treasury companies.
Data from CoinGecko shows the 10 leading public companies cumulatively hold over 15.7 million SOL, currently worth over $3.18 billion.
The post Solana boost as Reliance adds SOL to treasury holdings appeared first on CoinJournal.
Sky Sport Italia suggests that Juventus could meet face-to-face with Luciano Spalletti to discuss a potential appointment as Bianconeri head coach on Tuesday, and that the Old Lady are planning to offer a short-term contract with an option to renew.
Juventus are on the lookout for a new head coach to replace Tudor, who was relieved of his duties on Monday.
The Croatian had gone eight matches without a win in any competition and his team had not scored in any of their last four matches. He becomes the first Serie A head coach to lose their job in 2025-26, lasting for just eight league matches.
According to reports from Gianluca Di Marzio and Sky Sport Italia, Juventus could hold face-to-face talks with Spalletti as early as Tuesday. As Football Italia reported on Monday, the former Napoli and Italy head coach is the current frontrunner to replace Tudor.
According to the latest updates, Juventus are prepared to offer Spalletti a contract until the end of the 2025-26 season with an obligation to renew if the Old Lady qualify for next season’s Champions League.
As per Gianluca Di Marzio, it remains to be seen whether that automatic contract extension will be for another 12 months, or for another two years. Monday evening’s report indicates that Spalletti is already inclined to accept either way.
Sky also adds that Spalletti has recently rejected potential opportunities abroad, including Fenerbahce and to some lucrative proposals from Qatar, in order to focus on a return to Serie A.
Kenan Yildiz has sent his best wishes to Igor Tudor, who was sacked from his position as head coach of Juventus on Monday: ‘All the best for the future’.
Juventus officially announced the departure of Tudor as head coach on Monday following a run of eight matches without a win across Serie A and the Champions League. The Bianconeri had not won since the 4-3 victory over Inter on September 13, and had not scored in any of Tudor’s last four matches in charge.
The Croatian is the first head coach to lose his job in Serie A in 2025-26, receiving his marching orders just eight league games into the campaign.
Gleison Bremer was the first of the Juve players to publicly express their gratitude to Tudor following the news of his departure on Monday. “Thank you for everything, gaffer, best of luck for the future,” he wrote in his story on Instagram.
Yildiz, the most recent of the Juventus players to thank Tudor, wrote the same message as Bremer, but in English: “Thank you for everything, Mister. All the best for the future.”
Mattia Perin has also sent a message to Tudor on his Instagram story, simply writing: “Thank you, mister.”
Juventus and Italy legend Gianluigi Buffon has expressed his support for his former colleague Luciano Spalletti, who is the current frontrunner to replace Igor Tudor as head coach of the Bianconeri.
Juventus announced on Monday that Tudor has been relieved from his duties as head coach following a run of eight matches without a win and four games without scoring. The Old Lady have not won in any competition since the 4-3 Derby d’Italia victory over Inter on September 13.
Several names have already been linked with a move to take over at the Allianz Stadium, including Roberto Mancini and Raffaele Palladino, but Spalletti is the current frontrunner, and is already in direct contact with the club.
Buffon, speaking at the closing ceremony of the Corriere dello Sport centenary event in Naples on Monday evening, expressed his support for Spalletti becoming the next head coach of his beloved Juventus.
“For me, Luciano is the right profile for any big club who wants to remain ambitious. You won’t lose many with Luciano,” Buffon said.
Buffon and Spalletti have worked together previously as part of the Italy national team set-up. Spalletti was CT from the end of the summer in 2023 until the start of the summer in 2025, while Buffon served as delegation chief, a role that he still holds today.
“It would be a great professional choice,” Buffon said of Juventus’s links with Spalletti. “He’s a football man, he’s a great person and a great coach.
“Spalletti is the best around in terms of experience, charisma and authority. He’s the right person for ambitious clubs who want to remain ambitious. It’s a shame seeing him not in the dugout.”
Jose Mourinho had an opportunity to discuss his time with Inter, and his rivalries with Milan and Juventus alongside Adriano Galliani and Gianluigi Buffon during a special event on Monday evening: ‘I have so much respect for him’.
Mourinho, Galliani and Buffon were all among the star guests at an event organised by Corriere dello Sport, celebrating the paper’s 100th anniversary on Monday evening.
Mourinho, who was appointed head coach of Benfica in September, was unable to attend in-person, but joined the special guests on a video call midway through the event on Monday.
Mourinho had a brief opportunity to discuss Inter’s rivalries with Milan and Juventus with Galliani and Buffon, insisting that he always had ‘respect’ for the former, and considers the latter ‘one of the greatest, if not the greatest’.
Galliani, speaking about his experiences going up against Mourinho during his Milan days, said: “I’ve never felt like an opponent of Jose Mourinho. I respect him and I hope that this feeling will be reciprocated.”
Mourinho, meanwhile, replied: “I always remember that during my time with Inter, I both won and lost against Milan. But, Galliani and (Silvio) Berlusconi would always come into the dressing room to congratulate us, and for this, I have so much respect for Adriano.”
Buffon interjected, and insisted that the rivalry between Inter and Juventus was not always as pleasant.
“There was no ‘good’ blood between Juve and Inter,” Buffon said. “At the time, we wanted to kill them, but then you’d meet Jose, who’d make a joke or say something to you that meant that you couldn’t hate him.”
Mourinho was then able to exchange pleasantries with Buffon, adding: “I’ve always seen Juve as Juve, even if they were coming back up from Serie B at the time. And Gigi was always among the best, if not the best.”
Gian Piero is bringing a clear identity to Roma, despite an up-and-down start to the season that has brought four home defeats across Serie A and the Europa League. The victory against Sassuolo over the weekend, however, rounded off by a Paulo Dybala winner, is a platform to build on from a technical and mental standpoint.
Despite the fact that he is lacking the strikers and wingers needed to play his way, Gasperini has led Roma to the top of the Serie A standings along with Napoli, with six wins from their first eight league matches of the season.
This achievement comes from Gasperini’s ability to adapt, his ability to make do with what he has, and his ability to stay competitive, even in times of trouble.
The Roma side that we see today doesn’t quite line up with the coach’s philosophy: That would be impossible given the squad’s shortcomings, but they’re picking up valuable points and are becoming increasingly solid.
It’s a solid team, one that is working hard on a daily basis rather than talking too much or making too many complaints.
And, if this journey results in a return to the Champions League, it will be an impressive achievement, a sign that the project is finding form and continuity. For now, the transfer window can wait.
Only two Serie A players have been included on the 26-player shortlist for the 2025 edition of the FIFPRO World XI, as voted for by players across the globe.
The FIFPRO World XI has been running for 20 years, and acknowledges the 11 most successful players each calendar year. The nominees are voted for by players across the world.
A 26-player shortlist has been revealed, and that will be whittled down to a final 11, which will be announced on November 3.
The goalkeeper, three defenders, three midfielders and three attackers with the most votes will be included, and the remaining spot is assigned to the outfield player with the next highest number of votes.
Two Serie A representatives have been included on the 26-player shortlist for 2025, namely Luka Modric of Milan and Kevin De Bruyne of Napoli.
Italy international Gianluigi Donnarumma has been included among the goalkeepers, and is a strong candidate to be included in the final XI given his victory in the Champions League final with Paris Saint-Germain earlier this year.
2021 was the last time that either an Italian or a Serie A player was included in the final XI. That came a few months after the EURO 2020 final, which had been delayed by a year due to the COVID-19 pandemic. Donnarumma was included on that occasion, as was Juventus’s Leonardo Bonucci, Chelsea’s Jorginho, and Cristiano Ronaldo, who was still with Juve for the first half of that year.
Gianluigi Buffon (2017) is the only other Italian to have been included in the FIFPRO World XI over the last 10 years. He and Matthijs De Ligt (also 2017), Dani Alves (2017, 2016) and Paul Pogba (2015) are the only other Serie A players to have been included in the last 10 years.
Goalkeepers: Gianluigi Donnarumma (PSG/Manchester City), Alisson Becker (Liverpool), Thibaut Courtois (Real Madrid).
Defenders: Trent Alexander-Arnold (Liverpool/Real Madrid), Pau Cubarsi (Barcelona), Virgil van Dijk (Liverpool), Achraf Hakimi (PSG), Marquinhos (PSG), Nuno Mendes (PSG), William Saliba (Arsenal).
Midfielders: Jude Bellingham (Real Madrid), Kevin De Bruyne (Manchester City/Napoli), Luka Modric (Real Madrid/Milan), Joao Neves (PSG), Cole Palmer (Chelsea), Pedri (Barcelona), Federico Valverde (Real Madrid), Vitinha (PSG).
Forwards: Ousmane Dembele (PSG), Erling Haaland (Manchester City), Kylian Mbappe (Real Madrid), Lionel Messi (Inter Miami), Raphinha (Barcelona), Cristiano Ronaldo (Al-Nassr), Mohamed Salah (Liverpool), Lamine Yamal (Barcelona).
The 26-player shortlist for the 2025 FIFPRO Men's World 11 – as voted by players worldwide.
The team will be revealed on 03.11.2025. pic.twitter.com/bnu1umSCKw
— FIFPRO (@FIFPRO) October 27, 2025
Gaming smartphones used to be an extremely niche product, and while they technically still are, there are a lot more phones out there these days that can be considered suitable gaming smartphones. Even if they aren’t marketed as such. With that in mind, consumers have more choices for a gaming smartphone than ever before. With more options comes more of a challenge in finding the best gaming smartphones available, because you have a higher chance of picking something that isn’t a good phone for gaming.
That being said, we’ve set out to find all the best gaming smartphones for you to make this process easier. There will be some obvious choices and some maybe not so obvious, but all of them will be viable for playing mobile games if that’s the kind of device you’re looking for.
Here are the best gaming smartphones you can buy in 2025.
If you want the best gaming smartphone available, then there are a couple that would easily fit into this category; however, we’re recommending the REDMAGIC 10S Pro as the phone to beat. Not only is it extremely capable because of its specifications, but it was purpose-built for mobile gaming and offers some specialized gaming features. It’s also available at a very reasonable and affordable base price compared to another high-end option we had in mind. At the end of the day, the REDMAGIC 10S Pro provides a basically pound-for-pound experience and has a lower price. So, this is the best for anyone who wants a dedicated gaming smartphone. At least for now. We’re a few months out from the end of the year, and eventually, new gaming smartphone models will arise.
REDMAGIC’s 10S Pro is an excellent example of what a gaming phone should be – affordable, powerful, and full of features that cater to the gamer. After years of development and several iterations, the REDMAGIC 10S Pro is the product of a lot of hard work to create something that mobile gamers will be proud to have.
It offers several advantages, and while it comes in at a lower price point than direct competitors, it doesn’t skimp on performance. It doesn’t give an inch. That’s an impressive feat and it’s one of the reasons why it’s the best gaming phone available for most people in 2025.
The REDMAGIC 10S Pro has a lot of unique features that other high-end phones won’t have, and that’s one of the reasons why it’s a special phone for mobile gaming enthusiasts. The key feature, at least in our eyes, is the ultrasonic triggers that sit on top of the phone when you’re holding the phone in landscape mode for playing games. These act just like the triggers on a controller. These are perfect for shooter games, but you can map these triggers to any in-game control so you could use them for any game you want, as long as that games plays in landscape mode.
This phone also has a pretty large battery capacity and a really good cooling system. The latter helps ensure the phone stays capable of operating at optimal temperatures to sustain that high performance for longer periods of time. Then of course, you can pick this phone up with large amounts of RAM and storage, and it’s powered by the Snapdragon 8 Elite chipset, which is extremely powerful for mobile games.
Display: 6.85-inch AMOLED
Brightness: 2,000 nits
Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass
Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite
RAM and Storage: 12GB, 16GB, or 24GB RAM / 256GB, 512GB, or 1TB storage
Cameras: 50MP+50MP+2MP
Battery: 7050mAh Dual Cell Battery
Charging: 80W wired
Colors: Nightfall, Dusk, Moonlight
When it comes to premium gaming phones, there’s really only one choice, and this year it’s the ASUS ROG Phone 9 Pro. At a retail price of $1,299, it is most certainly not cheap but you get a top-of-the-line gaming smartphone with an exceptional experience for mobile gaming. While some of us here at Android Headlines personally like it more than the REDMAGIC 10S Pro, the 10S Pro is still the best offering because of its price and similar performance. However, if money is no object and you’re not concerned about the price, then this is the gaming phone you go with. ASUS spared no expense, and you might not want to either.
The ASUS ROG Phone 9 Pro released early in the year, making it one of the first phones to launch with the Snapdragon 8 Elite. It was officially launched in November of 2024, but it didn’t reach the US until January of 2025. It has an admittedly pretty good camera for a gaming phone. We say this because gaming phones typically have not had very good cameras. ASUS and REDMAGIC have started to change this and the ROG Phone 9 Pro has what is likely the best camera of any “gaming phone” that’s currently available.
Of course, the real magic lies in the special software features in the Armoury Crate app, as well as the popular AirTriggers. ASUS pioneered this feature and it has since spread to other gaming phone devices in similar forms. Still, they feel the best on the ROG devices.
The AirTriggers are one of the best things about this device. They give your phone trigger-like ultrasonic buttons that act like the triggers on a controller. ASUS is no longer the only brand to offer a feature like this, but it is the brand that offers the best-feeling triggers on a gaming phone. Plus, it has some excellent gaming software, with the most advanced features we’ve seen yet thanks to ASUS”s infusion of AI-powered functions.
It also has the best cooling of any gaming phone we’ve ever used, which allows it to keep sustained performance at a high level beyond other devices. You could play the most demanding games on this phone for a couple of hours and barely notice any change in surface temperature. At least, it wouldn’t get to the point where things are uncomfortable. This wasn’t the case with some of the older ROG Phone models, so ASUS came a long way with this one. There is, of course, the addition of large amounts of RAM and storage capacity, though, this isn’t specific to the ROG Phone 9 Pro. It’s just one of the really great things about it.
Display: 6.78 inch FHD+ 2400 x1080
Brightness: 2,500 nits peak, 1,600 nits HBM
Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass Victus 2
Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite
RAM and Storage: 16GB or 24GB RAM / 512GB or 1TB storage
Cameras: 50 MP, f/1.9, 24mm (wide), 32 MP, f/2.4, (telephoto), 13 MP, f/2.2, 13mm, 120˚ (ultrawide)
Battery: 5,800mAh
Charging: 65W wired, 15W wireless
Colors: Phantom Black
Gaming phones aren’t for everybody, and that’s understandable. They focus mostly on gaming as the key features, so naturally, a few other things may take a backseat. That being said, there are still consumers out there who like mobile gaming but want something that does other things really, really well. Thankfully, some brands, like Samsung, have put an emphasis on mobile gaming in recent years while still managing to deliver a phone that’s excellent for mobile gaming, but it’s not an actual gaming phone. The Galaxy S25 Ultra is the best phone to go for if you want something that can perform well with mobile games, that isn’t actually a gaming phone. That means you won’t get any special gaming-centric hardware features here, but it’ll run games effortlessly thanks to its powerful hardware.
The Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra is not a gaming phone but it is a good phone for games, because it’s good at pretty much everything it can do. It has great cameras, it has lots of storage, and it has a powerful chipset for high performance. Plus, it has a big screen with great resolution and vibrant colors. In other words, you’ll get a good screen size for games and the colors in those games will look amazing. Of course, it can’t be forgotten that this device has plenty of AI-powered software features to make everyday use outside of games more convenient.
Samsung has also taken great pains to increase mobile gaming performance and improve the user experience while playing games. This includes the use of a vapor chamber for better cooling, and even some gaming software features. It’s an all-around great device for more than just gaming. But, when it comes time to game, this phone won’t let you down.
What makes this phone special is that it’s a high-performance phone that can be used for mobile gaming, but it’s not really a gaming phone. So, as a user, you just end up with a really, really nice premium phone that can just happens to be able to play games well. Not just well, but at top-tier levels, given its RAM, storage, and Snapdragon 8 Elite chipset.
It’s a device that is just as suitable for everything else people love to do with mobile phones as it is for mobile gaming. It doesn’t look like a gaming phone either. That is most certainly going to appeal to some people who like games but don’t like the over-used gamer aesthetic. Even better is that you can use this phone for years to come. Samsung has promised 7 years of major OS updates, security updates, and feature updates. Which means, you’ll still be getting new versions of Android in 5 years. This isn’t something that was typical until Google’s Pixel 8 series. Samsung followed and promised 7 years of updates with last year’s Galaxy S24 series, and it’s continuing to do so here. The Galaxy S25 Ultra is an expensive phone as well, but it does a lot and it does it all pretty well.
Display: 6.9″ Dynamic LTPO AMOLED 2X 120Hz.
Brightness: 2,600 nits peak
Protection: Corning Gorilla Armor 2
Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite for Galaxy
RAM and Storage: 12GB RAM, 256GB, 512GB or 1TB Storage
Cameras: 200MP primary camera at f/1.7, 10MP 3x telephoto at f/2.4, 50MP 5x telephoto at f/3.4, and 50MP ultrawide at f/1.9.
Battery: 5,000mAh
Charging: 45W wired and 15W wireless. 4.5W reverse wireless also available
Colors: Titanium Silver Blue, Titanium Black, Titanium White Silver, Titanium Gray, Titanium Jade Green, Titanium Jet Black, Titanium Pink Gold
The OnePlus 13R is perhaps the best option for a phone that excels at mobile gaming in the budget category. It doesn’t cost a whole lot these days, and it’s still using some pretty powerful specs for a phone. Even if the chipset is from last year, it’s still last year’s flagship chipset from Qualcomm. Which is only a little less powerful than the Snapdragon 8 Elite.
OnePlus has also done some work to make its phones good for mobile gaming. The company included vapor chambers, added some gaming-centric software features, and, of course, the phones use good specs that allow the phone to run games well with high settings. This is another device that isn’t really a gaming phone, but it does play mobile games really well, all at a fraction of the cost of premium devices and actual gaming phones.
Much like the OnePlus 12R, the OnePlus 13R prides itself on being capable in many different areas and that includes gaming. The approach is similar to Samsung with a focus on using high-quality components to ensure that gaming performance is smooth, but without alienating the crowd of consumers who doesn’t like the style of gaming phones or the fact that they can drop the ball in a few areas, most notably the camera, although not always. The OnePlus 13R shines in most areas including with battery life (so you can play games for longer), and it does these things while managing to keep the price tag a reasonable amount. How does OnePlus keep the price lower? Mainly by using last year’s chipset. This is the gaming phone for anyone who wants something mainstream, with excellent performance, great features, and a stylish design.
The thing that makes this phone special the most is that it has top-tier gaming performance at a price of $599. Thanks to the use of the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 as opposed to the Snapdragon 8 Elite, OnePlus was able to keep the price lower than its flagship OnePlus 13. There are other differences, of course, but this one factor helped a lot. Yet, the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 is still a flagship chipset, just from one year prior, and that makes it a very good chip for games. OnePlus has also kept the vapor chamber and even improved on it from the previous year. Not to mention, it has put some focus toward enhancing mobile gaming through a few software features. There was a time that only brands who made official gaming phones would pay attention to this detail. More and more brands who make devices for the masses are catering to gamers too. And OnePlus is one of them.
It charges up extremely fast as well, when you use the wired charger, and that bodes well for the gamer who plays for long periods of time and needs to charge up the device as much as possible before having to rush out the door. By all accounts this is a great phone for gaming if you’re on a smaller budget and don’t want to compromise too much on performance.
Display: 6.78 LTPO AMOLED 120Hz
Brightness: 4,500 nits peak
Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass 7i
Processor: Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Gen 3
RAM and Storage: 12GB/16GB RAM ; 256GB/512GB Storage
Cameras: 50MP primary camera at f/1.8, 8MP ultrawide at f/2.2, 50MP telephoto at f/2.0
Battery: 6,000mAh
Charging: 80W wired
Colors: Astral Trail, Nebula Noir
If you’re looking to go even less expensive than the OnePlus 13R, then the Poco X7 Pro 5G is the phone for you. It’s the best bang for your buck if mobile gaming is a huge focal point in choosing a new phone to upgrade to. While it won’t have the best performance of any phone on the market, it has considerably good performance, and it costs under $400. That’s a price-to-performance value you can’t really argue against. Plus, the phone doesn’t look too bad in terms of design.
The Poco X7 Pro 5G is the kind of phone you consider when you want something that was built with mobile gaming in mind, but for the crowd of consumer who doesn’t want to spend more than a few hundred dollars.
At an average price of around $360, the Poco X7 Pro 5G from Xiaomi is a testament to what you can produce for less money when you put some effort into the development process. While it won’t beat out the top-tier devices, the Poco X7 Pro will have no problem delivering a quality gaming experience to the user. If you don’t care so much about having the absolute best, this is the device we’re recommending because it’s affordable, and it performs well. Not to mention it has a huge battery, so it’ll last a while between charges, too.
What makes this phone truly special is that it can play mobile games with pretty good performance that most mobile gamers are likely to find acceptable, all without charging the consumer more than a few hundred dollars. This is the biggest draw of the Poco X7 Pro 5G. You’ll pay under $400 for it, and you’ll end up with a device that pumps out decent performance and has a long-lasting battery.
With a 120Hz display and ultra-slim bezels, gaming visuals will be presented in a delightful way so you can enjoy more of your game time without distractions. Plus, the slimmer bezels just look nicer overall. It also comes with an IP68 rating for dust resistance and water resistance. An IP68 rating on phones this inexpensive isn’t as common, so this is definitely a standout feature of the design.
Display: 6.67-inch CrystalRes AMOLED display
Brightness: 3,200 nits peak
Protection: Corning Gorilla Glass 7i
Processor: MediaTek Dimensity 8400-Ultra
RAM and Storage: 8GB RAM, 256GB storage/12GB RAM, 256GB storage/12GB RAM, 512GB storage
Camera: 50MP Main camera at f/1.5 with OIS, 8MP Ultrawide
Battery: 6,000mAh
Charging: 90W wired
Colors: Black, Green, Yellow
Android Version: Android 15 via HyperOS 2
Software Support: 4 years of major Android updates
AI Software: Google Gemini, Circle to Search, AI Cinematic Lockscreen, AI Dynamic Wallpapers, AI Writing, DeepThink Mode
Camera Score: Not tested by DXOMark
Camera Features: AI Image Expansion, AI Film, AI Erase Pro, 4K Video Recording at 60fps, Director Mode, Burst Shot Mode, Night Scene Capture
The post Best Gaming Smartphones appeared first on Android Headlines.
The One UI 8 rollout has seen its share of issues, with Samsung pausing the process on several of its phones, including the popular Galaxy S24 and S23 flagships. The company hasn’t disclosed the reason that triggered this move, but we assume something serious. Anyway, it looks to be a thing of the past, as Samsung appears to have resumed the One UI 8 update for the Galaxy S24 and S23 models.
The screenshots shared by Tarun Vats confirm that One UI 8 is again available for the Galaxy S23 and S24. This is happening first in Samsung’s home soil, South Korea, suggesting that the Android 16-based update will also resume in other affected regions shortly. To recall, One UI 8 debuted on the Galaxy Z Fold 7 and Z Flip in July. It later made its way to other models, starting with the Galaxy S25 series.
Since then, Samsung has temporarily halted the update for various models without acknowledging or giving out a reason. It halted the One UI 8 rollout for the Galaxy S23 last week, after it began rolling out earlier this month.
One UI 8 is now back on track, as it’s rolling out again in the Galaxy S24 and S23 October monthly update. The update weighs around 396MB for the Galaxy S24 and 385MB for the Galaxy S23.
Meanwhile, Samsung’s next big UI upgrade is One UI 8.5, whose beta was originally rumored to start in November. But this is now reportedly not happening, possibly because of Samsung’s change in launch plans for the Galaxy S26 series.
The post Samsung Finally Resumes One UI 8 Rollout for Galaxy S24 & S23 appeared first on Android Headlines.
Samsung’s upcoming big software update, One UI 8.5, is expected to bring some major changes and optimizations. However, things are reportedly not going as smoothly as planned. The company has now reportedly delayed the rollout of its One UI 8.5 beta. The program was earlier rumored to open in late November.
While Samsung has not made any official announcement yet, a fresh leak suggests that the firm has delayed the rollout of its One UI 8.5 beta update. The well-known tipster on X/Twitter, Tarun Vats, who closely follows the company’s software rollout timeline, recently revealed that the One UI 8.5 beta for the Galaxy S25 series has been postponed.
Earlier reports indicated that the beta would begin in the last week of November, but that schedule now appears unlikely. The delay seems to be connected with the major shake-up within the Galaxy S26 series.
According to sources, Samsung has canceled the Galaxy S26 Edge and reinstated the S26 Plus. It has also scrapped its plan to rename the standard S26 as S26 Pro. With the company revising its entire strategy, the internal development timeline has been disrupted. This has indirectly pushed back the One UI 8.5 beta as well.
Since there are no official words on the update yet, it’s unclear how long the firm plans to hold off on the beta program. Historically, the company has delayed the release of its major software versions, such as One UI 8.0 and 8.1. This is to ensure the update’s stability before the stable release.
Anyway, if the One UI 8.5 beta rollout is delayed by more than a few weeks, it could line up with the slightly postponed launch of the Galaxy S26 series. However, depending upon the priorities of the company, the update may be delayed much longer than anticipated.
The post Samsung Galaxy S26 Changes Reportedly Delay One UI 8.5 Beta appeared first on Android Headlines.
Earlier this year, Google announced that a Fitbit Personal Health Coach was coming to eligible devices, such as the Pixel Watch 4, and this week, it’s entering an early preview phase. This brings it one step closer to being fully launched, although it will take a little more time to get there, Google admits. This early preview will serve as a way for users to test the new feature and give some feedback to Google so that it can improve where things need to be improved. “Building this health coach takes time, rigor, and input to make sure it works well for everyone, which is why we’re starting with a preview and asking for your honest feedback,” Google says.
Since this is a preview, Google is quick to point out that everything it has mentioned as part of the preview is “by no means a comprehensive list of everything it can do.” That means users can expect it to do even more than what Google has announced so far. Which, by the way, includes everything from creating workouts on the fly to understanding more about specific health conditions. These don’t even have to be health conditions you have. It can just be something you’re particularly interested in learning more about.
Good news for anyone who wants to try this out: you’ll be able to give the Personal Health Coach a try starting tomorrow, October 28. Google doesn’t mention a specific time, so you may just have to end up keeping an eye on the Fitbit apps on your devices.
Google says you will need an eligible device to check it out, and this includes Pixel Watch and Fitbit devices. You also need to be a Fitbit Premium subscriber, as this will be a Fitbit Premium feature. Once the feature begins rolling out, users will be able to spend about 5 to 10 minutes having a conversation with their AI-powered fitness coach to get the ball rolling. Doing this isn’t mandatory to begin using the preview, as Google notes you can come back to it later, but it does seem to be recommended.
It’s also worth noting that this preview doesn’t have access to everything the current version of the Fitbit app has. A lot of features are missing. This includes menstrual health logging and tracking, body temp logging and tracking, social features like friends and leaderboards, and a host of others.
That being said, this is a preview, and Google confirms that users can swap back and forth. So, it isn’t a one way or another kind of situation. You can have both, just not in one app experience yet.
The post Fitbit's Personal Health Coach enters an early preview this week appeared first on Android Headlines.
Qualcomm has officially entered the AI chip race with the launch of its two new accelerator chips. With this move, the company aims for a major shift from its traditional focus on smartphone and wireless connectivity semiconductors. With the launch of its new AI200 and AI250 chips, the company has positioned itself as a new challenger in the booming data center market, currently dominated by Nvidia and AMD.
According to an official announcement, Qualcomm plans to commercially release its new accelerator chip, the AI200, in 2026. The AI250 is scheduled to launch later in 2027. Both of these chips are designed for large-scale, liquid-cooled server racks. They are capable of powering an entire rack with up to 72 chips acting as one system.
Qualcomm builds its data center chips on the same hexagon neural processing unit (NPU) as its mobile processors. According to the company’s general manager of data center and edge, Durga Malladi, this is a part of a strategic move. She says that “We first proved ourselves in other domains, and then scaled up to the data center level.”
Unlike NVIDIA, whose GPUs are primarily used for training AI models, Qualcomm’s chips focus on inference, running pre-trained models efficiently. The company claims its rack-scale systems will cost less to operate. It is said to consume around 160 kilowatts per rack, roughly similar to Nvidia’s systems.
Malladi further adds in her statement that Qualcomm will offer modular sales. Clients will be able to purchase full racks or individual components. Interestingly, even competitors like Nvidia or AMD could use Qualcomm’s CPUs or other data center parts. The new AI cards are also said to be capable of handling 768GB of memory, surpassing both NVIDIA and AMD in this metric.
The post Qualcomm Challenges Nvidia with In-House AI Accelerator Chips appeared first on Android Headlines.
The post Coinbase Collaborates With Citi to Facilitate Seamless Adoption of Crypto and Stablecoin Payments appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
Coinbase Global Inc. (NASDAQ: COIN) has partnered with Citigroup Inc. (NYSE: C). The strategic partnership between Citigroup and Collaboration will help democratize stablecoin and crypto payments to both retail and institutional clients.
According to Brian Armstrong, CEO of Coinbase, the collaboration with Citi will work on improving stablecoin utility and digital assets adoption. Furthermore, Citi is a top-tier bank with more than 200 million customers from over 160 nations and jurisdictions.
The direct impact of Citi’s collaboration with Coinbase is the enhancement of the mainstream adoption of digital assets, amid the ongoing macro bull market. With both entities serving millions of global users, their partnership will enhance crypto liquidity and demand in the short term.
“This collaboration will combine Coinbase’s years of experience building secure, streamlined, and scalable infrastructure for digital assets with Citi’s global payments network that spans 94 markets and over 300 payment clearing systems. Together we’re working to create innovative payment solutions for institutions operating at scale,” Coinbase noted.
Both entities will be building their collaboration on the notable crypto regulatory clarity, especially in the United States. For instance, Citi users will seamlessly access stablecoin payments via Coinbase in a regulated manner through the GENIUS Act.
Following the announcement, COIN shares edged 5% higher on Monday, October 27, to trade about $366 at press time. Investors have gained more confidence in the long-term growth of COIN, since the exchange has an edge over its competitors.
Notably, the COIN stock price in the weekly timeframe has signaled a potential bullish breakout towards market discovery. Meanwhile, Citi’s stock price gained 2% on Monday to trade at about $100.81 at press time.
Amazon is preparing for one of its biggest corporate shake-ups in years. The tech giant is planning to cut as many as 30,000 corporate jobs starting Tuesday, according to three people familiar with the matter who spoke with Reuters. The […]
The post Amazon to lay off 30,000 corporate employees in largest job cut since 2022, reports first appeared on Tech Startups.
Amazon is betting big on automation. Internal documents reviewed by The New York Times reveal plans to automate 75% of its warehouse operations using advanced robotics — a move that could eliminate the need for more than 600,000 new hires […]
The post Amazon plans to replace 600,000 jobs with robots and AI first appeared on Tech Startups.
The line between traditional banking and digital assets is disappearing fast. Pave Bank, a fully licensed commercial bank built for this new era of programmable finance, has raised $39 million in fresh funding led by Accel, with participation from Tether […]
The post Pave Bank raises $39M in funding led by Accel to bridge traditional finance with regulated digital assets first appeared on Tech Startups.
IBM is doubling down on blockchain. The tech giant announced on Monday the launch of Digital Asset Haven, a new platform built to help banks, governments, and corporations securely build and scale their digital asset operations. It’s a move that […]
The post IBM launches Digital Asset Haven, a new blockchain platform for financial institutions and governments first appeared on Tech Startups.
Nvidia is quietly gearing up for a new frontier—autonomous mobility. According to a report from Chinese publication 36Kr, the chipmaker is developing an internal robotaxi project that could put it in direct competition with Tesla and Waymo. The plan, shared in […]
The post Nvidia is reportedly building a $3B robotaxi fleet to challenge Tesla and Waymo first appeared on Tech Startups.
Top 10 Tech News Stories Today — Your quick briefing on the Latest Technology News, Startup Trends, and Innovation shaping the future. It’s Monday, October 27, 2025, and we’re back with the Top 10 Technology News Stories for the Day. […]
The post Top Tech News Today, October 27, 2025 first appeared on Tech Startups.
Saudi state-owned AI startup Humain is building a full-stack AI ecosystem — from data centers and cloud infrastructure to advanced AI models and a new voice-controlled operating system called “Humain 1.” Saudi Arabia’s ambitious push into artificial intelligence just took […]
The post Saudi AI startup Humain to launch new voice-controlled AI operating system first appeared on Tech Startups.
Halo: Campaign Evolved marked the official confirmation of something that felt like it would never happen just a short few years ago, with Halo officially coming to PlayStation. Following that announcement, GameStop, the retailer that was initially known for selling physical video games that's now more known for turning into a glorified Pop Funko and merch store called the 'Console Wars' over. Of all entities, the White House, which would normally have more important things to post about, responded with an AI-generated image of President Trump in Spartan armor with the caption "Power to the players." GameStop's original post comes […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/gamestop-console-wars-over-halo-on-ps-white-house-trump-ai-spartan-armor/
Gearbox founder Randy Pitchford was recently interviewed by Shacknews alongside a few other colleagues to discuss the making of Borderlands 4, the studio's latest game, which was released on September 12. The video runs for 73 minutes, and right toward the end, Pitchford goes into exactly what is needed to create such a big videogame like Borderlands 4. Interestingly, he then adds that the gaming industry as a whole is just getting started and 'figuring out' videogames, which haven't yet received their 'Citizen Kane' moment yet. To make a game like Borderlands 4 takes a big investment. It's a massive, […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/borderlands-boss-gaming-hasnt-even-produced-single-masterpiece-yet/
Qualcomm has announced its latest AI chips, which are designed to scale up to a purpose-built rack-level AI inference solution, but interestingly, they employ mobile memory onboard. Qualcomm's New AI Chips Take a 'Daring' Pivot Away From HBM To Target Efficient Inferencing Workloads Qualcomm has come a long way from being a mobile-focused firm, and in recent years, the San Diego chipmaker has expanded into new segments, including consumer computing and AI infrastructure. Now, the firm has announced its newest AI200 and AI250 chip solutions, which are reportedly designed for rack-scale configurations. This not only marks the entry of a […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/qualcomm-new-ai-rack-scale-solution-actually-uses-lpddr-mobile-memory-onboard/
As the saying attributed to P.T. Barnum goes, "There is no such thing as bad publicity." German company Böcker certainly subscribes to the view after turning a press photo of one of its ladders used in the daring Louvre Museum heist into a viral marketing campaign.
Leica photographers are finally getting support for tethering in Lightroom Classic. With version 15.0, the SL3 and Q3 camera systems are natively supported, meaning that no additional plugins are necessary for tethering to work.
Sigma's full-frame Foveon image sensor project has faced significant challenges, but the company's CEO says it is still working on Foveon image sensor development.
House hunters have begun to notice that real estate listings increasingly contain AI images and are calling them misleading.
Xiaomi has already launched the 17, 17 Pro, and 17 Pro Max, but of course there's still one member missing from its latest flagship family - the 17 Ultra. It's unclear exactly when this phone will be made official, but for reference note that the 15 Ultra (Xiaomi skipped the number 16 in order to match Apple's product naming scheme) got official this February. Today some more details about the Xiaomi 17 Ultra's cameras have been outed in China. Xiaomi 15 Ultra According to Digital Chat Station on Weibo, the 17 Ultra will come with a new 50 MP main camera that supports better...
Samsung is seeding a new update for the Galaxy Buds3 series. The flagship earbuds were launched in July last year alongside the Galaxy Z Fold6 and Galaxy Z Flip6. The Galaxy Buds3 and Buds3 Pro are receiving a firmware update. At the moment, the update is only available for users in South Korea. However, it is expected to be rolled out to users in other regions soon. According to screenshots shared by users on Samsung's community forum, the update improves stability and fixes bugs. Unfortunately, the changelog doesn’t detail the fixes or improvements. The Galaxy Buds3 update is...
Oppo announced the Find X9 and Find X9 Pro in China earlier this month, and now it's almost ready to take them to global markets as well. The company is live-streaming the global unveiling on YouTube, and you can find the stream embedded below. The event starts on October 28 at 3 PM GMT / UK time, 4 PM in Germany and France, 8:30 PM in India, 8 AM in California, and 11 AM in New York. The duo's European pricing surfaced last week, with the X9 allegedly starting at €999 and the Pro model going for €1,299. In China, the Find X9 has a 6.59-inch AMOLED screen with 120Hz refresh rate...
DJI’s compact camera line looks set for a refresh. Nearly two years after the Osmo Pocket 3 made its debut, leaked images of what’s believed to be the Osmo Pocket 4 have surfaced online. The upcoming model adds new physical controls and slight tweaks to its overall shape and size.
A side-by-side comparison shot of the Osmo Pocket 3 and Pocket 4’s chassis has emerged online, showing the Pocket 4 stands slightly taller and narrower than the Pocket 3. Still, the redesign keeps that signature pocketable feel. This leak lines up with earlier footage from Barcelona, where what looked like a Pocket 4 prototype was spotted filming in public.
The most visible change is a new set of hardware buttons placed below the rotatable touchscreen, replacing the “Osmo” logo found on the Pocket 3. These could serve as shortcuts for recording, focus, or gimbal controls—making one-handed shooting much easier. Combined with reports that production is already underway, the leak suggests a launch could happen before early 2026.
The Osmo Pocket 3 set a high bar back in 2023 with its 1-inch CMOS sensor, 4K/120fps recording, and 2-inch rotatable OLED screen, though its 179g weight and short battery life left room for improvement. Previous rumors point to the Pocket 4 possibly adding a dual-camera setup. If true, it could mean a telephoto or depth camera for added versatility alongside the 1″ main camera.
DJI seems ready to respond with a more ergonomic, creator-friendly design. Whether it lands before the holidays or in early 2026, the Osmo Pocket 4 looks poised to be a small but meaningful upgrade for handheld storytellers everywhere.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
(Source)
The post DJI Osmo Pocket 4 chassis leak hints at refreshed dimensions appeared first on Gizmochina.
It’s the season of flagship Android wars in China. Almost every major brand has unveiled a new device in the last month or so, each equipped with the latest processors, top-tier displays, and, thankfully, bigger batteries.
The Vivo X300 and Xiaomi 17 are two such contenders. On paper, both devices come loaded with high-end hardware, eye-catching designs, and the latest chips from MediaTek and Qualcomm.
But peel back the specs and the differences start to show. So let’s break down what really sets them apart.
Both the Vivo X300 and Xiaomi 17 share similar dimensions. It measures around 150mm tall and weighs just under 200 grams. They’re slim, premium slabs that feel engineered to impress.
Vivo’s design features glass on both sides, paired with an aluminum alloy frame, while Xiaomi opts for Dragon Crystal Glass on the front, complemented by an aluminum frame.
Both phones are IP68 rated, meaning they can withstand accidental water drops and dusty environments. However, Vivo takes it a step further with an IP69 rating, enabling it to withstand high-pressure water jets. That’s rare even among flagships, though it’s unlikely to make a meaningful difference in real-life use.
Both phones use LTPO AMOLED panels with 120Hz refresh rates and 2160Hz PWM dimming, making them easier on the eyes at low brightness. Vivo’s display measures 6.31 inches, while Xiaomi’s is roughly the same at 6.3 inches.
Brightness is where Vivo pulls ahead. The X300 peaks at a massive 4,500 nits, while Xiaomi reaches up to 3,500 nits. Both are extremely bright and should deliver great outdoor visibility, regardless of the numbers.
In terms of color, both screens support HDR10+, HDR Vivid, and advanced tone mapping. Xiaomi adds Dolby Vision to the mix, giving it an edge when watching supported content on Netflix or YouTube.
Resolution-wise, both hover in the 1220–1260p range, offering crisp text and smooth visuals.
The two phones take very different approaches to performance. The X300 runs MediaTek’s Dimensity 9500, a 3nm chip with ARM C1 cores clocked up to 4.21GHz.
Xiaomi, on the other hand, ships with Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5, also built on a 3nm process and equipped with custom Oryon V3 cores running up to 4.6GHz.
On paper, Snapdragon’s architecture has the upper hand. It uses two 4.6GHz Oryon V3 Phoenix L cores and six 3.62GHz Phoenix M cores, paired with an Adreno 840 GPU—delivering top-tier gaming and raw compute performance. The Dimensity 9500’s 4.21GHz C1-Ultra and 3.5GHz C1-Premium cores aren’t far behind, and MediaTek’s Arm G1-Ultra GPU is also powerful.
In real-world use, both phones should feel incredibly fast. Scrolling, multitasking, and gaming happen without hesitation. Vivo’s OriginOS 6 (based on Android 16) feels smooth and responsive, while Xiaomi’s HyperOS 3 offers deep customization and similarly slick performance.
This is where things get interesting. The Vivo X300 features a bold 200MP main sensor with OIS, a 50MP periscope telephoto, and a 50MP ultrawide. The system is tuned by Zeiss and includes Zeiss T* lens coating, laser autofocus, and even 3D LUT import for pro-grade color work.
The Xiaomi 17, meanwhile, sticks to a more traditional 50MP triple setup—50MP main, 50MP telephoto (2.6x optical), and 50MP ultrawide—with Leica-co-engineered optics.
Both phones offer flagship camera performance, and the final quality will come down to ISP tuning and post-processing. However, Vivo holds a clear advantage in flexibility, thanks to support for external photography accessories, including a telephoto extender that can deliver crisp shots at up to 200mm.
On the front, both devices use 50MP selfie cameras with 4K video support, but Xiaomi goes further with HDR10+ video capture and gyro-EIS.
Battery life is where Xiaomi dominates. The Xiaomi 17 packs a huge 7,000mAh cell along with 100W wired, 50W wireless, and 22.5W reverse wireless charging.
Vivo’s 6,040mAh battery with 90W wired and 40W wireless charging still offers strong endurance, easily lasting a day and a half, but Xiaomi simply goes farther. The difference between 6,040mAh and 7,000mAh will be noticeable, especially for heavy users.
Both phones skip the headphone jack but feature stereo speakers. Xiaomi’s setup is tuned for Dolby Atmos and Snapdragon Sound, with Hi-Res 24-bit/192kHz playback. Vivo’s speakers are clean, but lack Dolby branding.
Connectivity is top-tier on both devices, including Wi-Fi 7, Bluetooth 5.4, NFC, infrared, and multi-band GPS. Vivo adds eSIM support internationally, which Xiaomi lacks, while Xiaomi includes DisplayPort output over USB-C, allowing it to connect directly to a monitor.
The Vivo X300 and Xiaomi 17 show how differently two brands can approach the same idea: a compact 2025 flagship.
The Vivo X300 stands out with its brighter display, Zeiss-tuned 200MP camera, and cleaner design. It’s ideal for users who prioritize photography and aesthetics.
The Xiaomi 17 shines with its massive battery, Leica tuning, Snapdragon performance, and superior audio. It’s the better fit for power users who value endurance and versatility.
There’s no outright winner—just two flagships excelling in their own way.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
The post Vivo X300 vs Xiaomi 17: Two flagships head-to-head appeared first on Gizmochina.
Motorola is stirring excitement for its next mid-range entry, the Edge 70. This phone blends a super-slim profile with surprisingly generous launch deals. With the official reveal set for November 5, the company has already started teasing specs that make this phone look like an appealing option for casual users who prioritize design and in-hand experience.
The Edge 70 packs a 4,800mAh silicon-carbon battery—larger than the iPhone Air’s 3,149mAh and even the Galaxy S25 Edge’s 3.900mAh—yet the chassis stays impressively thin at 5.99mm. Charging speeds are solid too, with 68W wired and 15W wireless support, promising up to two days of battery life.
Under the hood, Motorola is opting for Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 7 Gen 4, paired with 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM and 512GB of UFS 3.1 storage.
Leaked Geekbench 6 CPU scores suggest performance on par with the MediaTek Dimensity 8350 of the Edge 60 Pro. The display sounds premium as well: a 6.7-inch 1.5K pOLED panel with 120Hz refresh, 4,500 nits peak brightness, and Gorilla Glass 7i protection. The camera setup features 50MP main and ultrawide lenses on the back, paired with a 50MP selfie shooter.
Where things really heat up is pricing. While Motorola hasn’t confirmed global prices yet, the Edge 70—sold in China as the X70 Air—appears to be positioned as an affordable rival to Apple’s iPhone Air and Samsung’s Galaxy S25 Edge. In China, it’s available in two variants: 12GB + 256GB for 2,599 yuan (~$365) and 12GB + 512GB for 2,899 yuan (~$410).
For international buyers, Motorola appears to be stacking generous launch offers that could amount to over €550 (~$640) in savings through early-bird vouchers and regional promos. If those carry over to the final pricing, the expected €699 (~$760) tag could dip into Pixel 9a territory—a seriously competitive spot for what’s shaping up to be a near-flagship phone.
The Edge 70 will debut in Europe first, with India and the US expected to follow by December.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
(Source: Motorola | Geekbench)
The post Motorola Edge 70 appears on Geekbench, launch offers revealed — matches Edge 60 Pro in performance appeared first on Gizmochina.
Baseus has officially launched a new 100W power bank in China. The product is now available on JD.com with a retail price of 199 yuan ($28). It features a 20,000mAh battery, a 3C + 1A output layout, and built-in dual USB-C charging cables that eliminate the need to carry separate cables.
The power bank supports 100W fast charging and is designed to work with a wide range of devices, including smartphones, tablets, laptops, handheld consoles, and cameras. According to Baseus, it can charge a 13-inch MacBook Air up to 36% in just 30 minutes. It also supports up to 65W input for self-charging and can fully recharge itself in approximately 2.5 hours.
Baseus has included support for several charging protocols such as PD, PPS, UFCS, QC, FCP, AFC, and SCP. The power bank is compatible with major brands, including Apple, Xiaomi, Huawei, Oppo, Vivo, and Samsung. It delivers up to 100W via its USB-C port and the USB-C1 cable, 50W via the USB-C2 cable, and 22.5W via the USB-A port. It can charge Xiaomi phones at 55W and iPhones at up to 45W.
The device features an ergonomic and compact design that is 24% smaller and 40% thinner than typical 20,000mAh power banks. It weighs around 420 grams and measures 152.1 × 66 × 26.5mm. The surface uses a smooth, skin-friendly coating, and the body includes soft R-shaped edges for improved grip. The built-in charging cables are made from dual-weave high-density braiding and interlock to form a convenient carrying loop.
Internally, the power bank houses four high-density 5000mAh cells with a total energy rating of 73Wh. It uses a graphene-based dual heat dissipation system to prevent overheating. It also comes with an onboard AI temperature control chip that monitors thermal conditions 36,000 times per hour to ensure stable performance.
Baseus has added nine layers of protection, covering overvoltage, overcurrent, short circuit, temperature, and electromagnetic interference. The product is available in Starry Blue, Moonlight Beige, and Interstellar Black color options.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories!
The post Baseus launches 100W power bank with 20,000mAh capacity & dual built-in cables appeared first on Gizmochina.
OnePlus’ latest launch event wasn’t just about phones. Alongside the OnePlus 15 and Ace 6, the company also unveiled the OnePlus Pad 2 for the Chinese market.
Before we get into the details, there’s one thing to clear up. OnePlus’ tablet naming scheme differs internationally and in the mainland.
Globally, the company has already launched the OnePlus Pad 3 with the Snapdragon 8 Elite chip. It’s the successor to 2024’s Pad 2 that comes with Snapdragon 8 Gen 3.
This means the China branding is technically a generation behind. Still, the Pad 2’s hardware lines up with what you’d expect from a premium 2025 tablet.
The OnePlus Pad 2 features a 12.1-inch 3K display (3000 × 2120) with a 144Hz dynamic refresh rate, a 540Hz touch sampling rate, and 900 nits of peak brightness. OnePlus claims it can push 144fps in select mobile titles.
Powering the device is the MediaTek Dimensity 9400+, a flagship-tier chip with an AnTuTu score of over 3.05 million, paired with an ultra-large vapor-cooling system covering more than 46,000mm².
Despite the horsepower, the tablet remains slim at 5.99mm and weighs just 579 grams.
On the software side, it runs ColorOS 16, which includes a few additions for gamers and students alike. A new “Game Camera” feature lets users capture ultra-clear Live Photo screenshots or replay up to 30 seconds of gameplay.
For note-takers, the OS brings handwriting beautification and intelligent content extraction tools to improve the experience during online classes. The Pad 2 also supports a panoramic virtual screen mode that can open three apps side-by-side, along with two additional floating windows.
Inside, there’s a 10,420mAh battery with 67W SuperVOOC charging, and OnePlus claims the system is optimized for “five years of lasting smoothness.” The tablet also supports PC-level WPS Office, multi-window workflows, and even custom font installations.
The OnePlus Pad 2 starts at 2,799 yuan (≈ $380) for the 8GB + 256GB model, with 12GB + 256GB and 16GB + 512GB variants priced at 3,099 yuan and 3,599 yuan, respectively.
Open sales begin on October 30, and early buyers will receive a one-year screen protection plan worth 249 yuan at no additional cost. Meanwhile, students can claim a free stylus worth 399 yuan during the pre-sale period.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories!
The post OnePlus Pad 2 goes official with Dimensity 9400+, 3K 144Hz display, and 10,400mAh battery appeared first on Gizmochina.
As smartphone innovation hits new heights, the battle between Oppo Find X9 Pro and Honor Magic8 Pro captures the essence of next-gen flagship competition. Both models redefine performance, camera prowess, and design finesse in 2025’s premium segment. This comparison matters because it highlights how two leading brands interpret “ultimate innovation” differently, balancing endurance, photography, and speed to meet the demands of modern power users seeking the perfect all-rounder.
Both the Oppo Find X9 Pro and Honor Magic8 Pro deliver premium craftsmanship, but their design philosophies differ subtly. Oppo leans toward a sleek, minimalist look with a Gorilla Glass build and aluminum frame, offering a smooth, unified aesthetic. The Honor Magic8 Pro, meanwhile, opts for Giant Rhino Glass protection with a slightly more robust, futuristic edge that aligns with its flagship identity. Both feature IP68/IP69 ratings, ensuring resistance to dust, immersion, and even high-pressure water jets, ideal for rugged or outdoor users.
In practical terms, the Find X9 Pro feels slightly denser and solid in the hand, while the Magic8 Pro balances its weight more efficiently, offering better grip comfort during prolonged use. The overall ergonomics favor the Honor slightly due to its narrower frame, though Oppo’s precision finish gives it a more luxurious touch.
Verdict: The Oppo Find X9 Pro wins on aesthetic elegance and seamless finish, whereas the Honor Magic8 Pro offers better hand-feel and durability. For users valuing style and refinement, Oppo stands out; for those prioritizing practicality and toughness, Honor is more compelling.
The Oppo Find X9 Pro’s LTPO AMOLED panel boasts 1B colors, Dolby Vision, HDR10+, and a 3600-nit peak brightness, more than sufficient for outdoor visibility and vibrant contrast. In contrast, the Honor Magic8 Pro raises the bar with a 4320Hz PWM dimming frequency, HDR Vivid, and a staggering 6000-nit peak brightness, making it one of the brightest smartphone displays available.
Color reproduction is rich on both, though Honor’s calibration tends toward natural, slightly warmer tones, while Oppo delivers deeper blacks and cinematic contrast ideal for HDR streaming. Motion handling is equally fluid at 120Hz, but the Magic8 Pro’s ultra-high PWM ensures superior eye comfort during long use, minimizing flicker fatigue.
Verdict: The Honor Magic8 Pro clearly leads in display brightness and visual comfort, making it the better pick for media consumption and outdoor use. However, Oppo’s color depth and Dolby Vision integration give it a more refined multimedia experience. Users prioritizing brightness and longevity will appreciate Honor’s edge.
The Oppo Find X9 Pro runs on MediaTek’s Dimensity 9500, a 3nm powerhouse, while the Honor Magic8 Pro wields the latest Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5, one of Qualcomm’s most powerful chips to date. The Snapdragon offers better thermal control and higher sustained performance, especially for gaming, AI tasks, and multitasking.
While Oppo’s C1 custom cores deliver impressive speeds and stability, the Honor Magic8 Pro’s Oryon cores demonstrate superior efficiency and raw output in benchmark comparisons. GPU performance also tilts toward Honor’s Adreno 840, offering smoother rendering in demanding 3D environments. Both pair with fast UFS 4.0/4.1 storage and up to 16GB RAM, ensuring fluid multitasking.
Verdict: The Honor Magic8 Pro takes the lead with its Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5, which provides more consistent peak performance and better optimization across apps and games. The Oppo Find X9 Pro, though slightly behind, remains highly capable and thermally efficient, making it a more battery-friendly performer.
Battery life is a key differentiator here. Oppo’s 7500mAh battery provides impressive endurance with balanced 80W wired and 50W wireless charging, plus 10W reverse wireless support. Honor counters with a 7200mAh global variant (6270mAh in Europe), but compensates with faster 120W wired and 80W wireless charging.
In real-world use, Oppo offers slightly longer runtime due to its power-efficient chipset and larger capacity, while Honor’s faster charging system can restore power in nearly half the time. The inclusion of reverse wired and high-power wireless charging options makes Honor a more versatile charging hub for other devices.
Verdict: Oppo wins in longevity and energy optimization, while Honor dominates in speed and convenience. For heavy users needing quick top-ups, the Magic8 Pro’s 120W system is unmatched; for endurance-focused users, the Find X9 Pro’s 7500mAh cell remains superior.
Both flagships bring exceptional camera setups, but their imaging philosophies diverge. Oppo’s collaboration with Hasselblad delivers natural color science and precise dynamic range tuning, supported by a 50MP wide, 200MP periscope, and 50MP ultrawide trio. Honor’s setup mirrors this but with slightly larger sensors, particularly its 200MP periscope and 50MP ultrawide, optimized for low-light clarity and fine detail.
Honor’s 3.7x optical zoom offers sharper telephoto results, while Oppo’s color calibration provides a more balanced, true-to-life tone, particularly in daylight scenes. In the video, both offer 4K up to 120fps with 10-bit HDR and OIS, but Oppo’s Dolby Vision recording gives it a cinematic advantage.
Verdict: Honor edges ahead for zoom and low-light performance, but Oppo counters with superior color depth and professional-grade color science. For photography enthusiasts, Honor’s sensor array offers more versatility, while content creators will prefer Oppo’s cinematic HDR video output.
Oppo’s 50MP front camera produces sharp, natural portraits, enhanced by its precise color calibration and gyro-EIS for steady 4K video. Honor’s 50MP sensor is equally capable but gains an edge through its additional TOF 3D sensor, enhancing facial depth, biometric accuracy, and background separation in portrait shots.
Honor’s dual-sensor setup delivers better face mapping for secure Face ID and more professional bokeh effects, while Oppo focuses on clarity and dynamic range, particularly under mixed lighting.
Verdict: The Honor Magic8 Pro secures the win with its dual-sensor system and Face ID capabilities, giving it more functionality and accuracy. Oppo’s single-lens system still excels in realism and sharpness, ideal for those who value natural tones over AI processing.
The Oppo Find X9 Pro is priced around $800, while the Honor Magic8 Pro costs approximately $850. Given the minor $50 difference, both deliver flagship-grade specifications, but Honor offers a longer software promise, 7 major Android upgrades versus Oppo’s 5.
Honor’s inclusion of faster charging, higher peak brightness, and the more powerful Snapdragon chip justifies the slight premium. However, Oppo delivers greater value through its larger battery, refined design, and Hasselblad-backed camera tuning.
Verdict: For future-proofing and raw power, Honor’s extra investment feels warranted. For balanced value and endurance, Oppo remains the smarter buy for those seeking flagship performance without the highest price tag.
Both phones push flagship innovation, but in different ways. The Oppo Find X9 Pro stands out with Hasselblad color tuning, ultrasonic fingerprint technology, and satellite connectivity (exclusive to its 1TB variant). The Honor Magic8 Pro differentiates itself with Face ID, emergency SOS satellite calls, 6000-nit display brightness, and industry-leading 120W charging.
Each device caters to a different flagship philosophy. Oppo emphasizes design finesse, endurance, and balanced performance, while Honor targets users wanting cutting-edge display tech and superior connectivity.
Verdict: The Honor Magic8 Pro emerges as the more future-forward device with its extended software support and superior hardware integration. However, the Oppo Find X9 Pro offers a more cohesive, refined flagship experience, appealing to users seeking luxury, endurance, and timeless reliability.
Read More:
The post Oppo Find X9 Pro vs Honor Magic8 Pro: One Phone Dominates in Speed, Camera, and Design appeared first on Gizmochina.
The OnePlus 15 has barely launched in China, but it’s already finding its way into the hands of eager international buyers. Thanks to import retailers like Giztop, the phone is available globally ahead of its official release — packing Qualcomm’s new Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chip and flagship hardware at a surprisingly aggressive price.
Launched in China on October 27, the OnePlus 15 is the company’s first phone powered by Qualcomm’s 3nm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor. In China, pricing starts at CNY 3,999 (~$561) for the 12GB/256GB variant and goes up to CNY 5,399 (~$758) for 16GB/1TB. Importers like Giztop currently list it at the following prices:
Buyers can choose between Black, Purple, and Titanium color options.
Early import units run ColorOS 16 (Android 16-based) with multi-language support, but also come with pre-installed regional apps and reportedly no official warranty — meaning any issues rely on seller policies.
The specs are undeniably premium: a 6.78-inch, 1.5K LTPO AMOLED display with 165Hz refresh rate. Thanks to the 8 Elite Gen 5, it can even hit 165fps in supported games, including Call of Duty Mobile, League of Legends Mobile, and Naruto Mobile. There’s a massive 7,300mAh battery this year, up from 6000 mAh of the OnePlus 13.
The phone packs a 7,300mAh silicon-carbon battery with 120W wired and 50W wireless charging, along with a 50MP triple-camera setup that includes a 3.5x periscope telephoto lens. Interested readers can check out our launch coverage for a full breakdown of features.
And for those willing to wait for the global version with localized software and warranty, November 13 seems to be the date to mark.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
(Source: Giztop)
The post OnePlus 15 already available to users globally via import appeared first on Gizmochina.
OnePlus has launched the Ace 6 in China, targeting gamers with powerful performance, vibrant visuals, and smart power management. The device sits below the OnePlus 15 in the lineup and is expected to launch globally as the OnePlus 15R.
The OnePlus Ace 6 has a 6.83-inch flat OLED display with a 2800×1272 resolution and 450ppi density. It supports adaptive refresh rates from 60Hz to 165Hz, 10-bit color, full DCI-P3 coverage, and up to 1,800 nits peak brightness.
The screen includes TÜV Rheinland Intelligent Eye Protection 5.0, low-flicker PWM dimming, and DC-like dimming above 70 nits. It also offers AI blink reminders, adaptive color temperature, sunlight mode for outdoor visibility, and a night reading mode for comfort in low light.
Under the hood, the device runs on the Snapdragon 8 Elite chip built on a 3nm process, featuring an octa-core CPU and Adreno 830 GPU clocked at 1.1GHz. It integrates a WindChaser Gaming Engine that synchronizes CPU, GPU, and NPU to maintain 165fps performance in games.
The phone also includes an eSports Triple-Chip setup with a dedicated performance chip, G2 network chip, and Lingxi touch chip to cut latency and stabilize frames. It offers up to 16GB LPDDR5X RAM and 1TB UFS 4.1 storage.
The device runs ColorOS 16 based on Android 16, offering new AI-based features such as AI Flash Notes, cross-device collaboration with iPhones and Macs, and real-time multi-screen connectivity.
Talking about optics, the rear camera setup includes a 50MP Sony IMX906 main sensor with OIS and EIS and an 8MP ultra-wide camera. It supports 4K video recording at up to 120fps. The front camera features a 16MP sensor with support for 1080p video at 30fps.
The phone packs a dual-cell 7,800mAh battery that supports 120W SuperVOOC charging. OnePlus claims the phone charges to 50% in 16 minutes and fully charges in 43 minutes. The device includes a bypass charging feature to reduce heat during gaming and supports multiple fast-charging standards such as UFCS, PPS, PD, and QC.
The OnePlus Ace 6 offers IP66, IP68, and IP69K water and dust resistance. It features an under-display ultrasonic fingerprint sensor, an X-axis haptic motor, dual stereo speakers with OReality Audio effects, and NFC. For connectivity, it includes dual-SIM 5G, Wi-Fi 7, and Bluetooth 5.4 with LHDC 5.0.
The OnePlus Ace 6 is available in Quick Silver, Racing Black, and Flash White. Pricing in China is as follows:
The phone is currently on sale in China, with a global launch expected in the near future.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories!
The post OnePlus Ace 6 launched with Snapdragon 8 Elite, 165Hz display & 7,800mAh battery appeared first on Gizmochina.
OnePlus has officially unveiled the OnePlus 15 in China, featuring Android’s best chip, a 165Hz screen, and a big battery. It’s also the first OnePlus phone in years to move past the Hasselblad camera partnership. Instead, the company is introducing its own LUMO Imaging technology.
The OnePlus 15 is a spec-heavy device in most areas, but the display is clearly the star of the show. At the launch event, OnePlus spent most of its time talking about the screen — and it’s easy to see why.
OnePlus claims the 15 is the first phone in the world with a 165Hz refresh rate. To be specific, 165Hz with 1.5K resolution. And the claims are that it improves response time by 10 milliseconds and display speed by 27%.
The company is leaning into gaming to make full use of this ultra-high refresh rate. The screen supports native 165fps gameplay for popular esports titles like Call of Duty Mobile, League of Legends Mobile, and Naruto Mobile, while it is also compatible with 144Hz and 120Hz modes.
The display itself is the third-generation “Oriental Screen ” from BOE built on OnePlus’ self-developed production line. OnePlus says its display metrics surpass DisplayMate A++ standards, with hardware-level low blue light, a 1-nit true dark mode, and industry-low flicker (SVM < 0.12) for improved eye comfort. It’s also the first display to receive the new “Little Gold Label” eye-protection certification in China.
The OnePlus 15 runs on Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chipset. According to OnePlus, the SoC delivers 20% higher CPU performance, 35% lower CPU power draw, and 23% better GPU performance, all while consuming 20% less energy.
To make use of that power, OnePlus introduced what it calls a “Fengchi Gaming Core (in Chinese),” a system-level gaming optimization engine that enables sustained 165fps gameplay. The company also says it’s the first Android phone with touch-display synchronization for improved touch accuracy and consistency during long gaming sessions.
Networking performance also gets a boost from the new G2 esports network chip, which reduces latency by up to 65%, speeds up game updates by 71%, and improves video upload speeds by 42% under network congestion.
Of course, this level of performance generates heat. To manage that, the OnePlus 15 uses a “Glacier Cooling System” featuring an ultra-thin steel vapor chamber that increases liquid cooling space by 43% and doubles capillary water absorption efficiency. It also incorporates aerospace-grade supercritical aerogel to keep the phone cool to the touch.
Powering everything is a 7,300mAh battery with 120W wired and 50W wireless charging. OnePlus says a 5-minute charge gives up to 6 hours of video playback, while 13 minutes can refill 5,000mAh.
In real-world testing, the company claims the OnePlus 15 can run large FPS games at 165fps for up to 7.6 hours, stream short videos for 19 hours, or handle navigation for 12 hours straight.
The OnePlus 15 borrows a page from console gaming as it has a gyroscope of the same specifications used in the PS5 controller. Its 200Hz sampling rate improves aiming accuracy by 77% and cuts latency by 11%, claims OnePlus.
For imaging, the OnePlus 15 debuts the LUMO Imaging System, pairing a 50MP Sony sensor with OIS, a 50MP ultrawide, and a 3.5x optical periscope telephoto lens of the same megapixel count. The camera supports 4K 120fps Dolby video recording. There is a 32MP sensor on the front for selfies.
On the software side, it ships with ColorOS 16, offering AI tools such as automatic video summaries, AI mind mapping, and quick bill recording. The phone also supports multi-device mirroring across Mac, iPhone, smartwatch, and PC. Other features include an IP69K rating, USB 3.2 Gen 1, and dual stereo speakers.
The OnePlus 15 starts at 3,999 yuan (around $560) in China and is set to go on sale beginning on October 28.
Here’s the full pricing breakdown:
The phone comes in Mist Purple, Sand Storm, and Absolute Black.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.
The post OnePlus 15 launches with 165Hz display and Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 appeared first on Gizmochina.
Xiaomi has added the Portable Photo Printer Pro to its global website. The compact printer is designed to bring professional-quality photo printing to everyday users.
The printer uses professional dye-sublimation printing technology to produce sharp, high-definition photos. It supports a 313 dpi resolution, a wide 16.7 million colour gamut, and 256 levels of greyscale, ensuring smooth colour transitions and realistic details. Each print captures accurate tones and true-to-life clarity.
Each photo is automatically laminated during printing, protecting it from moisture, fingerprints, and fading. Xiaomi says this feature keeps prints bright and clear over time, helping preserve memories for years. The Portable Photo Printer Pro is small enough to fit in one hand (measures 86.8 x 142.5 millimeters and 26.8 millimeters thick) and can easily be carried in a backpack or jacket pocket.
The printer connects directly to smartphones through Bluetooth using the Xiaomi Home app. It also supports multi-user connections for up to three users, allowing friends and family to print from their own phones without additional setup.
Users can print live photos and AR photos that include short videos (up to 15 seconds) or audio clips (up to 60 seconds). You can also add borders, dates, and watermarks, or use photo templates for collages, stickers, and creative layouts. The Portable Photo Printer Pro has an inbuilt 880 mAh battery.
The Xiaomi Portable Photo Printer Pro is currently available in the UK for £109.99 and in Europe for €129.99. It is expected to roll out to other regions soon, depending on local distribution channels.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
(via: Notebookcheck)
The post Xiaomi Brings Portable Photo Printer Pro to Global Market Delivering True-to-Life Prints in Seconds appeared first on Gizmochina.
Thinking about giving your creativity a new spark this Halloween? Whether you’re crafting spooky decor, engraving personalized gifts, or looking for the ultimate maker’s treat, a Creality Falcon Laser Engraver could be the best gift for yourself or a loved one. This season of creativity and mischief is the perfect time to bring ideas to life with precision and style.
But with so many models to choose from, it’s natural to wonder, which Falcon should you buy? Should you start small or go all-in with a professional-grade engraver? This Creality Falcon Buyer’s Guide breaks down different models, from the beginner-friendly Falcon A1 to the smart and powerful A1 Pro, and the industrial Falcon2 Pro, helping you find your perfect creative match and grab the best festive discounts.
Before you buy, think about how you’ll use your engraver.
Your answers will decide whether you should start with an entry-level Falcon A1, step up to the A1 Pro, or go all in with the Falcon2 Pro.
If you’re new to laser engraving, the Falcon A1 (10W) is a fantastic place to start. It’s pre-assembled, compact, and extremely beginner-friendly; just unpack, plug in, and start creating. With its CoreXY motion system, it engraves up to three times faster than similar models while maintaining sharp precision.
The A1’s built-in auto material recognition system detects your material and automatically adjusts settings, so there’s no guesswork. Its smart camera allows live previews, drag-and-drop alignment, and accurate positioning, perfect for first-time creators.
You can engrave on wood, leather, paper, dark acrylic, and fabric, ideal for making gifts, keychains, nameplates, and home décor. Compact enough for desktops and classrooms, it’s safe, easy, and efficient, a truly “plug-and-play” start to your laser journey.
Once you’re ready to go beyond simple crafts, the Falcon A1 Pro (20W) unlocks a new level of speed, detail, and versatility. It doubles the power of the A1, handles thicker materials, and even supports an optional 2W Infrared Laser Head for direct metal engraving.
You can work with over 350 materials, including wood, acrylic, glass, metal, stone, and ceramics. The AI Vision Autofocus system ensures every engraving is sharp to within 0.012 inches, while the HD camera helps trace designs or batch-process multiple pieces at once.
The A1 Pro is also smart. With app control, you can monitor progress, receive safety alerts, and start or stop jobs remotely. Its intuitive touchscreen interface feels like using a smartphone. For creators running small online shops (like on Etsy), this machine delivers professional results without the industrial footprint.
For professionals and small businesses, the Falcon2 Pro Series is the powerhouse of the lineup. Available in 22W, 40W, and 60W, it’s an enclosed, safety-certified, industrial-grade laser engraver and cutter.
Built for high-volume production, the Falcon2 Pro can cut through 22mm wood, 30mm acrylic, and even 0.2mm stainless steel in a single pass. It’s equipped with integrated air assist, adjustable laser beams, and a bonus 1.6W fine-engraving laser module (included with 40W and 60W versions).
The built-in HD camera and auto-positioning system simplify alignment and batch production. With FDA Class 1 certification, multiple safety sensors, and an enclosed design, it’s safe for workshops, studios, and home businesses alike.
Professionals will appreciate its rotary engraving compatibility, enabling 360° engraving on bottles, cups, and cylindrical items. It also supports Creality’s AP1 Air Purifier, keeping your workspace smoke-free and clean.
| Your Goal | Recommended Model | Why It Fits |
| Learn laser engraving & create at home | Falcon A1 (10W) | Affordable, compact, and ready-to-use |
| Grow a small craft or online business | Falcon A1 Pro (20W) | More power, smarter workflow, wider material support |
| Run a professional workshop or studio | Falcon2 Pro (40W/60W) | Industrial-grade precision, enclosed safety, and large-scale production capabilities |
If you’ve been waiting for the right time to buy, now’s your chance:
Falcon A1 Series: Up to 18% OFF
Falcon2 Pro Series: Up to 15% OFF
Sale Period: October 20–30, 202
Laser engraving isn’t just a hobby anymore; it’s a creative gateway. Whether you’re designing Halloween ornaments, making custom gifts for friends, or running a growing craft business, Creality’s Falcon Series gives you the right mix of power, safety, and smart features for every stage of your journey.
The Falcon A1 makes creation effortless for beginners, while the A1 Pro bridges the gap between passion and profit with faster speeds and advanced controls. For professionals and small studios, the Falcon2 Pro delivers unmatched precision, cutting depth, and enclosed safety, built to handle large-scale production with ease.
This Halloween, don’t just buy another gadget, invest in creativity. With up to 18% off the Falcon A1 Series and 15% off the Falcon2 Pro, it’s the perfect moment to treat yourself (or surprise a fellow maker) with a gift that keeps on creating all year long. From spooky engravings to festive crafts, your next masterpiece starts with a Creality Falcon.
The post Trick or Treat Your Creativity: This Halloween, Grab a Creality Laser Engraver at a Discount appeared first on Gizmochina.
OPPO has announced a new phase of collaboration with Google to improve how users experience AI on their phones. The partnership focuses on three main areas: personalized AI features, better AI model deployment, and stronger privacy protection.
Kai Tang, President of Software Engineering at OPPO, said, “Working closely with partners like Google allows us to integrate next-generation AI experiences that are not only powerful but also highly personalized and secure.”
A key part of this collaboration is a new app called Mind Space, launching with the OPPO Find X9 Series, which is scheduled to debut on October 28. Mind Space helps users collect and organize on-screen content, such as text, images, or web pages, using a simple three-finger swipe. All saved content is stored in one place and automatically sorted for easy access.
OPPO has worked with Google to connect Mind Space to Gemini. This integration allows Gemini to access content from Mind Space and help users take action with it. For example, someone planning a trip can save articles and notes in Mind Space and then ask Gemini to create a detailed itinerary. Users can choose exactly what Gemini can see or use from within Mind Space, keeping control over their data.
Gemini will also work with other OPPO apps. Users can chat with Gemini to get help, edit photos using the Nano Banana image editing model, or ask questions through Gemini Live. Gemini Live can respond to what users see on their screen or through their camera, offering visual help such as showing steps to fix a device or organize storage.
All these features are backed by OPPO’s AI Private Computing Cloud, which uses Google Cloud’s confidential computing services. This setup ensures that all AI processing happens in a secure and encrypted environment. Sensitive data remains private and cannot be accessed by any third party, including OPPO.
The full range of these AI features will be available on the OPPO Find X9 Series and ColorOS 16. Buyers of the Find X9 or Find X9 Pro will get a free three-month subscription to Google AI Pro, which includes access to premium Gemini tools and 2TB of cloud storage.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
(Source)
The post OPPO and Google Announce New AI Partnership for Privacy and Personalization on Find X9 Series appeared first on Gizmochina.
Google has redesigned AI Studio with a new AI-powered vibe coding feature that lets anyone go from a simple prompt to a working AI app in minutes. The update removes the need to handle API keys or connect multiple models manually, making app creation faster and easier.
Users can now describe the kind of app they want, and AI Studio automatically connects the right models and APIs using Gemini. For example, you can build tools like Veo to generate videos from a script, or Nano Banana for AI-powered image editing. You can even create a writing app that checks sources through Google Search. The new system removes the need to work with separate APIs, SDKs, or services. Just describe your idea, and AI Studio builds it. If you need a quick idea, the “I’m Feeling Lucky” button can generate a random project for you.
The App Gallery has been redesigned into a visual library of sample projects made with Gemini. You can explore them, view starter code, and remix them into your own. The new Brainstorming Loading Screen shows Gemini-generated ideas while your app is building, giving you more inspiration as you wait.
The new Annotation Mode makes editing simple. You can point to any part of your app and tell Gemini what to change. For example, you can say “make this button blue” or “animate the image from the left,” and it will update right away. You no longer need to dig through lines of code to make small changes.
If you reach your free usage limit, you can add your own API key and continue coding. AI Studio will switch back automatically when your free tier renews.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
(Source)
The post Vibe Coding Arrives in Google AI Studio: Create AI Apps from a Single Prompt appeared first on Gizmochina.
So the rumors were true after all. Nothing has officially confirmed the launch of its next smartphone, the Nothing Phone (3a) Lite, and it’s arriving very soon on October 29, just two days from now.
Unlike most Nothing launches that come with weeks of cryptic teasers and marketing buzz, this one’s happening almost instantly. The first teaser dropped today, and the phone will hit the stage on Wednesday. A bit surprising to come from Nothing.
Phone (3a) Lite. 29.10. 13.00 GMT.
— Nothing (@nothing) October 27, 2025
Light up the everyday. pic.twitter.com/VVNclQ6mEl
Still, it aligns with earlier leaks, which revealed that the device’s first sale could begin on November 4.
The Phone (3a) Lite will reportedly be offered in a single variant with 8GB of RAM and 128GB of storage, and will be available in the brand’s signature black and white color options.
Under the hood, the device is said to be powered by MediaTek’s Dimensity 7300 chipset, featuring four Cortex-A78 cores clocked at 2.5GHz and four Cortex-A55 cores at 2GHz, paired with a Mali-G615 GPU.
The device has appeared on Geekbench running Android 15, but it could launch with Android 16 instead, as Nothing has now begun rolling out Android 16 to existing Phone (3a) users.
As for pricing, the phone is expected to cost €249.99 (around $290) in France, with some European markets possibly getting it for as low as €239.99. For comparison, the regular Phone (3a) starts at €349.99.
There’s no word yet on whether the trademark Glyph Interface or Nothing’s minimalist design will see changes. But given the company’s track record, we can expect the same transparent aesthetic. The teaser shows a blinking light on the back, though.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.
The post Nothing confirms Phone (3a) Lite launch for this week appeared first on Gizmochina.
XMG has launched the new FUSION 15 (L25), the most portable model in its current FUSION lineup. Built with a 15.3-inch aluminium body and weighing 1.95 kilograms, it serves as the Intel version of the XMG CORE 15. The laptop is powered by an Intel Core Ultra 7 255H processor and is the only XMG model that offers the GeForce RTX 5050 GPU, along with options for the RTX 5060 and RTX 5070.
The FUSION 15 has a 2560 x 1600 IPS display with a 300 Hz refresh rate, 500 nits brightness, and 100 percent sRGB color coverage. The 99.8 Wh battery provides over 10 hours of video streaming and lasts even longer for light office work. With a focus on efficiency, this model is smaller than the 16-inch FUSION 16, measuring 342 x 236 x 22 mm.
The cooling system uses two 70 mm fans and 132 copper fins to manage heat through two rear vents. Both the CPU and GPU are cooled with Honeywell PTM7958 phase-change thermal pads.
The XMG Control Center lets users fine-tune power and fan settings. GPU power can be set between 50 and 115 watts, and CPU power from 10 to 90 watts. Custom fan curves can also be defined. NVIDIA Optimus automatically switches between integrated and dedicated graphics, but users can choose to run only on iGPU or dGPU if needed.
The laptop supports up to 128 GB of DDR5 RAM and 16 TB of SSD storage through two SO-DIMM and two M.2 PCIe 4.0 slots. RAM speeds reach 6400 MT/s, and pre-applied thermal pads help maintain temperature stability.
Ports include Thunderbolt 4, HDMI 2.1 and 2.0b, Mini DisplayPort 2.1, USB-C 3.2 Gen2, three USB-A 3.2 Gen1, Gigabit LAN, an audio jack, and an SD Express card reader. It supports Wi-Fi 7 and can connect up to five external monitors.
The edge-to-edge keyboard has per-key RGB lighting, a numeric keypad, and N-key rollover. A large 123 x 77.5 mm Mylar touchpad and a Full HD webcam with a privacy shutter are also included.
The base model with an RTX 5050, 16 GB DDR5-5600 RAM, and 1 TB SSD is priced at €1,549 including VAT. It is available now on bestware.com.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories!
The post XMG Introduces FUSION 15 with Core Ultra 7, RTX 5050 GPU, and 1600p 300 Hz Display appeared first on Gizmochina.
Last week, iQOO held a launch event to announce the iQOO 15 in China. The brand has already confirmed that the device will be heading to India next month (November). A new “Guess the Launch Date” teaser released by iQOO India CEO Nipun Marya has revealed its possible unveiling date.
Drop your guesses!
— Nipun Marya (@nipunmarya) October 26, 2025
The above teaser has revealed the iQOO 15’s design for the Indian market. The spinning wheel in the teaser momentarily stops on 27 / 11 three times, indicating that November 27 could be its launch date.
The variant shown in the teaser has a sleek white finish and RGB lighting around the camera island. The imprinted text in the camera module confirms that it will support 100x digital zoom. Recent teasers have revealed that it will be iQOO’s first phone to arrive with the OriginOS 6 UI onboard.
The iQOO 15 available in China has a 6.85-inch AMOLED screen that offers a 2K resolution, a 144Hz refresh rate, and an anti-reflection film. Under the hood, the device is equipped with the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chipset, up to 16GB of LPDDR5x RAM, and up to 1TB of UFS 4.1 storage. It has a 7,000mAh battery with 100W wired and 50W wireless charging support.
The iQOO 15 has a 32-megapixel camera on the front. Its rear camera setup has a Sony IMX921 50-megapixel primary camera, a Samsung JN1 ultra-wide lens, and a Sony LYT-600 50-megapixel periscope telephoto camera. It is also equipped with other features, such as a metal middle frame, an ultrasonic in-screen fingerprint sensor, dual speakers, a USB-C (3.2 Gen 1) port, and an IP68/69-rated body.
With a starting price of 4,199 Yuan (~Rs 51,800), the iQOO 15 is available in four shades, such as silver-red, green, white, and black. It also comes in a special King of Glory Collector’s Edition with a blue paint job.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.
The post iQOO 15 India launch could be November 27, reveals tipster appeared first on Gizmochina.
Xiaomi has officially started pushing out HyperOS 3 globally, its latest Android 16-based skin that promises a cleaner design, better performance, and tighter device integration across its ecosystem. The company announced the rollout on October 25, via its official X account, confirming that the new Xiaomi 15T and 15T Pro are the first to receive it.
The initial builds — OS3.0.3.0.WOEEUXM for the 15T and OS3.0.4.0.WOSEUXM for the 15T Pro — arrive as OTA updates, and they also reportedly include the October security patch. The rollout begins in Europe, with other regions to follow soon. Users can check for updates under Settings > About Phone > System Update as availability expands in the coming days.
Interestingly, Xiaomi’s mid-range 15T models are getting the new OS ahead of the flagship Xiaomi 15 and 15 Ultra, which feature the Snapdragon 8 Elite chip. The 15T Pro, powered by the Dimensity 9400+, will effectively serve as the first global test group for the refined platform.
According to Xiaomi’s rollout roadmap, the 15 and 15 Ultra, Redmi Note 14, and Poco F7/X7 series will follow in November, with the Xiaomi 14, Poco F6, and other 2024 models getting the update by late November or early December.
HyperOS 3 introduces a new “Hyper Island” quick menu for media, navigation, and notifications, along with faster performance and improved cross-device syncing between phones, tablets, and wearables. With this update, Xiaomi continues closing the software gap with Apple’s iOS — and for 15T owners, the upgrade starts now.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
(Source)
The post Xiaomi begins global rollout of HyperOS 3, 15T series gets it first appeared first on Gizmochina.
Realme looks ready to push the limits of battery life in the budget segment with its upcoming C85 Pro. Early details from Realme Vietnam hint at a phone built for endurance without the usual bulk — and that alone could make it stand out.
The headline feature is a 7,000mAh silicon-carbon battery, which Realme says can last up to two days on a single charge. That’s reportedly paired with 45W fast charging. Based on Realme’s previous models, you can expect around 10 to 12 hours of active screen time, depending on how hard you push it.
While the thickness or weight is still under cover, none of the phones with 7,000mAh+ silicon-carbon batteries that have been released so far are exactly thick or heavy. So users can still expect a reasonably good in-hand experience.
The C85 Pro also takes durability seriously. It’s tipped to carry an IP69 rating and MIL-STD-810H certification, making it more resistant to dust, water, and drops than most phones in its price range.
On the front, the phone packs an AMOLED panel with FHD+ resolution, 120Hz refresh rate, and a whopping 4,000-nit peak brightness — bright enough for direct sunlight. Under the hood, the phone is expected to use the MediaTek Dimensity 6300 chip with 5G, up to 8GB RAM, and up to 256GB storage.
Pricing should land somewhere between $250 and $300, aimed mainly at markets like Vietnam and India. If these specs hold up, the Realme C85 Pro could be a rare combo: long-lasting, tough, and pocket-friendly. Expect a launch sometime in early 2026.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
(Via)
The post Realme C85 Pro teased with a 7,000mAh silicon-carbon battery appeared first on Gizmochina.
ASUS Republic of Gamers (ROG) has teamed up with HoYoverse’s Honkai Impact 3rd to launch the ROG x Honkai Impact 3rd Elysia’s Special Collection for the ROG Phone 9 series. The collection celebrates Elysia’s new ROG-exclusive outfit and combines her graceful design with ROG’s gaming technology under the slogan “Your Game, Lit With Love.”
The Elysia’s Special Collection gift box comes in a Romantic Pink theme with packaging shaped like a letter, symbolizing a personal message from Elysia to fans. The soft pink color scheme blends pixel-style tech elements with ROG Phone 9’s AniMe Vision display. Opening the box feels like receiving a letter from Elysia, bringing her charm into everyday gaming life.
The collection includes several themed collectibles:
Each box has a unique serial number that unlocks two Enchanted Phones and 2,000 Asterite in Honkai Impact 3rd through the campaign site.
ROG is also releasing an exclusive Elysia Theme Pack for the ROG Phone 9 series. It includes a themed wallpaper, charging animation, incoming call screen, always-on display, and AniMe Vision animation, available free on the ROG Phone Theme Store.
The ROG x Honkai Impact 3rd Elysia’s Special Collection launched worldwide on October 23, 2025. Only 5,000 units will be available globally, priced at US$119. Some regions will also distribute the box through promotional campaigns.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
(Source)
The post ASUS ROG x Honkai Impact 3rd Elysia Collection Launches for ROG Phone 9 Series appeared first on Gizmochina.
MecTuring has introduced a new robotic mop called the MecTuring Mop X2 that promises easier cleaning with powerful and intelligent functionality. It is designed to handle everyday mess and stronger stains while keeping pricing within reach. Continue reading ahead to learn all the key features of the Mop X2.
The Mop X2 focuses on cleaning challenges commonly found in Indian households, especially hard-to-remove marks on tiled or marble floors. It features two rotating mop pads that apply a strong scrubbing force to remove stubborn spots that regular wiping often leaves behind.
Along with this, 15,000 Pa suction clears dust and small debris in one go, reducing the need for separate sweeping. Navigation is handled by NavPro4 LiDAR, which helps the robot accurately map multiple floors, adapt to furniture placement and avoid falls or collisions.
Carpet detection prevents wet mopping on fabric surfaces. With a 5200mAh battery, the device can operate for up to 300 minutes, covering approximately 4,000 sq ft before returning to the dock.
The MecTuring Mop X2 is priced at Rs 34,999 (~$400) as an introductory offer for the Indian market. It is now open for pre-orders exclusively through the company’s official website, with deliveries set to begin on Nov. 15.
Buyers will get a standard 1+1-year warranty, along with a 10-year waterproof suction motor warranty, which adds value for long-term usage and reliability.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.
The post MecTuring Mop X2 debuts with powerful scrubbing for Indian floors appeared first on Gizmochina.
LG has added another OLED model to its growing UltraGear OLED lineup with the UltraGear 27GX704A, following the earlier 27GX700A. The main difference between these two models is the OLED technology used. The UltraGear 27GX700A uses Tandem OLED technology (4th gen WOLED), while the UltraGear 27GX704A relies on older 2nd Gen WOLED technology.
Second-gen WOLED monitors use white OLED emitters with color filters to produce RGB colors, offering good efficiency and lower burn-in risk but slightly reduced brightness and color purity. RGB Tandem OLED monitors use separate red, green, and blue emitters stacked together, delivering higher brightness, better color accuracy, and longer lifespan by spreading the electrical load across multiple layers.
The 27GX704A monitor is available on Amazon for US$779. This monitor was initially introduced in China, Japan and Canada last month.
The UltraGear 27GX704A uses a 26.5-inch glossy WOLED panel with a QHD resolution of 2560×1440 and a 16:9 aspect ratio. It offers 178-degree viewing angles to keep image quality consistent from all sides. The monitor supports a 240Hz refresh rate and a 0.03ms grey-to-grey response time, allowing smooth visuals during fast-moving gameplay.
The display covers 98.5 percent of the DCI-P3 color gamut, supports 10-bit color depth, and has a 1,500,000:1 static contrast ratio. It delivers 275 nits of typical brightness and reaches up to 1300 nits in HDR mode. It is certified for VESA DisplayHDR 400 True Black and HDR10, providing strong contrast and bright highlights.
For adaptive sync, it supports AMD FreeSync Premium Pro, NVIDIA G-Sync compatibility, and VESA AdaptiveSync. Gaming features include Black Stabilizer, Dynamic Action Sync, crosshair overlays, FPS counter, factory calibration, flicker-free technology, and reader mode.
In terms of connectivity, the 27GX704A comes with two HDMI 2.1 ports, one DisplayPort 1.4, a USB-B upstream port, two USB-A downstream ports, and a 3.5mm four-pole headset jack.
The design features a four-sided borderless frame with a glossy finish and Hexagon RGB lighting on the back. The stand supports 130mm height adjustment, as well as swivel, tilt, and pivot functions. The monitor measures 605.2 × 351 × 45.3 mm without the stand and weighs 4.8 kg.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
The post LG UltraGear 27GX704A OLED Monitor with 240Hz Refresh Rate & 0.03ms Response Time Hits US Store shelves appeared first on Gizmochina.
Xiaomi is said to be working on the Xiaomi 17 Ultra for the Chinese market. Speculations are rife that the device may launch before the end of this year. Reliable tipster Digital Chat Station has been leaking key details about the 17 Ultra, and in a new leak, he shared new details about its camera capabilities and rear design.
DCS’ new leak reveals that the Xiaomi 17 Ultra will arrive with a major upgrade in its camera system, starting with a new 50-megapixel primary camera with a significantly larger sensor, improved in-sensor zoom technology, and a seamless transition to its telephoto lens for lossless focal range coverage.
The telephoto unit itself will reportedly use a new 200-megapixel large-sensor periscope camera, supporting multiple focal lengths without loss in image quality. It is also expected to offer telephoto macro shooting with good magnification, although the focus range may not be extremely close.
Both these new lenses are claimed to provide a high dynamic range, suggesting a major step up in overall photography performance on the Xiaomi 17 Ultra. Readers can visit this post to know its rumored camera sensors.
Based on this speculation about the Xiaomi 17 Ultra featuring a large round camera module that occupies a significant portion of the back panel, the device may not include a secondary display like the Xiaomi 17 Pro and Xiaomi 17 Pro Max.
Under the hood, the Xiaomi 17 Ultra will have the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5, which also powers the other Xiaomi 17 series phones. On the front, it is expected to feature a 6.8-inch flat OLED screen offering a 2K resolution and a 120Hz refresh rate. It is expected to arrive in three shades, such as black, white, and purple.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.
The post Xiaomi 17 Ultra expected to launch without rear display appeared first on Gizmochina.
After launching the Vivo X300 series earlier this month, Vivo seems to be shifting its focus to the upcoming Vivo S50 series. As per reports, the new S-series is expected to launch in China next month (November). Ahead of the expected launch, reliable tipster Digital Chat Station has leaked the key details about the Vivo S50 and S50 Pro Mini.
According to DCS, the Vivo S50 series will have two models with different-sized displays. The leak reveals that the standard model will have a 6.59-inch flat display offering a 1.5K resolution, paired with a metal middle frame and a periscope telephoto camera. The telephoto unit reportedly features a medium-sized sensor of flagship-grade quality, indicating a notable upgrade in zoom photography.
On the other hand, the Vivo S50 Pro Mini will be a compact offering equipped with a 6.31-inch flat display with support for 1.5K resolution. Being a Pro model, it will have top-tier camera hardware. It appears both phones will be equipped with a 50-megapixel front-facing camera.
When asked about what chipset powers the Vivo S50 series, the tipster seemingly suggested a flagship chip capable of achieving a 3M AnTuTu score for the Pro variant. As per a previous leak, this device could be equipped with the Dimensity 9400, which powered the Vivo X200 series last year.
The said leak also suggested that the Vivo S50 Pro Mini could be equipped with a triple-camera setup featuring a periscope camera. For security, it could be equipped with an ultrasonic in-screen fingerprint sensor.
The Vivo S50 series is expected to face competition from the Oppo Reno 15 lineup and the Honor 500 series, which are also expected to launch in November in China.
Vivo is also said to be working on the Vivo X300 FE for the global market. To recall, the China-exclusive Vivo S30 Pro Mini was rebranded as the Vivo X200 FE globally. Therefore, the X300 FE could be a rebadged version of the S50 Pro Mini.
And what happened to the Vivo S40 series? The company has reportedly skipped it because the number 4 is considered unlucky in China, prompting Vivo to move straight to the S50 series.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.
The post Vivo S50, S50 Pro Mini display size, camera details leaked, may launch in November appeared first on Gizmochina.
Huawei launched the MatePad Pro 12.2 (2025) back in July in China. Months after its release, the Gold Collector Edition is going on sale in the mainland starting today. The device comes in a single configuration of 16GB RAM and 1TB storage.
Alongside the Pro model, Huawei is also launching the MatePad Mini Collector’s Edition in China today.
The limited edition model is priced at 7,799 yuan (around $1,095). It’s available exclusively in a PaperMatte display variant with Wi-Fi support.
The tablet packs a 12.2-inch dual-layer OLED screen with a resolution of 2800 x 1840 pixels, a 144Hz refresh rate, P3 wide color gamut, 1.07 billion colors, and HDR Vivid certification.
It houses a 50MP main camera paired with an 8MP ultra-wide-angle shooter. On the front, there’s an 8MP camera for video calls and conferences.
Interestingly, this is Huawei’s first tablet to support Wi-Fi 7. It packs a 10,100mAh battery that can charge up to 85% in just 40 minutes. The tablet also supports a one-step unlocking feature for more convenient and secure access.
As expected, the tablet supports stylus, mouse, and keyboard accessories.
The MatePad Mini Collector’s Edition comes in two configurations — 16GB/512GB and 16GB/1TB — priced at 5,999 yuan (~$845) and 6,499 yuan (~$915) respectively.
Both models are available in Universal Red with a PaperMatte display and offer network and Wi-Fi connectivity options.
The MatePad Mini features a flexible OLED full-screen display with an ultra-narrow 2.99mm bezel and a 16:10 aspect ratio.
The screen peaks at 1,800 nits, and the PaperMatte Edition cuts off 99% of ambient light interference for more comfortable reading sessions.
For video calls, the tablet includes a 32MP front-facing camera with RAW-quality portrait and beautification tools. Under the hood, there’s a 6,400mAh battery with 66W SuperCharge support.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Don’t miss a thing! Join our Telegram community for instant updates and grab our free daily newsletter for the best tech stories!
The post Huawei’s new Gold Collector’s Edition of the MatePad Pro 12.2 (2025) goes on first sale in China appeared first on Gizmochina.
If you’re making TikToks in 2025, your phone isn’t just a phone. It’s your camera rig, editing suite, sound booth, and live broadcast studio all in one. Raw specs alone are no longer enough. You need cameras that don’t blow out highlights or lose detail in low light, software that understands creative workflows, and connectivity that stays reliable during uploads. And ideally, it all fits in your pocket.
Here’s a breakdown of the best smartphones for TikTok creators in 2025 based on what actually matters for shooting, editing, and posting content on the go.
Apple’s new iPhone 17 Pro and Pro Max are built for serious content creators. Both models feature a triple 48MP camera system, including a next-generation telephoto lens with 8x optical zoom at 200mm. This setup works well for creative portrait videos and stylized b-roll. The 18MP front camera now uses a square sensor, which helps capture wide, cinematic-looking vlogs and selfies.
The A19 Pro chip, combined with Apple’s 16-core Neural Engine, processes 4K 120fps Dolby Vision video without breaking a sweat. High-resolution footage can be edited directly in apps like iMovie or CapCut without slowing the system down.
For vloggers, Dual Capture allows simultaneous front and rear camera recording. This is useful for reaction videos, travel updates, and storytelling content. With vapor chamber cooling and up to 2TB of storage, the iPhone 17 Pro models deliver studio-level performance in a phone.
| Preview | Product | |
|---|---|---|
|
|
iPhone 17 Pro 256 GB: 15.93 cm (6.3″) Display with Promotion up to 120Hz, A19 Pro Chip,… | Check Price on Amazon |
Please Note: When you buy something using the links in our articles, we may earn a small commission at no cost to you.
The new Pixel 10 Pro and Pro XL are ideal for creators who want software to handle much of the workload. The Tensor G5 chip may not be the fastest in benchmark tests, but it focuses heavily on camera performance. Features like Magic Cue, Auto Best Take, and Camera Coach help creators optimize scenes in real time.
The 48MP Pro Res Zoom camera supports up to 100x digital zoom with strong stabilization and clear detail. The front camera now shoots at 4K 60fps. Features like cinematic blur and HDR10+ add a polished look to everyday clips.
Google has also introduced Pixelsnap, a magnetic accessory system that supports 25W Qi2 wireless charging and works with grips, gimbals, and other tools. It is a creator-friendly ecosystem with support for fast shooting and seamless setup.
Please Note: When you buy something using the links in our articles, we may earn a small commission at no cost to you.
Samsung’s Galaxy S25 Ultra is designed for creators who treat mobile video like professional work. The 200MP main sensor produces ultra-detailed footage, and the new 50MP ultra-wide camera captures cleaner visuals in low-light indoor settings.
The camera app includes tools like ProScaler for advanced image processing and Galaxy Log for direct in-camera color grading. These features make it easier to maintain a consistent visual style. Optical zoom at 5x and 10x levels adds framing flexibility for stylized shots.
The Snapdragon 8 Elite chip powers on-device AI, while a larger vapor chamber improves thermal stability. With a 5000mAh battery, the Galaxy S25 Ultra supports long recording sessions without overheating or draining too quickly.
| Preview | Product | |
|---|---|---|
|
|
Samsung Galaxy S25 Ultra 5G AI Smartphone (Titanium Black, 12GB RAM, 512GB Storage), 200MP Camera, S… | Check Price on Amazon |
Please Note: When you buy something using the links in our articles, we may earn a small commission at no cost to you.
The Xiaomi 15 Ultra caters to creators who demand full manual control and high-end video output. It uses a Leica-branded quad-camera system with a 1-inch primary sensor and a 200MP HP9 telephoto lens. The phone supports 4K 120fps recording, 10-bit Log, and ACES-certified video standards.
Xiaomi includes a dedicated Photography Kit Edition. This grip accessory features a shutter button, thumb rest, filter ring, and a built-in 2,000mAh battery. This toolset helps creators stay productive on longer shoots.
The phone runs on HyperOS, which efficiently handles large video files and complex editing tasks. It is best suited for creators who treat mobile filmmaking like a professional setup.
Vivo’s X200 Ultra emphasizes imaging above all else. The phone features two 50MP Sony LYT-818 sensors and a 200MP Zeiss APO super-telephoto lens with 200mm optical zoom. Two custom imaging chips, VS1 and V3+, handle image processing before and after capture. This setup ensures responsive performance, even with complex video modes.
It supports 4K 120fps, time-lapse video, and a professional-grade teleconverter kit. Vivo also offers a separate photographer’s kit that includes a zoom lever, shutter grip, and a 2300mAh battery. This phone is highly adaptable for professional-style content creation.
Apple’s base iPhone 17 brings several pro-level features to the standard model. The 6.3-inch display now includes ProMotion and Always-On Display, while the A19 chip delivers top-tier processing. The camera system includes a 48MP main and 48MP ultra-wide lens, along with the new 18MP Center Stage front camera.
This front camera uses AI to track faces, rotate orientation, and improve framing for group selfies and vlogs. It also supports 4K HDR video and Dual Capture. For lifestyle creators and everyday vloggers, the iPhone 17 is a strong choice. It is lightweight, fast, and easy to use.
| Preview | Product | |
|---|---|---|
|
|
iPhone 17 512 GB: 15.93 cm (6.3″) Display with Promotion, A19 Chip, Center Stage Front Camera for… | Check Price on Amazon |
Please Note: When you buy something using the links in our articles, we may earn a small commission at no cost to you.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories!
The post Best Smartphones for TikTok in 2025 appeared first on Gizmochina.
OnePlus is set to launch the OnePlus 15 and Ace 6 later today in China. But just hours before the official launch, alleged price details for both devices have appeared on the Chinese social media platform Weibo.
According to the leak, the OnePlus 15 could start at 4,299 yuan (~ $605) for the 16GB RAM and 256GB storage model. The 16GB/512GB variant is said to be priced at 4,899 yuan (~ $690), while the top-end 16GB/1TB version could reach 5,399 (~ $760) yuan.
Meanwhile, the OnePlus Ace 6 is rumored to start at 3,099 yuan (~ $435) for the 12GB RAM and 512GB storage configuration. The higher-end 16GB/512GB variant could cost around 3,399 yuan (~ $480).
Both phones are also expected to come in a 12GB RAM and 256GB storage version, which would lower the starting price below what the leaked figures suggest.
It’s worth noting that these leaks come from an unverified source, so the prices should be taken with caution. OnePlus has not confirmed any of these numbers ahead of the launch.
Some key specifications of the OnePlus 15 have already been confirmed. The device features a 6.78-inch OLED display with a 2772 x 1272-pixel resolution and a 165Hz adaptive refresh rate.
It is powered by the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chipset and packs a 7,300mAh dual-cell battery. The camera setup includes a triple 50-megapixel camera setup on the back, including a periscope telephoto lens with 3x optical zoom, alongside a 32-megapixel front camera.
The Ace 6, meanwhile, sports a slightly smaller 6.83-inch 1.5K display and is powered by the Snapdragon 8 Elite with a massive 7,800mAh battery supporting 120W fast charging.
The phone is confirmed to feature an ultrasonic in-screen fingerprint sensor, a metal frame, and IP68/69/69K ratings. Its camera setup includes a 16-megapixel front shooter and a dual 50MP + 8MP rear system. The Ace 6 will reportedly come in Black, Quick Silver, and Flash White color options.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories.
(Source)
The post OnePlus 15 and Ace 6 price leak hours before the launch appeared first on Gizmochina.
ByteDance, the parent company of TikTok, just dropped a major piece of the future of 3D content creation. It’s called Seed3D 1.0, and it’s not your average model generator. This tool can turn a single 2D image into a complete, simulation-grade 3D model, complete with detailed geometry, photorealistic textures, and physically based rendering (PBR) materials.
It’s an end-to-end pipeline built on the increasingly popular Diffusion Transformer architecture, trained on massive datasets and clearly aiming for dominance in the generative 3D space.
While tools like Gaussian Splatting and open-source projects such as Hunyuan3D have pushed boundaries, ByteDance claims Seed3D 1.0 outperforms both open-source and closed-source rivals in texture quality and geometric fidelity. It achieves this with just 1.5 billion parameters, beating even larger models like Hunyuan3D 2.1, which uses 3 billion parameters.
The core innovation lies in its combination of a multimodal Diffusion Transformer and a stepwise generation strategy. It begins by analyzing an image with a vision-language model to extract object-level and spatial cues. It then generates individual 3D models and assembles them into a full scene. This allows it to scale from a single chair to a fully detailed office or even a large-scale cityscape.
Seed3D 1.0 also excels at maintaining texture consistency across multiple viewpoints. Instead of relying on generic textures, it generates view-aligned materials that remain coherent from every angle, ensuring both realism and structural accuracy for simulation-grade use. The output isn’t just for research purposes; models created with Seed3D can be directly integrated into simulation platforms like Isaac Sim for embodied AI training.
As the boundary between real and synthetic content continues to blur, Seed3D 1.0 marks a significant leap forward for ByteDance, and potentially for 3D content creators, robotics developers, and spatial computing platforms around the world.
For more daily updates, please visit our News Section.
Stay ahead in tech! Join our Telegram community and sign up for our daily newsletter of top stories!
The post ByteDance Unveils Seed3D 1.0: Turn Any Photo Into a Realistic 3D Model Instantly appeared first on Gizmochina.
Cristiano Ronaldo is enjoying a brilliant start to the 2025–26 season with Al Nassr, currently riding a 10-game winning streak. However, with Karim Benzema’s Al Ittihad posing their next major challenge on Tuesday, Ronaldo will reportedly be without one of the team’s key players.
After losing the Saudi Super Cup final on penalties earlier this season, Al Nassr have responded with an impressive run across the Saudi Pro League, King’s Cup, and AFC Champions League Two. Now set to face Al Ittihad in the round of 16, Jorge Jesus’s side will have to do so without a crucial midfield presence.
According to journalist Ali Alabdallah, Marcelo Brozović has been left out of the squad by head coach Jorge Jesus for the game against Al Ittihad. The Croatian midfielder participated in group training on Monday, but the Portuguese manager opted to rest him to avoid aggravating his injury.
Brozović was forced off with an injury on October 18 during Al Nassr’s match against Al Fateh, leaving the field in the 19th minute for Abdullah Al-Khaibari. Medical tests later revealed that the midfielder had sustained a minor tear in his adductor muscle.
The Croatian star, who had featured in nearly every match this season, has already missed games against FC Goa and Al Hazem. With Abdullah Al-Khaibari and Angelo expected to anchor the midfield, Al Nassr will face a significant challenge without one of their most experienced players.
With the arrivals of Kingsley Coman, João Félix, and Iñigo Martínez, plus Jorge Jesus at the helm, expectations were high for Al Nassr to contend for every title this season. Since their Saudi Super Cup defeat, Ronaldo’s side has done just that.
In the Saudi Pro League, Al Nassr remain the only club with a perfect record of six wins in six matches, scoring 21 goals and conceding just twice. They also top their AFC Champions League Two group and remain alive in the King’s Cup. Having already beaten Benzema’s Al Ittihad twice this season, 2–1 in the Super Cup semifinals and 2–0 away in the league, Al Nassr enter Tuesday’s matchup as clear favorites.
After reaching peak performance in the 2023/24 season, Vinicius Jr has struggled to maintain his form with Real Madrid, drawing criticism from fans. With Kylian Mbappe firmly established as the team’s cornerstone, the Brazilian has been relegated to the background. Moreover, the recent El Clásico against Barcelona, despite being a win, has prompted Vinicius to reconsider his future with Xabi Alonso’s team.
Vinicius Jr.’s contract with Real Madrid runs through 2027, with both parties initially keen on a renewal despite differing salary expectations. The Brazilian forward was open to negotiating terms to secure his future with the club. However, after being substituted in the 72nd minute against Barcelona, the 25-year-old star reportedly had a change of heart, potentially altering his plans for continuity with the team.
According to Diario As, Vinicius Jr feels Xabi Alonso undervalues his contributions to the team, despite his defensive improvements. He believes he deserves an irreplaceable spot in the starting lineup, akin to Mbappe’s status. Frustrated by the situation, the Brazilian star views the ongoing scenario as unsustainable and is contemplating a departure in the summer of 2026 if the coach’s perspective on his role remains unchanged.
While Real Madrid have consistently backed Vinicius, his reaction to being substituted stirred unrest within the team. “Me? Me? Coach, coach! Me? … Always me! I’m leaving the team! I’m leaving, I’d better leave!“ he exclaimed. The front office expressed displeasure over his behavior, reports Diario As, leading Xabi Alonso to deliver a pointed message to Vinicius post-game. With this in mind, the Brazilian’s continuity may not be as clear as it was supposed to be days ago.
Vinicius Jr. and Rodrygo Goes have been staples in Real Madrid’s lineup for several years, with Rodrygo shifting to an unnatural right-wing role to accommodate both talents. However, this compromise wasn’t viable long-term. With Xabi Alonso now at the helm, the dynamic has shifted, prompting increased competition and a rotation strategy that hasn’t sat well with Vinicius, highlighting tensions in maintaining harmony on the pitch.
Although Vinicius has thrived as a disruptive left winger, Kylian’s arrival has curtailed his freedom on the pitch. In response, Xabi Alonso may look for a player who complements the French star more effectively. Rodrygo Goes stands out as a potential game changer, with his dribbling skills, inside play, and creativity. Despite having only 316 minutes compared to Vinicius’ 880, contract renewal discussions might give Rodrygo an edge in securing more playing time.
Lionel Messi and Cristiano Ronaldo may have stepped away from the European spotlight in recent years following their moves to Inter Miami and Al Nassr, respectively. Still, the two legends remain firmly among the elite, earning nominations for the FIFPro 2025 Best XI alongside several of the game’s biggest stars.
On Monday, FIFPro, the international players’ union representing professional footballers worldwide, released the shortlist for the 2025 FIFPro Men’s World 11. The 2024–25 season has already sparked plenty of debate over who deserves top individual honors, with Ousmane Dembélé recently winning the 2025 Ballon d’Or. Now, the discussion shifts to who will make this year’s Best XI.
In a nominee list dominated by Paris Saint-Germain players, Lionel Messi and Cristiano Ronaldo stand out as two of the eight forwards in contention for the 2025 Best XI. Remarkably, they are also the only two candidates not currently playing in Europe, a testament to their enduring quality and global influence despite plying their trade elsewhere.
Joining Messi and Ronaldo on the forwards shortlist are PSG’s Ousmane Dembélé, Manchester City’s Erling Haaland, Real Madrid’s Kylian Mbappé, Barcelona’s Raphinha and Lamine Yamal, and Liverpool’s Mohamed Salah. Notably, Bayern Munich striker Harry Kane was left off the list, an omission that has raised eyebrows among fans.
For last year’s FIFPro World 11, the attacking trio consisted of Mbappé, Haaland, and Vinícius Júnior. The 2025 winners will be revealed on November 3, and given the dip in form of some previous selections, this year’s edition could see a completely new forward line, possibly featuring Messi and Ronaldo once again.
The FIFPro Best XI carries prestige as it is voted on exclusively by professional players from more than 70 affiliated countries. Voters select one goalkeeper, three defenders, three midfielders, and three forwards, who together form the final team.
The players will have to choose between the next list of stars:
Christian Pulisic, opting out of the 2025 CONCACAF Gold Cup to concentrate on his AC Milan commitments, drew criticism from fans and former players alike. Yet, the 27-year-old standout participated in the USMNT‘s October friendlies, sustaining an injury he’s still recovering from. In light of this, the Italian side has reportedly issue a strong request to coach Mauricio Pochettino ahead of the following friendly games.
According to Calciomercato, AC Milan are actively negotiating with the United States Soccer Federation to prevent Christian Pulisic from being called up by USMNT coach Mauricio Pochettino for November’s international friendlies. With this move, they are focused on allowing the 27-year-old to recuperate fully, ensuring he’s in top form for the pivotal derby clash against Inter Milan on November 23rd.
Even though Christian Pulisic is sidelined for AC Milan’s match against Atalanta on October 28, he could return to face AS Roma on November 2. However, the Italian side prioritizes a meticulous recovery plan to ensure he regains peak form without risking setbacks. This strategy aligns with their advisory to the USMNT, especially as the U.S. team already holds a 2026 World Cup spot as hosts.
Mauricio Pochettino, recognizing Christian Pulisic’s vital role for the USMNT, might still call him up to spearhead the offense. However, as reported by La Gazzetta dello Sport, AC Milan aim to negotiate with Pochettino, proposing that the 27-year-old star plays only the November 15 match against Paraguay. This arrangement would allow Pulisic to return promptly, ensuring he remains fit and well-rested for the crucial Derby against Inter Milan.
Since Massimiliano Allegri’s arrival, Christian Pulisic has become a pivotal force in the offense, amassing six goals and two assists to lead the team’s scoring chart. Rafael Leao, capitalizing on the USMNT star’s absence, struck three goals in his last two matches, sparking rumors about Pulisic’s potential displacement. Despite these speculations, Allegri reportedly has definitive plans for the lineup, signaling Pulisic’s position remains secure upon his return.
La Gazzetta dello Sport reveals that Allegri’s trust in Santiago Gimenez has waned, with their relationship reportedly at an all-time low. Consequently, Christian Pulisic will join forces with Rafael Leao in an effort to revitalize AC Milan’s attack, as the team grapples with a recent goal drought. With the Rossoneri trailing leaders Napoli and AS Roma by just one point, they are determined to string together crucial victories to bolster their Serie A title hopes.
The conversation around artificial intelligence (AI) has been dominated by “replacement theory” headlines. From front-line service roles to white-collar knowledge work, there’s a growing narrative that human capital is under threat.
Economic anxiety has fueled research and debate, but many of the arguments remain narrow in scope.
However, much of this narrative is steeped in speculation rather than the fundamental, evolving dynamics of skilled work.
Yes, we’ve seen layoffs, hiring slowdowns, and stories of AI automating tasks. But this is happening against the backdrop of high interest rates, shifts in global trade, and post-pandemic over-hiring.
As the global talent thought-leader Josh Bersin argues, claims of mass job destruction are “vastly over-hyped.” Many roles will transform, not vanish.
For the SEO discipline, the familiar refrain “SEO is dead” is just as overstated.
Yes, the nature of the SEO specialist is changing. We’ve seen fewer leadership roles, a contraction in content and technical positions, and cautious hiring. But the function itself is far from disappearing.
In fact, SEO job listings remain resilient in 2025 and mid-level roles still comprise nearly 60% of open positions. Rather than declining, the field is being reshaped by new skill demands.
Don’t ask, “Will AI replace me?” Ask instead, “How can I use AI to multiply my impact?”
Think of AI not as the jackhammer replacing the hammer but as the jackhammer amplifying its effect. SEOs who can harness AI through agents, automation, and intelligent systems will deliver faster, more impactful results than ever before.
As an industry, it’s time to change the language we use to describe SEO’s evolution.
Too much of our conversation still revolves around loss. We focus on lost clicks, lost visibility, lost control, and loss of num=100.
That narrative doesn’t serve us anymore.
We should be speaking the language of amplification and revenue generation. SEO has evolved from “optimizing for rankings” to driving measurable business growth through organic discovery, whether that happens through traditional search, AI Overviews, or the emerging layer of Generative Engine Optimization (GEO).
AI isn’t the villain of SEO; it’s the force multiplier.
When harnessed effectively, AI scales insight, accelerates experimentation, and ties our work more directly to outcomes that matter:
We don’t need to fight the dystopian idea that AI will replace us. We need to prove that AI-empowered SEOs can help businesses grow faster than ever before.
The new language of SEO isn’t about survival, it’s about impact.
For years, marketing and SEO teams grew headcount to scale output.
Today, the opposite is true. Hiring freezes, leaner budgets, and uncertainty around the role of SEO in an AI-driven world have forced leaders to rethink team design.
A recent Search Engine Land report noted that remote SEO roles dropped to 34% of listings in early 2025, while content-focused SEO positions declined by 28%. A separate LinkedIn survey found a 37% drop in SEO job postings in Q1 compared to the previous year.
This signals two key shifts:
If your org chart still looks like a pyramid, you’re behind.
The new landscape demands flexibility, speed, and cross-functional integration with analytics, UX, paid media, and content.
It’s time to design teams around capabilities, not titles.
The best SEO leaders aren’t hiring specialists, they’re hiring aptitude. Modern SEO organizations value people who can think across disciplines, not just operate within one.
The strongest hires we’re seeing aren’t traditional technical SEOs focused on crawl analysis or schema. They’re problem solvers – marketers who understand how search connects to the broader growth engine and who have experience scaling impact across content, data, and product.
Progressive leaders are also rethinking resourcing. The old model of a technical SEO paired with engineering support is giving way to tech SEOs working alongside AI product managers and, in many cases, vibe coding solutions. This model moves faster, tests bolder, and builds systems that drive real results.
For SEO leaders, rethinking team architecture is critical. The right question isn’t “Who should I hire next?” It’s “What critical capability must we master to stay competitive?”
Once that’s clear, structure your people and your agents around that need. The companies that get this right during the AI transition will be the ones writing the playbook for the next generation of search leadership.
The future of SEO teams will be defined by collaboration between humans and agents.
The future: teams built around agents and empowered humans.
These new teams succeed when they don’t live in silos. The SEO/GEO squad must partner with paid search, analytics, revenue ops, and UX – not just serve them.
Agents create capacity; humans create alignment and amplification.
Building the SEO community of the future will require change.
The pace of transformation has never been faster and it’s created a dangerous dependence on third-party “AI tools” as the answer to what is unknown.
But the true AI story doesn’t begin with a subscription. It begins inside your team.
If the only AI in your workflow is someone else’s product, you’re giving up your competitive edge. The future belongs to teams that build, not just buy.
Here’s how to start:
The future of SEO starts with building smarter teams. It’s humans working with agents. It’s capability uplift. And if you lead that charge, you’ll not only adapt to the next generation of search, you’ll be the ones designing it.
Japan has officially stepped into the regulated stablecoin era with the launch of JPYC EX, the country’s first fully licensed digital yen under the revised Payment Services Act. This milestone marks a pivotal moment for Japan’s financial sector, bridging traditional banking infrastructure with the Web3 ecosystem.
Building on earlier versions of JPYC, the new JPYC EX is designed to serve as a compliant, yen-backed stablecoin connecting the nation’s banking system to blockchain-based commerce, DeFi applications, and cross-border payments. With full legal authorization and asset backing, it positions the yen as a future cornerstone in global digital finance.
According to CryptoQuant, the total stablecoin market capitalization has now surpassed $150 billion, forming the backbone of liquidity for crypto markets, DeFi protocols, and global payments. Analysts from Citi and Bloomberg project that this figure could expand to between $1.6 and $4 trillion by 2030. Within that rapid growth, JPYC is forecasted to capture roughly 2% of the market, reaching a valuation of around $70 billion.
A Fully Regulated Digital Yen Bridging Japan’s Finance and Web3
What distinguishes JPYC EX from other stablecoins is its combination of regulatory clarity, asset backing, and technical versatility. Domestic bank deposits and Japanese government bonds fully collateralize each token, ensuring complete transparency and stability. This structure makes JPYC EX one of the world’s most legally robust stablecoins. A benchmark for compliance-driven innovation in digital finance.
Built on Ethereum, Polygon, and Avalanche, JPYC EX provides instant yen transfers with near-zero fees. Making it a practical tool for businesses and individuals alike. It supports commerce, payroll, peer-to-peer payments, and DeFi applications, offering the efficiency of blockchain without sacrificing legal or operational safeguards.
JPYC EX also aligns closely with Japan’s digital transformation strategy, which aims to merge traditional finance with emerging Web3 systems. By serving as a settlement layer for e-commerce platforms, NFT marketplaces, and cross-border transactions, the stablecoin enables instant yen transfers across Asia, lowering costs and increasing accessibility for international trade.
Looking ahead, analysts forecast JPYC’s market capitalization could reach $70 billion by 2030. It represents roughly 2% of the global stablecoin market. This growth potential underscores Japan’s ambition to establish the digital yen as a key pillar of the decentralized global economy. With its blend of regulatory trust, technological precision, and global reach, JPYC EX may redefine how national currencies operate in the Web3 era.
The chart shows that stablecoin market dominance currently sits around 8.31%, following a sharp rise earlier in October that pushed the ratio above 9%. This level often signals heightened demand for liquidity and safety, as traders move capital into stable assets amid market uncertainty.
Over the past few months, dominance has steadily climbed from the 7.3%–7.5% range, reflecting a cautious sentiment as Bitcoin and major altcoins face selling pressure. However, the recent pullback suggests that some funds are beginning to rotate back into risk assets, a potential early sign of market stabilization.
Technically, the dominance remains above both the 50-day and 200-day moving averages, indicating a broader uptrend in liquidity positioning. If this level holds, it may serve as a buffer during continued volatility. Conversely, a sustained drop below 8% could signal that traders are redeploying capital into crypto assets, possibly fueling short-term rallies.
Stablecoin dominance remains elevated — a sign that market participants still prefer holding dry powder. Until dominance begins a more decisive decline, this cautious stance will likely persist, underscoring the market’s fragile balance between risk-off sentiment and the readiness for re-entry into volatile assets.
Featured image from ChatGPT, chart from TradingView.com
Ethereum’s bullish momentum has intensified throughout the weekend, with the price climbing above $4,100. This steady recovery follows a strong rebound from the $3,500 region after a crash earlier in the month.
Investor sentiment, as shown by trading volume and flows on exchanges, has turned optimistic amidst the recovery. Now that Ethereum’s price action is starting to turn bullish again, a new technical analysis shared by crypto analyst Freedomby40 on the social media platform X suggests that the current rally could be far from over, projecting a possible long-term climb to $16,000.
Freedomby40’s analysis, which is based on the Elliott Wave structure, presents Ethereum as currently positioned in an extended bullish sequence that began forming in late 2022. Posting the technical analysis on X, the analyst noted that Ethereum’s price action looks great for a continuation.
His chart shows that the asset has just completed a corrective phase and is entering a renewed impulse wave, with support established between $3,225 and $3,563 at the 0.5 and 0.382 Fibonacci retracement zones, respectively. The analyst labels this zone as the ideal accumulation area for the next leg up, consistent with previous cycle structures seen in 2017 and 2021.
The Elliott Wave projection in his analysis presents a multi-layered confluence of impulse waves extending to the third degree. It illustrates that Ethereum is currently unfolding its fifth major impulse wave in a structure that traces back to mid-2022.
The internal structure of this wave sequence also reveals a C wave in motion, which itself contains smaller sub-impulse waves. Within that C wave, Ethereum appears to be entering its own fifth sub-wave, which is known to be a decisively bullish wave.
Based on this setup, the analyst outlined two potential target zones on the chart: a green box representing the realistic price range for this wave cycle and a red box depicting the higher, more extended scenario that could push Ethereum’s market cap into the trillion-dollar level.
Freedomby40’s analysis identifies multiple price levels based on Fibonacci extensions from the current price action. The first price target is at $6,303, which is based on the 1.0 Fibonacci extension. This initial price target will see the Ethereum price break above its current all-time high, but this is the first of many.
The next target, the 1.236 extension, is positioned around $9,013. These two price targets ($6,303 and $9,013) were described by the analyst as very realistic. Possible extensions are at the 1.382 and 1.618 Fibonacci extension levels, corresponding to $11,210 and $16,077, respectively.
At the time of writing, Ethereum is trading at $4,160, up by 5.2% in the past 24 hours. Freedomby40’s outlook joins a growing list of ultra-bullish Ethereum price forecasts from institutional research desks and top analysts. Standard Chartered Bank recently raised its 2025 price target for Ethereum to $7,500, while projecting a potential long-term path to $25,000 by 2028.
Crypto analyst Bobby A is warning that the XRP price may face trouble soon. He says the large monthly chart is showing weak signs, and this could mean the market is turning bearish again. The analyst thinks the price might need to drop further before it can move higher.
Bobby A says the big XRP chart does not look healthy right now. He explains that many important monthly indicators are crossing bearishly. He says XRP is trading below the 1.618 level, and the price action there looks like a rejection rather than a breakout. He thinks this rejection is happening at a terrible time for XRP, noting that the monthly candle is closing near the BMSB line, another dangerous sign for the price.
Bobby A reminds traders that when the Bressert indicator crosses bearish on the monthly chart, history shows it has never been good for XRP. He believes that history could repeat itself, and these bearish signals are evident on the chart right now, suggesting the mid-term trend may not be strong. His analysis says that in six days, XRP will be facing the monthly candle close again, and facing it while price action is weak is usually not a good sign. He is worried because the chart’s overall structure shows more weakness than strength at this time.
He explains that when a chart shows this kind of technical damage, the smart move is to stay alert. He says traders must focus on risk control during times when the big charts start to flash warning signs. He shares this because he has trusted his chart study before when XRP was under $0.30, and now he needs to trust what he sees again with XRP above $2. He says the market can change very fast, and traders must be ready for those changes.
Right now, XRP is already making a small move downward. Bobby A says this retracement is happening in real time. He warns that XRP could roll over again and retest lower price support levels. If this happens, the token price could fall under $1 to find more substantial support before it tries to recover. He believes there is a real and present risk that the price will crash below $1 if sellers keep pushing it down.
He advises traders to protect their money and manage their trades carefully. He says capital safety must come first in times like these. Even though he still believes in XRP’s long-term future and remains a strong supporter of the project, he feels the odds right now point to lower prices in the mid-term. He says this is because the latest market signs are not strong enough to support a big bullish move yet.
This article was first published on The Bit Journal: Why is Ripple CEO emphasizing the role of XRP in Ripple’s future strategy despite the growing influence of stablecoin RLUSD? Read on to discover.
Ripple CEO Brad Garlinghouse has reaffirmed XRP’s role in Ripple’s future strategy. Saying that XRP wasn’t simply a token, the CEO stated that it was central to Ripple’s entire ecosystem and daily operations.
According to a statement by the chief executive on the social media platform X, Garlinghouse said that even as the company continued building other solutions to enable the Internet of Value, the role of XRP remained at the center of everything. He made the statement after completing a $1.25 billion acquisition of the prime brokerage platform Hidden Road, which has since been renamed Ripple Prime. Commenting on Ripple’s future strategy, Garlinghouse stated:
“With today’s close of Hidden Road (now Ripple Prime), Ripple has announced 5 major acquisitions in ~2 years (GTreasury last week, Rail in August, Standard Custody in 2024, Metaco in 2023) […] As we continue to build solutions to enable an Internet of Value, I’m reminding you all that XRP sits at the center of everything Ripple does. Lock in.”
Ripple’s future strategy has involved several acquisitions, such as Hidden Road, aimed at strengthening XRP’s role and improving its liquidity. As a result, it will now be easier for users to buy, sell, and use XRP, enabling more individual traders and institutions to access the token.
According to Ripple President Monica Long, “the future ahead is mighty bright,” since the firm intended to use the deal to unlock utility for both XRP and new stablecoin RLUSD. Long noted that RLUSD was already being used as collateral in prime brokerage products and that Ripple Prime was exploring additional ways to use XRP.
While stablecoin RLUSD was already receiving increased market focus, Garlinghouse stated that XRP would continue to serve as a bridge asset within its On-Demand Liquidity (ODL) solution, which has now been rebranded as Ripple Payments. Addressing concerns that an emphasis on stablecoin RLUSD would diminish XRP’s role, Garlinghouse reassured the XRP community that XRP would remain at the center of Ripple’s future strategy. He further stated:
“XRP is the heart of Ripple’s strategy. We are committed to ensuring its continued role in our ecosystem.”
Even amid ongoing global expansion and strategic acquisitions, the company’s entire leadership has reassured users that XRP’s role within the Ripple ecosystem remains intact. Garlinghouse states that the token was not simply a cryptocurrency, as Ripple’s future strategy was founded on.
Ripple’s infrastructure has been designed to complement XRP’s utility and ensure that it remains the central cog of the firm’s growing portfolio.
As Ripple’s influence expands globally, it will be interesting to see how the company places the token as central to its success in the digital asset market.
Ripple: A blockchain-based digital payment company that has created a network and protocol that uses the cryptocurrency XRP and the XRP Ledger.
XRP: A digital asset that serves as the native cryptocurrency for the XRP Ledger (XRPL), an open-source, decentralized blockchain built for fast and low-cost global payments.
RLUSD: Also known as Ripple USD, it’s the official Ripple stablecoin, pegged 1:1 to the U.S. Dollar and built on the XRP Ledger. Designed for instant payments and institutional use, RLUSD brings together stability, compliance, and speed, connecting the traditional financial world with on-chain liquidity.
XRP is sometimes referred to as “the banker’s coin,” and for that reason, XRP was originally used for sending cross-border remittances. Today, the primary use case for XRP is making high-value cross-border payments.
Online stores, gift card sites, and some businesses accept XRP for goods and services. Many payment gateways (like Bitpay) integrate XRP as a payment method.
Yes. Ripple Labs partners with major banks and payment providers to enable XRP for real-world cross-border payments (e.g., remittances and B2B payment services).
Yes. XRP is designed for fast, low-cost international transfers. Many remittance services integrate XRP into their workflows.
Read More: Why XRP Still Matters in Ripple’s Strategy Despite RLUSD’s Growing Influence">Why XRP Still Matters in Ripple’s Strategy Despite RLUSD’s Growing Influence
This article was first published on The Bit Journal.
Mike Selig has just been nominated by President Donald Trump to lead the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC).
According to multiple reports, crypto regulator Mike Selig is currently the chief counsel for the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) Crypto Task Force and has experience at the CFTC under former chair Chris Giancarlo.
The nomination comes as the Trump administration is trying to refine the regulation, oversight, and institutional framework of the digital assets space.
Mike Selig’s background is a mix of traditional financial regulation and crypto-policy experience. He’s currently Chief Counsel for the SEC’s Crypto Task Force and has advised SEC Chair Jay Clayton.
Before that, he worked at the CFTC as a law clerk or counsel and was a partner at the law firm Willkie Farr & Gallagher, specializing in asset-management and digital-asset regulation.
He’s publicly commented on the classification of digital assets, including saying in 2023 that “XRP itself is simply computer code. A fungible commodity, like gold or whiskey.”
Hence, experts say he would bring regulatory gravitas and crypto awareness to the role.
Selig’s nomination comes at a time when the U.S. regulatory framework for crypto is in flux. Legislation like the CLARITY Act and the GENIUS Act are being set to clarify which agency oversees which types of digital assets.
Reports share that the CFTC and SEC just had joint discussions to eliminate fragmentation in crypto oversight. Crypto regulator Mike Selig is to replaces a previously stalled candidate, Brian Quintenz, whose appointment was met with industry push-back.
White House crypto adviser David Sacks described Selig as “deeply knowledgeable about financial markets and passionate about modernizing our regulatory approach” in his announcement.
With Selig in charge, the CFTC may get more responsibility in the digital-asset space. The nomination is about the agency’s role in overseeing commodities and derivatives, including digital asset-related products.
Sources reported that Selig is charged with just as the CFTC is expected to take on new authority over the nearly $4 trillion crypto market.
Moreover, Selig’s comments and analysis of the Ripple Labs litigation show he’s comfortable classifying digital assets as commodities rather than securities, a big holding block in regulatory terms.
His appointment may make market participants open up more access to regulated platforms and vehicles.
The big question in crypto regulation has been jurisdiction: which agency regulates what? The SEC has always focused on securities, while the CFTC handles commodities and derivatives.
Crypto regulator Mike Selig’s nomination aligns with recent signals of cooperation between the two agencies. A joint roundtable held in September featured SEC Chairman Atkins and acting CFTC Chair Caroline Pham saying they would end decades of regulatory fragmentation.
Selig’s nomination reinforces that. According to expert analysis, his dual agency background means he can streamline overlapping regulatory mandates. That could mean clearer paths for token classification, custody frameworks, and digital-asset exchanges, fewer grey areas for issuers and investors.
Industry has welcomed the nomination. The crypto community noted his previous comments and legal positions align with the adoption of digital assets. Charles Hoskinson, founder of Cardano, wrote on X:
“Chairman Selig is going to do a great job at the CFTC. I have full confidence in his ability and leadership.”
The media also said crypto regulator Mike Selig is seen as a market-friendly regulator compared to previous enforcement-heavy regimes. While confirmation by the Senate is still needed, the nomination itself is a signal that the regulatory environment may favor of more structured crypto oversight.
Crypto regulator Mike Selig’s nomination as CFTC chair means a big change for digital-asset oversight in the US. With experience at both the SEC and CFTC, Selig is put uo to lead at a moment of regulatory convergence, institutional engagement and legislative momentum.
His nomination means the US is doubling down on its goal to be a global hub for crypto innovation, with clearer rules and coordinated oversight.
The impact is expected to be far-reaching, from institutional access to token classification, custody services, and trading venues.
CFTC: US regulatory agency that oversees commodity futures, options, and derivatives.
SEC: US federal agency; that enforces securities laws and regulates securities markets.
Crypto-Task Force: A unit within the SEC, focused on crypto-asset regulation, compliance, and enforcement.
Token classification: The legal determination of whether a digital asset is a security, commodity, or other asset class with regulatory implications.
Confirmation (Senate): The process by which the US Senate approves presidential nominees for agency leadership.
Regulatory convergence: The alignment of rules, mandates, and enforcement approaches across multiple agencies, to reduce conflict and overlap.
Mike Selig is the current chief counsel for the SEC’s Crypto Task Force, previously worked at the CFTC and in private practice focused on asset-management and digital-asset regulation.
He’s being nominated at a time of regulatory flux and legislative movement so clarity on oversight, token classification and institutional access might be seen.
He may expand CFTC oversight of digital assets treated as commodities or derivatives and coordinate more with the SEC on securities-type tokens.
As of the latest report; he’s been nominated but still needs Senate confirmation before he can take the chair.
Many are positive; citing his prior legal commentary and regulatory experience. For example; Cardano’s founder is fully confident in his ability to lead the CFTC.
Read More: Trump Pro-Crypto Lawyer Nominee for CFTC Chair: A Turning Point for U.S. Crypto Regulation?">Trump Pro-Crypto Lawyer Nominee for CFTC Chair: A Turning Point for U.S. Crypto Regulation?
Google announced Query groups in Search Console Insights. The AI feature clusters similar search queries, surfaces trends, and shows which topics drive clicks.
The post Google Uses AI To Group Queries In Search Console Data appeared first on Search Engine Journal.
© Eric Hartline-Imagn Images/File Photo
Franke was attending a wedding in the Dominican Republic when he died, his colleague said
© Barstool Sports
Paul Gascoigne has described his involvement in the Raoul Moat manhunt as the “biggest regret” of his life.
© PA Archive
The first attempts at using pig organs in humans were short-lived
© Getty/iStock
A Kentucky trooper was shot by a gunman during a traffic stop but was saved thanks to the quick actions of a group of Good Samaritans.
© Kentucky State Police
© Getty/iStock
© AP Photo/David Zalubowski
Pop star, who is currently on her Bite Me tour, said her body has ‘finally given out’
© Getty Images
David Lammy has accused Robert Jenrick of having a “brass neck” over comments made about a mistakenly released migrant sex offender.
© Parliament TV
© Elizabeth Cook/PA
New season sees Liam Hemsworth replace Henry Cavill as Geralt of Rivia
© Netflix
The bill seeks to end the practice of ‘rental bidding’, where landlords can effectively maximise the rent they receive.
© Getty Images/iStockphoto
© From the Lesley & Rhyan Prather Foundation
Errors such as accidental release of Hadush Kebatu, who was imprisoned for sexually assaulting a 14-year-old girl, are symptomatic of ‘chaos’ in criminal justice system
© Crown Prosecution Service
Cyber experts believe digital IDs could be targeted if your phone is stolen
© Alamy/PA
Bitcoin Magazine
Strategy (MSTR) Earns S&P ‘B-’ Rating, Marking a Major Milestone for Bitcoin-Backed Credit
For the first time in financial history, a major credit rating agency has formally evaluated a company built on a bitcoin-backed credit model. In news covered by Bitcoin Magazine, the S&P Global Ratings has assigned Strategy Inc (MSTR) a ‘B-’ Issuer Credit Rating with a Stable outlook, recognizing not just the company, but the emergence of Bitcoin as collateral inside the credit system. This marks a watershed moment for corporate finance. Bitcoin-backed credit is no longer theoretical. It is now a rated financial reality.
Until now, Bitcoin had been accepted by equity markets, ETFs, and corporate treasury conversations — but credit markets remained untouched. Credit markets are where legitimacy is ultimately decided because they determine who can borrow, at what cost, and against which assets.
By rating Strategy Inc, S&P has implicitly acknowledged:
This is not a marketing milestone — it is a structural one. Bitcoin has entered the language of risk-adjusted return, yield, and covenants.
The rating is speculative grade, but the Stable outlook is critical. It signals S&P’s belief that Strategy can continue to service obligations and access capital markets without selling its Bitcoin reserves — a foundational principle of bitcoin-backed credit.
S&P’s analysis mentions several possible weaknesses:
However, they also credited Strategy with unique structural strengths:
In short, S&P is signaling that bitcoin-backed credit can function — if managed with discipline.
Strategy Inc met the S&P 500 inclusion criteria in profitability and market capitalization but was passed over in 2024, widely believed to be due to its Bitcoin-heavy balance sheet. That decision now appears less defensible.
With a formal credit rating, the company shifts from “unrated anomaly” to “rated issuer.” For institutional capital, that distinction matters.
Bitcoin entering equity indices begins with Bitcoin entering the credit models behind them.
This rating does more than validate Strategy — it validates the architecture of bitcoin-backed credit as the superior evolution of corporate treasury management.
Phase 1 was equity-funded Bitcoin accumulation — high growth but shareholder dilution.
Phase 2 introduced convertible debt and preferred equity — allowing companies to acquire Bitcoin through capital markets rather than operating earnings.
Phase 3, now underway, is full institutional recognition of bitcoin-backed credit — rated, benchmarked, and capable of scaling.
This is the endgame:
With S&P formally rating Strategy’s issuer credit, this model moves from innovation to infrastructure.
This rating does not compel companies to adopt Bitcoin. But it removes the claim that Bitcoin cannot be integrated into traditional credit systems.
From now on:
What makes this moment different isn’t that another institution “acknowledged” Bitcoin. That’s happened before with ETFs, GAAP accounting changes, and treasury allocations.
What’s different is where the recognition has now occurred: Not in equity markets. Not in payment networks. But in credit — the foundation of corporate finance and monetary systems.
When a credit rating agency like S&P evaluates a company built on Bitcoin, it does three things that have never happened before:
This rating does not mean the model is risk-free. It means the model is real enough to underwrite, stress test, and lend against.
That is the real inflection point — not that S&P approved of Bitcoin, but that they were forced to measure it.
Disclaimer: This content was written on behalf of Bitcoin For Corporations. This article is intended solely for informational purposes and should not be interpreted as an invitation or solicitation to acquire, purchase or subscribe for securities.
This post Strategy (MSTR) Earns S&P ‘B-’ Rating, Marking a Major Milestone for Bitcoin-Backed Credit first appeared on Bitcoin Magazine and is written by Nick Ward.
Bitcoin Magazine
S&P Assigns ‘B-’ Rating to Strategy (MSTR), Citing Bitcoin Exposure and Liquidity Risk
S&P Global Ratings assigned a ‘B-’ issuer credit rating to bitcoin-juggernaut Strategy, reflecting the company’s heavy concentration in bitcoin and limited dollar liquidity. The outlook is stable.
S&P said the rating reflects Strategy’s “high bitcoin concentration, narrow business focus, weak risk-adjusted capitalization, and low U.S. dollar liquidity.” The company reported $8.1 billion in pre-tax earnings in the first half of 2025, almost entirely from appreciation in the value of its bitcoin holdings.
The firm said in their release that while Strategy’s balance sheet is dominated by bitcoin, its management has prudently staggered debt maturities and maintained flexibility by financing primarily with equity.
In other words, this rating means Strategy can meet debt obligations for now but faces significant default risk if market conditions worsen.
Strategy — now effectively a bitcoin treasury company — raises capital through equity and debt issuances to purchase and hold bitcoin. Its securities give investors varying exposure to bitcoin across its capital structure.
Just today, founder and former CEO Michael Saylor announced a purchase of 390 BTC between October 20 and October 26, spending approximately $43.4 million at an average price of $111,053 per Bitcoin. The firm still operates a small AI-powered analytics business, though it remains roughly breakeven.
JUST IN: S&P Global Ratings has rated a #Bitcoin treasury company for the first time — Michael Saylor’s Strategy
— Bitcoin Magazine (@BitcoinMagazine) October 27, 2025
This S&P rating is the first-ever rating of a Bitcoin Treasury Company by a major credit rating agency.
According to S&P, Strategy’s risk-adjusted capital ratio was significantly negative as of June 30, 2025, because the agency deducts bitcoin assets from equity in its calculation.
Strategy reported $8.1 billion in pre-tax earnings in the first half of 2025. Operating cash flow during the period was negative $37 million.
The agency cited several key risks, including a currency mismatch between Strategy’s bitcoin-denominated assets and dollar-denominated obligations such as interest, debt principal, and preferred dividends.
S&P also pointed to cybersecurity risks given the company’s reliance on custodians to safeguard its bitcoin.
Strategy holds bitcoin valued at roughly $70 billion, against $8 billion in convertible debt, much of which matures beginning in 2028. Annual preferred dividends total about $640 million, which the company plans to fund through additional stock and preferred equity issuance.
While Strategy’s access to capital markets remains a core strength, S&P warned that a sharp decline in bitcoin prices or loss of investor confidence could impede its ability to refinance debt or pay dividends, potentially leading to bitcoin sales “at severely depressed prices.”
S&P said the rating could be downgraded if access to markets weakens or debt management risks rise. An upgrade is unlikely unless the company improves its U.S. dollar liquidity or reduces reliance on convertible debt.
Earlier this year, Michael Saylor laid out an ambitious plan to reshape global finance through Bitcoin.
In an interview with Bitcoin Magazine, Saylor described an “endgame” in which Strategy accumulates a trillion-dollar bitcoin balance sheet, growing 20–30% annually, and uses it as the foundation for a new global credit system.
At the core of his vision is scale: with enough BTC on corporate balance sheets, the long-term appreciation of Bitcoin — historically around 21% annually — would supercharge the capital base.
On top of that, Saylor sees an opportunity to issue bitcoin-backed credit at yields significantly higher than traditional fiat-based debt, potentially two to four percentage points above corporate or sovereign rates.
He argued that over-collateralization could make this system safer than even AAA-rated debt, while simultaneously fueling broader financial growth.
Saylor’s vision extends beyond credit markets. As Bitcoin becomes embedded in corporations, banks, insurers, and sovereign wealth funds, public equity indexes could gradually become indirect bitcoin vehicles.
This, he says, would benefit equity markets and corporate balance sheets while introducing higher yields and greater transparency into financial products.
The implications are broad: savings accounts could yield 8–10% instead of near-zero, money market funds could be denominated in bitcoin, and insurance products could be reimagined around bitcoin collateral.
This post S&P Assigns ‘B-’ Rating to Strategy (MSTR), Citing Bitcoin Exposure and Liquidity Risk first appeared on Bitcoin Magazine and is written by Micah Zimmerman.
Cruise lines are changing sailing routes to Deviate Hurricane Melissa, now categorized as a 5 hurricane near Jamaica and on track to unleash torrential floods, bottomless landslides, and winds of utter destruction. Hurricane Melissa’s impact on Jamaica is expected to be catastrophic Melissa’s is a merciless storm, and every cruiser knows how overwhelming a tropical storm. Sadly, sailors have to deal with this problem twice, as cruisers are mercilessly rerouted south of a menacing hurricane. Caribean seas are known for alluring and hazardous sailing.
Hurricane Melissa has become a significant storm, packing high winds and heavy rain. According to the latest advisory from the National Hurricane Center, the storm’s effects will reach Jamaica and nearby areas by Oct. 27, bringing with it the potential for life-threatening flash floods and widespread infrastructural damage. Haiti, the Dominican Republic, and Cuba will also likely experience severe conditions, with the storm expected to impact the southeastern Bahamas and Turks and Caicos by Oct. 29.
In response to the storm, Carnival Cruise Line has rerouted several ships to safer destinations:
Carnival emphasizes that the safety of passengers remains a top priority and encourages travelers to monitor their sailing alerts through the Cruise Manager on the official Carnival website.
Other major cruise lines have also adjusted their routes to avoid Hurricane Melissa’s impact.
If you’re booked on a cruise in the coming days, you should be prepared for potential itinerary changes due to Hurricane Melissa. Here are a few tips to ensure a smooth experience:
Caribbean destinations are a common stop for cruises, but hurricane season can pose a threat to travel plans. Nevertheless, cruise companies are well-prepared for these interruptions and focus primarily on safety. For the most recent information and advice, customers are encouraged to contact the cruise line directly.
If you are anticipating a cruise in the next several days or weeks, consider these itinerary alterations to be a part of the cruise experience during hurricane season. Their aggressive attempts to reroute, assuming the weather permits, maintain the line’s rep of taking safety first.
The post Cruise Itinerary Updates: How Hurricane Melissa Impacts Travel Plans appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Autumn’s vibrant hues are not confined to the United States. Across the globe, countries showcase their own breathtaking fall landscapes, offering travelers unique experiences to witness nature’s colorful transformation. From Japan’s fiery maples to Canada’s golden aspens, here are some of the world’s top destinations for autumn foliage.
In Japan, autumn is celebrated through “koyo,” the tradition of viewing autumn leaves. From late October to early December, the country’s landscapes are painted in shades of red, orange, and gold. Kyoto’s ancient temples, such as Tofuku-ji and Kiyomizu-dera, provide serene backdrops to the fiery foliage. The Philosopher’s Path offers a picturesque walk lined with vibrant leaves, while the Irohazaka Winding Road in Nikko presents a dramatic display of colors.
Canada’s vast forests transform into a kaleidoscope of colors each fall. In Quebec, the Laurentian Mountains and Gatineau Park are renowned for their vibrant reds and oranges. Ontario’s Algonquin Provincial Park offers a stunning array of yellows, reds, and purples. The Maritimes, particularly Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, boast brilliant fall foliage, with the Cabot Trail providing panoramic views of the colorful landscape.
South Korea’s autumn season, from mid-October to early November, is marked by golden ginkgo trees and fiery maples. Seoraksan National Park is a popular destination, offering hiking trails surrounded by vibrant foliage. Naejangsan National Park is famed for its brilliant red leaves, while the streets of Seoul, particularly around Gyeongbokgung Palace, are lined with golden ginkgo trees, creating a picturesque urban autumn scene.
China offers diverse landscapes to experience fall’s beauty. In Beijing, Xiangshan Park (Fragrant Hill) is a hotspot for red maple leaves, attracting photographers and nature enthusiasts. The Jiuzhaigou Valley in Sichuan Province is known for its multi-colored lakes and surrounding forests, creating a fairy-tale autumn setting. Guangwu Mountain in Sichuan is dubbed “China’s No. 1 mountain with colorful leaves,” offering a stunning display of crimson foliage.
India’s Kashmir Valley is renowned for its autumn beauty. In October, the chinar trees turn vibrant red, creating a picturesque landscape. The Mughal Gardens, such as Nishat Bagh and Shalimar Bagh, are surrounded by colorful foliage, offering serene settings for visitors. The Dal Lake, with its houseboats and surrounding autumn colors, provides a unique experience for travelers.
While not as widely recognised for autumn colors, several European destinations offer stunning fall landscapes. In Germany, the Black Forest is adorned with golden and red leaves, creating a fairy-tale atmosphere. The Loire Valley in France showcases vineyards with changing colors, offering scenic drives and wine tasting opportunities. In Italy, the Dolomites provide dramatic mountain backdrops to vibrant autumn forests, making it a perfect destination for hiking and photography.
The UK offers charming autumn landscapes, especially in its countryside. The Lake District in England is known for its rolling hills and tranquil lakes surrounded by colorful foliage. Scotland’s Highlands provide dramatic mountain scenery with forests turning golden and red. Wales’ Brecon Beacons National Park offers a mix of woodlands and open moorlands, showcasing a variety of autumn colors.
In the Southern Hemisphere, New Zealand’s autumn occurs from March to May. The South Island, particularly around Queenstown and Wanaka, offers stunning displays of red and gold leaves against mountainous backdrops. The Otago Central Rail Trail provides a scenic route through changing landscapes, perfect for cycling enthusiasts.
Autumn offers a unique opportunity to witness nature’s vibrant transformation. While the United States is renowned for its fall foliage, destinations worldwide provide equally stunning displays. Whether you’re hiking through Japan’s ancient temples, cruising along Canada’s scenic routes, or exploring China’s colorful valleys, the world offers a rich tapestry of autumn beauty waiting to be discovered. So, pack your bags and embark on an unforgettable journey to experience the colors of the world this fall.
The post Explore the World’s Most Stunning Fall Foliage Destinations appeared first on Travel And Tour World.New York City, famous for its festive energy and magical holiday atmosphere, now offers a playful new seasonal experience unlike anything travelers have seen before. In a creative collaboration that blends nostalgia with immersive design, Club Wyndham has introduced a themed holiday accommodation at its Midtown 45 property — a delightfully unconventional retreat known as the Let It Dough Suite.
Inspired by cheerful holiday baking traditions and the spirit of wintertime coziness, the suite invites families, couples and festive explorers to rediscover the joy of the holidays through whimsical design and interactive experiences. Available for booking beginning November 17, 2025 and open through January 6, 2026, this specialty suite transforms a New York hotel stay into a storybook-style holiday getaway.
The Let It Dough Suite is designed as a charming, cottage-style hideaway infused with wintry personality. Instead of typical New York luxury minimalism, guests step into a comforting world of sweetness and imagination. From the moment they enter, they are greeted by the subtle scent of cookies and an interior crafted to resemble a holiday bakery brought to life.
Walls are treated with hand-drawn-style illustrations that resemble a festive kitchen sketch, and oversized décor pieces create a playful sense of dimension. Surfaces are trimmed with faux icing drips, cookie motifs appear across the walls, and vintage-inspired shelving holds jars and bowls that feel plucked from a storybook pantry. Frosted window art completes the illusion of a snowy winter just beyond the glass — even on days when Manhattan streets are clear.
The centerpiece of the suite is a cozy kitchen and dining space designed for memory-making moments. Here, families can roll dough, decorate cookies, and enjoy warm pastries fresh from the oven. The holiday theme flows seamlessly from room to room, culminating in a dreamlike bedroom inspired by cinnamon rolls, with swirled bedding textures and comforting caramel tones that wrap the room in visual warmth.
The Let It Dough experience extends beyond décor. This seasonal suite was curated for hands-on enjoyment, featuring interactive touches throughout. Guests can:
Every detail encourages travelers to slow down, savor holiday traditions, and create memories. Even bedtime is treated as a seasonal ritual, with themed eye masks and plush blankets to complete the experience.
Though the Let It Dough Suite is exclusive to New York City, the collaboration extends beyond the East Coast. Holiday travelers at select Club Wyndham resorts across the United States will be treated to Cookie Happy Hour, a seasonal moment when warm baked treats are offered to guests at no additional cost. Participating resorts include:
These select properties will host afternoon cookie gatherings throughout the holiday period, bringing a touch of festive joy to travelers nationwide.
Adding to this seasonal surprise, Club Wyndham has launched a giveaway that will grant one winner a two-night stay in the Let It Dough Suite from December 17–19, 2025. The prize also includes round-trip airfare for two, giving one lucky guest the chance to enjoy a festive escape in Manhattan during the height of the holiday season.
The Let It Dough Suite accommodates up to four guests and is available for both Club Wyndham owners and general travelers. Two- and three-night stays can be reserved between November 17, 2025 and January 6, 2026, with nightly rates starting at $399 plus tax. Ahead of public booking, select Club Wyndham owners with existing Midtown 45 reservations from November 3–16 may receive complimentary upgrades as a surprise benefit.
At a time of year when New York glows with holiday lights and festive markets, this imaginative suite offers an immersive retreat that embraces holiday whimsy without sacrificing comfort. With its blend of creative décor, interactive surprises, and joyful nostalgic energy, the Let It Dough Suite turns a city break into a fully baked holiday experience.
Travelers seeking seasonal magic, family connection, or simply a cozy escape amid Manhattan’s winter wonderland will find a warm welcome in this playful hideaway.
The post New York Holiday Tourism Boost as Club Wyndham Unveils Let It Dough Suite Immersive Baking Retreat appeared first on Travel And Tour World.With a revolutionary take in the American cruise market, American Cruise Lines plans to expand their fleet by ten ships by the year 2028. This addition will enhance the existing cruise itineraries to include cruises on rivers, the coasts, and other specialty areas like the Great Lakes and the National Parks. The firm’s purpose on constructing 100 percent American flagged ships reflects befitting belief confidence in the growth the American cruise industry. The addition will expand the company’s travel attained, and at the same time, strengthen the company’s and industry’s reputation for premium small-ship cruises within the domestic market.
American Cruise Lines’ flagship project starts with the debut of the American Pioneer, a small Patriot Class ship that will sail Florida’s coast starting on 31 October 2025. This new vessel will join the company’s growing fleet, which includes the recently launched American Patriot and upcoming ships in the Patriot Class series. The new ships will offer luxurious coastal and river cruises, providing guests with an immersive and unique way to explore the U.S. without venturing abroad.
These ships are designed to sail through iconic destinations such as the Mississippi River, the Columbia and Snake Rivers, Alaska and the East Coast. Furthermore, they will serve lesser-explored but equally enchanting locales like the Great Lakes, Arkansas River and National Parks. With an expected launch pace of one ship every four months, these additions will significantly expand American Cruise Lines’ service offerings, opening new routes and opportunities for both tourists and cruise enthusiasts.
The Patriot Class ships are specifically designed to provide the ultimate cruising experience with luxurious amenities, including 130 guest capacity, five decks, and private balconies for each guest room. With their upscale features, including an observation deck, fitness centre, grand dining rooms, and casual cafes, these ships will offer guests an unmatched level of comfort while they cruise through some of America’s most scenic and historical waterways.
American Cruise Lines’ expansion is a game-changer for the domestic tourism industry. According to Charles B. Robertson, president and CEO of the company, the launch of the new ships demonstrates their ongoing commitment to U.S. tourism and reinforces their belief in the power of small-ship cruising. The new additions will enhance the cruise line’s already prestigious portfolio, providing tourists with more opportunities to explore the U.S. while benefiting from the convenience and comfort of a modern cruise experience.
In addition to the new Patriot Class ships, American Cruise Lines is also introducing a new series of modern American Riverboats. These new vessels are set to revolutionise cruising along the U.S. rivers, with larger ships such as the American Encore debuting in 2026. The American Encore will operate on the Columbia and Snake Rivers, catering to 180 guests in luxurious private balcony accommodations.
The American Riverboats series, first introduced with the American Song in 2018, has already received critical acclaim for its innovative design and world-class facilities. American Encore, expected to launch in 2026, will include a multi-story glass atrium, expansive outdoor walking decks, and a fitness centre, offering passengers even more ways to relax and enjoy the cruise. The new riverboats will continue to serve regions like the Columbia and Snake Rivers and will be a part of exclusive National Parks cruises, offering an intimate and scenic way to experience America’s natural beauty.
The launch of these 10 new ships is not only about expanding American Cruise Lines’ fleet but also about providing new opportunities for tourists to explore the U.S. The ships will increase accessibility to more remote and under-visited destinations, allowing guests to explore the country’s natural wonders, including river cruises along the Mississippi and coastal trips in Florida. Additionally, the Great Lakes and Arkansas River will be new focal points for travellers, offering unique adventures off the beaten path.
For tourists seeking adventure in nature, the National Parks cruises will provide an ideal blend of luxury and outdoor exploration. The ships’ itineraries will bring tourists closer to some of America’s most renowned parks and wilderness areas, creating unforgettable experiences for nature lovers and families alike. With cruises available year-round, these ships will create a consistent presence in these markets, catering to a diverse range of travellers.
American Cruise Lines has a 50-year history of offering small-ship cruises throughout the U.S. and has always maintained a steadfast commitment to supporting the local tourism economy. The introduction of these 10 ships further cements the company’s legacy as the largest provider of U.S.-flagged riverboats and small ships. These new ships will not only expand American Cruise Lines’ ability to serve new destinations but will also boost the local economies of the regions they visit by attracting tourists and providing jobs.
As more ships are introduced, they will continue to offer a level of luxury, comfort, and intimacy that is unparalleled in the cruise industry. With a strong focus on passenger experience and new destinations, American Cruise Lines’ new ships will shape the future of domestic cruising and provide tourists with more diverse and exciting ways to explore the U.S.
The introduction of 10 new ships by American Cruise Lines is set to bring substantial growth to the U.S. tourism industry, offering new itineraries and enhancing the company’s already impressive fleet. These ships will help to expand access to untouched regions of the U.S., providing new opportunities for tourists to experience America’s beauty and history.
American Cruise Lines hope to retain their side of the market while attracting busy U.S. nationals. As the first company to provide American domestic luxury cruises, American Cruise Lines have positioned their reputation deeply, America’s first river and coastal cruising has, and probably forever will, use their reputation as the country’s domestic luxury river and coastal cruise provider as their starting point.
Image Credit: American Cruise Lines
The post American Cruise Lines Expands U.S. Market With Ten New Ships, Boosting Domestic Tourism Along With New Opportunities For Travellers appeared first on Travel And Tour World.As the monsoon season arrives in Malaysia, bringing heavy rains to regions like Kelantan, Sabah, Johor, and beyond, travelers may wonder how to make the most of their indoor time. From luxury resort retreats to vibrant local markets, Malaysia offers a wide array of indoor activities perfect for the rainy season. Whether you’re seeking relaxation, cultural immersion, or fun experiences, there’s no shortage of ways to enjoy the beauty of Malaysia while staying dry.
Luxury Resorts for a Monsoon Retreat
During Malaysia’s wet season, the monsoon rains create an ideal opportunity to unwind in one of the country’s high-end resorts. Pahang and Johor are particularly popular for offering peaceful and quiet retreats, where the usual crowds thin out, allowing visitors to enjoy a more serene experience. Resorts in these regions offer an array of indoor activities, such as cooking classes, batik painting, and spa treatments that can keep you entertained while staying sheltered from the rain.
For those looking to stay active indoors, many resorts boast indoor pools and fitness centers, offering plenty of options for exercise. These activities, combined with fewer tourists, make these resorts an ideal choice for travelers seeking a luxurious, tranquil stay during the monsoon season.
Exploring Local Markets and Handicrafts
For those staying in Malaysia’s historic cities, local markets provide a fantastic way to experience the country’s culture while remaining dry. Sheltered markets like Terengganu’s Pasar Payang, Kelantan’s Pasar Siti Khadijah, and Sabah’s Anjung Kinabalu offer a glimpse into Malaysian life through their vibrant stalls and specialty products.
In these markets, visitors can sample local snacks such as lekor in Terengganu, akok in Kelantan, and amplang in Sabah. For a true taste of Malaysia, be sure to try regional dishes like nasi kerabu in Kelantan or the famous laksa in Penang. These markets are not only a refuge from the rain but also an opportunity to experience Malaysia’s diverse culinary offerings.
Indoor Cultural Exploration: Museums and Art Galleries
If you’re interested in diving deeper into Malaysia’s rich history and culture, the country offers an abundance of museums and galleries to explore indoors. The National Museum in Kuala Lumpur offers a comprehensive look at Malaysia’s history, from pre-colonial times to the present day. In Kuala Lumpur, the Islamic Arts Museum is a must-see for art lovers, housing an impressive collection of Islamic art from across Southeast Asia.
In Penang, the Pinang Peranakan Mansion offers an immersive tour of Peranakan culture, while Melaka is home to numerous museums dedicated to the region’s colonial history and trade. These indoor cultural activities provide a deeper understanding of Malaysia’s heritage, offering visitors a rich and educational experience while staying dry.
Attending Local Performances and Recitals
The monsoon season also brings an exciting opportunity to engage with Malaysia’s vibrant performing arts scene. Many venues across the country, such as the Kuala Lumpur Performing Arts Centre (KLPAC), host a variety of performances throughout the year, from traditional dance and music to contemporary theatre.
Other venues like the Penang Performing Arts Centre and Pusaka Studio in Kota Bharu also offer performances that showcase Malaysia’s diverse cultural heritage. Visitors can enjoy the unique sounds of traditional Malaysian music or experience the country’s folk dance performances while staying warm and dry indoors.
Conclusion: Making the Most of the Monsoon in Malaysia
While the monsoon season may limit some outdoor activities, Malaysia offers plenty of exciting and enriching indoor experiences to make your visit worthwhile. Whether relaxing in a luxury resort, exploring local markets, visiting museums, or attending live performances, there is no shortage of ways to enjoy the culture, hospitality, and beauty of Malaysia, rain or shine. The monsoon season provides the perfect opportunity to embrace the unique indoor activities the country has to offer, making for an unforgettable experience.
The post Embrace the Rain in Malaysia: Indoor Activities to Enjoy During the Monsoon Season appeared first on Travel And Tour World.This December 2025, LIAT Air is increasing its commitment to Caribbean connectivity with new flights linking the Eastern Caribbean to the Dominican Republic. Starting December 12, the airline will operate a weekly direct service between Antigua and Santo Domingo, followed by two weekly flights connecting Dominica and Punta Cana beginning December 9. These new routes answer a growing demand for streamlined business and leisure travel between key destinations in the region.
The latest route launches with a Friday departure from Antigua’s VC Bird International Airport, arriving in Santo Domingo at 4 PM, and returning from the Dominican capital at 4:45 PM. The service, operated on LIAT Air’s advanced ATR 42-600 aircraft, exemplifies the airline’s effort to expand beyond traditional English-speaking Caribbean markets and tap the Dominican Republic’s increasing role as a travel, business, and diaspora hub. Introductory one-way fares begin at dollar three hundred forty eight, a price calibrated to attract both local travelers and international tourists.
The new Dominica–Punta Cana route is scheduled for Tuesdays and Saturdays, with flights departing Dominica at 2:10 PM and arriving in Punta Cana at 3:45 PM; return legs leave Punta Cana at 4:45 PM, and arrive back in Dominica at 6:20 PM. This flight utilizes LIAT’s Embraer ERJ-145 jet, highlighting the company’s fleet modernization and renewed focus on frequency and reliability.
Punta Cana’s appeal as a world-class resort destination meshes with Dominica’s growing reputation for nature tourism, offering travelers new options for multistop vacations and fostering market diversification.
With these additions, LIAT Air cements its role as a pivotal carrier in Caribbean aviation, rekindling the spirit of the region’s traditional air bridge under a revitalized model. The recent launches join a spate of new routes in 2025, including services to Barbuda and Jamaica, as the airline’s network grows to match regional demand and changing travel patterns.
The carrier also recently announced plans for Antigua–Guyana flights, reinforcing the Eastern Caribbean’s direct links with South America.
These routes are expected to drive a notable uptick in tourism between the Eastern Caribbean and the Dominican Republic, a country experiencing record inbound arrivals and emerging as a hub for airlines serving both North and South America. The increased connectivity will facilitate business trips, educational exchanges, trade, and family travel, as well as boost visitor arrivals at both ends.
Travel sector leaders have highlighted that LIAT Air’s expansion not only improves flight options for Caribbean nationals but also enhances accessibility for international visitors, supporting hotel occupancy, hospitality services, and tourism supply chains in the winter high season.
According to LIAT Air, the new network strategy is geared towards supporting economic development, diaspora mobility, and cultural exchange. By offering direct and reliable services to growing destinations like Santo Domingo and Punta Cana, the airline is making it easier for the Caribbean’s diverse populations to access business, medical, educational, and leisure opportunities across language and cultural lines.
In addition to passenger service, the flights create new channels for the movement of goods and services, underpinning inter-island trade and business partnerships.
Tickets are available for booking through LIAT Air’s official platform and authorized travel agents. The company encourages early reservations to secure introductory fares and popular travel dates. The launch is part of a broader initiative to make Caribbean air travel smoother, more convenient, and more inclusive.
With its revitalized network, LIAT Air continues to play a central role in connecting economies, communities, and cultures throughout the region at a time when streamlined travel is more essential than ever.
The post LIAT Air Launches New Caribbean Routes, Boosting Regional and Dominican Republic Connectivity: Here’s What You Need to Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.The Eastern Caribbean’s air connectivity is set to strengthen with Bahamasair’s new nonstop route between Fort Lauderdale-Hollywood International Airport and North Eleuthera Airport starting November 23, 2025, alongside LIAT Air’s launches of Antigua to Santo Domingo and Dominica to Punta Cana flights in December. These developments underscore the region’s ongoing commitment to boosting tourism, facilitating business travel, and enhancing access to some of the Caribbean’s most beloved destinations.
Bahamasair’s new service will operate every Wednesday and Sunday through January 4, 2026. Flights depart Fort Lauderdale in the early afternoon, arriving in North Eleuthera two hours later with return legs timed to offer convenient day travel. Introductory roundtrip fares start at dollar three hundred sixteen, making it a compelling option for travelers seeking the Bahamas’ famed pink-sand beaches, charming pastel towns, and tranquil atmosphere without requiring long-haul flights.
North Eleuthera serves as a gateway to Harbour Island and Spanish Wells, reachable by short ferry rides, ideal for quick getaways or extended Caribbean escapes. Destinations like Governor’s Harbour and Cape Eleuthera resort further highlight the island’s appeal as a destination for authentic natural beauty and relaxed leisure travel.
Capitalizing on rising leisure and business demand, LIAT Air will introduce a weekly Friday flight between Antigua and Santo Domingo starting December 12, 2025. Operated with the ATR 42-600 aircraft, the route offers afternoon departures facilitating day or multi-day visits to the Dominican capital with competitive introductory fares. In addition, LIAT Air will start two weekly flights on Tuesdays and Saturdays between Dominica and Punta Cana beginning December 9, operated on Embraer ERJ-145 jets. The service connects Dominica’s eco-tourism offerings with Punta Cana’s large resort market, enabling diverse travel experiences and enhanced destination access.
These new air routes come at a pivotal moment for Caribbean travel, facilitating greater regional mobility while supporting the tourism sector’s growth objectives. By improving access among the Eastern Caribbean islands and the Dominican Republic, airlines like Bahamasair and LIAT Air help stimulate local economies through increased visitor spending, extended stays, and greater cultural interaction.
Travel demand from North America and intra-Caribbean travelers is expected to benefit substantially from these shorter, more frequent routes, feeding hotel, dining, and service industries in each destination.
Bahamasair employs a modern ATR 42-600 aircraft for the new North Eleuthera route, reflecting fleet upgrades aimed at improved efficiency and comfort. LIAT Air continues to leverage its growing fleet, featuring Embraer ERJ-145 jets and ATR turboprops, to serve diverse markets ranging from short island hops to slightly longer regional flights. This fleet diversity enables schedule flexibility and scalable offerings tailored to seasonality and passenger volumes.
Both airlines have outlined plans for continued route development across the Caribbean, including LIAT’s anticipated new link to Guyana and Bahamasair’s sustained emphasis on connecting Florida and the Bahamas. These strategies demonstrate a shared vision of fostering a robust, interconnected Caribbean aviation market that supports tourism, trade, and community ties throughout the region.
Passengers can book tickets from late 2025 via official airline websites and authorized travel agents. Early bookings are encouraged to secure promotional fares and desired travel dates, especially for holiday and high-season travel to the Caribbean’s premier leisure destinations.
The introduction of these direct flights represents a welcome expansion of travel options, helping visitors bypass complex connections and facilitating easier access to some of the Caribbean’s most stunning island experiences.
Image Credit: BahamasAir
The post Bahamasair Expands Caribbean Connectivity with New Nonstop Routes Starting December 2025: All You Need to Know appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Located in the beautiful Wadi El Gemal nature reserve along Egypt’s Red Sea coast, Al-Qula’an, an Ababda-managed eco-village, is providing an effective model of community-based eco-tourism. Through its shift from a subsistence fishing-based community to eco-tourism, the village is helping safeguard its delicate mangrove habitats while providing travelers with a rich cultural, environmentally friendly travel experience. Al-Qula’an’s innovative blend of traditional practice and contemporary eco-tourism principles raises the standard for sustainable tourism worldwide, demonstrating how tourism development can harmoniously exist alongside environmental protection.
Al-Qula’an has made a transformational shift from traditional subsistence fishing to community-based eco-tourism, aligning local economic needs with environmental protection. Once dependent on fishing for livelihood, the village now embraces eco-tourism as a way to create long-term economic stability while conserving the sensitive ecosystems surrounding the mangrove coastlines.
The village’s transition has involved engaging locals in tourism management, where traditional knowledge of the region’s ecosystems plays a key role in maintaining a balance between economic activity and ecological preservation. This strategy benefits both the Ababda community and the environment, proving that sustainable practices can serve as a strong alternative to more destructive development models.
One of Al-Qula’an’s key environmental focuses is the preservation of its mangrove ecosystems, which serve as essential nursery habitats for marine life and nesting sites for endangered sea turtles. Mangroves are vital for maintaining biodiversity in the region and act as a natural barrier against coastal erosion. The tourism model emphasizes visitor education about the importance of these coastal ecosystems and how responsible eco-tourism can directly contribute to their conservation.
Through sustainable tourism practices, the village helps maintain these critical habitats while also educating visitors on the importance of preserving natural sites, ensuring that tourism development enhances rather than exploits the region’s delicate environments. Marine life benefits from the protection of the mangroves, and initiatives such as these can be extended to other coastal regions in Egypt and beyond, where eco-tourism becomes a tool for marine conservation.
In line with Al-Qula’an’s commitment to sustainability, the village implemented solar power and desalination technology in 2018 to power small-scale tourism facilities. By harnessing renewable energy and providing clean water through desalination, the village minimizes its reliance on external resources, reducing its environmental footprint and ensuring a sustainable infrastructure for the future.
These efforts are part of the broader eco-tourism model that blends modern green technology with traditional practices. Solar panels and desalination systems not only reduce the village’s carbon footprint but also showcase the feasibility of integrating renewable resources into remote tourism operations, particularly in areas where access to conventional utilities is limited.
Al-Qula’an’s eco-tourism success is also supported by the $14.25 million UNDP–Egyptian Red Sea Initiative, which launched in 2024. The initiative provides financial and technical support for community businesses in the Red Sea region through 2030, with a focus on reducing pressure for large-scale, high-impact developments in the area.
Through the UNDP initiative, the village receives continued support in business development, environmental education, and tourism infrastructure, empowering the Ababda community to expand their eco-tourism efforts while protecting the surrounding environment. This program provides a sustainable growth framework, encouraging local communities to adopt eco-friendly practices and scale their businesses without sacrificing the integrity of the natural surroundings.
The UNDP initiative also serves as a counterpoint to proposals for high-impact developments in nearby sites, such as Ras Hankorab, which have been met with local opposition due to potential environmental and social impacts. Al-Qula’an’s eco-village model stands as a stark contrast to these proposals, showing how small-scale, community-driven initiatives can generate economic opportunities without compromising environmental integrity.
While large-scale resorts and developments may promise significant returns, they often come at the cost of local culture and natural landscapes. Al-Qula’an’s model provides a sustainable alternative, demonstrating that tourism can flourish when managed responsibly and with a focus on preserving the community’s cultural and ecological heritage.
Al-Qula’an’s success is a testament to the power of community engagement and local stewardship in creating sustainable tourism models. By combining traditional knowledge with modern eco-tourism practices, the village has created a blueprint for other communities in Egypt and around the world to follow. As global demand for eco-tourism continues to rise, Al-Qula’an serves as an example of how tourism can contribute to the local economy while protecting the environment.
The village is also an example of how cultural tourism and ecological preservation can coexist in a mutually beneficial relationship. Visitors not only experience the beauty of the Red Sea coastline and the mangroves but also gain a deeper understanding of the region’s cultural significance and environmental challenges. This intersection of cultural tourism and nature conservation could become a model for other protected areas across Egypt and the Middle East, where communities can use tourism to protect their heritage while generating income.
Al-Qula’an keeps on developing as a prime eco-tourism spot, it shows that it is possible that economic growth and sustainability do not go hand in hand. The village has shown that it is possible for tourism to be a positive force with local knowledge, community participation, and stewardship of the environment, improving the lives of the residents while keeping nature’s beauty intact.
Looking to the future, Al-Qula’an is not only a success story in ecotourism—it is a model for sustainable rural development across the globe. By emphasizing cultural preservation and environmental protection, the village has demonstrated how tourism can provide a better, more sustainable future for both the local community and the industry as a whole.
The post Al-Qula’an, Eco-Village in Egypt Promotes New Community-Led Eco-Tourism to Protect its Mangrove Coastlines and Fostering a Sustainable Ecosystem appeared first on Travel And Tour World.Football fans across the globe were left stunned as England captain Harry Kane was omitted from the 2025 FIFPRO Men’s World 11 shortlist, despite a record-breaking spell at Bayern Munich that has seen him rack up a jaw-dropping 74 goals in 71 appearances since his switch from Tottenham Hotspur, Softfootball reports.
The announcement sparked widespread debate across social media, with many supporters and pundits alike questioning how one of Europe’s most consistent finishers could be overlooked after such a prolific run of form.
According to the International Federation of Professional Footballers (FIFPRO), the 26-man shortlist was officially unveiled via their X handle earlier today, setting the football community abuzz.They posted;
The 26-player shortlist for the 2025 FIFPRO Men's World 11 – as voted by players worldwide.
— FIFPRO (@FIFPRO) October 27, 2025
The team will be revealed on 03.11.2025. pic.twitter.com/bnu1umSCKw
Among the dazzling nominees is Ousmane Dembélé, the newly crowned 2025 Ballon d’Or winner, whose exciting displays for Paris Saint-Germain have elevated him into world-class territory. Once plagued by inconsistency, the Frenchman has enjoyed a redemption arc this year, combining flair with end product in a way that has finally silenced his critics.
There’s also room for football’s enduring legends, as Lionel Messi and Cristiano Ronaldo two ever-present names in global football’s elite—once again make the cut, joined by Kylian Mbappé, who continues to shine since joining Real Madrid.
Meanwhile, Mohamed Salah, a three-time PFA Player of the Year, maintains his place among the world’s best after another brilliant campaign with Liverpool, proving once again that consistency is his superpower.
Other notable inclusions are Erling Haaland, Jude Bellingham, Kevin De Bruyne, and teenage prodigy Lamine Yamal, who continues to dazzle for Barcelona.
The FIFPRO World 11 remains unique as the only global football award decided entirely by players themselves, making it one of the most respected recognitions in the sport.
The final Best XI will be revealed on November 3, and while Kane’s absence will undoubtedly fuel debate, the blend of legends, leaders, and new stars ensures this year’s lineup will be nothing short of spectacular.
Key takeaways
ZEC, the native coin of the ZCash ecosystem, has continued its rally, up 12% in the last 24 hours. The rally comes after the coin added 380% to its value in the last 30 days, outperforming other major cryptocurrencies.
The positive performance comes after Solana, the world’s second-largest smart contract platform, launched wrapped ZEC via the Zolana bridge. The wrapped tokens function as standard Solana Program Library (SPL) tokens. Hence, they don’t offer the privacy protections inherent to native Zcash.
Furthermore, they are backed 1:1 by native ZEC but do not conceal balances or transaction data.
The ZEC/USD 4-hour chart is bullish and efficient thanks to the coin’s ongoing rally. The technical indicators are bullish, suggesting that buyers are currently in control. The bullish trend could see ZEC’s price surge higher in the near term.
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) of 67 shows a bullish bias, with the buyers currently in control. The MACD lines are also within the positive region, suggesting that the price could surge higher in the near term.
If the bullish trend continues, ZEC could rally towards the $400 level over the next few hours or days. An extended bullish run would allow ZEC to hit a multi-year high of $500 in the coming days or weeks.
However, if ZEC faces a correction following its recent run, it could retrace to the ILQ at $318 over the next few hours. Further downtrend could see ZEC drop to the major support and TLQ level at $235. This support level will likely hold in the medium term, allowing ZEC to build on its recent run.
The post ZEC rallies 12% as bullish momentum continues; Check forecast appeared first on CoinJournal.
The latest updates suggest that Luciano Spalletti is the current frontrunner to become the new head coach of Juventus following the sacking of Igor Tudor, but how would the former Italy CT line up with the Bianconeri, and which tactics would he look to deploy?
Juventus confirmed the sacking of head coach Tudor on Monday following a run of eight games without a win across Serie A and the Champions League. The Old Lady had also gone four games without scoring. Their last victory came in a 4-3 win over Inter in the Derby d’Italia on September 13.
Several coaches have already been linked with a move to the Allianz Stadium, including Raffaele Palladino and Roberto Mancini, but Spalletti is considered the current frontrunner, and has already been in direct talks with the club.
Spalletti has deployed a number of different formations across his recent spells in charge of the Italy national team, Napoli and Inter.
Most recently, Spalletti played with a 3-5-1-1 during his final matches in charge of the Italy national team, given that he had plenty of midfielders but hardly any options to choose from at centre-forward or on the wings. He had also used a 4-2-3-1 or 4-3-3 in the build-up to and during EURO 2024.
With Napoli, a 4-3-3 built around centre-forward Victor Osimhen and left winger Khvicha Kvaratskhelia was the norm during Spalletti’s Scudetto-winning season in 2022-23.
With Inter, a 4-2-3-1 was Spalletti’s usual go-to, and, given the options currently available at Juventus, it would make sense if he deployed that same system in Turin.
Under Tudor, Juventus had often lined up with a back three, but following the injury to Gleison Bremer, the Bianconeri have been left with just four centre-back options to select from, which does not leave them with much cover, or possibilities to rotate.
Given that the current Juventus squad is not blessed with an abundance of central midfield options, it would make sense to see Manuel Locatelli and Khephren Thuram keep their places in a double-pivot.
There would then be several options to deploy in the no.10 role, including posterboy Kenan Yildiz, summer signing Jonathan David and the out-of-favour Teun Koopmeiners, all of whom offer different qualities.
(4-2-3-1): Di Gregorio; Joao Mario, Kalulu, Bremer, Cambiaso; Locatelli, Thuram; Conceicao, David, Yildiz; Vlahvoic.
Massimiliano Allegri insists Milan remain equipped to keep winning despite a growing injury list, as the Rossoneri prepare for a difficult away match against Atalanta.
Speaking on the eve of the Bergamo trip, the coach confirmed that several key players are close to returning but also stressed that the squad must stay focused and avoid excuses.
Allegri revealed positive news on the recovery front.
“Tomorrow we will have Loftus-Cheek back. Before the match against Parma we hope to have Pulisic on the bench, while we expect Estupiñán to return for the Roma game after the international break,” he said, with quotes via MilanNews.
The coach also noted that “Jashari should begin rejoining the group from Wednesday, but he will need time.”
Despite the absences, Allegri refused to dwell on who is unavailable. “We have a small squad, but it is enough to face the games between now and the break,” he insisted.
“The Milan squad is strong. These injuries can happen, but we are in good physical condition and have played some good technical matches. We must not think about who is missing, we have other very good players who can play.”
The Rossoneri boss also pushed back against the idea that missing Pulisic, Estupiñán or others would define the team’s results. “It’s not as if we win or lose just because five players are out,” Allegri continued.
“When we are back at full strength, we will only improve – this is a strong Milan squad.”
Milan travel to Bergamo with little margin for error, facing one of Serie A’s most intense and physical opponents. Allegri’s message, however, is clear: no alibis, no fear – just continuity and focus.
Watch and listen to the latest news updates from the world of Calcio courtesy of Football Italia expert Alfredo Pedullà.
Today’s focus is on the sacking of Igor Tudor by Juventus, who was let go from his role as head coach of the Bianconeri this morning.
The Old Lady suffered a 1-0 defeat to Lazio in the Capital last night and this was the straw that broke the camel’s back for the Juventus coach.
Pedullà discusses how this decision was inevitable, especially after last night painted a portrait of a fractured and disheartened Juventus.
A group of Juventus ultras have expressed their support for recently-sacked head coach Igor Tudor, just a few hours after his departure was officially confirmed by the club: ‘One of us’.
Juventus announced on Monday that they had parted company with head coach Tudor, who had gone eight games without a win in all competitions and four games without a goal, ending with a 1-0 defeat away against Lazio on Sunday evening.
Football Italia understands that the Bianconeri have already been in direct contact with former Italy national team head coach Luciano Spalletti, who is considered the first-choice candidate to replace Tudor at the Allianz Stadium.
Just a few hours after Tudor’s sacking was officially announced, Juventus ultras from the Curva Sud erected a banner outside the Allianz Stadium, expressing their support for the recently-departed Tudor.
“Tudor one of us, the fish stinks from the head,” the banner outside the Juventus stadium read.
Striscione comparso fuori dall’#AllianzStadium. #Juventus #Tudor pic.twitter.com/0IRlxJEbQ0
— Ale Cibien (@_cibi99_) October 27, 2025
Tudor was given a run of 24 competitive matches in charge of Juventus, including his stint as interim head coach at the end of the 2024-25 season. He recorded an average of 1.58 points per game over that period.
He is the third Bianconeri head coach to depart in 18 months, following the dismissals of Thiago Motta and Massimiliano Allegri in March 2025 and May 2024 respectively.
Luciano Spalletti is the name at the top of Juventus’s shortlist of potential replacements for Igor Tudor, who was dismissed from his role as head coach on Monday, and Football Italia can reveal that there has now been direct contact between the Bianconeri and the former Italy national team head coach.
Juventus parted company with Tudor on Monday morning following a run of eight games without a win in any competition and a run of four matches without scoring a goal. The Croatian’s final match in charge ended in a 1-0 defeat away against Lazio at the Stadio Olimpico on Sunday evening.
The latest news is that there has now been direct contact between Spalletti and representatives from Juventus. An intermediary is involved and the club approve of the decision to move forwards in negotiations with Spalletti.
Spalletti has given his full availability to taking over at Juve, and is seeking an 18-month contract. He would, however, be willing to accept a deal until the end of the 2025-26 season with an option to extend for a further year.
Other coaches who have been linked with the job, namely Raffaele Palladino and Roberto Mancini, remain alternative options for the Old Lady for now.
Juventus are hoping to close a deal with Spalletti, but they still need to reach an agreement.
Aldredo Pedullà analyses Juventus’ 1-0 loss against Lazio on Sunday, highlighting Igor Tudor’s mistakes, which eventually led to his dismissal, and Maurizio Sarri’s breakthrough.
Tudor’s final game as the Juventus coach saw the Croat tactician make several tactical changes that, in the end, created a hybrid and increased confusion for the players.
Juventus have not scored in the last four games and are without a win since September 13.
On the other hand, Lazio coach Sarri silenced his critics despite having many starters forced to the sidelines and despite having a team without new signings, due to a transfer embargo imposed on the club in the summer.
Watch the full analysis in the video below.
Gazzetta dello Sport reports that Tottenham and Bayern Munich are showing ‘real interest’ in struggling Juventus striker Dusan Vlahovic.
The Serbia international remains Juventus’ best scorer this season with four goals in 11 appearances across all competitions, but has not found the net since September 16.
Last night, he started in a 1-0 loss against Lazio, which marked Juventus’ third consecutive loss and Igor Tudor’s dismissal.
Juventus have not scored in four consecutive matches for the first time since 1991 and have gone eight games without winning for the first time since 2009.
Tudor had replaced Thiago Motta in March 2025, but it would be a mistake to consider him as only responsible for Juventus’ downfall in recent weeks.
Gazzetta noted that Juventus lack high-level players in the team and analysed the Vlahovic case.
“Tudor changes the factors, but the product remains the same,” wrote Gazzetta dello Sport vice-editor Stefano Agresti.
“Juventus haven’t seen similar numbers since the Maifredi era in 1991.
“Vlahovic has lost the magic that had brought him back in harmony with the black-and-white world.
“The Serbian striker neither scores nor helps the team, sending the coach into a tailspin when it comes to choosing the formation and the focal point in attack.
“He could leave in January as Tottenham and Bayern Munich are showing real interest.”
Vlahovic’s contract at the Allianz Stadium expires at the end of the season, so the Bianconeri will be willing to listen to offers in the winter transfer window.
Parma coach Carlos Cuesta says his side will need humility, intensity and complete collective focus as they prepare to face Roma at the Stadio Olimpico in Tuesday’s midweek Serie A round.
With the league immediately returning after the weekend fixtures, the Crociati now face one of the toughest away matches on the calendar – and will have to do so without most of their travelling fans, following restrictions on away ticket sales to Parma residents.
Cuesta was full of respect for the Giallorossi when speaking in his pre-match press conference. “Roma are a very strong, solid team with clear ideas,” he said, via TMW.
“Their coach is a reference point in this league for what he has done and what he has inspired. It will be a difficult match that we must approach with humility and confidence.”
On the coaching duel, Cuesta smiled at the contrast in experience: “I want to learn from everyone, and he is certainly a major reference. Roma transform quickly under his guidance. We go there with the will to play our football and to play well.”
Rotation could be a factor, but Cuesta stressed mentality over names. “We will always choose the players who are most ready. Matches last more than 90 minutes – everyone must be ready to make a positive impact.”
Roma’s threat is no mystery to him. “We expect a Roma side that wants to play in our half, attack space and press without the ball. They are solid, aggressive and flexible. We must be ready for every scenario.”
Despite Parma’s goal struggles, Cuesta remains calm. “We are convinced the goals will come. When you give everything, there is nothing more you can ask.”
Sunderland have made a fantastic start to their Premier League return, with a number of players impressing for Regis Le Bris’ side. However, they could soon feel the force of this, as clubs have started to take notice.
Saturday’s memorable 2-1 victory over Chelsea elevated Sunderland into the top four of the Premier League, and although they will not expect to stay there, they are well on their way to avoiding relegation, which was their goal at the beginning of the campaign.
One player that has stood out for Sunderland is Wilson Isidor, who scored in the victory at Chelsea. However, there is a feeling that he could be set to leave in 2026.
Aston Villa are one of the clubs interested in Isidor, and according to Mick Brown (via Football Insider), Sunderland will find it difficult to keep the 25-year-old forward come next summer.
“Unfortunately, this is the way it tends to work. If you get promoted from the Championship and start the season strongly, and your players are proving they can impress at this level, it’s going to attract interest. It’s a difficult situation for Sunderland, really, because they obviously want to keep these players.
“Isidor in particular is attracting interest and a lot of top clubs have had scouts watching him. They’ll have been keeping tabs on his performance against Chelsea, because that shows he can do it against the top sides and not just those down the bottom.
“Sunderland experienced it in the Championship last season, with clubs looking at their players. It’s no different now, and whether it’s Isidor or anybody else, I expect they’ll be determined not to lose them after having such a good start.”
For now, Sunderland will continue to enjoy Isidor, but there may be a feeling that he could be taken away in 2026.
The post Sunderland poised to receive Aston Villa offer for 25-year-old star appeared first on CaughtOffside.
Google is currently working on its next major software update for Pixel devices—also known as Pixel Feature Drop—for a November 4, 2025 release. This update will deliver several key upgrades. However, among all of them stands out a substantial boost to customization through the introduction of Theme Packs for Google Pixel phones.
This isn’t the first time we’ve heard about this feature. It’s been highly anticipated among Pixel fans, as it has the potential to finally break the customization limitations on these devices compared to third-party Android implementations (such as One UI and Chinese custom skins).
According to Mystic Leaks, the long-rumored Theme Packs feature is finally ready for public release. These packs will represent more than minor color tweaks. They will offer comprehensive, system-wide aesthetic changes. The initial launch will involve a high-profile collaboration, with the first official theme drawing inspiration from the film “Wicked: For Good,” conveniently coinciding with the movie’s first screenings. This joint launch suggests Google plans to launch collaborative Themes constantly in the future.
That said, the upcoming Drop also includes a couple of major new features. First, for the creators, The Pixel Studio app is gaining new animation functionality that uses generative AI. Users will be able to transform their existing photos and GIFs into short, dynamic video clips. There are no details yet on which AI model will be behind this feature. However, it is likely powered by the latest Veo 3.1. This new tool will offer a simple way for users to add dynamic motion to their static media.
Lastly, the other star feature of the update will help users manage communication overload. The Pixel VIP feature will let you prioritize notifications from contacts designated as “VIPs.” Its scope will initially be limited to conversations within WhatsApp and Google Messages. However, it leaves the door open for potential integration with more messaging services and apps in the future.
The post Google Pixel Phones Will Finally Get Theme Packs Soon appeared first on Android Headlines.
If you’ve got an iPhone or a phone with a MagSafe-compatible case, then you should definitely consider picking up this MagSafe phone grip accessory, because this Amazon deal knocks the price down to just $8.98. That’s a respectable price for an accessory like this one, which has multiple uses. Normally, this thing is also $11.99 at full price, so why not save a few extra bucks, right?
As for what this does, it’s a MagSafe phone grip. It has a ring shape on it that allows you to slip your finger through and hold the phone more securely. This is great for holding the device one-handed, especially if you’re typing. This also serves as a kickstand, and its design allows it to be used as a kickstand while the phone is in landscape or horizontal orientations.
This is a neat little trick because once you’re done holding it, you can set it down on your desk or table or any other flat surface, and prop the kickstand part out to stand the phone up. It doesn’t charge your device, so if you need to charge the phone and want to charge it via the MagSafe, then you’ll have to take this off while you do that. You also won’t have to be worried about safety with this magnet accessory attached, because it has a super-strong magnet inside. It’s strong enough to hold up to 5.5 lbs., which is around 2,500g, and that’s more than enough to keep your phone attached.
The post This MagSafe phone grip is also a kickstand, and it's only $9 appeared first on Android Headlines.
Charging up your devices can be a pain in the neck if you don’t have enough outlets to plug everything in, but luckily, this deal on the flat 6-in-1 charging station from Anker can save you from those terrible moments. As the name suggests, the Anker Nano 6-in-1 flat charging station will let you charge or power up to six devices at a time. Normally, this charging station accessory would end up costing you $49.99. However, Amazon has it on sale for $37.99 today.
Aside from having the capability to power six devices, here’s what makes this charging station so good. First, it has a flat plug. With the flat plug, you can easily plug the charging station into an outlet, even if it’s behind furniture. Ideally, you wouldn’t need this sort of solution. However, sometimes the only available outlets are stuck behind couches, desks, or other furniture that needs to be up against the wall. The flat plug allows you to bypass this hurdle. The charging station itself is also quite flat, with two additional AC outlets and four USB ports. Two of those USB ports are USB-C.
And if it wasn’t already obvious from the picture, the cable is also thin and flat, which not only helps it fit behind stuff but also does a good job at preventing it from tangling up. The main reasons for grabbing an accessory like this are to charge multiple devices at once and help get rid of cable clutter from multiple chargers. This also comes in three colors.
The post Anker's flat 6-in-1 Nano charging station is down to just $38 appeared first on Android Headlines.
We’ve seen how AI can generate text. Later, we also saw how AI can generate images and videos. So, AI that generates music? Why not? And that’s something that OpenAI is reportedly working on, which is generative AI music.
According to a report from The Information, it has learned that OpenAI is developing a new AI tool that would allow users to create generative music. This means that similar to generative text, images, and videos, users can just type in a prompt using natural language, and the AI will create a song for them on the fly.
The report goes on to state that OpenAI is apparently working with students from the prestigious Juilliard School to annotate scores. This will help the AI model train itself on music. That being said, if this report is accurate, OpenAI won’t be the first to launch such a tool. Platforms like Sumo and SOUNDRAW already offer similar capabilities.
However, we suppose the potential upside is that OpenAI might bake this feature into ChatGPT. This will give ChatGPT even more tools, making it a more well-rounded AI model compared to those designed for niche purposes.
That being said, we have to wonder what the world and the industry think about this. At the moment, most people seem to be against AI-generated content. This is especially true when it comes to text, images, and videos, which have been labelled as “AI slop.” However, there could be some potential use here.
Content creators right now have a few options when it comes to using music in their videos. They can either pick from a library of songs that are copyright-approved, find their own royalty-free music, or pay a third-party platform to license music. Otherwise, they risk having their videos pulled, muted, and accounts suspended. Giving these creators the ability to generate something on the fly could be one way around that.
Plus, we’re sure that there are many musicians, record labels, and music publishers who might be concerned that their content is being used to train these AI models without their consent or compensation. We’ve already seen artists, writers, and publishers sue AI companies, so it’s not entirely out of the question.
The post OpenAI May Launch its Own Generative AI Music Tool appeared first on Android Headlines.
Google’s Pixel Watch 3 is still one of the best smartwatches out there that you can buy. Even at its regular price, it’s an enticing purchase because it has plenty of awesome features, and it’s Google’s first watch to come in a 45mm size. Still, it becomes an even better value when you can save money on it, and that time is now, as Amazon has it on sale for $100 off.
Normally, the Pixel Watch 3 in the 45mm size would cost you $299. However, Amazon has it on sale for $199. This is the all-time low price for the watch, and quite honestly, well worth it if you don’t feel like spending close to $200 more for the latest model.
The Pixel Watch 3 features everything from advanced sleep tracking to automatic activity tracking of several different types of exercises. Naturally, it works as a great device to keep you informed on smartphone notifications without having to pull your phone out of your pocket or purse or wherever else you may have it stowed away. Plus, now that it has Gemini available, the watch has become even more useful. You can also use the Pixel Watch 3 for Google Pay payments at checkout stands and for Google Maps directions. You can even set navigation up to display the navigation on the watch display, which makes driving navigation way easier, as you can just lift your wrist for a quick peek.
The post Google's second-best Pixel Watch is now on sale for $100 off appeared first on Android Headlines.
The Google Pixel 10 series has been in the stores for weeks. With their cutting-edge features and refined design, they are devices worth protecting and accessorizing. Since its launch, the market has been flooded with a vast array of cases and accessories. To help you navigate the options, we’ve curated a list of the best cases in various categories, ensuring your Google Pixel 10 is not only safeguarded but also enhanced to fit your lifestyle. All our selections are readily available on Amazon, making it easy to get your hands on these top-tier products.
For those who prioritize a secure hold on their device, the dbrand Grip Case for the Google Pixel 10 is in a league of its own.
Engineered with microscopic ridges along the sides, dbrand’s Grip Case offers an unparalleled grip that significantly reduces the likelihood of accidental drops. The tactile texture provides a confident and comfortable feel in your hand, making it ideal for one-handed use and for those on the go.
Beyond its impressive grip, the dbrand Grip Case doesn’t skimp on protection. It boasts military-grade impact resistance to safeguard your Pixel 10 from everyday tumbles. The case is also fully compatible with dbrand’s extensive collection of skins. This allows you to customize the look of your phone without compromising on the secure grip that makes this case a standout choice. The design you see in the image above is just one of dozens of options to choose from.
When maximum protection is your top priority, the Spigen Tough Armor for the Google Pixel 10 is the case to beat.
This case is built to withstand serious impacts. It features a dual-layer design that combines a flexible TPU interior with a hard polycarbonate exterior. It also incorporates Spigen’s Air Cushion Technology in the corners for enhanced shock absorption during drops.
Despite its robust construction, the Spigen Tough Armor maintains a relatively slim profile and includes a built-in kickstand for hands-free viewing. The precise cutouts ensure easy access to all ports and buttons, and the raised edges provide excellent protection for the screen and camera. If you lead an active lifestyle or simply want peace of mind knowing your Pixel 10 is safe from harsh conditions, the Tough Armor is a reliable choice.
For an all-around excellent case that perfectly complements the Google Pixel 10, look no further than Google’s own Pixelsnap Case.
This case offers a great fit and is designed to work seamlessly with the phone’s new PixelSnap technology. This ensures a secure connection with compatible magnetic accessories. The case provides reliable protection against everyday drops and scratches without adding unnecessary bulk. While it’s not an ultra-slim case, it maintains the slim profile of your device.
The Pixelsnap Case is crafted from a soft-touch silicone that feels great in hand and enhances grip. The finish reduces the chances of accidental slips. It also features a soft microfiber lining to keep your Pixel 10 free from scuffs. There’s also a variety of colors to match your personal style and the phone’s own colorways.
Maybe you’re looking to protect your Google Pixel 10 from scratches and minor bumps without sacrificing its sleek design. Well, the Mous Super Thin Case is an exceptional option.
This case is impressively slim and lightweight, adding minimal bulk to your phone, so it still feels comfortable in your pocket. It’s constructed from a durable yet flexible material that provides a surprising amount of protection for such a slender profile.
The Mous Super Thin Case features a minimalist design that lets the aesthetics of your Pixel 10 shine through. It’s also compatible with Pixelsnap accessories. So, you can take advantage of the magnetic ecosystem without needing a thicker case. For those who prioritize a minimalist feel and want to keep their device as close to its original form as possible, this case is the top contender.
If you’re looking to elevate the look and feel of your Google Pixel 10, the premium Bellroy Leather Case is another great option.
This case is a product of a partnership between Bellroy and Google. The partnership ensures a perfect fit and seamless integration with the phone’s features. The case is crafted from high-quality, eco-tanned leather that develops a unique patina over time.
The Bellroy Leather Case offers a slim profile while still providing ample protection for your device. The interior is lined with a soft microfiber to prevent scratches, and the edges are slightly raised to protect the screen and camera. For those who appreciate the touch of elegance of genuine leather, the Bellroy case is calling you.
For those who value both style and convenience, the TORRO Premium Leather Wallet Case for the Google Pixel 10 is an excellent all-in-one solution.
Crafted from genuine top-grain leather, this folio-style case exudes a classic and sophisticated look. The supple leather not only feels great in the hand but also offers durable protection against daily wear and tear.
Inside, the TORRO case features a soft microfiber lining and multiple card slots. This allows you to carry your essential cards and some cash alongside your phone. The case also has a built-in stand function, perfect for watching videos or making video calls. This TORRO case integrates a nice combination of premium materials, practical features, and robust protection.
Protecting the vibrant display of your Google Pixel 10 is crucial. Fortunately, the Spigen GlasTR EZ FIT Tempered Glass screen protector makes it incredibly easy.
This screen protector is made from durable 9H hardness tempered glass to defend against scratches and cracks. It also features an oleophobic coating to resist fingerprints and smudges.
What sets the GlasTR EZ FIT apart is its innovative auto-alignment installation tray. This ensures a perfect, bubble-free application every time. The screen protector offers edge-to-edge coverage without interfering with most cases and maintains the original touch sensitivity and display clarity of your Pixel 10. If you want reliable and hassle-free screen protection, the Spigen GlasTR EZ FIT is a top choice.
The Spigen O-Mag Ring is a versatile accessory that enhances both the grip and functionality of your phone, working perfectly with the native Qi2 magnets of the Google Pixel 10.
This magnetic ring attaches securely to the back of your phone, providing a comfortable and stable loop for your finger. This drastically improves one-handed use, making it much easier and safer to navigate the large cover and main screens.
In addition to being a secure grip, the O-Mag Ring doubles as a durable kickstand. It rotates 360 degrees, allowing you to prop your Google Pixel 10 up in either or portrait landscape mode at various angles, which is perfect for watching videos, taking video calls, and more. Its strong magnetic attachment makes it easy to snap on when you need it and remove for wireless charging.
Keep your Google Pixel 10 powered up on the go with the Anker Nano Power Bank.
This compact and portable charger packs a 10,000mAh capacity, which is enough to provide multiple charges for your Google Pixel 10. It features a built-in USB-C cable that doubles as a carrying loop, so you never have to worry about forgetting your charging cable.
The Anker Nano Power Bank delivers up to 30W of power. So, it perfectly matches the fast-charging power supported by the device. The charger also has an additional USB-C and USB-A port for charging other devices. There’s an informative display that shows you the remaining battery percentage, so you’ll always know when it’s time to recharge the power bank itself. For a reliable charging solution, the Anker Nano Power Bank is an excellent Google Pixel 10 companion.
For the most seamless and efficient wireless charging experience for your Google Pixel 10, the official Google Pixelsnap Wireless Charger is the way to go.
This charger is specifically designed to work with the Google Pixel 10’s PixelSnap technology. This ensures perfect alignment and optimal charging speeds every time you place your phone on it. The magnetic connection makes it easy to use, even in the dark.
The Pixelsnap Wireless Charger delivers a fast and reliable charge. Plus, its minimalist design looks great on any desk or nightstand. It’s a simple and elegant solution for keeping your phone topped up without the hassle of cables. If you want the most convenient and optimized wireless charging for your new phone, the official Google charger is a great choice.
Like many other modern phones, the Google Pixel 10 doesn’t come with a power brick in the box. If you don’t have one at home, the Anker 312 Charger (30W) is an excellent and affordable option for fast charging.
This compact and powerful charger can charge your Google Pixel 10 at its maximum supported speed via USB-C.
The Anker 312 features a foldable plug, making it incredibly portable and perfect for travel. It also incorporates Anker’s safety features to protect your device from overcharging and overheating. For a reliable, fast, and compact charging solution, the Anker 312 is a must-have accessory for your handset.
The post Best Google Pixel 10 Cases & Accessories appeared first on Android Headlines.
For years, Google has been working on optimizing Android for tablets and other large-screen devices. Key feature additions like a taskbar and improved split-screen functionality have helped. However, many users agree that Android tablets still fall short of offering truly seamless, PC-level multitasking. Google is now working to close this gap by reviving and refining a powerful tool that could change how we use tablets: the ability to run any Android app in a floating bubble.
Recent findings by Android Authority suggest Google still has this “bubble anything” concept. The company now aims to better fit existing tablet workflows with an updated interface. Google is positioning it to become a seamless, general-purpose feature for power users.
The new implementation centers on a simple, intuitive drag-and-drop gesture. Code strings and accompanying animations indicate that tablet users will soon be able to drag an app icon directly from the taskbar and drop it onto one of the screen’s bottom corners. This action will immediately launch the app in a smaller, floating bubble window. Users can then move this bubble freely while simultaneously working in other applications.
This approach aligns perfectly with how other multitasking features, such as split-screen mode, currently work on Android tablets. The goal is probably to minimize the learning curve. To further ensure a smooth user transition, the code also points to a new educational tutorial with animations. This will guide users through the new drag-to-float gesture the first time they interact with the taskbar.
The current version of Android limits the “bubble” feature almost exclusively to conversation notifications from supported messaging apps. However, the evidence strongly suggests this new gesture will apply to any app placed on the taskbar. Android already allows any app icon to sit in that position. So, extending the floating window capability to all apps is a logical next step.
This broader application unlocks powerful multitasking possibilities. It may allow users to keep three, four, or more apps instantly accessible at the same time. This is a significant functional boost, particularly for smaller tablets that struggle to fit multiple applications comfortably in the standard split-screen mode. Some custom skins from other brands already integrate similar functions. However, a powerful, native solution would be very useful to add uniformity between all Android devices.
We still don’t know when these improvements will arrive in a stable release. However, the presence of a fully designed tutorial and corresponding animations suggests that this “bubble any app” Android feature is making steady progress toward a public release in a future update.
The post New Android Gesture Will Let You Run Any App in a Floating Bubble appeared first on Android Headlines.
It looks like we’re one step closer to putting this whole TikTok saga behind us. According to US Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, US President Donald Trump and China President Xi Jinping are expected to “consummate” the TikTok deal this Thursday.
According to Bessent, “We reached one in Madrid, and I believe that as of today, all the details are ironed out, and that will be for the two leaders to consummate that transaction on Thursday in Korea. My remit was to get the Chinese to agree to approve the transaction, and I believe we successfully accomplished that over the past two days.”
Last month, Trump signed an executive order that would see ByteDance sell its TikTok US operations to American-owned companies. Ever since he came into power, Trump had been pushing for China and ByteDance to sell TikTok. This was based on concerns that ByteDance is a Chinese company. The US government was worried that data of US citizens and users would be sent back to China.
Under the Biden administration, TikTok was due to be banned in the US at the start of the year. However, following Trump’s re-election, he extended the deadline of the ban several times. At one point, it looked like we would never hear the end of this whole TikTok saga. But come Thursday, Trump will officially close the TikTok deal and put it to bed once and for all.
Once the deal has been closed, TikTok’s US operations will come under control of a new board of directors. Oracle will be responsible for security operations. These board of directors are also expected to oversee TikTok’s recommendation algorithm, source code, and also take over duties when it comes to the moderation of content.
Note that this only applies to TikTok in the US. For the rest of the world, your TikTok experience should remain the same. However, we have to wonder if TikTok US could undergo a huge change. TikTok’s algorithm is kind of what gives the platform an edge over competitors like Instagram Reels.
But if US companies and engineers are taking over the algorithm to make their own tweaks, what could this mean for creators based in the country? Could they see a drop in views? We suppose we’ll have to wait and see.
The post Trump and Xi to Finalize TikTok Deal This Thursday appeared first on Android Headlines.
Google is working to make its on-device security features more transparent and manageable for users. An analysis of a recent beta version of the Play Protect Service app indicates that the company is adding updates to its Live Threat Detection tool, which uses artificial intelligence models to identify potentially malicious applications on Pixel phones and Android devices in general.
The Live Threat Detection feature fully relies on local, on-device AI. This means all the processing happens entirely on the local hardware. This approach allows for quick threat detection without requiring sending sensitive application data to Google’s cloud servers. The result is a strong layer of user privacy throughout the scanning process. Now, Google is making it friendlier and easier to use.
Currently, Android’s Live Threat Detection issues real-time alerts when it detects suspicious app behavior. However, the feature offers limited visibility beyond those initial notifications. Google is now fixing this lack of a central hub. The recent findings (by Android Authority) point to the development of a dedicated new page for the security tool. This upcoming screen is expected to clearly list all applications that the system has flagged as potential threats. Moving the threat information from individual, potentially numerous notifications to a permanent, centralized report is a great move. It improves user control and makes the security status of the device significantly easier to check at a glance.
Additionally, Google is adding a new, specific alert type focused on data harvesting. Code strings reveal a future warning designed to explicitly inform users when an application deemed unsafe is detected monitoring the device’s location or activity. This alert directly addresses a major area of concern for user privacy: applications that covertly harvest sensitive data or track user movement patterns without proper consent.
These changes aim to enhance the usefulness of Android’s security tools. The mainstream public often underestimates security improvements because they often act in the background. However, keeping your personal data safe from potential bad actors is key in today’s tech industry.
The post Android's Live Threat Detection is Getting Powerful Updates appeared first on Android Headlines.
The post ClearBank to Join Circle’s Payments Network and Expand Stablecoin Access appeared first on Coinpedia Fintech News
ClearBank, a technology-enabled clearing bank, is making a major push into digital finance to expand stablecoin use and improve cross-border payments across Europe.
ClearBank has announced a strategic framework agreement with a subsidiary of Circle Internet Group, the stablecoin giant behind USDC and EURC.
Through this partnership, the two companies will work together on a range of initiatives in the European market.
Initially, the focus will be on expanding access to USDC and EURC, Circle’s MiCA-compliant, fully reserved stablecoins, through Circle Mint in Europe. This move places ClearBank as a core infrastructure partner for banks and fintechs, that are looking for trusted, multi-currency stablecoin solutions for payments, treasury, and liquidity use cases.
ClearBank is taking another big step by planning to join Circle’s Payments Network (CPN), making it one of the first European banks to do so. This will let clients move money around the world at internet speed, with the transparency of blockchain technology.
By linking its cloud-based banking system with Circle’s infrastructure, including Circle Mint and the Circle Payments Network, ClearBank is bridging traditional and digital finance to make cross-border payments faster and cheaper.
Mark Fairless, CEO of ClearBank, said this move marks a major step in ClearBank’s growth as a cross-border payments innovator.
Sanja Kon, VP of Partnerships & Business Development, EMEA at Circle, said that this partnership will expand access to USDC and EURC, helping drive faster, more transparent payments and unlock new financial services built on “open, programmable money.”
ClearBank and Circle are also exploring additional strategic use cases, including stablecoin-based treasury solutions and future tokenized asset settlement integrations.
Circle launched the CPN in April, to connect banks, fintechs, and payment providers to settle cross-border payments in real time using regulated stablecoins like USDC and EURC. CPN supports a wide range of cross-border use cases, from payments and remittances to treasury and onchain finance.
Circle also became the first global stablecoin issuer to meet MiCA requirements in July 2024, well ahead of the regulation coming fully into effect later that year.
Clearbank’s move highlights the growing confidence among financial institutions in using stablecoins for global payments.
Anchor is a new underwater survival game from developer Fearem, which essentially mashes the kind of harsher survival crafting that players love in Rust with the underwater setting of Subnautica to create a new experience. Set in a dystopian world where a nuclear apocalypse has sent humanity into the ocean to try and find a new way to survive, you'll be able to join up with other players in the 150-player servers or lone shark your underwater journey as you try to survive on your own. It'll also feature PvE modes for those who don't want to deal with the […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/underwater-survival-game-anchor-mashes-subnautica-rust/
After NVIDIA launched its Rubin AI GPUs last month, we decided to interview Larry Yang, the chief product officer at Phononic. We were wondering about the new chips' cooling requirements given that energy constraints are closely related to AI rollout. Larry is an industry veteran with more than 30 years of experience under his belt. He has previously worked at Google, IBM, Microsoft and Cisco. Our conversation revolved around the cooling requirements for NVIDIA's and other AI chips. It also covered AI ASICs, commonly known as custom AI processors. Larry outlined that high bandwidth memory (HBM) chips are one reason […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/nvidias-ai-gpu-performance-can-be-increased-to-bring-payback-to-the-order-of-single-digit-months-says-phononic-chief-product-officer/
The GeForce RTX 4090 laptop GPU reached the performance level of RTX 5090 with a simple shunt mod, which unlocked the GPU's full potential. Redditor Unlocks RTX 4090 Laptop GPU's Potential by Adding 1m Ohm Resistor to Allow Higher Power Draw; Results in Performance Boost in Double Digits Shunt modding is a common way of unlocking a GPU's potential, which essentially allows the GPU to draw more power for achieving higher scores. A shunt resistor is used by the GPU's power management controller that measures current flow, and one can trick the GPU by adding it in the circuit to […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/user-shunt-mods-rtx-4090-laptop-achieves-over-20-performance-gains/
A new Unreal Engine 5 feature pushed to the engine's main development branch last week could pave the way for significant Lumen performance improvements across the board and for the lighting technology to be implemented in Nintendo Switch 2 games. As reported by tech artist Dylan Browne on X, Lumen Irradiance Cache, a probe-based Lumen mode for lower-end devices, is now available in the Epic engine. Compared to the default Hardware Lumen, the new mode features less occlusion detail and worse reflections, but it's still a good compromise compared to having no Lumen at all, judging from the comparison video […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/unreal-engine-5s-new-feature-could-bring-big-visual-improvements-on-nintendo-switch-2/
The U.S. Department of Energy (DoE) has reportedly collaborated with AMD on two new supercomputer projects, utilizing Team Red's latest AI chips to address scientific challenges. AMD to Collaborate With the U.S. DoE To Build Out Two Cutting-Edge Supercomputers, With Record Deployment Times Based on a new report from Reuters, it seems like AMD has managed to secure a massive partnership with the U.S. DoE, which involves the construction of two new supercomputers, mainly for academic purposes. This marks a major deal for Team Red, which is currently in pursuit of having its tech stack widely adopted by customers in […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/amd-lands-major-us-government-ai-deal-to-power-next-gen-supercomputers/
Last Friday, The Pokémon Company announced that Pokémon Legends: Z-A, the latest entry in the ever-popular monster catching franchise, had sold 5.8 million copies in its debut week. Now, Circana's Senior Director & Video Game Industry Thought Leader, Mat Piscatella, revealed that the game's retail launch was particularly big in the United States, where it registered the best performance of the last two and a half years. Pokémon Legends: Z-A had a massive US launch at retail. Launch week physical unit and dollar sales of Pokémon Legends: Z-A were the biggest for a new physical video game launch since The […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/pokemon-legends-z-a-had-massive-retail-launch-in-the-us/
The Battlefield 6 battle royale mode has finally been revealed and will officially be called Battlefield REDSEC. As rumoured, it'll launch tomorrow, and it'll be free-to-play. EA and Battlefield Studios revealed the mode with a short post on the official Battlefield X (formerly Twitter) account, which included a link to a gameplay trailer that'll go live tomorrow, alongside the mode itself going live. We'll have more official knowledge on the mode tomorrow when the gameplay trailer goes live, which will likely be followed by a blog post on the Battlefield 6 website, though for now we do have other claims […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/battlefield-6-battle-royale-battlefield-redsec-launches-tomorrow/
What should one do when reputed analysts continue to contradict each other? After all, this is exactly what is now happening with the Apple iPhone Air, with one group of analysts asserting that demand remains healthy, while the other continues to sound the proverbial death knell for the ultra-slim iPhone variant. TD Cowen does not see Apple reducing the production cadence for the iPhone Air, contradicting KeyBanc Capital and Ming-Chi Kuo A TD Cowen report over the weekend claimed that the Cupertino giant was not changing its production cadence for the iPhone Air, using "field work" as a confirmation mechanism […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/confusion-all-around-td-cowen-says-apple-is-not-reducing-iphone-air-production-as-jefferies-declares-nearly-zero-lead-times-for-the-variant-in-china/
The current generation of Xbox and PlayStation consoles is now more than five years old, making it well past the time we would start hearing about what the next generation of consoles will look like. We've seen several rumours on what the next-generation Xbox hardware will include, and on top of comments from Xbox president Sarah Bond, a picture of Xbox's next console is starting to form. Now, a new report from Windows Central seems to piece it together a bit more clearly, framing the next Microsoft console as a best of both worlds between the PC and console experience. […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/next-gen-xbox-will-reportedly-be-best-of-both-worlds-between-pc-and-console/
Apple is expected to debut the iPhone 17e in a matter of months - the spring of 2026, to be more specific. It is hardly a surprise, therefore, that the rumor mill apropos the new iPhone is now going into a relative overdrive. A tipster claims Apple will bring its signature dynamic island to iPhone 17e, while retaining a 60Hz display refresh rate A tipster who goes by the username Digital Chat Station on Weibo reported earlier today that Apple's iPhone 18 Pro and Pro Max are likely to feature a 48MP telephoto camera with a larger aperture on top […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/apple-iphone-17e-rumored-to-bring-dynamic-island-60hz-display/
The jaw-dropping price of the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 meant that Samsung would continue paying the ‘Qualcomm tax’ or move to its own silicon, which it is aggressively pursuing to reduce its massive chipset expenditure. While the use of the Exynos 2600 is one way to offset its skyrocketing costs, the Korean giant is now facing another conundrum that threatens to set off a price hike for the Galaxy S26: rising memory prices. Fortunately, one report states that thanks to Samsung’s vertical integration of its semiconductor and smartphone sectors, also known as DS Division and MX Division, respectively, the company […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/galaxy-s26-price-hike-prevented-due-to-samsung-vertical-integration-structure-of-two-divisions/
Apple's 2027 iPhone lineup is still a bit further away, with as many as 6 different iPhones expected to launch in the interim, including at least one in the form of a foldable. Even so, the buzz around the 20th anniversary iPhone lineup remains as effervescent as ever, buoyed by the growing number of bells and whistles that the lineup is expected to sport. Apple's iPhone 20 lineup rumored to get LOFIC camera tech Apple is likely to skip the number 19 and jump straight to the number 20 for its iPhones launching in 2027. The move is expected to […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/apples-20th-anniversary-iphone-20-to-get-lofic-camera-tech/
Just as Vampire: The Masquerade - Bloodlines 2 finally arrives on the scene after years of development, another Vampire: The Masquerade game disappears for good. Vampire: The Masquerade - Bloodhunt, the free-to-play battle royale that initially launched in its 1.0 state on April 27, 2022 (after an early access release on September 7, 2021), is shutting down its servers on April 28, 2026, almost exactly four years since its 1.0 arrival. Developer Sharkmob confirmed the shutdown in a statement on Vampire: The Masquerade - Bloodhunt's official website, citing the dwindling player population as "no longer sustainable" to keep the game […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/vampire-the-masquerade-bloohunt-servers-shutdown-2026/
Following several months of rumors about a remake of Halo: Combat Evolved, the game that started one of Xbox's most successful franchises, Halo Studios (formerly 343 Interactive) announced Halo: Campaign Evolved during this year's Halo World Championship event. The remake, powered by Unreal Engine 5 visuals (with the original game's code running beneath), will be released next year on PC, Xbox Series S and X, and even PlayStation 5 for the first time in the series. As with all remakes, some fans immediately started dissecting the gameplay footage to see what was changed from the original. Even more interesting, though, […]
Read full article at https://wccftech.com/halo-combat-evolved-designer-likens-remake-to-dance-remix-classic-song-straight-to-chorus/
Four photographers were taken to the hospital but seemingly avoided disaster following a violent crash during the Gold Coast 500 Supercars race in Australia over the weekend.
A week after Fourth of July celebrations, PetaPixel reported that multiple California police departments had used drones to surveil and spot people illegally shooting off fireworks. Promised fines have been rolling out since, including a new $300,000 one levied against an Orange County homeowner who claims they were not even home on July 4.
Photographer Chris Levine, who captured an iconic holographic portrait of Queen Elizabeth II, is being sued by artist Rob Munday who claims that he is the co-creator of the works Equanimity and Lightness of Being.
As part of its expanding crackdown on immigration, the United States government says it will soon begin photographing every non-citizen, including all legal ones with green cards and visas, as they enter and leave the U.S. The government claims that improved facial recognition and more photos will prevent immigration violations and catch criminals.
Apple is expected to upgrade the base iPhone to 12GB of RAM - 4GB more than the iPhone 17, and the same as the iPhone 17 Pro and 17 Pro Max, and iPhone Air. According to industry sources, Apple has asked key supplier Samsung to increase its supply of LPDDR5X RAM for the next iPhone lineup. Samsung reportedly only makes LPDDR5X RAM in 12GB and 16GB modules. The bump up to 12GB will allow the base model iPhone to run AI models on-device, which is hard to pull off with 8GB of RAM. [#InlinePriceWidget,14049,1#] According to reports, Apple will move to a staggered release...
The OnePlus 15 just became official today in China, and it's expected to reach international markets next month. Ahead of that, we were lucky enough to have the opportunity to shoot some camera samples with the OnePlus 15 around Prague in Czechia. So here they are. The OnePlus 15 gave up on the Hasselblad co-branding of its predecessors in favor of the company's own self-developed DetailMax Engine, billed as its new era of computational imaging that focuses on delivering "clear and real" images (these are OnePlus' words). So we put that to the test, let's start with images from the main...
Back in September, Xiaomi began recruiting beta testers for the global version of HyperOS 3. The company has now announced that the software’s global rollout has started in phases for select users. According to the official Xiaomi HyperOS account, the HyperOS 3 global rollout has kicked off with the Xiaomi 15T series. The company revealed that the update will be available to users in a phased manner. It is likely that Xiaomi 15T and 15T Pro users who signed up for the global beta program will be the first to receive the stable HyperOS 3. In China, the Xiaomi 15 series and Redmi K80...
Over the past decade, Marc Andre ter Stegen has cemented his status as one of the world’s top goalkeepers, playing a pivotal role in Barcelona‘s recent title wins. Despite his contributions, the team has opted for Joan Garcia as the new starting goalkeeper, sidelining the German from their plans. In response, a major Premier League club is eyeing a loan move for ter Stegen in the upcoming transfer market.
According to Sky Sports, Chelsea are eyeing Marc Andre ter Stegen and are readying a loan proposal for the Barcelona goalkeeper. This move could mean leaving Robert Sanchez with a secondary role, as he has faced significant criticism for his lack of confidence on the field. Ter Stegen’s potential addition would fulfill their quest for a seasoned veteran since Edouard Mendy’s departure, marking a strategic advancement for the team’s ambitions.
While it may seem counterintuitive, a loan move for Marc-André ter Stegen could benefit Barcelona. Although not directly profitable, relocating his substantial salary would ease financial pressure on the club. His full wage is temporarily exempt from official accounts due to a long-term injury, but remaining on the roster may complicate registration. Thus, a loan emerges as a pragmatic solution to navigate both financial and administrative challenges.
Not only Barcelona but also Ter Stegen stands to benefit significantly from a loan move. With Joan Garcia and Wojciech Szczesny commanding the goalkeeper position for the Culers, the German faces relegation to a secondary role. German national team coach Julian Nagelsmann has cautioned him that his status as a starter is crucial for a spot in the 2026 World Cup. Consequently, a transfer might be his best option to secure his international future.
After tearing his patellar tendon, Marc Andre ter Stegen faced an extended absence from Barcelona, paving the way for Szczesny’s arrival. Despite returning late in the season, the German star didn’t secure the desired playing time, prompting his agent to reportedly voice concerns to the front office. This move supposedly displeased Hansi Flick, prompting a strong commitment to Joan Garcia as the starting goalkeeper, with Wojciech backing him up.
Marc’s decision to undergo back surgery blindsided Barcelona, leaving the club in turmoil when he revealed his intentions publicly. Adding to the tension, Ter Stegen initially refused to sign a medical consent form aimed at easing his salary burden with LaLiga, reports Mundo Deportivo. Though he eventually agreed, the incident strained their relationship, casting doubt on his long-term future with the team.
Given that Barcelona no longer requires his services and cannot afford his enormous salary, Marc Andre ter Stegen could leave the team this winter on loan, with a potential permanent transfer in the summer. For that reason, the German goalkeeper must now deliver standout performances to secure a move to a top team in a long term.
Juventus kicked off the 2025-26 season with high hopes following improvements to their roster, yet they find themselves struggling, winless in eight straight games and far from the top of the standings. In response, the club has parted ways with coach Igor Tudor, leaving Weston McKennie without a crucial supporter. Tudor’s exit marks another addition to the Bianconeri’s revolving door of coaches in recent years, underscoring a significant issue within the organization.
“Juventus FC announces that it has today relieved Igor Tudor of his duties as head coach of the Men’s First Team, along with his staff consisting of Ivan Javorcic, Tomislav Rogic and Riccardo Ragnacci,” the team stated on its website. Tudor’s tenure lasted only 24 games, marking him as the official coach, no acting coach, with the fewest games managed before termination.
Following Igor Tudor’s dismissal, six coaches have taken the helm at Juventus: Massimiliano Allegri, Maurizio Sarri, Andrea Pirlo, Paolo Montero (acting), Thiago Motta, and the recently ousted Croatian coach. Remarkably, only Allegri enjoyed a long tenure, spanning 2,861 days across two terms, underscoring the club’s struggle with maintaining a cohesive sports strategy and clear direction.
Weston McKennie faces uncertainty following Tudor’s dismissal, which has left a significant impact on his playing time. As a key figure for the USMNT star, McKennie consistently featured in lineups, either as a starter or sub. With his contract set to expire at season’s end and no clear renewal plan, the front office might opt not to renew, casting doubt on his future.
After Juventus dismissed Igor Tudor as head coach, the team swiftly appointed Massimo Brambilla, the Juven Next Gen coach, to lead the squad in the interim. Although he lacks extensive elite-level experience, he might hold the reins for several months while the front office searches for a permanent successor. In the ongoing quest to fill the top spot, two prominent candidates have emerged as frontrunners in the discussion.
According to Fabrizio Romano, General Manager Damien Comolli has set his sights on Luciano Spalletti and Raffaele Palladino to helm the team. As free agents, both coaches are viable options for Juventus to pursue during the current season. However, Spalletti, with his track record of winning Serie A titles, especially resonates with fans as the preferred choice.
A high-riding Genesis GV70 test mule, believed to be linked to the production version of the Genesis X Gran Equator concept, has been spotted in detail again in South Korea. The sighting, reported by our colleagues at @hscarstory_, suggests that Genesis may be actively working on a rugged, high-performance electric SUV. Electrified GV70-Based Mule Hints at Genesis’ Off-Road Ambitions […]
The post Mysterious Off-Road Genesis GV70 Electric Test Mule Spied appeared first on Korean Car Blog.
Google added Query groups to the Search Console Insights report. Query groups groups similar search queries together so you can quickly see the main topics your audience searches for.
What Google said. Google wrote, “We are excited to announce Query groups, a powerful Search Console Insights feature that groups similar search queries.”
“Query groups solve this problem by grouping similar queries. Instead of a long, cluttered list of individual queries, you will now see lists of queries representing the main groups that interest your audience. The groups are computed using AI; they may evolve and change over time. They are designed for providing a better high level perspective of your queries and don’t affect ranking,” Google added.
What it looks like. Here is a sample screenshot of this new Query groups report:
You can see that Google is lumping together “search engine optimization, seo optimization, seo website, seo optimierung, search engine optimization (seo), search …” into the “seo” query group in the second line. This shows the site overall is getting 9% fewer clicks on SEO related queries than it did previously.
Availability. Google said query groups will be rolling out gradually over the coming weeks. It is a new card in the Search Console Insights report. Plus, query groups are available only to properties that have a large volume of queries, as the need to group queries is less relevant for sites with fewer queries.
Why we care. Many SEOs have been grouping these queries into these clusters manually or through their own tools. Now, Google will do it for you, making it easier for more novie SEOs and beginner SEOs to understand.
More details will be posted in this help document soon.
Login
